Home

Alibre Design User Guide Alibre Design User Guide

1. From the Sketch menu select Shape Config 2 gt Alibre Design Professional sert A 3D Sketch Feature Tools Team Design Window F w Activate 2D Sketch ctrl E Select 9 Constraints Eo Dimension Cor Ordinate Dimension stione Auto Dimension la lt 1 gt E Es igures ce Reference Figures Extend Trim Fillet lane Chamter Move Rotate fiews Offset fiews Mirror Repeat b Analyze Project To Sketch Direct Coordinate Entry Insert F Create Custom Symbol Text Standard Sketch Shape Pattern Types koe E eS Round Shape Square Shape Obround Shape Rectangle Shape Rectangle With R Cort Single D Shape Double D Shape The Pattern type field offers 5 different patterns to choose from Pattern Type No Pattern creates a single instance of the selected shape Linear Pattern creates a linear pattern of the selected shape 40 Chapter 4 Sketching Chapter 4 Sketching When Linear Pattern is selected the dialog options will look like this Pattern Type Pattern Parameter Pitch P 1 000 O Pattern Angle A a F m Pee N Number N E E a A Fi PA You will set the values for e Pitch The distance between two successive shapes in the pattern Pattern Angle The angle of inclination with respect to the positive X axis e Number The number of shapes in the pattern must be a value of 1 or
2. Hame Confa lt 1 gt Locks Lock All Unlock All General Parameter Values Part Data General Properties Color Properties Reference Geometry Hiding Active Section View Lock All Unlock All Feature Suppression Parameter Values Part Data General Properties Color Properties Reference Geometry Hiding Active Section View Assembly Part Subassembly Configuration Active Part Subassembly Suppression Part Subassembly Hiding Figure 77 Edit Part Configuration Dialog O Constraint Suppression Positions Make Flexible Active ok C Caca 2 Check the options you want to Lock for this configuration 3 Select OK to accept the selections To make a configuration active Double click the configuration you want to activate Or Right click the configuration you want to activate and select Activate Or Follow steps 1 and 2 above and check the box next to the option Active then select OK 10 1 3 Regeneration of Design Configurations When Alibre Design models are regenerated each feature in the Design Explorer is calculated in the order it appears All features that appear above the blue dog bone are features that have been regenerated Features below the blue dog bone as well as suppressed features are not generated OO O a Features Wi Extrusion lt 1 gt fle Sketch lt 13 Ni Extrusion lt 2 gt fo Sketch lt 23 When modeling wi
3. coocccncccccocccncccconccnncnaccnnnnnnnncononnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnncnncnnnnnnnnnnnns 78 A A S n a e eae ee a e ee ee een ere 78 5 2 1 PAX UMEOUCIA AMS ONES scania re lin 78 5 2 2 AXIS AMOO TWO PONS toni 79 52 3 Axis Usina O ylindrical FaCe tence dd e E E E a 79 5 2 4 AXIS through TWO PIANOS av a 79 5 2 5 Axis Orisetand Parallel to Axis Or Edge nea de DO LOS 79 5 3 A O A O A tda an cette tag cent A 80 5 3 1 POINT al SDECHIER Coordinate Siessen is 80 532 Fointat Plane And AXIS EOS tos a a aa ae a aa 80 5 3 3 Point at AXIS Edge and AMS EDO ceta a a i i ed E K A a ec 80 5 3 4 Point atthe Center of Circula Edge cs taa dto E onagheemaadeas 80 5 3 5 OMT aL A Aa 81 5 3 6 ollo o A Om nem a er er coe era ee eee 81 5 3 7 Point DETWEEIN TWO POIN S sete acd coaticten tie tents dt bo 81 D4 FRETERCCE SUM ACCS nuit til 81 5 4 1 INSEMING Referente SUMACES iii di erat 81 5 4 2 Positioning Reference SUMacOS essa iio 82 5 4 3 Thickening Reference Surfaces 00000 ti id didas 83 5 4 4 MINT ATA et OU ck sees E E E E E E casa tee wastes eras E E AO 83 5 4 5 Extuding to GEOMGLEY cxcxct sere dae 84 5 5 Reference Geometry Visibility ccooccccccoocnnnccnnncccononnncnnnonnnonnnnnnnnonononnnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnons 84 5 5 1 Hiding Individual Reference Geometry emMS ooccccccccccccocnccnnnccnonenoncnnnnnonononnncnnnnnonnnonnnnnnnnnnnononos 84 5 5 2 Hiding Reference Geometry Groups asne a i a a A 84
4. 7 6 1 Sweep Boss and Sweep Cut Features gt To create a sweep boss or cut 1 Sketch the closed profile 2 Sketch the path s The path must either start on or pass through the plane of the profile but is not required to pass through the profile itself The path cannot intersect itself 3 Select the Sweep Boss tool or the Sweep Cut tool from the Part Modeling toolbar or from the Feature menu select Boss gt Sweep or Cut gt Sweep The Sweep Boss or the Sweep Cut dialog appears Sweep Boss Sketch to Sweep Sweep Type Rigid Path Objects jo Draft Angle Outward Label Sweep lt 2 gt o 4 Inthe Sketch to Sweep field select the profile sketch 5 Inthe Path Objects field select the path sketch es One or more sketches or edges may be selected 6 Select a Sweep Type You can create the sweep along the Entire Path or To Geometry 7 lf To Geometry was selected click in the Geometry Target box and select an existing plane surface or face in the work area You can also specify a Geometry Offset value to create a gap between the target and the end of the feature 8 If Entire Path was selected click the Rigid checkbox if desired to force the profile to remain parallel to the profile s sketch plane through the sweep 9 To place a draft on the sweep specify a Draft Angle Select the Outward option if necessary You cannot create a draft if the Rigid option is applied 10 Click OK
5. From the View menu select Constraint Symbols or press Ctrl Shift C on the keyboard Figures will remain constrained when constraint symbols are hidden This is a toggle on off so the visibility can be turned back on using the same command gt To change the size of the constraint symbols From the Tools menu select Options On the General tab in the Design Viewing field check Large Constraint Symbols This will increase the size of the constraint symbols Unchecking the option will return the symbols to their original size Design Viewing Large constraint spmboig Shade reference planes Ne model i view i Show reference plane normals Use flat shading Default size reference geometries W Snap to working plane W Reorient on extrude Extra Small Mode size 1 y Geometry and sketch thickness 4 7 5 Checking the Status of a Sketch Constraint status of an individual figure There are several possible states that indicate whether a figure is constrained completely or not A figure is constrained completely when zero degrees of freedom the number of ways in which the sketch can still move within the sketch plane remain These states are displayed in the workspace status bar when a sketch constraint tool is selected and the cursor is positioned over a figure E Geometry Status Under defined Well defined A figure is fully constrained and dimensioned there are no remaining degrees of freedom Under defined A figure is
6. Note Alibre Design will warn you if there are duplicate file names or any unsafe saving conditions Hover over the exclamation points to learn about the warning 5 Click OK to finalize the multi item save 301 Chapter 14 Opening and Saving 14 2 4 Saving Files to the Alibre Vault Saving to the Alibre Vault is similar to saving to the file system The primary difference is instead of entering a location for files as you would for the file system you enter other types of data such as the Product or Project to which the item belongs The more data you define during a save that relates to the file you are saving the more powerful the Alibre Vault becomes To activate saving to the Alibre Vault please see The Alibre Vault see The Alibre Vault by M Files on page 347 Note Even if you have set the option to use the Alibre Vault files will still be saved to the File System if they already exist on the File System The Alibre Vault option in Alibre Design affects new files only If you would like to save a file on the File System to the Alibre Vault you will need to do a Save As or Save As All operation on the file gt Saving items to the Alibre Vault Unlike the File System the Alibre Vault will always present you with a dialog during a save operation This is because you are given the option to Make Version 1 Select any Save option 2 The Single or Multi Save dialog shown below appears TA AA Save to Vault Al
7. Rotary Motor Rotary Spring Rotary Damper Linear Actuator Linear Spring Linear Camper Note If you have already added a Physical Element of a particular type to that constraint the option will be shown disabled A dialog opens to allow you to specify the setting for the element you are adding Linear or Rotary All moving parts in your simulations are free to move in any way except where specifically constrained When simulated they act under the influence of constraints gravity and forces torques and motions specified by you using physical elements The types of physical element available in Alibre Motion are divided into two broad categories Rotary concerns torques and motion around a central axis Linear concerns forces and motion in straight lines Constraints Define Types of Physical Elements Available The Assembly Constraints and their geometries and settings defined in your designs dictate the type of physical elements you can add to create simulations The types of motions allowed by the constraint in Alibre Design can give you a good idea of the types of physical elements that are available for that constraint and shown in the Insert sub menu 323 Chapter 16 Alibre Motion For instance an Align constraint between two straight edges allows rotation of each part around the lines as well as linear motion along the lines When mapped into Alibre Motion you are able to add b
8. 15 2 2 Exporting a File gt To export a file Select the Export tool from the Standard toolbar or from the File menu select Export Fxanort File ie Sayet O altre _Ceslar v r a Sl prat Fk Fla rama Hear Elt Cue Albre lb ap Lame as hipa Lericel ACIS Fr 6 file sc WS Re lik Browse to the location where you want to export the file Specify the File name From the Save as type menu select the appropriate file format to use Click Save The Export File dialog appears 311 Chapter 15 Importing and Exporting Data 15 3 Special Options for IGES and STL Files Alibre Design has special option settings for exporting IGES and STL files and importing IGES files These special settings are found in the File Types tab of the Options dialog You can access the Options dialog by selecting Options from the Tools main menu in any 3D workspace Options General Grid Configure file types Write MSBO m surfaces az NURI AutoCAD faces _ Elipses as NURES JAMAS v1 04 Spec Bounded surfaces Wire as copious data EOL length E v Trimmed curves Override Units to Centimeters we Read Free curves Copious data curve Free points Free surfaces Scale to mm Scale factor Points to evaluate during conversion Tolerance for breaking curves into edges Spline curve edges split Trimmed curve preferences ok _ Cara
9. 340 Chapter 16 Alibre Motion Generate Video Settings General Tab a E Generate ideo AWI E xl General Advanced Output file to create EAM otion Data MowiesElipsel avi tee Mowe display name Elliptic Trammel Video frames per second 25 Cancel 1 In Output file to create specify the name and path of the video file to be generated Click the Browse button to select a file and path from a standard File dialog 2 In Movie display name enter the name of the movie as it should be shown in a video playback program Note Not all video players display this name or may do so only as an option 3 In Video frames per second enter the number of frames per second at which video playback programs should display the generated video Note The maximum speed at which video may be played back depends on the system and the video playback program 4 Click OK to apply changes and close the dialog or Cancel to abandon changes and close the dialog 341 Chapter 16 Alibre Motion Advanced Tab 1 Generate Video AYI xl General Advanced Yideo handler Diei Codec Handler description Divo 6 0 Codec Quality Eeutrame every 10 fames Note Not all handlers Codecs installed on pour system will necessarily be able to generate videos sucesstully Some may also ignore Quality and Keytrame parameters or may slow playback considerably while gener
10. 4 In Error Tolerance specify the error tolerance allowed internally by the Simulator during calculation The allowable range of values varies depending on the type of simulation specified in Simulation Type Under some circumstances lower values may impact Simulation performance and the highest value is selected by default 5 In Simulation type specify the type of Simulation to be performed Choose the desired type from the drop down list See Simulation Types and Parameters see Simulation Types and Parameters on page 331 for more information Traces Tab Note This dialog is available on the Settings dialog or by selecting Trace Options from the right click menu of any Trace listed in the Motion Explorer This form is used to specify the type length and default colors of Traces shown during playback to visualize the paths of Parts and Sub Assemblies and to get feedback concerning their Velocities and Accelerations ES Trace Options p les Enable traces e Show trails le Show Position trails az lines Trail length 6 framez E Settings for individual trace types M Show trace Show trail e Fade trail color Acceleration gt To set Trace options 1 Check Enable traces to show traces during playback No traces of any kind will be shown during playback unless this box is checked 2 Check Show trails to see indications from previous animation frames These trails can be extremely use
11. 4 4 2 Circle gt To sketch a circle 5 Select the Circle tool from the Sketching toolbar or from the Sketch menu select Figures gt Circle or right click and select Circle from the pop up menu 6 Position the mouse pointer at the center point location 7 Click in the Work Area to place the center of the circle and release Then drag the mouse to sketch the circle 8 Click again to complete the circle gt To resize a circle 1 Click the Select tool from the Sketching toolbar 2 Move the mouse pointer over the circle 3 Click hold the mouse button and drag the figure to resize the circle 4 Release the mouse button gt To move a circle 1 Click the Select tool from the Sketching toolbar 2 Move the mouse pointer over the center node of the circle 30 Chapter 4 Sketching 3 Click hold the mouse button and drag the circle 4 Release the mouse button 4 4 3 Circular Arcs You can sketch three different circular arc types 1 Center Start End 2 Start End Radius 3 Tangent Start End gt To sketch a circular arc using Center Start End 1 Select the Circular Arc Center Start End tool from the Sketching toolbar or from the Sketch menu select Figures gt Circular Arc gt Center Start End or right click and select Circular Arc from the pop up menu 2 Position the mouse pointer at the center of the arc 3 Click to place the center of the arc 4 Click a second time t
12. Chapter 11 Assembly Design 8 In Layer Twist set an angle to rotate the layers with respect to each other if desired 9 In Label enter a unique name for the pattern 10 Click OK The circular pattern will appear in the Design Explorer with the parts in the pattern listed under it in the tree These patterned parts cannot be edited or moved however any of the patterned parts can be deleted by right clicking them in the Design Explorer and choosing Delete E 2 Circular Pattern 1 E solid_1_6015 lt 5 gt co Bl eolid_1_6015 lt 6 gt BA solid_1_5015 lt 7 gt 11 3 8 Moving and Rotating Parts Freely You can move or rotate a part freely as long as it is not anchored or constrained in such a way that limits movement gt To mowe a part 1 Left click a part and drag it while continuing to hold down the left mouse button The part moves as you drag the cursor You can release the Ctrl key after the part begins to move Or Select the Move Part tool from the Assembly Modeling toolbar Or From the Tools menu select Move Part 2 Move the cursor over the part you want to move 3 Click and drag the cursor to move the part gt To rotate a part 1 Move the cursor over the part to rotate 2 Hold the Ctrl key select a part in the work area holding both mouse buttons and drag the cursor The part rotates as you drag the cursor You can release the Ctrl key after the part begins to rotate Or Select the Rotate Part to
13. Cheded gut po Checked out pebeben iv Dele 17 5 2 Views Views are one of the most important concepts in the Alibre Vault They are logical views of your entire data set essentially providing the functionality of filters based on the metadata you have entered for all of the items in your Vault 352 Chapter 17 The Alibre Vault by M Files Several default views are set up in the Alibre Vault as shown below File Edit View Favorites Tools New Operations Settings Help ted O gt DO search Ij Folders Hab A Address 4 M Alibre Search in metadata and e dl j Reset All We weil Ee Advanced Search Mame amp Customer O41 By Product ln By Project 233 CAD Files Eg Documents mm View 95 Customers Me Projects assigned to Me es PA checked Out to Me en Recently Modified by Me PA oline a Assigned toMe 3 T Recently Modified by Me 0 Out to Me SS atest Searches Type Document Vault 11 objects O bytes w Document a Project When you click on a view the Alibre Vault searches all your data based on the criteria that defines the view For example a By Product view will search all your data and find every Product value that has been used It will then display all available projects for you to drill deeper A 1 By Product File Edit Wew Favorites Tools New Operations Settings Help Reset All By Files Advanced Search Type 2 Customer Virtual Folder Virtual Folder t tee D
14. Enter the appropriate Spacing value that controls the distance between each figure in the pattern If necessary select the Change Direction option Select the linear path for the second pattern direction The second linear path should not be parallel to the first Enter the appropriate value in the Copies field this value includes the original figure Enter the appropriate Spacing value that controls the distance between each figure in the pattern If necessary select the Change Direction option Click OK to create the pattern OOOO TERORON To create a radial pattern Select the Circular Sketch Repeat tool from the sketch repeat fly out on the Sketching toolbar or from the Sketch menu select Repeat gt Circular The Circular Pattern dialog appears Select the figure to be patterned Select the Circular path center Axes points and existing edges on other features can be used as the circular path center Enter the appropriate value in the Copies field this value includes the original figure Enter the angle that will separate each copy in the radial direction If necessary select the Change Direction option Click OK to create the pattern OTO 4 GRAS O Chapter 4 Sketching 4 6 8 Moving and Rotating Sketch Figures You can move existing sketch figures from one location to another or rotate them about an axis gt 1 To move sketch figures From the Sketch menu select Move The Move Figures dial
15. 1 From the Tools menu select Options The Options dialog appears 2 Select the General tab if it is not already selected 3 Inthe Hints area deselect DOF hints 4 Click OK 4 8 Placing Dimensions on Sketch Figures Normally to fully define and capture design intent in a sketch you must place dimensions on sketch figures However it is not required to dimension sketches before they are used to create features Most importantly sketch dimensions can easily be changed and modified at any time Additionally any dimensions you place in a sketch will in turn be displayed in the 2D drawing that is based on the part when you choose to Project Design Dimensions when creating the drawing Two types of dimension states exist driving and driven Driving dimensions are used to define and constrain a figure After driving dimensions have been placed on a figure driven dimensions can also be added that are dependent upon the values of the driving dimensions By default driven dimensions are displayed in parentheses Driven dimensions cannot be edited since they are dependent on driving dimensions Subsequent changes to driving dimensions automatically update the driven dimensions In the figure below the 2 000 and 750 dimensions are driving dimensions and the 1 250 dimension is a driven dimension noted by parentheses If the 2 000 or 750 dimension were changed the 1 250 dimension would automatically update as well Figure 19 Sketch Figu
16. 128 Inserting Configurations of Parts or Subassemblies 193 Inserting Images in a Drawing 249 Inserting Reference Surfaces 81 Inserting Sketch Nodes from a File 95 Inserting Standard Views 234 236 244 251 256 264 Installation 1 Installing 3 Installing Alibre Design 3 Installing and Enabling Alibre Motion 314 Inter Design Constraints 200 218 229 Interference checking 222 Introduction to the Design Interface 13 J Joining Parts amp Removing Material in an Assembly 231 K Keyboard Hot Key Descriptions 22 L Launching 5 Layers 245 Line 29 92 Line Display in Views 243 Line figure 29 Linking a BOM to a Drawing 284 285 Lock properties represented in the Design Explorer 185 186 Loft Boss 111 Loft Boss and Loft Cut 111 Loft Cut 111 Index Maintaining Multiple Simulations 335 Managing Assembly Constraints 218 Managing Design Property Value Fields 269 Managing Features in the Design Explorer 147 158 Manually Applying Sketch Constraints 56 Measurement Tool 162 Metadata 348 Mid Plane 104 Mirroring 3D feature 128 sketching 51 Mirroring Features 128 Mirroring Figures 51 Missing Design Configurations 195 Model Terms 15 Modifying a Part 159 Modifying Driving Dimension Values 253 Modifying Sketch Dimension Properties 65 Modifying Spreadsheet Driven Parameters 171 Modifying the BOM View Style 296 Motion
17. Alibre Design User Guide Copyrights Information in this document is subject to change without notice The software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement or nondisclosure agreement The software may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of those agreements No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying and recording for any purpose other than the purchaser s personal use without the written permission of Alibre Inc Alibre Inc 2350 Campbell Creek Blvd Suite 100 Richardson TX 75082 USA www alibre com O 2008 Alibre Inc All rights reserved Alibre and the Alibre logo are registered trademarks Alibre Design and Alibre PhotoRender are trademarks of Alibre Inc in the United States and or other countries Alibre Motion Copyright O 2008 Jake Lyall Contents A A pate iuasnceeaasseatote vesswadeesacdeeucuoavetauenscesucsacvereuescasuncessueacuoonteieeuncuaicaveassacuseaves 1 1 1 SyVSlem MEG UIFEMCNS nerien i de 1 te A a a a e e a A ato scat 2 1 3 ell A N A TN 3 1 4 WEAN STAINING VAIS Desg ates cece teat 4 Getting Started WIth AlIDFe DESIG i ina aa aa E N 5 2 1 IntlalLacmen or ADe Desi visera id 5 2A A enc aa steer ae em se a dea aed esa ee ee 6 aa Ne Home VV O ica 6 2 3 1 SyS lem OPONSE tino iednitoo 7 2A ANOS AC CS cease saves a O a a A O ease cn tec 8 25 Co
18. Cancel 3 Select the circular edges on the model This typically represents the end of a screw or other threaded item You can select multiple edges however they must all be exactly the same diameter ue Automatic iid chemer Note The Major Diameter is read only and represents the diameter of the edge you selected 4 Set the Minor Diameter of the thread 5 Set the Thread Length of the thread 6 Select Create Chamfer on Edge if you need the 2D representation of the thread to have a chamfer on the end 7 Enter the Callout you would like to appear on the drawing 8 Rename the Feature by changing the Label if desired 9 Click OK You will notice that as you change the values the 3D model will update with a general preview of the thread s dimensions 125 Chapter 7 Feature Creation 71 13 Holes Hole features create standard holes e g counter bored or counter sunk holes in a part You place hole features on planar faces and then place dimensions or constraints on the hole center to position the hole as required In addition you can add thread information which can be shown on drawings gt 1 126 To create a hole E Select the Hole tool from the Part Modeling toolbar or from the Feature menu select Hole or right click and select Add Hole from the pop up menu The Hole dialog appears D Insert Hole Hole Specification Start surface y Fece lt 9 gt C Reverse Type Simple Depth
19. Chapter 12 Drawings When you create a drawing based on the part you can choose to display the driving dimensions from the part automatically during view creation see Inserting Standard Views on page 234 on the applicable view in a drawing If you do not choose to display driving dimensions upon creating the drawing you can always do so later You can also manually insert additional dimensions on a drawing view These user added dimensions are referred to as Reference dimensions Reference dimensions are displayed the same as driving dimensions However you can display a reference dimension in parentheses to distinguish it from driving dimensions Right click the reference dimension and select Properties from the pop up menu Select the Units and Tolerance tab select the Display As Reference Dimension option and click OK If a driving dimension is changed in part mode the associated dimension in the drawing will automatically get updated You can also edit driving dimensions in the drawing If you change a driving dimension in the drawing the part is automatically updated Reference dimensions cannot be edited or changed However reference dimensions will update upon the modification of driving dimensions You can insert additional reference dimensions in drawings to further clarify the design intent 12 3 1 Placing Additional Dimensions on a View You can use the same methods to add dimensions to a drawing as you use to dimension ske
20. Ng Faces Male Connector z gt Large Male Connector 3 gt Large Male Connector 4 gt Large F El El E gt To change the configuration that is used for a component of a subassembly If you need to edit which configuration is active in a nested component that is not an immediate child of the root assembly you must open the subassembly and change the active configuration there You can open the subassembly separately or you can edit it in the context of the root assembly If a part is edited in the context of an assembly the part s active configuration will automatically be set to match the configuration held by the assembly 10 3 2 Missing Design Configurations When using configurations you must use care when deleting configurations that you have created as they may be used by assembly components When you open an assembly in which one of the components is missing its configuration you will see a message similar to the following Messages Messages Missing Configurations Location Li Documents and Settngs karal My Documents Assembly Path Female Connector medium test config 195 Chapter 10 Design Configurations You can select the OK button in the Message dialog and the assembly will continue to open You will see the following changes take place in the Design Explorer e The component name appears dimmed with a question mark over the icon e The missing configuration name is present in
21. Splines can be constrained to reference planes and planar faces 98 Chapter 6 3D Sketching Note With the Perpendicular constraint the behavior of lines and splines differs Lines will be parallel to the normal of a plane or face Splines will be set tangent at the start or end of the spline parallel to the normal of a plane or face Ei Tangent Figures can be constrained to be tangent to a curve Tangent constraints can be applied automatically during sketching or placed manually after a figure has been sketched Ce Tangent Continuous An open 3D figure can be constrained to be continuous at its endpoint to another open 3D figure or an open edge Collinear Figures may be constrained so that they lie in the same line 6 10 Other 3D Sketch Functions Other sketch options are similar to 2D sketch options The sketch grid on page 66 Snapping to the working plane on page 67 Cursor display on page 68 Editing sketches on page 73 Renaming sketches on page 73 99 Chapter 7 Feature Creation CHAPTER 7 Feature Creation Parts are modeled by creating features Features are individual 3D shapes representing common mechanical design elements like bosses and holes which either create material or remove material in a part Many features such as extrude boss and revolve boss require an associated sketch to define the 2D profile of the 3D shape Other features such as fillet and edge chamfer can be created withou
22. TIP If several parts are open in Alibre Design click Active Sessions in the Control Parameters dialog The Active Sessions dialog appears Select the desired part and click OK Control Parameters Design Front Main Capl Active Sessions Repository File System Name Cell Current Current Value New Yalue 1500000 in 2 000000 in 0 500000 in Q00000 in 000000 in 5 AAA in Mame Cell Reference Type Units Distance cm y Reset Apr Close In Parameters click one of the parameters lts name appears in the Name field For Cell Reference click the field then click the cell on the Excel spreadsheet that the parameter should reference Or Click the E button The cell reference box appears Click the desired spreadsheet cell then click the E button to return to the Control Parameters dialog Note If the spreadsheet is moved or any folders are renamed the link from the cell to the part dimension will be broken To reestablish 172 the link use the Equation Editor dialog to re link the spreadsheet see Re linking a Spreadsheet to a Part on page 173 to the part In Type select the parameter type distance angle or count In Units set the desired units of measurement for distance and angle parameters Click Modify To add a new parameter click Reset The entry fields are cleared In Name type a name for the new parameter then follow steps 6 10 above Click Close
23. The number of shapes in the pattern must be a value of 1 or greater Check the box for Shape Angle Vector if you want the shapes in the pattern aligned along the radius of the circular pattern See Arc Pattern above for an example of how the Shape Angle Vector option works This option is not available for the round shape Grid Pattern creates a grid pattern of the selected shape When Grid Pattern is selected the dialog options will look like this Pattern Type Hx e AY os a Dd E amp py py CA amp Pattern Parameter Pitch along F 4 000 r iE A First Shape Anchor Pitch along i Per 1 000 i Fi Fa 2 Humber along 2 Ms 3 a e Mumber along Y N Y 3 E LS ot ad O Pattern Angle a 0 x m You will set the values for Pitch along X The distance between two successive shapes in the x direction noted in the diagram as PX Pitch along Y The distance between two successive shapes in the y direction noted in the diagram as PY e Number along X The number of shapes in the pattern in the x direction noted in the diagram as NX must be a value of 1 or greater e Number along Y The number of shapes in the pattern in the y direction noted in the diagram as NY must be a value of 1 or greater e Pattern Angle The angle of inclination with respect to the positive X axis 43 Chapter 4 Sketching First Shape Anchor Location The first shape ancho
24. 1 Hold the Ctrl key and move the cursor over the part you want to select The part highlights and the cursor changes to i 2 Click to select the part The part is highlighted in the work area as well as the Design Explorer El Points ay Redline Views ig Section Views U Features we Constraints E A part 3 lt 1 gt I Orbe be 11 3 5 Part Display Options You can select from four different display modes to control how parts are displayed The default display type is Shaded Other display options include Wireframe Shaded amp Visible Edges and Shaded amp All Edges gt To change the display of all items in the assembly From the View menu select Display and one of the four options e Shaded displays parts in shaded mode edges are not outlined e Wireframe displays parts in wireframe mode only edges are outlined and displayed Note When viewing the display in wireframe you can turn the silhouette edges of the model on or off To do this from the View menu e select Display Check the Silhouette Edges option to turn them on You can also use the de tool to toggle them on and off e Shaded amp Visible Edges displays parts in shaded mode only visible edges are outlined e Shaded amp All Edges displays parts in shaded mode visible as well as hidden edges are outlined The display is updated Note You can quickly change between shaded and wireframe display modes by selecting the Shaded and Wireframe
25. 1 Select the Fillet tool from the Part Modeling toolbar or from the Feature menu select Fillet or right click and select Add Fillet from the pop up menu The Fillet Edges dialog appears O Fillet Edges Fillet Type Constant Radius v M Tangent Propagate Entities to fillet Radius Edgec4 gt 500 Radius 1 500 2 Label Fillet lt 3 gt x Ce el 2 Select Constant Radius as the Fillet Type 3 Select the edge s or face s to be rounded Selecting a face will subsequently select all the edges associated with that face 4 Deselect the Tangent Propagate option if necessary The Tangent Propagate option creates a fillet on the selected edge as well as any other edges that form a path in which a tangent condition can be resolved Figure 52 Tangent Propagate On Figure 53 Tangent Propagate Off 5 Specify the Radius 6 Click OK to create the fillet 7 8 2 Variable Radius Fillets Variable radius fillets create a rounded face or variable radius on an edge You specify a start radius and end radius and a smooth transition is made between the two along the selected edge s gt To create a variable radius fillet 1 Select the Fillet tool from the Part Modeling toolbar or from the Feature menu select Fillet or right click and select Add Fillet from the pop up menu The Fillet Edges dialog appears 2 Select Variable Radius as the Fillet Type 120 Chapter 7 Fea
26. 1 Select the Insert Axis tool from the Inspection toolbar or from the Insert menu select Axis or right click in the work area and select Insert Axis from the pop up menu The Insert Axis dialog appears 2 Select an existing reference plane or planar face 3 Select a reference plane or planar face that intersects the first plane or face A preview of the new axis is displayed 4 Click OK to create the axis 5 2 5 Axis Offset and Parallel to Axis or Edge You can create an axis that is parallel to an existing axis or edge and offset by a specified distance gt To create an axis offset and parallel to an edge 1 Select the Insert Axis tool from the Inspection toolbar or from the Insert menu select Axis or right click in the work area and select Insert Axis from the pop up menu The Insert Axis dialog appears 2 Select an existing edge or axis 3 Select a reference plane or planar face that passes through the edge or axis selected in step 1 A preview of the new axis is displayed 4 Enter an offset distance 19 Chapter 5 Reference Geometry 5 If necessary select Reverse to create the axis in the opposite direction 6 Click OK to create the axis 5 3 Points In part and assembly workspaces the origin is the only 3D point displayed by default Additional 3D points can be inserted as necessary gt To inserta new point 1 Select the Insert Point tool from the Inspection toolbar or from the Insert menu selec
27. 13 Troubleshooting Failed Features 183 Workspaces 8 13 Tutorials 6 21 U Unbend 157 Unbend and Rebend 157 Uninstalling 3 Uninstalling Alibre Design 4 Units 8 Unlinking a BOM from a Drawing 285 Updating Drawing Views 242 Updating the Table 297 Using Configurations in a BOM 200 Using Configurations in Assembly Patterns 196 Using Configurations in Drawings 199 Using Dimension Styles in Templates 254 Using Equations in Dimensions 62 152 Using Permissions 354 Using Spinner Controls 61 Using the Design Explorer 159 Using the Equation Editor with Configurations 202 Using the Measurement Tool 162 Using the Project to Sketch Tool 165 V Variable Radius Fillets 120 Vault 347 Versioning 356 Versioning Concepts 356 Vertex 15 18 Vertex Chamfers 122 View and Sheet Boundaries 242 View Manipulation 20 View scale 234 Viewing constituents 183 custom views 17 multiple 3D views 16 named views 17 tools 20 Viewing and or Editing an Exploded View 227 Viewing Constituents 183 Viewing Part Reference Geometry 213 Viewing Published PDF Files 181 Viewing Version History 357 Views 352 W Weld Symbol 279 Weld symbols 279 Work area 13 Work Area Color Scheme 15 Working in a BOM Workspace 283 290 Working in a Drawing 237 Working in a Sketch 66 Working With a BOM in a Drawing 283 Working with Existing 3D S
28. 2 Modify the appropriate parameters 3 Click OK to apply the changes 219 Chapter 11 Assembly Design gt To rename a constraint You can customize the constraint label in the Design Explorer 1 Right click the constraint in the Design Explorer and select Rename from the pop up menu or double click the constraint with a short pause between clicks The text cursor appears in the label 2 Type in a new label 3 Press Enter on the keyboard gt To delete a constraint Select the constraint and press Delete on the keyboard or right click the constraint in the Design Explorer and select Delete from the pop up menu The constraint is deleted 11 4 6 Failed Assembly Constraints A constraint may fail due to the following reasons e Constraint was initially applied incorrectly e g applying an align constraint to a planar face and a non planar face e The constraint creates an over defined condition e A condition changes after the constraint was applied e g deleting a part from an assembly or the geometry in which the constraint applies is modified A failed constraint is displayed in italics in the Design Explorer In the example below the Align constraint has failed di Ale 4 a Mate 3 pea T Wey Mate 4 lt is recommended you resolve a failed constraint as soon as the condition occurs gt Totroubleshoot and resolve a failed constraint e Right click the constraint and select Status from the
29. 5 5 3 Hiding All Reference Geometry Groups coooccccnncccccncnonnccnnnnonononcnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnanas 84 5 6 Renaming Reference GeOoMetIY cernes a A A E 85 57 Deleting Relerence Geometry ic ts 85 5 8 Editing Reference Geometry Properties aisian a a a oa a a 85 A AP 87 6 1 THE 3D SKEICMING Inte maceta 87 6 2 SD SkeICNING Conex sner lille adidas 88 6 32 GUrrenECOORINaIE SY SIS soc toa 88 6 4 Sketch Plane Guide Lines and Elevation 0 cccccccceecceeccuceceeceeecueececeaeeaeecaeecueeaeecuesaueceecuesaueceesuesaueseesaeeens 89 6 5 En t ring and Exiting 3D Sketch Mo O de erate ce 92 6 5 1 Entering 3D Sketen MOS dd A Gee 92 6 5 2 Exiting SD Sketch Modistas 92 60 DORE OMA US o a O ee 92 6 6 1 A A gn A A ogee 92 6 6 2 A aca E E nes ead eA sees nese ee eed ob A E E E get aed EEE E ETE asa T tad 93 6 6 3 EEI E E ce ectadvedsecsnact cee cuntd T E E I A S A E E T 94 O DES Co 6 gig Nod S eaa O E oe ee ee 94 6 7 1 Placing a Sketch Node aci tii dla 94 6 7 2 Inserting Sketch Nodes from a File cccccscsseececcceseeececcesneceescsseeeesccseneeesecseeenscceseeeesccesneesscoess 95 68 Working with Existing 3D SkKeICM FIQUICS siii dis 95 6 8 1 Adamo Fleitas 95 6 8 2 Dimensioning 3D Sketch Figures carac ia 96 69 mes Bs 106 ale Oy go gt eee ee rn ne eee ree 98 6 9 1 ME a 98 6 9 2 FE MICE CONSTA Sic Antec 98 6 10 Other 3D Sketch FUNCIONS seras 99 F
30. Click hold the mouse button and drag the center node to reshape the circular arc 4 Release the mouse button gt To move a circular arc 1 Click the Select tool from the Sketching toolbar 2 Select the arc AND center node by dragging a selection rectangle around the entities 3 Hold the Shift key click and hold the mouse button and drag the circular arc sa Release the mouse button 4 4 4 Rectangles You can sketch two different rectangle types 1 Rectangle by Two Corners 2 Rectangle by Three Corners gt To sketch a rectangle using Two Corners 1 Select the Rectangle by Two Corners tool from the Sketching toolbar or from the Sketch menu select Figures gt Rectangle gt Two Corners 2 Click to place one corner of the rectangle 3 Move the mouse pointer to sketch the rectangle 4 Click a second time to locate the opposite corner of the rectangle 32 Chapter 4 Sketching gt To sketch a rectangle using Three Corners 1 Select the Rectangle by Three Corners tool from the Sketching toolbar or from the Sketch menu select Figures gt Rectangle gt Three Corners 2 Click to place one corner of the rectangle 3 Move the mouse pointer and click a second time to locate the other corner on the same end of the rectangle 4 Move the mouse pointer to adjust the rectangle length 5 Click a third time to place the end of the rectangle gt To resize a rectangle 1 Choose the Select tool fr
31. Design Explorer the Female Connector pattern will show the new instances but they will be suppressed This is because the option Part Subassembly Suppression is locked which means all new entities be suppressed in Config 2 However Parameters is unlocked which means the number of instances follows the changes made in the active configuration Config 1 in this example 197 Chapter 10 Design Configurations The result will be a _ a a a Female Connector 22 Female Connectors 3 Female Connectors 4 gt Female Connector 5 gt Female Connector E Female Connectors 4 ES Figure 83 Design Explorer of Assembly Config 1 A Female Connectors 1 gt Small coo Linear Pattern 1 Female Connectors Small Female Connectors 3 gt Large Female Connectors 4 gt Small 7 Figure 84 Design Explorer of Assembly Config 2 new pattern instances suppressed Example 2 Using the first example assembly again Assembly Config 1 has a pattern of four Female Connectors Create another configuration of the assembly Config 2 This time lock all options Assembly Config 2 is at this point identical to Assembly Config 1 Next activate Assembly Config 1 and edit the pattern so that it has seven instances instead of four Then activate Assembly Config 2 In the Design Explorer the Female Connector pattern will NOT show the new instances at all This is because both Part Subassembly Suppression an
32. Drawing Mark Up Mode 237 Drawing Selection Filters 241 253 Drawing Template custom 265 standard 233 Drawing Views boundaries 242 deleting 240 hole callouts 271 line display 243 moving 241 Drawings 233 adding sheets 248 dimensioning 250 inserting views 256 opening 233 Driving Designs by Spreadsheet 169 Duplicating an Exploded View 228 Index DWG 310 DXF 310 E Edge 15 18 Edge Chamfers 121 Editing a BOM 285 Editing a Part in an Assembly 139 229 Editing and Deleting Annotations 280 Editing and Designing Parts in the Assembly 228 Editing Design Boolean Features 139 Editing Properties of Configurations 186 Editing Reference Geometry Properties 85 Editing Sketches 73 99 Editing Sketches and Features 159 Ellipse figures 36 Ellipses 36 Elliptical Arc figures 37 Elliptical Arcs 37 Enabling or Disabling the Alibre Vault 348 Enclosed Figures 71 Entering 3D Sketch Mode 92 Entering and Exiting 3D Sketch Mode 92 Entering Sketch Mode 27 Equations dimensionality 62 Examples Of Various Trace Options 337 Exiting 3D Sketch Mode 92 Exiting Sketch Mode 27 Explicit Constraints 98 Explicit Selection Constraint Placement 216 Exploded View 264 Exploded View Steps 227 Exploded views 3D 223 in a drawing 264 Exporting 309 Exporting a BOM 298 Exporting a File 311 Exporting Data 309 Extending Figures 47 Exte
33. Or right click the items and select Delete from the menu Once all items that reference missing components are gone you can continue to fully use the drawing and detailing tools Note Red views in the Drawing Explorer can indicate several things In general red views convey that an item is either missing or that the 3D design has changed and the drawing has not yet been updated to reflect that change Pay attention to which items are shown in the Missing Design dialog to ensure you do not delete views which simply need to be updated reprojected versus views that have missing components 238 Chapter 12 Drawings Opening Outdated Drawings When you open a drawing from the file system that has an outdated design the drawing file will open and you will be prompted to Reproject the outdated designs This drawing has views which reler to older versions of exsting designs Should the obsolete views be refreshed with the current designs Project View Mode O Fast Views Precise Views Retain View Mode Lo JcJ Oj Choose one of the following options then click OK to continue updating the drawing e Fast Views the outdated items will be projected in Fast View mode e Precise Views the outdated items will be projected in the standard mode e Retain View Mode the outdated views will be projected in their current mode Note If you do not want to reproject your views click Cancel If you do not reproject your views
34. Patterns in an assembly 208 sketching 51 53 PDF Publishing Templates 175 176 177 179 Physical properties 164 213 Placing a Sketch Node 94 Placing Additional Dimensions on a View 251 Placing Dimensions on Sketch Figures 58 Placing Ordinate Dimensions on a View 252 Plane creation methods 75 Plane at Line and Point 77 Plane Normal to 3D Sketch or 3D Edge 78 Playback Deck 320 Point creation methods 80 Point along Edge 81 Point at Axis Edge and Axis Edge 80 Point at Plane and Axis Edge 80 Point at Specified Coordinates 80 Point at the Center of Circular Edge 80 Point at Vertex 81 Point between Two Points 81 Points 80 sketch nodes 46 Polygon figure 38 Polygons 38 Positioning Reference Surfaces 82 Prescribed Motions and Rotations 325 Printing 3D 182 drawings 250 Printing 3D Models 182 Printing a BOM 298 Printing a Drawing 250 Producing Efficient and Useful Simulations 332 Publishing a Model to HTML 182 Push Pull Face Sketch 141 Push Pull Pocket or Boss 142 Push Pull Radius 144 Q Quick Search 351 R Rebend 157 Rectangle figure 32 Rectangles 32 Reference Figures and Sketch Nodes 46 Reference Geometry 66 75 deleting 85 editing 85 renaming 85 visibility 84 Reference Geometry Visibility 84 Reference lines 46 Reference plane 15 creation methods 75 display options 75 Reference Planes 75 Reference Surfaces 81
35. Publishing package 1 Ensure that you have installed Adobe Reader Must be version 7 0 8 or higher 2 Browse to the location where you saved the file 3 Double click the file and it will open in the Adobe Reader 4 Left click once on the image of the model Or Right click the image of the model and choose Enable 3D 5 Click on any of the steps in the list to see the assembly explosion at that step 6 Click Reset then Explode to view the animation of the entire explosion 7 To view the implosion click Reset and then Implode 181 Chapter 9 Working with Parts Note You must click Reset each time you want to select either Explode or Implode for the animation to work correctly 9 10 5 Improving the Quality of Published PDF Files Following these suggestions can improve the quality of your published PDF files Before beginning the publishing process e Make sure your workspace window is maximized e Choose a white background for your work area e Make the model fill as much of the work area as possible 9 10 6 Publishing a Model to HTML You can send the image of a model directly to an HTML file if necessary gt To publish the model to an HTML file 1 Open the file containing the model you want to publish 2 From the File menu select Publish 3D PDF of model only in HTML or select the Publish 3D Model in HTML tool El from the PDF Publishing toolbar The PDF Publishing Wizard dialog appears 3 In Save
36. When you have added all of the desired elements this puts the Assembly workspace into Simulation Playback mode In this state all the constraints in the Assembly are suppressed and any Anchored bodies are freed The Simulator takes control of the placement of all moving parts and sub assemblies in order to animate them as Simulation frames are generated Regenerate Simulation When you have made changes to your Assembly use this to update the Simulator You may be prompted to do this occasionally if you have made a change that renders the Simulator unable to animate the model Clear Simulation This completely resets the Assembly design to create a blank simulation Note All changes you have made to the Simulation set up physical elements you have added and feedback elements you have defined will be lost Show Status Window The Status window shows any Warnings and Simulator messages generated when checking the simulation model or generating a simulation If you have closed the window it can be re opened by selecting this item 315 Chapter 16 Alibre Motion Settings This item takes you to the Settings dialog where you can specify the parameters that determine how the Simulation should be generated and played back From here you can also specify how Traces appear and other options 16 3 2 Alibre Motion Explorer Much like the Design Explorer the Motion Explorer shows all the items which make up a Simulation set up From h
37. all association between the BOM and drawing Refer to nserting an Existing Design Into an Open Assembly on page 206 for information related to unlinking a BOM from a drawing 13 3 8 Moving a BOM View to Another Sheet You can move the BOM view from one sheet to another sheet in the drawing if necessary gt To move the BOM view from one sheet to another Select the Select ls tool from the View toolbar Right click the BOM view in the work area or the Drawing Explorer and select Move from the pop up menu The Move item is enabled only when the drawing contains at least two sheets The Select Target Sheet dialog appears From the Target Sheet list select the sheet to which you want to move the BOM view Click OK The BOM view is listed under the target sheet in the Drawing Explorer and appears in the target sheet work area 13 3 9 Splitting a BOM View You can split a BOM view into multiple smaller views if necessary This is useful if a view is too long to fit onto a sheet gt 1 To split a view From the Tools menu select Bill of Materials gt Split View or right click the BOM view in the work area or Drawing Explorer and select Split View from the pop up menu The Split Bill of Materials View dialog appears 5 Split Bill of Materials View a x Bill of Materials View Height Minimum 533 The Minimum and Maximum values are specific to the table being split The Minimum value represents the combined w
38. dimension 140 Chapter 7 Feature Creation 2 000 Figure 69 Drawing View of Block After Direct Editing It is important to realize that you will need to manually add dimensions for most of the features that you modify using the Direct Editing tools However the Direct Editing tools can speed up the design process particularly on imported models The following sections describe each of the Direct Editing tools 7 17 2 Push Pull Face Sketch You can use the Push Pull Face Sketch tool in two ways First you can use it to offset planar faces by a distance Second you can use itona sketch that has not yet been used to create a feature which will create an Extrude Boss feature based on the selected sketch gt 1 9 To use the Push Pull Face tool Select the Push Pull Face Sketch tool from the Direct Editing fly out on the Part Modeling toolbar or from the Feature menu select Direct Edit gt Push Pull Face or Sketch The Push Pull Face overlay appears You may need to maximize your workspace in order to view the entire overlay The Push Pull Face overlay has two sections If you have the Show Full Overlay option checked on you will see both sections displayed If you have this option checked off you will see the top section You can then display the bottom section by moving your mouse pointer over the overlay To turn this option on and off from the Tools menu select Options On the Overlays tab check or uncheck Sho
39. e IGES igs Initial Graphics Exchange Specification An ANSI standard format e DWG dwg Standard file format for saving vector graphics from within AutoCAD e DXF dxf For drawing interchange format An ASCII or binary file format of an AutoCAD drawing file for exporting AutoCAD drawings to other applications or for importing drawings from other applications e 3DM 3dm Rhino Program file format 305 Chapter 15 Importing and Exporting Data 15 1 2 Importing a File You can import 3D parts and assemblies in STEP IGES or SAT formats You can import 2D drawings in the DXF or DWG formats gt To import a model file 1 Select the Import a tool from the Standard toolbar or from the File menu select Import The Import File dialog appears Loe E ee IN Rete Cota haart e a 4 pe rae ac JSR 1005108 Enri ndar Marin dp ho 2 Browse to the location where the file is located and select the file 3 Click Open 4 Ifyou have the option checked on the File Import Options dialog appears if you are importing non native Alibre STEP files IGES files and SAT files See mport Settings and Import Advisor on page 307 for more information a Select the applicable import options b If desired you can uncheck Show Options When Importing and this dialog will not be displayed during subsequent file imports c Click OK Note You can change whether or not the Import Options dialog is displayed during importing at
40. e Topology Patterns require you to tell Alibre Design which faces you want to pattern You can pattern any set of faces either a set that would make a complete feature or a set that represents only part of a feature Pattern Outcomes e Feature Patterns will result in a pattern of complete features e Topology Patterns will result in a pattern of sets of faces These may represent a complete feature but may not You should use a Feature Pattern if your design intent is to pattern the complete feature The following segments for creating Linear Topology Patterns and Circular Topology Patterns will demonstrate using this functionality to pattern a portion of existing geometry on this part that was imported into Alibre Design as a sat file gt To create a linear topology pattern 1 From the Feature menu select Topology Pattern gt Linear or select the Linear Topology Pattern tool from the Part Modeling Toolbar available in the Feature Pattern fly out The Linear Topology Pattern dialog appears Linear To pology Pattern Seed Pace Faci 13 Paltemed Faces First Direction Second D rection Linear pati Linear path _ Charge direction _ Change direction Spacng Spacing zoo AL feo C Copies 2 BU Copies i EU Y Check Results Label Topology Patten 3 133 Chapter 7 Feature Creation 2 Select the Seed Face Using the Seed Face Alibre Design will infer a group of related faces adjacent to each ot
41. enter the desired value for the width of the double D In the Angle field enter the desired angle if any measured from the x axis In the Pattern Type field select the pattern type you desire 3 Inthe Pattern Parameter field enter the values that apply for the pattern type you selected 4 Set the First Shape Anchor location this option is not in Arc or Circular pattern types This determines where the first shape in the pattern will be placed with respect to your mouse pointer when you click to place the shape 5 Move your mouse pointer in the work area and click to place the figure The Round Shape dialog remains open You can continue to modify the values in the Round Shape dialog as needed 6 Select Apply to accept the sketch figure The sketch figure is placed and centerpoints are shown for each shape In addition a preview for a new sketch figure appears with the mouse pointer You can place another sketch shape pattern you can modify any of the parameters when placing the next sketch pattern or choose Close to exit the Round Shape dialog Note Once a sketch shape pattern has been placed all of the shapes in the pattern are grouped as one sketch figure You cannot separate them However you can edit the shape pattern gt To edit a shape or shape pattern 1 Right click the shape in the work area and select Edit or double click the shape in the work area The Round Shape dialog appears 2 Make any changes necessar
42. from the Tools menu select Reproject Outdated Views The Reproject dialog appears 2 Choose one of the following options a Fast Views the outdated items will be projected in Fast View mode b Precise Views the outdated items will be projected in the standard mode c Retain View Mode the outdated views will be projected in whichever mode they are currently in 3 Click OK to continue updating the drawing 12 2 9 View and Sheet Boundaries A red view boundary is highlighted as you move the cursor over a view The view boundary is displayed both in and out of sketch mode The boundary size is calculated automatically based on the extents of the view Consequently you cannot change the size of the view boundary You can only work on a view e g add dimensions sketch figures etc when the view boundary is displayed around it The view boundary indicates the view is active Any items added to the view when it is active will be associated with the view If the view is moved the inserted items will move with it A sheet boundary is also highlighted when a sheet is selected and you enter sketch mode The sheet boundary indicates the sheet is active Any items added to the sheet when it is active will be associated with the sheet The boundary size is based on the extents of the entire sheet 12 2 10 Changing the View Scale You can change the default view scale or the scale of individual views after they have been placed A changed defa
43. or sketch line as the Axis centerline 4 Choose a Gap Type Natural Extends the edges of the wall along their natural curves until they intersect Round Creates fillets on any corners of the wall profile Extend Extends the edges of the wall beyond their endpoints in straight lines until they intersect 5 Specify the Wall Thickness Side 1 creates or removes material on the inward side of the sketch Side 2 creates or removes material on the outward side of the sketch 6 Click OK to create the thin wall revolution 110 Chapter 7 Feature Creation bag me r i an a ron rien ee Foe PP RRE ie Se Figure 40 Resulting revolved thin wall boss Figure 39 Initial sketch for a revolved thin wall boss 7 5 Loft Boss and Loft Cut Although the loft boss and loft cut features are different in end result the steps used to create them are identical Loft features simply referred to as lofts either create or remove material by forming a feature that transitions from one cross section Such as a sketch or existing face to another along a path The two sketches reside on different planes but do not have to be parallel to each other You can use two or more sketches or existing faces to create lofts gt To create a loft boss or cut 1 Sketch at least two profiles on two different planes The sketches must be closed The planes do not have to be parallel You may loft to a point by creating a sketch with exactly one
44. select Figures gt Ellipse 2 Click to select the ellipse center 3 Move the mouse pointer and click a second time to place the major axis of the ellipse 4 Move the mouse pointer and click a third time to place the minor axis of the ellipse gt To resize an ellipse 1 Choose the Select tool from the Sketching toolbar 2 Move the mouse pointer over the ellipse 3 Click hold the mouse button and drag to reshape the ellipse 4 Release the mouse button Note You can also edit the dimension of the figure if you have placed one 36 Chapter 4 Sketching gt To move an ellipse 1 Choose the Select tool from the Sketching toolbar 2 Select the entire ellipse by dragging a selection rectangle around it 3 Hold the Shift key click and hold the mouse button and drag the ellipse 4 Release the mouse button 4 4 7 Elliptical Arcs gt To sketch an elliptical arc 1 Select the Elliptical Arc tool dE from the Arc fly out on the Sketching toolbar or from the Sketch menu select Figures gt Elliptical Arc 2 Click to select the elliptical arc center 3 Move the mouse pointer and click a second time to place the major axis of elliptical arc 4 Move the mouse pointer and click a third time to place the minor axis of elliptical arc 5 Click a fourth time to start the elliptical arc 6 Click a fifth time to complete the elliptical arc gt To resize an elliptical arc 1 Choose the Select tool fro
45. the sketch plane Additional reference planes can be inserted in any orientation and also used as the sketch plane You can modify the display options of the reference planes gt 1 To modify plane display options From the Tools menu select Options General Tab Check Shade reference planes to see the reference planes slightly shaded in the work area Uncheck the box if you do not want to see the shading Check Show reference plane normals to see a 3D arrow designating the direction of a reference plane s normal when you place the cursor over it Uncheck the box if you do not want to see the designating arrows 5 1 1 Offset Plane You can create a new reference plane parallel to an existing reference plane or planar face offset by a specified distance gt To create an offset plane Select the Insert Plane ES tool from the Inspection toolbar or from the Insert menu select Plane or right click in the work area and select Insert Plane from the pop up menu The Insert Plane dialog appears Select the existing reference plane or planar face to offset Enter the offset Distance value Use a value of 0 00 if you want the new plane to be on the existing plane or face A preview of the new plane is displayed If necessary select Reverse to create the plane in the opposite direction 19 Chapter 5 Reference Geometry 5 Click OK to create the plane Figure 25 Offset Reference Plane 5 1 2 Tangent Plane You
46. your 2D drawing will continue to be out of date and you will have limited editing options when working with your 2D drawing until you reproject all outdated views 12 2 2 Renaming Sheets amp Views You can rename the sheet and corresponding views to convey relevant design information gt To rename a sheet or view 1 Right click a sheet or view in the Drawing Explorer and select Rename from the pop up menu 2 Type the new name 3 Press Enter The sheet or view name is updated 12 23 Changing the Drawing Template You can change the drawing template after the initial drawing creation gt To change the drawing template 1 Right click the sheet in the Drawing Explorer and select Change Template from the pop up menu The New Sheet Properties dialog appears 2 Select the Template option and select a template from the list To use a custom drawing template not listed click Browse and select the template from the Custom Drawing Template dialog Note If you have previously browsed to another template folder you can use the Default button to reset the template list back to the system template folder Or Select the Blank Sheet template option and select a sheet size from the drop down list 3 Change the Default View Scale if necessary 239 Chapter 12 Drawings 4 Click OK 5 If a Standard template was selected the Fill In Text dialog appears Complete the applicable fields and click OK The sheet is updated
47. 0 254000 cm E Cell Reference Units Modify Muti Select Sheet11 D 3 5 _ E ESE In the Name field it will say Multi Select and in the Cell Reference field each of the cells will be listed in the order they appear in the Parameters section It will say NULL in the place of a cell name if no cell is currently linked Click the E button to move to the linked Excel spreadsheet and select in the correct order the new fields that you want to link You must click the same number of cells as parameters you highlighted Return to the Control Parameters dialog by clicking the button Click the Modify button to update the parameter values 9 9 3 Modifying Spreadsheet Driven Parameters Modify the parameters for spreadsheet driven designs directly in Microsoft Excel gt 1 To modify spreadsheet driven parameters Launch Alibre Design Open the part that is linked to the spreadsheet Launch Microsoft Excel Open the spreadsheet of prepared parameters 171 Chapter 9 Working with Parts From the Tools menu in Excel select Alibre Design Add In gt Control Parameters For Excel 2007 select the Add Ins tab Choose Alibre Design Add In gt Control Parameters The Control Parameters dialog appears You may be prompted to save the workbook the Excel file before using it to control parameters The name of the open part is displayed in the Design field and its dimensions appear in the Parameters table
48. 4 Exploded View Steps The Exploded View Step Editor allows you to create and manage steps for your exploded view These steps will be similar to an instruction manual describing the assembling information for the assembly The steps can be used later when Publishing to PDF to animate the exploded view This is available for users with Full Publishing capability only The exploded view steps can be created in two ways 1 If you choose to auto explode your assembly the steps are automatically created 2 If you choose to manually explode your assembly a new step is created each time you move a part However only one step exists for each part in the assembly so if you move a part a second time the step for it updates Characteristics of exploded view steps e Each step will only move a single part from its initial position to its exploded position or from its exploded position to its initial position e A step can be moved to a different position in the sequence of steps e You can give a name to each step as well as a description of what that step does Editing exploded view steps You can access the Exploded View Step Editor in four different ways e From the Edit menu choose Edit Exploded View Steps e n the Design Explorer right click on the Exploded View and choose Edit Exploded View Steps Right click in the work area and choose Edit Exploded View Steps Fay e From the Assembly Modeling toolbar select the Open Exploded
49. Chapter 12 Drawings 3 Check the Project as Flat Pattern box 4 Click OK A preview of the flat pattern view appears in the work area 5 Move the cursor to position the view 6 Click once to place the view on the sheet 12 5 Custom Templates You can create a custom drawing template that meets your design process requirements A custom template can be created in two different ways as a symbol that you insert into a drawing or saved as a drawing that you select from the New Sheet Properties dialog 12 5 1 Creating a Custom Template gt To create a custom template 1 Open a new drawing workspace The New Sheet Properties dialog appears 2 Select Blank Sheet 3 Select a sheet size from the pull down list 4 Click the Create An Empty Drawing checkbox 5 Click OK An empty drawing workspace appears 6 In the work area sketch the border and title block using the sketch tools 7 Create text labels or standard information such as your company s name and address From the Sketch menu select Text gt Label Text labels can be used for making title block labels such as Scale DRW PART NO etc 8 Setup fields that collect data from the user for variable information such as Drawn by Date Designed For Drawing Number Scale etc From the Sketch menu select Text gt Field Text fields can be used for making title block fields to receive data that corresponds with SCALE DRW PART NO etc See Automatically Filling Title
50. Existing PDF If you have previously created a PDF file you can continue adding data to that PDF at a later time gt 1 To continue working on an existing PDF Open the file containing the model drawing or BOM that you want to include in the PDF From the File menu select Continue Previously Created PDF or select the Continue Previously Created PDF tool from the PDF Publishing toolbar The PDF Publishing Wizard dialog appears Select the appropriate radio button to choose whether you want to Append to the last PDF you created or Append to a different PDF If you chose to append to a different PDF click Browse to choose the PDF Click Next Continue in the PDF Publishing wizard as described in Creating a PDF File on page 175 9 10 3 PDF Publishing Templates Templates available when creating a PDF from a Part Sheet metal Part or Assembly Workspace Model Only Full The published PDF file will have one page which Page shows the 3D model Model Only Half The published PDF file will have one page which Page shows the 3D model only in the upper half of the PDF page The rest of the PDF page will be blank Model with textin The published PDF file will have one page which lower half shows the 3D model in the upper half of the PDF page The lower half of the PDF page will include your custom text mn G G 179 Chapter 9 Working with Parts Templates available when creating a PDF from an Assembly Workspac
51. Explorer The Push Pull tool remains active Left click another face or sketch to perform another Push Pull Face operation or click Exit to leave the Push Pull mode Common Errors When Using Push Pull Face Selecting a face that has fillets on it will cause the operation to fail To fix this error delete the fillet then apply the Push Pull Face operation and then place the fillet In some cases you can suppress the fillet apply the Push Pull operation and then unsuppress it rather than deleting it Selecting a chamfer as the face or selecting any face that has other faces meeting it at angles other than 90 degrees can cause unexpected results Depending on the results you want it may be more beneficial to create an Extrude Boss feature instead of using Push Pull Face 7 17 3 Push Pull Pocket or Boss You can use the Push Pull Pocket or Boss tool to move a Pocket or a Boss by a distance in a linear direction This tool allows you to do this without editing a feature or a sketch It is useful for manipulating files that have been imported into Alibre Design and do not have features or sketches available to edit A Pocket is an area of the model where material has been removed from the solid body This could be a Cut feature but it does not have to be The following example contains one large pocket with 2 smaller pockets within it for a total of 3 pockets A Boss is a solid portion of the model it can be a feature or a part of a fea
52. Explorer Groups 316 Motion Settings 317 Moving a BOM View to Another Sheet 287 Moving a View to Another Sheet 249 Moving and Fixed Parts 316 333 Moving and Rotating Parts Freely 210 Moving and Rotating Parts Precisely 211 Moving and Rotating Sketch Figures 53 Moving Parts to Simulate Assembly Physical Motion 211 Moving Rows and Columns in a Table 294 Moving the BOM View on the Sheet 286 Moving Views on the Sheet 241 Multiple Views 16 N Named Views 17 Note 270 Notes 270 NURBS figure 33 O Offline 5 Offset Plane 75 Offsetting sketching 49 Offsetting Figures 36 49 On the DVD 2 Online 5 Open and Closed Sketches 69 104 106 109 113 117 Opening a Drawing that References Missing Items 238 Opening a New Assembly and Inserting Existing Parts 206 Opening a New Drawing 233 Opening a New Workspace 14 Opening and Saving 299 Opening Files 299 Opening Files from the Alibre Vault 299 Opening Files from the File System 299 Opening Outdated Drawings 239 Optimizing the Drawing Display 245 Ordinate dimensions 252 Other 3D Sketch Functions 99 Index Overriding Design Values 296 Overview of Simulating and Playing 322 P Parallel Plane through a Point 77 Part Color 212 Part Display Options 163 207 Part Physical Properties 164 Partial View 262 Partial views 262 Parts display 163 modifying 159 toolbar 102 Pattern feature 130
53. Faces to remove Overrides Face ieee ia Standard thickness 1 200 n p3 C Shell outward NICKNESS T Label Shel 3 gt x Coe 0 2 Select the Faces to remove You can select multiple faces if necessary 3 Specify the Standard thickness value which defines the wall thickness after the part is shelled 4 If required you can also select faces to override in which case you can specify a custom wall Thickness To do so click in the Overrides area and select the face or faces to override in the Design Explorer or work area You can then set a custom override Thickness for each applicable face 5 Select the Shell outward option if you want to add external wall thickness 6 Click OK to create the shell 7 11 Draft Faces Draft surface features create a tapered face at a specified angle to another face in the model You can create drafts as individual features or you can specify drafts while creating other features such as extrude bosses 123 Chapter 7 Feature Creation gt To create a draft 1 Select the Draft Surface tool from the Part Modeling toolbar or from the Feature menu select Draft or right click and select Add Draft from the pop up menu The Draft dialog appears Faces to Draft T TE Neutral Plane Outward Label Draftc3 gt el 2 Select the Faces to Draft 3 Select the Neutral Plane A reference plane or an existing face can be used as the Neutral Pla
54. Hy tools from the Options drop down list on the Visibility toolbar gt To change the display of individual parts 1 Right click on any part 2 Select Render Mode from the popup menu 3 Select the render mode you want for that part 207 Chapter 11 Assembly Design 11 3 6 Inserting a Duplicate Design Into an Open Assembly You can insert copies of a part or subassembly that you have already inserted into an assembly gt l OR To insert duplicates into an assembly Select the design you want to duplicate and insert You can select the design in the Design Explorer or work area From the Insert menu select Duplicate A preview of the part appears in the assembly workspace The Duplicating dialog also appears Move the cursor to move the design if necessary Click once to place the design in the workspace If necessary continue to click to insert additional duplicates Press Esc or click Finish in the Duplicating dialog to complete the insertion The duplicate appears and is listed in the Design Explorer H 3041 20 lt 1 gt H 3041 foe 2 gt H 3041 foe 35 gt Left click on a part and hold down the left mouse button Hold down the CTRL key Drag the part A duplicate is instantly inserted and you can drag it around the assembly To finalize the duplicate release the left mouse button 11 3 7 Inserting a Pattern of Parts in an Assembly You can pattern a part or subassembly that you have already ins
55. If you prefer you can pre select the two entities and then open the Assembly Constraint dialog The Surfaces to constrain field will be populated with the selections 217 Chapter 11 Assembly Design 4 Select the appropriate constraint type Only the constraint types that are valid for the selected items are available 5 If you are applying the Angle constraint specify the angle in degrees 6 If you are applying the Tangent constraint select Inside or Outside 7 You can specify an Offset value if you are applying a Mate Align or Tangent constraint 8 Select the Preview option to check the result before applying it If the preview shows the parts in the incorrect position modify the constraint properties accordingly 9 Click Apply to finalize the constraint The second component in the list is constrained to the first component and the constraint is listed in the Design Explorer under the Constraints node The constraint label lists the constraint type Expand the node to view its constrained entities The dialog remains open so you can create another constraint 10 Repeat the procedure to create another constraint or click Close to exit the Assembly Constraints dialog 11 4 4 Inter Design Constraints While in part edit mode if you use a face on an existing part as a sketch plane or to create a new reference plane an inter design constraint will automatically be created This constraint will be displayed in the Design Explo
56. Join All Blanks option if you want to unite all the blanks into a single part If you want the resulting cut parts to be placed in the original assembly check the option Insert results into current assembly If you want the cut parts in separate workspaces uncheck this option 5 Click OK The selected blank parts are cut by the selected tool parts Each cut blank is represented in the Design Explorer as a new part with an Imported SAT File feature 232 Chapter 12 Drawings CHAPTER 12 Drawings You can create 2D drawings of the parts and assemblies you create Standard 2D views can be created automatically from the part or assembly Custom views can be created based on the standard views already present in the drawing In This Chapter Creating INI MINO ottotieteieioso o otiondooionltoroietotloemrentpejelciond 233 NU GMM MUR DW torino 237 Bo o o nn e oo 250 MASSING Additional VIGW AAA PP o a PEO OP io o E 256 UEO TE APP E er ou A 265 A A Cee ee ee ee A E ce nee ee N re ee ee ree eee 269 12 1 Creating a New Drawing 12 1 1 Opening a New Drawing You can open a new drawing from the Home window or any open workspace gt To open a new drawing from the Home window or any workspace Select the New Drawing tool from Standard toolbar or from the File menu select New gt Drawing The New Sheet Properties dialog appears 12 12 Selecting a Drawing Template You can select from a number of standard drawing template
57. O 312 Chapter 16 Alibre Motion CHAPTER 16 Alibre Motion Alibre Motion is a motion simulation solution for analyzing the behavior of mechanical assemblies with moving parts Using Alibre Motion engineers and designers can create simulations and animations of systems that move such as linkages engines automotive suspensions conveyors and other mechanisms lt can be used to study and analyze how various components interact and behave according to engineering principles and physical laws With Alibre Motion you can build virtual prototypes to help analyze and optimize designs without having to build and test expensive and time consuming physical prototypes Alibre Motion enables multi body dynamic analysis on an assembly created in Alibre Design allowing you to realistically predict and visualize the assembly s motion Note Alibre Motion is available in the Alibre Design Expert version For more information on getting a license for Alibre Motion please contact Alibre Sales Use Alibre Motion to e Create Virtual Prototypes with Automatic Constraint Mapping e Quickly create animations that can be saved as AVI files e Generate motion with prescribed rotations and translations e Generate motions due to gravity and prescribed forces and torques e Create accurate simulation models with a variety of physical elements e Get simulation feedback from traces and X Y result plots e Detect interferences of overlapping bodies On
58. Of course if you drop them straight down neglecting air resistance they would accelerate identically Similarly the center of mass must be in the right place to produce realistic behavior Use Realistic Constraints Most constraints in Alibre Design represent a real world physical behavior For instance in the real world a rod passing through a sleeve is constrained by the contact between the outer surface of the rod and the inner surface of the sleeve The Alibre equivalent of this relationship would be an Align constraint between the two surfaces However some useful constraints provided by Alibre Design do not have a real world counterpart such as those which include a Reference Geometry feature an Axis or a Plane Even though Alibre Motion may simulate the constraint such that the parts move exactly as expected the Reference Geometry could lie outside the Part and forces and torques may act through that point which in reality could not happen Avoid constraining against Reference Geometry in Assemblies you plan to simulate 16 6 3 Automatic Constraint Mapping ACM in Alibre Motion In the past one of the most time consuming processes when creating models for simulation was adding constraints Often a CAD design had constraints that needed to be recreated from scratch in the simulation program Alibre Motion automatically creates simulation constraints from the Design Constraints already present in the Assembly using a process called Automa
59. Optimizing he Drawina DIS Vii a ei donelevasccemes sa ie 245 a O O O A O II A O ane eat 245 a o A eee eet eee 248 12216 ROO Cena NS e in de lA 249 12 2 17 Moving a View to Another Sed bac cduciaatesdedennctllaceaseadscbacdukcbteves dad ossendedendeaee 249 12 2 18 Hiding Parts in a View Assemblies ONy ccccccsssseeeccceeecccceeeeceeceseaeeeeeseeaeeeesesseaeeeeeseageeeeeaaass 249 12 2 19 Inserting Images in a Drawing o ai 249 12220 PRAM DW esse E A E RE A ER 250 DIMENSIONING rt dt ios ee 250 12 3 1 Placing Additional DIMENSIONS on a Vi Wisin ii 251 12 3 2 Dimensioning Slots ANG Holas mica 251 12 3 3 Placing Ordinate Dimensions ON a VIEW seseeccecceeeeeeeeccaeeeeeeaeeeeeeceeeseeeesaueeeeeeessaaeeeeessaaeeeesaaees 252 12 3 4 Modifying Driving Dimension Valu s cccooonncccconococonnoconononcnnanonononcononannnnonanonononrnnonannnconananenonens 253 12 30 DIMENSION Pr MES e ari ot o 253 1123167 DIMENSION SIV OS eon a E E cu cena tes Ee baa seaw is pasts E a ocnsaeamaneee 254 i ato ee eam A A were 255 124 hsening Additional VEE a dais 256 tada Standard VIEW sass tt e A O E E 256 1242 AAV VOW errer a a e e a a do 256 1243 Detail VICW ecserin iiia aaa a ll il iia 257 p28 E a a a ee eee ne 259 1245 A a a a N a A 261 1240 O e 262 124 SEXOIOGOO VIEW cts di ile 264 12 4 8 Flat Pattern View of a Sheet Metal Part ooonccccccccccccnncconncccononnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnannncnnnnnnnnnann
60. Options dialog appears 2 Select the Grid tab 3 Check the Snap to grid checkbox to turn the snap to grid option on this is a toggle uncheck the box to turn it off 4 Click OK in the Options dialog Note You can snap to grid even if you do not have the grid displayed 4 9 2 Snapping to the Working Plane In sketch mode you can have the work area view automatically reorient once you have selected a sketch plane so that you are looking directly at the sketch plane the working plane gt To turn Snap to the Working Plane off 1 From the Tools menu select Options 2 Select the General tab if it is not already selected 3 Inthe Design Viewing area deselect the Snap to working plane option to turn it on uncheck it to turn it off 4 Click OK in the Options dialog When this option is checked ON the view will reorient once you have selected a sketch plane in sketch mode When this option is checked OFF the work area view will remain in its current orientation once you have selected a sketch plane gt To reorient the view back to the sketch plane While you are in sketch mode you can reorient the view back to the sketch plane at any time From the View menu select Orient gt To Sketch Plane or select the To Sketch Plane tool from the Orient View Toolbar de gt To reorient the view to the isometric of the sketch plane While you are in sketch mode you can reorient the view to the isometric of the sketch pla
61. Regeneration of Design Configurations 187 Relationships 359 Re linking a Spreadsheet to a Part 172 173 Remove Faces 145 Renaming sketches 73 Renaming Files 354 Renaming Reference Geometry 85 Renaming Sheets amp Views 239 Renaming Simulations 334 Renaming Sketches 73 99 Reordering Features 160 Reordering Sheets 249 Requirements 1 hardware 1 internet connection 1 system 1 Resequencing Data 297 Resizing Rows and Columns 293 Results and Feedback from Alibre Motion Simulations 336 Revolve Boss 108 Revolve Boss and Revolve Cut 108 Revolve Boss and Revolve Cut Features 109 Revolve Cut 108 Right click Menu 69 Rolling Back Features 161 Rolling Back to Previous Versions 358 Rounding a Corner 157 Running Simulations 334 S SAT 310 Saving and Using a Custom Template as a Drawing 265 266 Saving and Using a Custom Template as a Symbol 265 266 267 Saving Catalog Features 127 158 Saving Files 300 Saving Files to the Alibre Vault e 302 Saving Files to the File System 300 Scaling Parts 146 Searching 350 Section View 259 Section views 367 3D 163 drawing 259 Selecting a Drawing Template 233 248 Selecting Parts in the Assembly 207 Selecting the Model 234 256 Selection 18 advanced selector 18 Selection Methods 18 Setting Up Excel to Drive Designs 168 169 Setting Up Notifications 356 Setting Your Default Style 254
62. Select the components to insert into the assembly Press the Ctrl key as you select multiple components To select a series of items hold the Shift key and select the first and last parts in the series Note To start with a blank assembly workspace click Cancel on the Insert Part Subassembly dialog 4 Click OK to insert the part A preview of the part s appears in the assembly workspace The Inserting dialog also appears 5 Move the cursor to move the part s if necessary 6 Click once to place the part s in the workspace 7 If necessary continue to click to insert duplicates 8 Press Esc or click Finish in the Inserting dialog to complete the insertion 11 3 2 Anchored Parts A part s position in an assembly can be fixed by anchoring the part in the work area An anchored part cannot be moved When a part is anchored the Anchor from a part at any time Icon is displayed on the part in the Design Explorer You can anchor any part as well as remove the anchor state gt To add or remove the anchor state Right click a part in the Design Explorer and select Anchor Part from the pop up menu 11 3 3 Inserting an Existing Design Into an Open Assembly You can insert parts or sub assemblies any time after an assembly has been opened gt To insert an existing design into an assembly 1 From the Insert menu select Part Subassembly or right click in the work area and select Insert Part Subassembly from the pop up menu or p
63. The Reorder Sheets dialog appears 2 Click the sheet you want to move 3 Choose the appropriate button on the right to move the sheet to the desired position 4 Click OK to accept the new sheet order and exit the dialog 12 2 17 Moving a View to Another Sheet You can move a view to another sheet in a drawing gt Tomove a view to another sheet 1 Right click the view in the work area or Drawing Explorer and select Move from the pop up menu The Select Target Sheet dialog appears listing the drawing sheets you can move the view to 2 Select the sheet to which you want to move the view 3 Click OK The view is moved to the specified sheet and is listed under the target sheet in the Drawing Explorer 12 2 18 Hiding Parts in a View Assemblies Only In a drawing of an assembly you can hide parts in a view gt To hide a part in a view 1 Right click an edge of the part in the work area view and select Hide Part from the pop up menu OR In the Drawing Explorer click the plus sign EF next to the applicable view 2 Click the plus sign next to the assembly name to expand the list of associated parts 3 Right click the part and select Hide from the pop up menu 4 The part is hidden in the view and is dimmed in the Drawing Explorer To unhide the part right click the hidden part in the Drawing Explorer and deselect Hide 12 2 19 Inserting Images in a Drawing You can insert images such as logos into drawings Sever
64. The linear pattern will appear in the Design Explorer with the parts in the pattern listed under it in the tree These patterned parts cannot be edited or moved however any of the patterned parts can be deleted by right clicking them in the Design Explorer and choosing Delete ete Linear Pattern 1 4g solid 1 6015 lt 2 gt A solid 1 E015 lt 3 gt solid 1 BOTS lt 4 gt Tel Trl A m Circular Pattern You can use a circular pattern to repeat a part in a radial direction around a centerline gt To create a circular pattern of a part in an assembly 1 From the Insert menu select Part Subassembly Pattern gt Circular The Circular Part Subassembly Pattern dialog appears Circular Part Subassembly Pattern PartSubassembiy to Pattem a small bot lt 3 gt 6 mm Center A Pis Layers 1 Eee eee eee eee eee Copies 1 al Layer Spacing imm C Ange 90 Layer Twist b Ele Label Circular Pattem 1 a Canes 0 2 In Part Subassembly to Pattern select the part you want to pattern 3 In Center select the axis you want the parts to be patterned around from the Design Explorer 4 In Copies enter the number of copies you want including the original 5 In Angle set the angle value 6 In Layers enter the number of layers you want in the direction of your centerline The same number of copies will be created on each layer 7 In Layer Spacing set the distance between each layer 209
65. View Step Editor tool LEN You must be currently viewing an existing exploded view that has at least one part moved from its default location for any of the above options to be available Once you have the Exploded View Step Editor open you can click on each step and the part associated with that step will be highlighted in the work area You can name a step add a description or change the sequence of the steps gt To modify a step 1 Click on the step you want to edit 2 Inthe Name field type a name that you want to use to refer to that step 22 Chapter 11 Assembly Design In the Description field enter a description of what that step does Using the movement buttons on the right move the step up or down in the sequence or move it to the first or the last position in the sequence If you would like to combine 2 or more steps into one press and hold the Control key as you select all of the steps that you want to combine and then click the Group Steps button This action can only be reversed by using the Edit Undo command while viewing the Exploded view prior to exiting the model This capability allows you to show movement of multiple parts simultaneously when the exploded view is published to PDF Full Publishing licenses only Choose Apply then Close 11 8 Deleting an Exploded View To delete an exploded view Make sure you are not currently editing any Exploded views In the Design Explorer right cl
66. Water Feed Block Alibre Design Expert File Edit View Insert Sketch 3D Sketch Feature Tools Team Design Window Help das OOOO A ss A MEE ASIS L2odr3 Design Explorer Al Water Feed Block Ea Configurations EH Confia lt 1 gt Fa 84 g 29 Redline Views r By Section Views To lo Sketch lt 1 gt A Extrusion lt 2 gt Sketch lt 2 gt A Extrusion lt 3 gt Sketch lt 3 gt QQ Extrusion lt 4 gt 3 Sketch lt 4 gt QQ Extrusion lt 5 gt lb Sketch lt 5 gt QQ Extrusion lt 6 gt 5 Sketch lt 6 gt QQ Extrusion lt 7 gt 5 Sketch lt gt y i QQ Extrusion lt 8 gt 5 Sketch lt 8 gt Q Extrusion lt 9 gt 5 Sketch lt 9 gt A Filet lt 10 gt i Mirror lt 11 gt A Extrusion lt 12 gt Lo Sketch lt 14 gt S ee heOo 9O N SII OO S A Uwe 89 Be 3 oO A 2 fe WR Extrusion lt 13 gt 3 Sketch lt 11 gt Wm Extrusion lt 14 gt Figure 9 Workspace with Split Views 16 Chapter 3 Introduction to the Design Interface 3 1 6 Named Views In part and assembly workspaces you can use named views to control view display and manipulation You can quickly change the display to a 2 A default view and add custom views using the Orientations command under the View menu or by selecting the View Orientations on the View toolbar tool Drientations Front PY p Bottom lt 2 Isometric Dimetric To apply a named
67. When the auto analyze function is turned on Alibre Design will automatically run the Analyze Sketch tool each time you exit sketch mode or when you choose a feature tool while inside a sketch If the sketch has no errors the process you have started will continue If the sketch contains errors you will receive a dialog alerting you to the error Choose one of the following options e Show me this option brings up the Analyze Sketch dialog with the analysis results Select any of the results and continue on with Steps 6 10 in the check for errors manually instructions that follow e Ignore this option allows you to continue the process you started Be aware that if you have started the process to create a 3D feature the feature may fail as a result of the errors in the sketch Note Check the Do not show me this screen option first if you want to turn off the auto analyze function Alibre Design will not automatically analyze any future sketches unless you turn the option back on as described below gt To turn on and off auto analyze functionality 1 From the Tools menu select Options 2 Onthe General tab in the Design Interaction section uncheck the option for Automatically Analyze Sketches to turn it off check the option to turn it back on 70 Chapter 4 Sketching 10 To check a sketch for errors manually Select the sketch Select tool from the Sketching toolbar Select either the entire sketch by dragging a sel
68. Work Area to define the spline A curve is then interpolated based on the placement of the nodes 1 Select the Spline tool from the Sketching toolbar or from the 3D Sketch menu select Figures gt Spline 2 Click in the Work Area to start the spline curve 3 Move the cursor and click a second time to place an interpolation node 4 Move the cursor to shape the curve 5 Continue clicking to place additional nodes and curve segments Note One or more interpolation nodes may be specified via the direct coordinate entry tool 6 Double click or hit escape to complete the spline curve Note If you place the final node at the same location as the first the spline will be completed as a closed spline gt To edit a Spline Curve In 3D Sketch you can edit spline curves by selecting and dragging any of the nodes in the curve gt Inserting a Node Into a Spline Curve 2 Alice 1 From the 3D Sketch menu select Insert Node into Spline or select the Insert Node into Spline iz tool from the sketching toolbar 2 Click the spline to place a node 3 Continue clicking the spline to place as many nodes as desired 4 Choose the Select tool to exit the Insert Node command 6 7 3D Sketch Nodes 6 7 1 Placing a Sketch Node gt To place a sketch node 1 Select the Sketch Node tool from the Sketching toolbar or from the 3D Sketch menu select Figures gt Node 2 Click in the work area to place a sketch node You can continue clickin
69. Work Area to place the center of the arc Click a second time to start the arc Move the cursor to sketch the arc Click a third time to complete the arc Note The plane of the arc is defined by the three nodes If the three nodes are collinear the current sketch plane is used To sketch a circular arc using Start End Radius Select the Circular Arc Start End Radius tool from the Sketching toolbar or from the 3D Sketch menu select Figures gt Circular Arc gt Start End Radius Position the cursor at the arc starting location Click to start the arc Click a second time to locate the end of the arc Move the cursor to size the arc Click a third time to complete the arc Note The plane of the arc is defined by the three nodes To sketch a circular arc using Tangent Start End Select the Circular Arc Tangent Start End tool from the Sketching toolbar or from the 3D Sketch menu select Figures gt Circular Arc gt Tangent Start End Click a line or circular arc Move the cursor to size the arc Click a second time to complete the arc Note The plane of the arc is defined by the tangent line passing through the nodes at the start and end of the arc 93 Chapter 6 3D Sketching You can also modify a 3D sketch circular arc in the same way as a 2D sketch circular arc see Circular Arcs on page 31 6 6 3 Spline Creation of NURBS curves by interpolation Using this method specify a set of nodes in the
70. You can insert a new BOM view or existing BOM view into a drawing Note You can only insert one BOM view per drawing However you can insert the BOM view into any drawing sheet 283 Chapter 13 Bills of Material When you insert a BOM view into a drawing you are automatically linking the BOM to the drawing Linking a BOM to a drawing creates an association between the BOM data and the drawing itself You can link a BOM to a drawing see Linking a BOM to a Drawing on page 285 without actually inserting the view into a sheet gt To insert an existing BOM view into a drawing 1 Select the Insert Bill of Materials tool from the Detailing toolbar or from the Insert menu select Bill of Materials View The Bill of Materials dialog appears 5 Bill of Materials O New Bill of Materials Choose Template OOOO Design IS sisting Bill of Materials test cases Crank Assembly el 2 Click the Existing Bill of Materials radio button 3 Click Browse The Choose Design Part or Assembly dialog appears In the Document Browser navigate to the location containing the BOM 4 Select the BOM item and click OK 5 Click OK in the Bill of Materials dialog A preview of the BOM view appears in the work area and is listed in the Drawing Explorer with the other views Drawing Explorer E E assembly E assembly sheets Sem ew Sheets 1 gt ED Views 1 gt Bt H Views 2 gt H 6 Move the cursor
71. any time To do this in a design workspace choose Tools gt Options Select the Interoperability tab In the Import File Options sections check or uncheck Show Options When Importing 306 Chapter 15 Importing and Exporting Data The data appears in the workspace F utor AMS AGbre Design xport File Edit Yaw Iwert Seca JD Sketch Fesbre Tons Taambeeon Wirda al ERS TIELEN sjoo CE Design Polea Tuor MHS a HA Coviqustons El e ts El am pe EIN By Section Mie El E Fast res E Impotsd IGS fis CD os E le Li ag Edges s MI tu Faves El E OS GE Diaw 3 DEA a IEE Figure 102 Part Workspace Displaying Imported IGES File 5 Note that the part is displayed in the Design Explorer with the label indicating the file type e g Imported STEP file or Imported SAT file Any feature added to the imported model will appear after this entry in the feature history tree gt To import a DXF or DWG file 1 Select the Import a tool from the Standard toolbar or from the File menu select Import The Import File dialog appears 2 Browse to the location on the disk where the file is located and select the file 3 Click Open The Import DXF DWG File dialog appears Import DXF DWG File E File Units y Maintain Projection Import Only Visible Layers 4 Select the Units for the imported file 5 Check Maintain Projection to maintain the projection plane of the imported model in Alibre Design
72. cds 186 10 1 3 Regeneration of Design Configurations ooonnnncconnccconcnnncnnnnnonononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnonononnnnnnnnnononananennns 187 10 2 Creating Part and Sheet Metal Part ConfiguratiONS cccccocononoconnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnannnnos 188 10 2 1 Helpful Notes on Design Configurations in Parts cccccccccccsssssssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaaaeeassseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 190 10 3 ASSEembDIY Configurations a a ri a 190 10 3 1 Inserting Configurations of Parts or SubasSemMbli8s occcccccccononncccnnccccnnoncccnnnnnononanccnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnos 193 10 3 2 Missing Design CON IU IONS ira 195 10 3 3 Using Configurations in Assembly Patterns oooooooooccnnnnnccnnnnnncnnononnnnonnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnannnnnnnnnnnnss 196 10 3 4 Helpful Notes on Design Configurations in Assemblies ooccccoonncccnncccnononnccnnnnnononannccnnonononnnnnancnnns 199 10 4 Using Contigurations in Drawings A A ee 199 10 5 Using Connguratons Ma BOM a shoots a a atea eco diana es 200 10 6 Using the Equation Editor with Configurations ooocnccconnccconoonncnnnnnnnononcnnnnnononannnnnnnnnnonononnnnnnnnonnnnnannnnnnns 202 ASSembDIV DeSI Mica 203 Assembly Design Methodology vc acu ea itca td oodiseasise Note oeaeiewiilad aed et s amaceee totactuensetaeiddeddtuuadectieadeeos 203 TRe ASSEMDIDEeSIOn Mean lod 203 ASSEMDIV BES ad eee eee 205 11 3 1 Opening a New Assembly and Inserting Existing Parts
73. characteristics of a sub assembly are calculated from its constituent parts However in many cases especially where there are numerous constraints and parts the benefits in performance and efficiency can be significant 332 Chapter 16 Alibre Motion Include Nuts and Bolts In Sub Assemblies An extension of the last point with regard to small items whose dynamics are rarely of interest is that it is usually best to include them in a subassembly with one of the parts they secure For instance you might want to attach bolts to one part the nuts to the other and then constrain those two sub assemblies together as another sub assembly Alibre Motion will then only need to solve the dynamics of one part rather than many Ensure The Constraints are Correct Alibre Motion uses Automatic Constraint Mapping ACM to define the ways that Parts and Sub Assemblies can interact Ensuring that the Assembly moves as required before activating Motion goes a long way towards ensuring the expected behavior from Simulations Also be careful not to over constrain the Assembly as this may cause locking Build Realistic Parts Not just the mass but also the shape and size of a part determines its moments of inertia which influence the way it moves when acted on by a force or torque For instance a basketball has larger moments of inertia than an identical weight soccer ball has and because of this accelerates more slowly when rolling downhill
74. checkmarks are currently on and those without checkmarks are currently off Toggle a toolbar on and off by clicking on it gt To move a toolbar between the top and right of the workspace 1 In any open workspace from the View menu select Toolbars The Toolbars dialog appears 2 To move a toolbar from the top of the workspace to the right of the workspace select the toolbar name and then click Right 3 To move a toolbar from the right of the workspace to the top of the workspace click the toolbar name and then click Top 4 Click Close to apply changes and exit the dialog gt To drag a toolbar to a different position in an area 1 Move the cursor near the vertical bar on the left side of the toolbar 2 Click and hold the left mouse button and drag the toolbar to a new position within its respective area 19 Chapter 3 Introduction to the Design Interface 3 4 View Manipulation You can change the way the model appears in the work area by modifying the orientation and display of the model The tools available from the View toolbar the Orient View toolbar the Visibility toolbar and the View menu allow you to manipulate the model in many different ways rotating it changing the zoom level reorienting it and viewing the model as a wireframe or shaded model for example View Toolbar YN Orient View Toolbar Pee eo eo a Visibility Toolbar dd De DS che eb ce EP BP eh Bap BP a The P
75. column is highlighted 3 Right click in the table area and select Column gt AutoFit from the pop up menu or from the Format menu select AutoFit Column The column width automatically adjusts to the widest field in the column 13 4 5 Adjusting Column Header and Data Alignment You can adjust the alignment of column headers and column data independently or together gt To adjust column header alignment 1 Select any field in the column in which you want to change the header alignment 2 Right click in the table area and select Header Alignment gt Left or Center or Right Or From the Format menu select Header Alignment gt Left or Center or Right Or Select the Align Left Center a or Align Right stool from the View toolbar The column header alignment changes gt To adjust column data alignment 1 Select any field in the column in which you want to change the data alignment 2 Right click in the table area and select Data Alignment gt Left or Center or Right Or From the Format menu select Data Alignment gt Left or Center or Right Or Select the Align Left Center a or Align Right stool from the View toolbar The column data alignment changes gt To adjust column header and data alignment together 1 Click the table header of the column you want align The entire column is highlighted 2 Right click in the table area and select Data Alignment gt Left or Center or Right Or From the Form
76. condition Blind Depth 5 000 ALJ Threads Diameter Series 250 Es Name Label Hole lt 3 gt _ x Ca 8 Select the Start surface A reference plane or planar face can be used as the start surface Note You can place multiple holes simultaneously With the Hole dialog open click again on the start surface to place another hole Select the hole Type from the list A number of standard hole types are available In the Specification field enter the parameters associated with the hole type Select a Depth condition from the list Blind creates the hole to a specified depth To Limit Geometry creates a hole up to a specified face or plane An offset can also be specified Through All creates a hole through the entire part Specify the depth parameters depending on which depth condition is being used If needed choose the Thread type as described below Click OK to create the hole s To add threads to a hole In the Insert Hole dialog choose the desired thread Series Alibre Design supports UNC UNF UNEF UNS Metric Course Metric Fine Metric Special and NPT series threads Note Alibre Design does not include pre defined thread definitions for all of these thread types although they are supported You can create your own thread definitions by editing the Alibre Design thread definition file alibre_unicode thd You can use Notepad to edit this file A definition of the file format is em
77. displayed with column lines only e Row Column Lines the BOM table will be displayed with column and row lines 1 From the Format menu select Table Style 2 Choose either No Lines Row Lines Column Lines or Row Column Lines 296 Chapter 13 Bills of Material 13 4 12 Resequencing Data You can resequence reorder data in a table after you delete or move rows Resequencing a BOM will reset the Item Numbers so that they are sequentially numbered correctly in the order listed gt Toresequence a BOM From the Data menu select Resequence The Item Numbers are reordered ltem Number Quantity Part Hame ltem Number Quantity Part Number Part Number a 1 1 a2 part 7 1 a4 part4 2 1 a6 parte El 1 aa parts 4 1 als partis J 1 al partiz a 1 aid pari 10 1 al parti 6 1 as part 11 1 a parte 12 1 aa part3 13 1 ali partii 3 1 az parts ltem Humber Quantity Part Humber Par Hame ltem Number Quantity Part Number Part Number 1 1 az partz zZ 1 ad partd 3 1 a6 parte 4 1 aa parto J T al3 partis 6 1 al parti 7 1 alo parti A 1 al parti a 1 a part 10 1 ag PEET 11 1 ag parto 12 1 adi partii 13 1 a part3 Figure 101 BOM Table After Resequencing 13 4 13 Updating the Table You can have the assembly workspace open and the BOM workspace open simultaneously Consequently you can update a BOM table after making changes to an assembly Before you can update the BOM you first must save any changes made to
78. down When you do this Add becomes available You can use Add to select specific users or user groups to grant permissions 355 Chapter 17 The Alibre Vault by M Files 5 Set the specific permissions you want for each user or user group by changing the Allow or Deny check marks for each permission item 6 Click OK gt To set permissions in the Vault interface Setting permissions is identical in the Vault interface Select a file right click it and select Properties Instead of a Permissions drop down there will be a Permissions Ttb at the top of the meta card that provides the same functionality described above 17 9 Setting Up Notifications You can set up notifications for several events within the Vault For example you can set up groups or individuals to be notified when actions such as Check In Check Out Version Rollback etc are performed To enable notifications you will need to access the Server Administrator and input your mail server s SMTP settings along with any authentication that is required by your server Refer to the Vault help system accessed by right clicking the Mi icon on the lower left of your screen in the System Tray 17 10 Versioning 17 10 1 Versioning Concepts Using the Vault you can create versions of documents Versions serve several purposes such as providing a history of the design development and providing the ability to revert to a previous version When versions are created V
79. driving dimensions in the drawing will be reflected in the part after the drawing has been saved and the part is opened 12 3 5 Dimension Properties Dimension properties are determined by the style that you assign to each dimension When a dimension is created it is automatically assigned to the dimension style that you have set as your default dimension style You can change dimension properties either as a group or on an individual basis gt To change the default dimension style 1 From the File menu select Properties 2 Select the Dimensions and Annotations tab 3 Inthe Dimensions section select your desired default style from the drop down list This style will be applied to all newly created dimensions 4 Click Apply then Close gt To change the properties of a single dimension 1 Right click the dimension and select Properties The Dimension Properties dialog appears 2 To change which style is used for that dimension select a new style from the Dimension Style drop down list 3 To set the properties for this dimension independent of any style uncheck the Use Style checkbox You can then set the properties as desired for each tab 4 Click OK gt To change the properties of multiple dimensions 1 Click the first dimension to select it then hold the Shift key down as you select each subsequent dimension 2 Right click on any of the selected dimensions and choose Properties The Dimension Properties dialog app
80. e Does not use the concept of Folders to store data Instead all data is stored in the Vault Server which is in essence a large database e Does not use the concept of Folders to differentiate data Instead an item s metadata is used to differentiate it from other files File Name is a basic example of meta data e Does not let you browse a Folder Structure to find data Instead you browse something called Views Views are essentially filters for metadata For example a view can show you things such as e All Alibre Part Files all vault items with a ad_prt file extension e All projects due in the next two weeks all vault items with a Due Date lt 2 weeks e All Products Shows all your different products and lets you drill down to show all associated part assembly drawing BOM Word Excel etc files you have associated with a particular product e Allows infinite items of the same file name to be stored in the Vault Remember the Vault is a database and much like you can have multiple identical rows in Excel you can have multiple identical items in the Vault However since you will define metadata for each item File Name is only one piece of a file s defining factors e Has inherent versioning check in out security notification etc 17 3 Enabling or Disabling the Alibre Vault You should plan to exclusively use either the Vault or the File System This ensures that your data is not duplicated From the Home wind
81. each piston subassembly is treated as a rigid body it is not possible to properly constrain them such that each piston is aligned with its respective cylinder and each connecting rod is aligned with the crankshaft This is because in order to completely satisfy the set of constraints the piston in the second subassembly must move relative to its connecting rod You can easily accomplish this by making the second subassembly flexible gt To make a subassembly flexible Right click the desired subassembly in the Design Explorer and click the Make Flexible toggle on the pop up menu Each part in the subassembly can now be constrained independent of the other parts in the subassembly In the example above it is now possible to properly locate each piston subassembly as shown here lig New Assembly 1 i Ep Redline Wiews My Section Views a Exploded Wiews Constraints e Align 1 Mate 1 y Align 5 y Align E y Align 8 y Align 3 Connecting Ao crankshaft lt 1 gt A Block lt 1 gt Anchored Al crankshatt lt 1 gt lil Piston Asmb lt 1 gt a Pistons 1 gt kg Rod Assy lt 1 gt El i LI 221 Chapter 11 Assembly Design You can again make a subassembly rigid by turning off its Make Flexible toggle Note You cannot use the Make Flexible command on any subassembly that contains a pattern 11 6 Checking for Interferences You can check for interferenc
82. fashion e Thin Wall Cut gt Sweep create a thin wall sweep cut feature which removes material as a profile is swept along a path e Chamfer gt Vertex create a vertex chamfer feature e Offset Face offset a face by a specified distance e Move Face move a face by a specified distance e Save Catalog Feature save a feature for use in other models 71 2 Feature Terminology 7 2 1 Feature Types Boss Boss features are used to create or add material in a part Generally the first feature you create in a part will be a boss feature Cut Cut features are used to remove material from a part You cannot create a successful cut feature until at least one boss feature has been created Note Most 3D features will be created from a sketch You can only use an individual sketch to create one feature Once a sketch is used to create a feature it will appear under that feature in the Design Explorer You cannot use it again unless you delete the 3D feature that is using it In the figure below Sketch lt 1 gt is used by Revolution lt 1 gt Sketch lt 2 gt is used by Extrusion lt 2 gt and Sketch lt 8 gt is unused Therefore only Sketch lt 8 gt is currently available for use in a new feature 71 3 Extrude Boss and Extrude Cut Although the extrude boss and extrude cut features are different in end result the steps used to create them are identical Extrude features also referred to as extrusions either create or remove mater
83. from the Basic colors area or create a Custom color Click OK and the preview will update to reflect your selection Click OK to close the Color dialog To add Opacity or Reflectivity slide the controls appropriately Less opacity will make the part appear transparent as glass or clear plastic More reflectivity will make the part appear shiny as metal or plastic Click OK to apply the settings 9 8 Using the Project to Sketch Tool You can create new sketch or reference figures automatically by projecting existing edges onto a sketch plane This function is useful when you are creating a new part or modifying an existing part in an assembly workspace You can project edges from other parts in the assembly to the sketch in order to reference them in the new part gt 1 To use Project to Sketch Select a sketch plane Enter sketch mode Select the Project to Sketch tool from the Sketching toolbar or from the Sketch menu select Project to Sketch The Project to Sketch dialog appears Project To Sketch Entities to project aaa Options Create sketch figure Create reference figure _ Maintain association to source entity Select the existing feature edges that you want to project to the sketch plane Note You can select all the edges on a face at once by selecting a face To create a new sketch figure select the Create sketch figure option To create a new reference figure select the Create refer
84. gt To dimension individual figures Follow the steps below to place length dimensions on lines and diameter dimensions on arcs and circles 1 Select the Dimension tool from the Sketching toolbar or from the Sketch menu select Dimension or right click in the work area and select Dimension from the pop up menu 2 Move the cursor over the figure you want to dimension The figure is highlighted 3 Click the figure to show a preview of the dimension Move the cursor to move the dimension preview Note You can press the Esc key on the keyboard to cancel the current dimension operation 4 After the dimension has been positioned properly click again A dimension control box appears 5 Enter the appropriate dimension value in the box and press Enter on the keyboard The dimension is defined Note You can enter fractions e g 3 8 and simple equations e g 1 5 3 into the dimension control box You can also enter a value with units other than the current display units e g 5 mm The value will be converted to the display units automatically Supported unit abbreviations are mm cm and m gt To dimension distances or angles between figures Follow the steps below to place distance dimensions or angular dimensions between figures e g between lines between nodes between arc or circle center nodes etc 1 Select the Dimension tool from the Sketching toolbar or from the Sketch menu select Dimension or right click i
85. how the tab and flange length are measured in the part 154 Chapter 8 Sheet Metal Feature Creation The new method of calculation will produce different dimension values than the old method when the following options are chosen If the Bend Angle is anything other than 90 degrees and the alignment type is Inside the length of the tab feature will be different If the Bend Angle is anything other than 90 degrees and the length type is Inside or Outside the length of the flange will be different Updating a model created in a previous version You can update a part that was originally created in a previous version so that all flanges in the model are calculated using the updated method To do this 1 From the File menu select Properties 2 Choose the Parameters tab Check the box that says Update all flanges in this part created in a version of Alibre Design prior to V9 1 3 Click Apply You will be notified that the dimensions of the part will be permanently changed Once you have converted a model it cannot be undone Here is an example of how the dimensions of the part will change Consider a 1 x 1 tab on one edge of which we are adding a flange of length 1 The options chosen are e Alignment type Inside e Length Type Outside The following figure shows the dimensions of the part before and after these changes have been implemented The updated method shows the correct dimensions of 1 0 for both the
86. is the same as the sheet scale To enlarge the detail view right click it and select Scale from the pop up menu Detail A Figure 94 Completed Detail View You can place dimensions on the detail view You can also change both the detail circle label and the detail note To change either double click the text or right click the text and select Edit from the pop up menu The Note dialog appears containing the original text Enter the new text and click OK Also in the Detailing tab of the Drawing Properties dialog you can pre define the border style and font used for detail circles and detail view labels When using a sketched circle for the detail view the leader line and annotation positions are determined by the last location of the mouse before finalizing the circle you sketched as the reference gt To change the detail location 1 Click the Select ls tool from the View toolbar if it is not already selected 2 Move the mouse pointer over the detail circle annotation The annotation is highlighted and the mouse pointer changes 3 Click and drag the detail circle annotation to the new location gt To change the detail area size 1 Click the Select ls tool from the View toolbar if it is not already selected 2 Move the cursor over the detail circle annotation The annotation is highlighted and the cursor changes 3 Double click the annotation The Detail View Annotation dialog appears and the circle center node is displa
87. line exists you can choose which one you want to use 7 Select the direction of the helix Clockwise or Counter Clockwise 8 If necessary click the Reverse checkbox to change the axial direction of the helix 9 From the Type pull down menu select the appropriate helix type e Height and Revolution a helix is generated by specifying the overall feature height as well as the number of helical revolutions within the specified height e Height and Pitch a helix is generated by specifying the overall feature height as well as pitch The pitch is defined as the distance from one point on the helix to a corresponding point on the next revolution measured parallel to the axis e Revolution and Pitch a helix is generated by specifying the number of revolutions as well the pitch e Spiral a flat helix is generated by specifying the number of revolutions as well as pitch 10 Specify the appropriate helix parameters height pitch revolutions depending on which type was selected Note that if Pitch is specified you can also specify Constant Variable Ratio and Variable End pitch conditions e Constant Lets you maintain a constant distance The ratio control is disabled e Variable End Specifies the pitch at the end of the helix e Variable Ratio Allows you to change the pitch from start to finish in a ratio such that pitch at the end will be ratio x start pitch 11 If applicable specify a Taper angle to create a tapere
88. lt 1 gt ell small bokt lt 2 gt 4mm ell small bot lt 4 gt 6 mm gt To unsuppress the part Right click the part in the Design Explorer and select Suppress again 11 3 13 Applying Color Properties to a Part You can apply different color properties to each part in an assembly gt To apply color properties to a part 1 Right click a part in the work area or Design Explorer 2 Select Color Properties 3 Select a color and set the Reflectivity and Opacity levels as necessary 4 Click OK OR 1 Select a part either in the Design Explorer or the work area 2 Select the Color Properties tool from the Part Modeling toolbar or right click in the work area and select Color Properties from the pop up menu or from the Edit menu select Color lt Part Name gt Properties The Color Properties dialog appears 3 Select acolor and set the Reflectivity and Opacity levels as necessary 212 Chapter 11 Assembly Design 4 Click OK to apply the properties Note You can apply the same color properties to the entire assembly Select the top level assembly in the Design Explorer or from the Edit menu select Select All Follow steps 1 4 above to apply the color properties 11 3 14 Checking Measurements You can check measurements on an individual part basis or the assembly basis gt To check part assembly measurements 1 Right click a part or assembly in the Design Explorer and select 3D Measurement Tool from the pop
89. metal part E Insert New Assembly Insert and begin designing a new assembly TE Insert Pattern pattern a part in the assembly Insert Duplicate insert a copy of a part in the assembly Edit Part Subassembly edit a part or subassembly Quick Constraint Mode drag and drop constraint placement El el 0 Insert Assembly Constraint manually insert an assembly constraint Move Part move an individual part or parts Rotate Part rotate an individual part or parts Precise Placement position a part precisely 204 Chapter 11 Assembly Design Minimum Motion use with Rotate or Move to localize motion to selected part Equation Editor Color Properties modify color properties of parts Regenerate update assembly constraints Manual Explode explode the parts manually Auto Explode allow the software to explode the parts automatically Expand Explosion increase the distance parts explode auto mode Contract Explosion decease the distance parts explode auto mode T lll View Part Trails show hide the trail lines Edit Exploded View Steps view edit exploded view steps In assembly workspaces the top level assembly is listed first in the Design Explorer Parts and subassemblies are listed at the bottom in the order in which they are inserted or created The assembly icon signifies an assembly or subassembly item The part icon signifies
90. node in it 4 2 Select the Loft Boss tool or Loft Cut E tool from the Part Modeling toolbar or from the Feature menu select Boss gt Loft or Cut gt Loft The Loft Boss or the Loft Cut dialog appears Loft Boss Cross Sections Sketch Face Specify Tangent Tangent Tangent Magnitude Angle li Sketch lt 3 gt fle Sketch lt 2 gt Guide Curves General Options DE Global Minimize twist Minimize curvature Simplify surface gt a am o cl ee Lonnect ends 111 112 Chapter 7 Feature Creation In the work area select the sketches or faces to use in the loft If you select inside the design explorer you must press Shift to select multiple sketches or faces As you make the selections the corresponding labels appear in the Cross Sections box The sketches faces must be listed in the order in which the loft will be created To remove a sketch or face from the box select it from the list and press Delete on the keyboard If desired check the Specify Tangent box next to a sketch or face When Specify Tangent is selected local control of surface directions in the vicinity of the lofted sketches faces is possible If Tangency Angle is O surface normals remain perpendicular to the sketch plane normal or parallel to the adjoining face normals If Specify Tangent is checked Tangent Angles can be specified for sketches but not faces Specify the desired angle in the Tangent
91. not drag items Instead you explicitly click the two items you want to constrain We will show this using the previous example gt To enter Quick Constraint mode 1 Press Ctrl Q or select the Quick Constraint tool Ky from the modeling toolbar The Quick Constraint button is depressed on the modeling toolbar and the dialog appears Assembly Constraints 2 Select the first item with a single click This can be a face edge axis plane or point The item you click will highlight In the example below we have clicked on the cylindrical face of the bolt Assembly Constraints 3 Click the second item This can also be a face edge axis plane or point The second item highlights as well and the constraint is previewed The dialog will now populate with options that are relevant to the two types of geometry that you are constraining In this case we can set an angle create an offset or flip the bolt in the other direction In this case we can see the bolt is facing in the wrong direction AAPP AP Assembly Constraints Barents Ts UV o o 216 Chapter 11 Assembly Design 4 Select the Flip button if necessary This flips the orientation of the parts Now our bolt is in the correct orientation Assembly Constraints 5 By choosing the different buttons on the toolbar you can switch the type of constraint In this case we can choose to make the two cylinders tangent parallel or at an angle
92. of simulation See Simulation Types and Parameters for more on Quasi Kinematic simulations You can use prescribed motions in Dynamic Simulations as well Specifying Harmonic Functions Various quantities in Alibre Motion including prescribed motions forces and torques may be specified as Harmonic or Sinusoidally varying functions of time This enables you to create back and forth motions for instance 325 General Motor Tongue Prescnbed Rotation C Constant torque r f Hanmoric bague Period 4 Frequency Limits are relative Upper limit ritial value Lower limit Initiale ipereasing To completely specify a Sinusoidal function three things must be known Chapter 16 Alibre Motion Period The Period is the time taken for one complete cycle You can enter the Period in seconds which is the time taken for one complete cycle or the Frequency in Hertz which is the number of cycles per second Entering one automatically calculates the other e Amplitude The Amplitude of a Sinusoidal function is defined as the difference between the mid point and one extreme or the other In most applications we know the range of motion or force required so Alibre Motion allows you to specify the Amplitude by entering the Upper and Lower limits Phase The Phase is most easily thought of as the position within a cycle In Math and Engineering Phase is usually specified in Radians or Degrees b
93. one or more control points by invoking the direct coordinate entry tool and keying in the X Y coordinates Double click or hit Escape to complete the spline curve Note By making the last control point to be the same as the first control point a closed B spline curve can be created Creation of NURBS curves by interpolation Using this method you first specify a set of interpolation points in the Work Area that define the B spline A curve is then interpolated through the interpolation points 34 Select the B spline by interpolation points menu select Figures gt Spline gt Create gt B spline by interpolation points tool from the Sketching toolbar or from the Sketch Click to start the spline curve Move the mouse pointer and click a second time to place an interpolation point Move the mouse pointer to shape the curve Continue clicking to place additional interpolation points Note One or more interpolation points may be specified via the direct coordinate entry tool Double click or hit escape to complete the spline curve Chapter 4 Sketching Constraining B spline curves The following constraints are supported on the B spline curve e Coincident constraint An existing reference point can be made coincident with a location on the B spline by either dragging it onto the B spline OR by using the sketch Coincident constraint tool Note A point coincident to a B spline is kept floating meaning that th
94. oooccccncnoooconnnnncncnnnonnnnnnnnnonononononanannnnnnnnns 206 TSZ ale o AAA eter Rieter e A rae ere 206 11 3 3 Inserting an Existing Design Into an Open ASSEMDI ccccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeesaaeeeeeeeas 206 11 3 4 Selecting Parts in the Assembies a a 207 116 5 Pan Display ODIOS sranie e O a 207 11 3 6 Inserting a Duplicate Design Into an Open Assembly occccccnnnncccccccccncnnononnnnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnanannannnnnnnnnnos 208 11 3 7 Inserting a Pattern of Parts in an Assembly ccccconnncccnnnncconnncoconnconoconoconnnconanonononnnnnonannnnonananenonens 208 T38 Moving and Rotating Pans re nea 210 11 3 9 Moving and Rotating Paris Precisely aisinn a aata eds 211 11 8 11 9 11 10 11 11 11 12 Drawings vi 12 1 12 2 12 3 11 3 10 Moving Parts to Simulate Assembly Physical Motion o cccccocccnncccconcnncononncnnonnnnnonnnnnnnanennnnnos 211 A o a Pansare O wae te et encenldsomatess a EEA e aE G 212 TSA SUPPEN ARa en a a a eae sees iaee eae ea 212 11313 Applying Color Properties to a Patere a a a E a Aa N 212 3 14 MECKING Measurements asi A ANI 213 11 3 15 Viewing Part Reference Geometry ooocccccccccccocnnncconnnononononcnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnanenoss 213 Assembly Constraints los oido iia 213 idol ASSembly Constraint TYPES seana a id ee oe tie ines 213 11 4 2 Inserting Assembly Constraints Quick Constraint Mode oocccccnccccccconccnnn
95. options in the Trace Options dialog Current Values gt 1 To see the current values of a Trace You must have created a trace for a moving part or constraint and have traces enabled In the Motion Explorer expand the Traces category You will see each of the moving parts or constraints that you for which you created a trace Right click on one of the parts or constraints and select Current Values The Data dialog appears Mecsacmons is Tides S bae 1 lt gt Poston clocity A Acos erat on E E EEs 1Ii7ri Delete irate This dialog shows the current values of any measurable quantity at the current frame You cannot change any values here and no selections you make reset the current simulation Notes Position data is shown relative to the Assembly origin The position velocity and acceleration data shown for a Part is the data for its Center of Mass CG e Frame Shows the current playback frame at which the measurements are taken Data type select the type of data you are interested in The selections in this drop down will vary depending on the item for which data is being shown When you make a different selection the relevant data is shown immediately e X Y Z The data is shown as components parallel to the major axes of the Assembly design in the X Y Z boxes e Magnitude The total magnitude is shown in the Magnitude box 339 Chapter 16 Alibre Motion 16 7 2 Generating
96. select a sketch plane before you entered sketch mode you will need to select a sketch plane after entering sketch mode before you can begin sketching If you have your cursor hints turned on Tools gt Options gt General tab you will be prompted by the cursor hint to select a sketch plane You can select the sketch plane from the Design Explorer or in the work area Once you select the sketch plane all of the available sketching tools will become active The Activate Sketch tool on the Sketching toolbar will always appear in the active state while in sketch mode 4 2 2 Exiting Sketch Mode gt To exit sketch mode You can use any of the methods listed for entering sketch mode by deselecting the chosen option or use one of the following methods as well e Select the Exit button from the sketch mode overlay Refer to Sketch Mode Overlay on page 27 for details e Choose the Select tool from the View toolbar e Create a feature from the sketched profile For example select a feature tool such as the Extrude Boss tool from the Part Modeling toolbar e Select the Regenerate 4 key on the keyboard tool from the Part Modeling toolbar or from the Feature menu select Regenerate All or press the F5 4 2 3 Sketch Mode Overlay When you enter sketch mode an overlay will appear at the top of the work area This overlay gives you quick access to grid options the analyze sketch function and the ability to create multiple sketches wi
97. steps 2 6 on the Feature Relative tab if you want to specify a stacked feature control frame This allows you to see a different symbol for each row If you want a composite tolerance instead one symbol shared across rows check the Composite Tolerance checkbox Select the Projected Tolerance option if required and specify the Height of the projected tolerance zone Select the Standard that you want to use for the tolerance symbol Alibre Design supports ANSI Y14 5 M 1982 and 1994 The preview shows the symbol for the selected standard Select the Between Points option to call out a tolerance between two points Enter labels for the two points Select the Show option to include a leader the Bent option if desired and select an Arrow type Select Smart Anchor if necessary Move the mouse in the work area A preview of the annotation appears attached to the mouse pointer Left click once to place the leader line Left click again to place the annotation The text appears in light blue Click Apply to accept the annotation placement or you can double click The dialog remains open so you can continue to place additional annotations Before choosing Apply you can reposition the annotation while it is light blue in color To do this left click on the leader line or the text whichever you want to move and release the mouse button Move the mouse to reposition Left click again to place it 217 Chapter 12 Drawings 15 Click Close to
98. the order it was created Design Explorer 12 Configurations a Axes Planes a Points od Surfaces ES Redline Views 23 Section Views a Features fl Sketch lt 13 fo Sketch lt 2s fo Sketch lt 33 kg Edges hg Faces Wa Vertices Chapter 4 Sketching 4 10 1 Editing Sketches Sketches can be edited at anytime gt To edit a sketch 1 You can get into edit mode for a sketch in one of the following ways e In the Design Explorer right click the sketch name and select Edit from the pop up menu In the Design Explorer double click the sketch name e Double click a sketch in the work area if it has not been used to create a feature e If the sketch has been used to create a 3D feature double click the feature in the work area to edit the sketch used for that feature 2 The sketch appears in sketch mode and you can make the appropriate modifications to the sketch and exit sketch mode to apply the changes 4 10 2 Renaming Sketches Sketches are listed in the Design Explorer by default as Sketch lt 1 gt Sketch lt 2 gt etc You can rename the sketches to provide relevant information gt To rename a sketch 1 Inthe Design Explorer right click the sketch name and select Rename from the pop up menu or click the sketch name twice with a slight pause between the first and second click The sketch name is highlighted and can be changed 2 Type in the new sketch name 3 Press Enter on the keybo
99. the Body Text section press CTRL Enter on your keyboard Click Next In the Page Layout section select the page layout to which you want to publish If you chose the Image with Text template or the Text Only template check the Put my logo on the top right corner to include an image in the PDF then click Browse to find and select the image In Save Location browse to the location where you want to save the PDF file Note If you choose to save to an existing file after clicking Publish you will be prompted to choose if you want to overwrite the existing file or add the published page to the existing file at the end as an additional page Choose Preview if you would like to view the PDF file before saving it This creates a temporary file that is deleted if you do not publish the file Click Publish The PDF file will be created and saved to the location you specified gt To create a PDF file of a 2D drawing Notes You must have installed PDFCreator during the installation of Alibre Design You must have Full Publishing capability PDFCreator cannot be installed on the Vista operating system From the File menu select Publish to PDF or select the Publish to Acrobat PDF tool from the PDF Publishing toolbar The PDF Publishing Wizard opens and the BOM Drawing tab is active The Drawing Template option is selected Click Next If you want to add a header select the Title tab and enter a title Click the Fon
100. the Configurations tree with an X over the icon e No configuration is marked as active all configuration icons are in the inactive state e No representation of the component with the missing configuration is shown in the work area W Lonstraints a Holders Short Lead 4nchored EB Configurations E medium test contig ES Large E Small rs Constraints kg Edges h Faces Note If a configuration is missing from a component in a subassembly of the root assembly only the first indicator listed above will be seen for that component the component name will appear dimmed and will have a question mark over the icon No Configurations tree will appear under the component 10 3 3 Using Configurations in Assembly Patterns Inserting a part or subassembly pattern of a model with multiple configurations When you insert a part subassembly pattern in an assembly workspace the configuration of all instances of the pattern will match the configuration of the seed the original instance at the time of creation Constraints Female Connectors 1 gt Small Female Connectors Small Female Connector 3 Small Female Connectors 4 Small Figure 79 Design Explorer Showing Pattern as Created Figure 80 Pattern displayed in the work area all instances are the same configuration Once the pattern has been created you can change any of the instances individually to a different configuration 196 Chapter 10 Design Confi
101. the File menu select Publish to PDF or select the Publish to Acrobat PDF tool from the PDF Publishing toolbar The PDF Publishing Wizard opens and the 3D Model tab is active 2 Select a template to use See PDF Publishing Templates on page 179 for more information 3 Click Next 4 Ifyou chose one of the templates that includes exploded view steps a In Publish State choose to publish in Exploded or Unexploded State This will determine which state the model is displayed in the PDF b Check the Include Explosion steps and descriptions box if you would like to include the steps in the PDF Click the Font button A A if you would like to change the font of the exploded view steps in the PDF The text PDF Publishing will update to reflect the new font c Click Next 5 If you want to add a header select the Title tab and enter a title Click the Font button to change the font of the Title Tip The Title can be one line only and the text will not wrap 6 If you want to add a footer select the Footer tab and enter a footer Click the Font button 2 to change the font of the Footer Tip The Footer can be one line only and the text will not wrap 7 Click Next 8 Check the Views you want to include in your PDF if any The default view the state the model was in at the time you began the publishing process is always included 9 Click Next 10 In the Page Layout section select the page layout to whic
102. the callout balloon and click to place it To turn the dialog option back on from the Tools menu select Options In the General tab select the Show dialog when inserting callouts option You cannot copy and paste BOM callouts 289 Chapter 13 Bills of Material 13 4 Working in a BOM Workspace All work related to creating or editing a BOM is performed in a BOM workspace The BOM workspace displays the bill of material data in tabular format similar to a spreadsheet E assembly Alibre Design 2 5 3 ol x File Edit View Format Data Tools Team Design Window Help ie ar Ml o Bs Zl A ltem Number Part Number Quantity Part Name Part Number Quantity Part Name az 1 part PERE partii parts partis parti parta part part4 partio parti parti parta ow Oo a A eA HoH ho ESO so 5 6 SSI 8 s w mo 13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 al 1 1 1 1 In a BOM workspace you can e Add delete rows amp columns e Resize rows amp columns e Hide rows e Change data and header font properties e Automatically re sequence data e Override design values e Set column header and data alignment e Print BOM data e Export BOM data to a CSV file e Append add rows e Organize data by dragging and dropping columns and rows e Change the table display orientation e Sort data in ascending or descending order e Control how a BOM will be displayed in a drawing 290 Chap
103. the design The design does not need to be open in order to update the table You cannot update the BOM when it is being edited within the context of the drawing gt To update the table From the Data menu select Update Table Or Select the Update Table tool from the Edit toolbar The table is updated to reflect any recent changes made in the design 297 Chapter 13 Bills of Material 13 4 14 Exporting a BOM You can export a BOM table as a csv file You can open csv files in any spreadsheet application or text editor gt To export a BOM 1 Select the Export File tool from the Standard toolbar or from the File menu select Export The Export File dialog appears 2 Select the Save in location 3 Specify a File name 4 Select a Save as type 5 Click Save 13 4 15 Printing a BOM You can print a BOM table by itself directly from the BOM workspace gt To print a BOM table 1 From the File menu select Print The Print dialog appears 2 Select the appropriate printer 3 Specify the print layout 298 Chapter 14 Opening and Saving CHAPTER 14 Opening and Saving In Alibre Design you can utilize the File System or the Alibre Vault if you are licensed for it to quickly open and save files In This Chapter OpenId AMES ola esa 299 A A A o temas oe ead eto g eee eer aear E eee eee ene 300 14 1 Opening Files Alibre Design uses standard Windows dialogs for opening Alibre Design files
104. the design icon in the Design Explorer as illustrated below RR Extrumans ee Common causes of feature generation failure include e The sketch used to define the feature profile contains open or overlapping figures e g an extrude boss feature fails if the profile sketch contains any open ends Improperly specifying the feature parameters e g interchanging the path sketch and profile sketch involved in a sweep boss Modifying an upstream feature causes a downstream feature to fail gt To troubleshoot a failed feature e Right click the feature and select Status from the pop up menu A dialog appears containing information related to the cause of the feature failure Right click the feature and select Edit The feature properties dialog appears Modify the conditions if applicable If the failure is a result of an incorrect sketch edit the sketch and correct accordingly 9 10 10 Viewing Constituents You can view the constituents of Alibre Design Parts Sheet metal Parts Assemblies Drawings and Bills of Material gt To view constituents in the Windows File System 1 In the Alibre Design Home Window from the Tools menu select Show Constituents The Show Constituents dialog appears 2 Browse to locate the item in the dialog 3 Click Open The Constituents dialog appears showing all items that are related to the selected item Or 4 Inthe Windows File System right click an Alibre Design file
105. the plane in the opposite direction Click OK to create the plane 5 1 4 Parallel Plane through a Point You can create a plane parallel to an existing reference plane or planar face through an existing point gt To create a parallel plane through a point Select the Insert Plane 55 tool from the Inspection toolbar or from the Insert menu select Plane or right click in the work area and select Insert Plane from the pop up menu The Insert Plane dialog appears Select an existing reference plane or planar face Select an existing reference point A preview of the new plane is displayed Click OK to create the plane 5 1 5 Plane at Line and Point You can create a plane through an edge or axis and a point or vertex gt To create a plane through a line and point Select the Insert Plane E tool from the Inspection toolbar or from the Insert menu select Plane or right click in the work area and select Insert Plane from the pop up menu The Insert Plane dialog appears Select an existing axis or edge Select an existing reference point or vertex A preview of the new plane is displayed Select the Containing Edge Axis option to create the plane through both the point and the axis edge Select the Normal to Edge Axis option to create the plane through the point and normal to the axis edge Click OK to create the plane 17 Chapter 5 Reference Geometry 5 1 6 Three Point Plane You can create a plane through
106. the polygon and drag the polygon to a new location Or Choose the Select tool from the Sketching toolbar 2 Select the entire polygon by dragging a selection rectangle around it 3 Hold the Shift key click and hold the mouse button and drag the polygon 4 Release the mouse button 4 4 9 Sketch Shapes You can create a variety of standard shapes in Alibre Design Each of these shapes can be placed alone or in a standard pattern Sketch Shapes are particularly useful for creating hole patterns with a large number of instances Using the Sketch Shapes tool to create a pattern and then creating one extruded cut requires less regeneration time than creating a cut and then patterning the cut figure for example Each Sketch Shape or Sketch Shape pattern is treated as a single entity Sketch Shapes can not be trimmed or extended and other sketch entities can not be trimmed or extended to them Sketch shapes can not be filleted or chamfered Dimensions can only be applied to the nodes that are automatically placed with each sketch shape These nodes are typically placed in the center of each instance as well as the First Shape Anchor if it is not in the center 38 Chapter 4 Sketching Standard Shapes Available Round Square Obround Rectangle Rectangle with R Corner Single D Double D These shapes are available from the Sketch menu as well as on the Sketching Toolbar e From the fly out menu on the Sketching Toolbar 39
107. to each other 6 When satisfied with the constraint click the check mark Or select Cancel to exit out without committing the constraint Note After you are satisfied with the preview you can immediately begin clicking on new items to constrain When you click on a new item while a previous constraint is being previewed the previewed constraint becomes committed and you can continue making new constraints Using this method you can very quickly apply constraints without needing to explicitly apply each one 11 4 3 Inserting Assembly Constraints Manual Method gt To insert assembly constraints 1 Click the Insert Assembly Constraint L tool from the Assembly Modeling toolbar or right click in the work area and select Insert Assembly Constraint from the pop up menu or from the Insert menu select Assembly Constraint The Assembly Constraints dialog appears Assembly Constraints Items to constrain Displacer Con Rod 5addle Face lt 14 gt Displacer Con Rod Faces 35 gt C Mate Tangent Inside Preview Align Tangent Outside Orient Offset Orde 5m S0 Label sw J _ cose 0 2 Select the first edge face plane or axis The selected item is highlighted in the work area and is listed in the Surfaces to constrain area 3 Select the second edge face plane or axis The selected item is highlighted in the work area and is listed below the first selection in the Surfaces to constrain area Note
108. training materials and other optional components 2 2 Tutorials Alibre Design tutorials are integrated with the application To access the tutorials press F1 to open the Help system then select the Tutorials book We strongly recommend that you work through these included tutorials Working through them will give you a good understanding of the basic modeling terms and concepts used in Alibre Design You will also become familiar with 3D viewing techniques in Alibre Design Ei Alibre Design Help It Contents Index J Search El Glossary Welcome to Alibre Design New in Alibre Design 11 0 Upgrading from Alibre Design Xpres 2 Help nro AA Figure 2 Tutorials 2 3 The Home Window Alibre Design is comprised of four main components the Home window Design Workspaces Drawing Workspaces and BOM Workspaces Each component opens in a separate window that you can independently resize position or tile Chapter 2 Getting Started With Alibre Design When you launch Alibre Design the Home window appears first and is always open while Alibre Design is running The Home window serves as the starting point for all other areas of Alibre Design Home Alibre Design Expert Seles File Tools Window Help Figure 3 Alibre Design Home Window 2 3 1 System Options A number of system options can be set and modified from the Home window From the Tools menu select Options The Options dialog appears Options General
109. up menu Or Select a part in the Design Explorer or work area right click and select Properties from the pop up menu The Measurement Tool dialog appears and lists the physical properties for the selection 2 Click Close on the dialog when finished viewing the properties 11 3 15 Viewing Part Reference Geometry You can view the reference geometry of a part while in an assembly These features can then be used to constrain the part to the assembly if desired gt To view part reference geometry 1 Right click the part in the Design Explorer or the work area 2 Choose Show Reference Geometry The part reference features will appear in the design explorer and in the model window gt To hide part reference geometry 1 Right click the part in the Design Explorer or the work area 2 Choose Show Reference Geometry This will be checked if reference geometry is shown Choosing it again will uncheck the option hiding the reference geometry 11 4 Assembly Constraints You can insert assembly constraints to precisely position and mate parts with respect to each other in an assembly Assembly constraints also dictate how parts move or rotate with respect to other parts A part is initially unconstrained and has six degrees of freedom when first inserted into an assembly You can move or rotate an unconstrained part in any direction As you place assembly constraints on a part the degrees of freedom are reduced and you begin to limi
110. view to the work area double click a named view or select a named view and click Set You can also add a custom view orientation by clicking Add and subsequently entering a view name 3 1 7 Design Explorer As previously described each workspace consists of the work area and the Design Explorer The Design Explorer s primary purpose is to track and list the structure of a part assembly or drawing However the Design Explorer can be used to accomplish numerous tasks Use the Design Explorer to Design Explorer 4 Water Feed Block E Configurations P H Confia lt 1 gt e Select items in the design by name a Axes f S Planes e Suppress or hide selected features and parts W Points oo Surfaces e Suppress or hide planes and axes 29 Redline Views B Section Views e Temporarily roll the model or assembly back to an a oe US earlier state double click a feature or part in the Ee Design Explorer or use the rollback bar q Extrusion lt 3 gt Y Extrusion lt 4 gt Identify and change the order in which features are q Extrusion lt 5 gt regenerated Y Extrusion lt 6 gt Y Extrusion lt 7 gt e Rename features right click a feature and select A Eanach Y Extrusion lt 9 gt Rename Fillet lt 10 gt 0 Mirror lt 11 gt e Delete features and parts NA Extrusion lt 12 gt Q Extrusion lt 13 gt e Toggle the display of section views on and off GQ Extrusion lt 14 gt 7 Axis lt 15 gt e Edit sketches
111. will have one page which shows the sheet that was active when the publishing process was started Chapter 9 Working with Parts Templates available when creating a PDF from a BOM Workspace Bill of Material The published PDF file will have one page which shows Bill of Material 9 10 4 Viewing Published PDF Files After you have published a PDF file you can view the PDF using the Adobe Reader version 7 0 8 or higher gt To view a published PDF file 1 Ensure that you have installed Adobe Reader 2 Browse to the location where you saved the file 3 Double click the file and it will open in the Adobe Reader gt To view any additional views included in the file Not all files will include additional views The views must have been selected during the publishing process 1 Ensure that you have installed Adobe Reader Must be version 7 0 8 or higher 2 Browse to the location where you saved the file 3 Double click the file and it will open in the Adobe Reader 4 Left click once on the image of the model Or Right click the image of the model and choose Enable 3D 5 From the Views drop down list select the view you want Note You can also select the Model Tree tab to see a list of all of the published views gt To view the explosion animation of an assembly Not all files will have the explode animation The file must have been published that way originally This capability is available with the Full
112. y Mate 3 A Displacer Con Rod lt 1 gt 4nchored B Configurations Bl Configs 1 gt 4g Constraints e Align 3 kaj Displacer Con Rod Saddle Face lt 5 gt kj Displacer Con Rod Facex lt 9 gt e Align 4 ka Displacer Con Rod S5addle Face lt b gt ka Displacer Con Riod Face lt 28 gt E ay Mate 1 E e Align 5 e Align 6 k Edges hi Faces Displacer Con Rod Saddle lt 1 gt Individual part with all Y constraints listed Figure 86 Design Explorer Showing Constraints Listed Under Constraints Node and Individual Components If you move the cursor over a constraint or select a constraint in the Design Explorer the applicable entities will highlight in the work area gt To change how constraints are viewed 1 From the View menu select Assembly Constraints 2 Check As List to see the constraints listed in the Design Explorer under the Constraints node This is a toggle on off option 3 Check With Component to see the constraints listed under the parts to which they relate This is a toggle on off option Both options can be checked at the same time allowing the constraints to be shown in both locations in the design explorer gt To change a constraint s properties You can change constraint properties such as offset distance or angle after a constraint has been applied 1 Right click the constraint in the Design Explorer and select Edit from the pop up menu The Assembly Constraints dialog appears
113. you initially want to create in the drawing You can insert additional standard views later as necessary Standard Views Creation Design designengr motion tutorial actuator_1 v Configurations o Exploded Views default v Front View View Selections di 9 m e H oje m gt Front Right Include design dimensions Scale 1 C Use sheet scale _x_J tna 0 gt To insert the standard views 1 A preview of the selected part or assembly is shown in the Front View preview window To select a different part click the Browse button to make a new selection 2 Select the view that you want to use as the Front View in the drawing You can use the arrow buttons to reorient the view in the preview window 08 You can also click the Workspace Orientation button to select from default and custom views created in the part or assembly workspace 3 Inthe View Selections area select the views that you want to insert into the drawing The default views are Front Top and Right To add or remove a view click the view s corresponding button View Selections Top Front Right 234 Chapter 12 Drawings If multiple configurations of the design exist select the one you want to use for these views from the Configurations list In the case of assemblies if any exploded views were created in the assembly workspace you can also select an exploded view from the Exploded Views list To see all of t
114. 1 Move the cursor over the cosmetic thread symbol The cursor changes and displays the annotation symbol 2 Right click the cosmetic thread and select Delete from the pop up menu Changing the appearance of cosmetic threads You can change the appearance of internal and external cosmetic threads gt To change the global thread appearance 1 Select the File gt Properties gt Threads tab 0 Drawing Properties M intemal Threads AA DASHED Dash DASHED Dash Empty Angle Start Angle Empty Angle LS D p e DASHED Dash w DASHED Dash F Figure 97 Drawing Properties Dialog Threads Tab 2 Set the layer styles you want for the components of the internal and external threads 3 Set the size of the empty angle you want as well as the starting location for the empty portion of the head on view by setting the Start Angle and Empty Angle 4 Set whether or not you want external thread run outs to be shown 273 Chapter 12 Drawings gt To change individual thread appearance 1 Right click on any cosmetic thread 2 Select Edit A dialog displays allowing you to override the global style shown above The dialog will be identical to the internal thread or external thread portion of the dialog pictures shown previously depending on the type of thread you are editing 12 6 3 Datums In part or assembly workspaces you can attach datum annotations to faces of models but not to v
115. 10 Suppressing a Part 212 Suppressing Features in Parts 160 Surface Finish Symbol 278 Surface finish symbols 278 Surfaces 81 inserting 81 positioning 82 thickening 83 Sweep boss 113 Sweep Boss and Sweep Cut 113 Sweep Boss and Sweep Cut Features 114 Sweep cut 113 System options 7 System Options 7 System Requirements 1 T Tab 152 Tab feature 152 Tangent Plane 76 Text notes 270 The 3D Sketching Interface 87 The Alibre Motion User Interface 315 The Alibre Vault by M Files 299 302 347 The Assembly Design Interface 203 The Home Window 6 The Interferences Dialog 344 The Main Alibre Motion Menu 315 The Part Modeling Interface 102 The Sheet Metal Part Modeling Interface 150 The Sketch Grid 66 99 The Sketching Interface 25 Thickening Reference Surfaces 83 Thin Wall Boss Sweep and Cut Sweep Features 115 Thin wall features extrude boss and cut 106 revolve boss and cut 110 sweep boss and cut 115 Thin Wall Revolve Boss and Cut Features 110 Threads and Callouts 127 271 Threads Hole features threads 123 Three Point Plane 78 Through All 104 Tips for Successful Direct Editing 146 To Depth 104 To Geometry 104 To Next 104 Toolbars 12 13 19 Topology Patterns 132 Topology Patterns vs Feature Patterns 132 Traces Visualizing Paths and Vectors 337 Trimming 47 Trimming a Solid 83 Index Trimming Figures 47 Workspace Terms
116. 10 3 Creating Version Labels With the Vault you can create Version Labels for your versions Version Labels are useful for marking milestones in an item s creation For example you can have standard version labels such as Meets Export Restrictions Initial Concept or Final Build The label will be displayed under Version Label in the Version History window as well as in the item s Property Display area directly in the Vault interface gt To assign a label 1 Open the Vault interface and find the item for which you want to create a label 2 Right click the item and select History or press Ctrl H All of the items versions are shown 397 Chapter 17 The Alibre Vault by M Files Select the version of the item for which you want to create a label Click Add Label to This Version Select the Version Label you want from the drop down You can also add a new version label to the list by clicking the small arrow next to the field and selecting Add New Value to List By default no labels are assigned to any version If you want the selected label to be cleared from the other versions too check the Clear this version label from the other versions of the object box This is useful when for example you want only one version of a contract to be labeled as approved The version label is visible from within the History dialog or on the item s property display area near the bottom of the Vault interface Recently Modified by
117. Alibre Design We welcome you to the ever growing community of designers who have discovered the high value of Alibre Design s feature rich modeling capability Alibre Design is easily installed on your computer Use these directions to get up and running in a matter of minutes In This Chapter A o E 1 CEPA seq sae cerseace secon jack tects aeecsamacetee cen secon amsce teeameaeeatamacec sosas aceanamace ET Op aii a le HaStallitiGe Aline DSS IGM enasna A aa Umins ta llinG Alibre Dear Ade 1 1 System Requirements The following requirements must be met to install and run Alibre Design Supported Operating Systems e Windows XP Professional or Home Edition e Windows Vista Business Home or Ultimate Unsupported Operating Systems e Windows XP Starter Edition e Windows NT e Windows Me e Windows 98 Other Operating Systems e Windows XP x64 Windows Vista x64 e Windows 2000 Server 2003 Occasionally some display related issues may occur depending on the system setup However Alibre Design does work on these operating systems Please contact support if you have having issues Alibre Design may function on these operating systems however it has not been tested It is strongly recommended to move to one of the supported operating systems Software Requirements Internet Explorer 6 0 or later e NET 2 0 Framework part of the installation process e Jf Redistributable part of the installation process Note Alibre
118. Angle field In this case the lofted surface tangent would be at the angle specified with the sketch plane normal If Specify Tangent is checked additional control is obtained using the Tangent Magnitude for each Cross Section Tangent Magnitudes control the rate at which surfaces diverge from the cross section sketch planes or faces As Tangent Magnitudes increase surfaces diverge more slowly from surface tangents at the sketch cross sections Specify the desired value in the Tangent Magnitude field A value of 0 is equivalent to not using Specify Tangent If desired Guide curves can be specified to constrain the location or direction of the lofted surface that is generated To specify Guide curves check the Guide Curves checkbox and select the sketches in the work area 2D and 3D sketches may be used but you cannot use guide curves if you are using a face as one of your cross sections Tip When you are active in 3D sketch mode you can constrain sketch figures to other existing sketches This is particularly helpful when you are sketching guide curves for lofts to ensure that your guide curves touch each profile used in the loft Guide curves are each exactly one open or closed loop each touching all the profiles Multiple guide curves can be used for Global and Local types however for the Tangent type only one guide curve should be specified As each curve is selected the corresponding labels appear in the Guide Curves list box T
119. Block Information on page 267 for additional information 9 Save the custom template as a drawing see Saving and Using a Custom Template as a Drawing on page 266 or as a symbol see Saving and Using a Custom Template as a Symbol on page 267 265 Chapter 12 Drawings 12 5 2 Customizing an Existing Template To customize an existing template Open a new drawing workspace The New Sheet Properties dialog appears Select the Template option and select a template from the list To open a custom template not listed click Browse and select the template from the Custom Drawing Template dialog Note If you have previously browsed to another template folder you can use the Default button to reset the template list back to the system template folder Click OK in the Sheet Properties dialog If the Fill ln Text dialog appears complete any applicable fields Click OK when finished with the Fill In Text dialog The Insert Design dialog appears Click Cancel Right click the sheet in the Drawing Explorer and select Activate Sketch on Sheet from the pop up menu Move the mouse pointer over the drawing border The border is highlighted Right click and select Explode Symbol from the pop up menu The template is exploded into individual segments Make the necessary changes to the template From the Sketch menu select Activate Sketch to leave the sketch mode Save the custom template as a drawing see Saving and Using a Custom Temp
120. Depending on whether or not you are using the Vault you may need to navigate to the Vault drive to find your files through this dialog See The Alibre Vault by M Files on page 347 for details on how to enable the Vault within Alibre Design 14 1 1 Opening Files from the File System gt To open any Alibre Design File You can do any of the following e From any workspace select File gt Open and browse to find your file e Select the Open icon in any workspace e Select the Open icon on the Home Window Note You can also browse to your files through Windows Explorer and double click them to open them in Alibre Design 14 1 2 Opening Files from the Alibre Vault You can access the Alibre Vault in several ways gt To open any Alibre Design File from within Alibre Design e From any workspace select File gt Open and browse to your Alibre Vault drive usually M by default e Select the Open a icon in any workspace e Select the Open icon on the Home Window E gt Navigate to the Alibre Vault using Windows Explorer 1 Go to My Computer and select the M Files drive usually M Or select the M icon at the bottom right of the screen in the System Tray 2 Select the Alibre Vault 3 Browse to your files using the search filter or View filters 299 Chapter 14 Opening and Saving 14 2 Saving Files The act of saving can have slightly different behavior depending on exactly what you are doing and
121. Design is only compatible with J 2 0 If J Second Edition is installed it will need to be uninstalled before Alibre Design can be used During the installation process of Alibre Design 11 0 J 2 0 will be installed automatically Microsoft DirectX 9 0c Chapter 1 Installation Minimum Hardware Requirements Intel Pentium or equivalent processor 2 GHZ or faster RAM 1 2 GB 1024 x 786 minimum screen resolution 1280 x 1024 or greater recommended 64 MB or higher video card with DirectX 9 0c Color 32 bit Hard Disk Space 500 MB Virtual Memory 1 GB CD ROM drive Mouse or pointing device Additional Recommendations for assemblies of 500 or more parts Intel Pentium or equivalent processor 3 GHZ or faster RAM 2 GB or more Virtual Memory 2 GB Recommended changes for Windows Vista Intel Pentium or equivalent processor 3 GHZ or faster RAM 2 GB or more Video Card 128 MB RAM or higher Color 32 bit 1 2 Onthe DVD The following items are on the installation DVD Alibre Design 11 0 Alibre Design Help Alibre PhotoRender DirectX 9 0c Internet Explorer 6 0 ALGOR DesignCheck Alibre Part Library Alibre CAM Alibre Motion Machinist Toolbox Engineers Toolbox Alibre Vault by M Files TraceParts Access Instructions 1 3 Installing Alibre Design The Alibre Design Installer is available on the installation DVD as well as from the Alibre website To download the Alibre Design installer from the website Sig
122. Direction option to create the offset in the opposite direction 5 Select a Gap Type the default is Natural Original sketch Figure 15 Original Sketch Example Natural Extends the edges of the wall along their natural curves until they intersect Original sketch Figure 16 Result Using Natural Gap Type 49 Chapter 4 Sketching Round Creates fillets on any corners of the wall profile Original sketch Figure 17 Result Using Round Gap Type Extend Extends the edges of the wall beyond their endpoints in straight lines until they intersect Original sketch Figure 18 Result Using Extend Gap Type 6 Click OK to create the offset figure s The new figures are created and become part of the sketch 50 Chapter 4 Sketching 4 6 6 Mirroring Figures You can use the Mirror tool to create copies of figures mirrored about another reference line or figure A Symmetric constraint is automatically applied between the original figure and the mirror figure If you change the original figure the mirrored figure will also change gt To mirror a sketch figure Select the Mirror tool from the Sketching toolbar The Mirror Figure dialog appears Select the figure s to mirror either one at a time or drag a selection rectangle around all figures The figure name s appears in the Figures to mirror section of the dialog Select the Mirror Axis to mirror the figure about The mirror axis can be either a r
123. Display Select Language English United States Default workspace on startup None Vault I Alibre Vault Detected Select Vault Alibre Vault ki Do not check for license updates on Startup Figure 4 System Options Dialog General tab The General tab allows you to specify the language you are using which type of workspace opens by default on startup you can select None so that no workspaces automatically open upon launching the software and your Alibre Vault settings if the Vault is installed and you are licensed for it Also you can change the startup options for checking for software updates and you can choose to have Alibre Design remember your password Display tab Under the Display tab you can check your graphics settings by selecting the Settings button Chapter 2 Getting Started With Alibre Design 2 4 Workspaces Before proceeding further in this User Guide we strongly recommend that you work through two of the basic Part Design tutorials Introduction to Sketching and Constraints and Modeling a Simple Part found in the Help system Working through these tutorials will give you a good understanding of the basic modeling terms and concepts used in Alibre Design You will also become familiar with 3D viewing techniques in Alibre Design By completing these tutorials now you will be better prepared for the material in the subsequent sections All design related tasks are carried out in window
124. EU Precision 3 Ww Mass Unit Kilograms w Mass MIM Figure 5 Design Properties Dialog The General Tab is used to fill in product or design data This data can be used to automatically populate title blocks or BOMs The Units tab is employed to set all design units and associated display format and precision Several other unit display settings are also available The Dimension tab is used to control dimension properties such as size dimension orientation and spacing and arrowhead style The Material tab is used to set the density of the part material This information is used when calculating physical properties of the part Chapter 2 Getting Started With Alibre Design The Display tab is used to control the graphics display In the Display Acceleration field you can set the options you want to use when in Display Acceleration mode in parts and assemblies Please see the Display Acceleration on page 183 section for more detail e The Curve Smoothness setting is applied on this tab to set the precision of the graphic display This does not affect the precision of the model only the display of the model on your screen Lower values will make circular items appear coarse but performance will improve Large values improve the visual appearance but can slow down performance Reasonable settings for this are usually between 30 and 50 The Apply Options tab is used to apply Design Properties settings on a system wide
125. Feature Patterns except that you do not have to have a feature to use them Topology Patterns can be used to make copies of existing geometry such as faces and edges They are particularly useful when you are working with an imported model that does not have a feature history Note You can pattern entire features using the Topology Pattern functionality but it is better design practice to use Feature Patterns for that purpose Also it is important to remember that the entire created pattern must be on the same face as the original geometry or an invalid body will result Topology Patterns vs Feature Patterns Feature Patterns and Topology Patterns will often provide similar results However the inputs for each type of pattern are different as are the outcomes they can provide Feature Patterns are used to pattern complete features which means there must be a feature history in the Design Explorer Models that are imported into Alibre Design do not have a feature history Topology Patterns can be used to pattern actual geometry and do not require a feature so they can be used on imported parts more easily Most of the time you will use Feature Patterns If you find that you can not accomplish your design goals with a Feature Pattern try using a Topology Pattern 132 Ghapter7 FeatureCreation 00 Pattern Inputs Feature Patterns require you to tell Alibre Design which features you want to pattern You must pattern complete features
126. From the Feature menu select Flange or select the Flange tool from the Sheet Metal Modeling toolbar The flange dialog appears On the Main Tab a In Edge click the edge on the existing tab to which the flange will be attached In Alignment choose the inside the tab wall outside the tab wall or adjacent to the tab wall condition Check the Trim Side Bends option if needed The following figures illustrate the difference in each of the alignment options The solid line represents the sketch plane from which the flange is created and the angle of the sketch plane represented by the solid line here is determined by the Bend Angle option described in step 7 Chapter 8 Sheet Metal Feature Creation Note Trim Side Bends can be checked only when the Bend Alignment Type is INSIDE or OUTSIDE This option is applicable when the layer edge s adjacent to the selected edge have flanges If this is true then there will be setback part on the flat stock side which would interfere with the bend on the adjacent edge The distance by which the side bend is trimmed is equal to the setback of the current flange being made If there are bends on both sides of the current flange being made then both the bends are trimmed if this option is selected Note that the side bend may be in the opposite direction also c In Leg type the length of your flange and choose whether you want the length measured on the inside of the curve the outside of the cur
127. INA DW ER E E AA aessdade 283 13 3 1 Inserting a BOM View into a DrawinNQ ccccooccnncccconconcccnonncnnnnnnnncnnonnnnnnonononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnannnnnnnnnns 283 Leese LINKING sas BOM ADMIN a a E ace eel acessmasa eaten 285 13 33 Unlinking a BOM from a Drawing ical oes ciara latino de 285 es A a BOM aak ee ate ea ad acne ac e anddceinde aateadcecb ate a S 285 13 3 5 Moving the BOM View on the Sheet cccccccssseecccceesseceecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseaeeeeeseeaeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeeaneeeeeeas 286 13 36 Hiding the BOM VIEW a iccctecsietieed etek A hii cio o atria Saul esa aiea aa 286 1853 Deleg BOM ViIGW sieeve canaries io tias 287 13 3 8 Moving a BOM View to Another Sheet cccccccccecesseeceeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeseeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeesaeess 287 13 335 ODIN BOM WieWeirrsisii io ici reci 287 133 10 Adding Galloul Bal iaa 288 13 4 Working ha BOM Workspace vaninn a 290 13 4 1 Adding and Deleting Columns in a BOM coocccccnnnnnnccncncnnnnnncnononnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnennnnnnss 291 13 4 2 Adding and Deleting a Row in a BOM ooccccnnccnnccccnnccnnncnnoncnnncnnnncnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnrrnnnonanennnnss 292 tods Bang a ROWS ssa pr eR a eer ee eee 292 13 44 Resizing Rows and Columns 00 id ida 293 13 4 5 Adjusting Column Header and Data AlignMent oooooonnncnnnccccnnnccccnnnnnonnnancnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononannnnnnnnnnos 294 13 4 6 Moving Rows and Columns in a Ta
128. If this option is unchecked the model will be projected onto the XY Plane in Alibre Design 6 Check Import Only Visible Layers to bring in only the visible layers from the original file Any frozen or off layers will not be imported If this option is not checked all layers will be imported This can clutter the drawing and slow performance 7 Click OK The file opens in a drawing workspace 307 15 1 3 Chapter 15 Importing and Exporting Data Import Settings and Import Advisor Alibre Design s import settings provide various options to apply when importing data The Import Options dialog will appear by default as you import data You can also set default import options from any workspace gt ls 2 308 To set default import options from a workspace From the Tools menu select Options The Design Options dialog appears Select the Interoperability tab Options General Grid File Types Color Scheme Interoperability Import File Options Insert Options Face Processing Face Processing Stitch to Solid e Stitch adjoining Faces L Heal C Heal Make Tolerant C Make Tolerant L Discard Non Solid Faces Override Units Override Units Import Analvsis and Reporting L Import Advisor L Check Part C Healing Analysis L Conversion Log Show Options When Importing Show Options hen Inserting C Cea 0 The Interoperability tab contains different selections that
129. K 270 Chapter 12 Drawings The datum target symbol can be repositioned by clicking the text and dragging This will change the length of the leader as well as reposition the datum target symbol Datum targets can also be moved to another location by clicking the arrow as opposed to the text 12 6 5 Feature Control Frames The geometric tolerance annotations let you specify a reference frame that contains all the geometric tolerance information for a selected surface or feature The annotations support both the ANSI Y 14 5 M 1982 and the 1994 standards Example 4131 4145 M 1352 Standard Diametrical tolerance Free state material condition Projected tolerance height You also include datum references if the geometric tolerance is related to a datum You reference primary secondary and tertiary datum reference frames with the following material conditions for each geometric tolerance M MMC maximum material condition L LMC least material condition S RFS regardless of feature size F Free State not limited by state position gt To create a feature control frame 1 In any type of workspace from the Insert menu select Annotation gt Feature Control Frame In a drawing workspace select the Feature Control Frame tool from the Detailing toolbar The Feature Control Frame dialog appears Feature Control Frame Pattern Locating Feature Relative L_ Composite tolerance Symbol la e Datum Reference F
130. K CTRL U Chapter 3 Introduction to the Design Interface Measurement Tool Dialog Equation Editor Dialog Toggle Workspace Previous View Next View Regenerate Zoom to Fit Toggle Sketches on off Toggle All Reference Geometry on off Assembly Workspace Toggle Quick Constrain Mode Assembly Properties Options Insert Part SubAssembly Insert New Part Orientation Dialog Measurement Tool Dialog Equation Editor Dialog Toggle Workspace Regenerate Previous View Next View Drawing Workspace Drawing Properties Options Sketch Mode Toggle Bill of Materials Print Toggle Workspace CTRL M CTRL E CTRL TAB F3 F4 F5 HOME CTRL SHIFT K CTRL SHIFT P CTRL Q ALT RETURN CTRL SHIFT O CTRL SHIFT I CTRL SHIFT N CTRL U CTRL M CTRL E CTRL TAB F5 F3 F4 ALT RETURN CTRL SHIFT O CTRL K CTRL B CTRL P CTRL TAB 23 Chapter 4 Sketching CHAPTER 4 Sketching Sketching is fundamentally the most critical aspect of parametric solid modeling The majority of features in Alibre Design begin with a sketch A sketch is made up of one or more figures and provides the basic profile for a feature Mastering sketching techniques is important and eventually leads to considerable time savings during modeling work In This Chapter ao e A A ee ee ee ene ee eee ere eee eee eee 25 Ci A nn nn AA 26 Gustomizing Me LOOK OF Sketeh FIQUIGS o
131. Location type the location where you want to save the file or click the Browse button to specify the location 4 In File Names enter a name for both the PDF file and the HTML file You must provide a filename for both PDF and HTML The HTML file contains a link to the PDF so both files are required for the HTML file to open correctly 5 Click Publish 9 10 7 Printing 3D Models You can print the images from your 3D workspace The print function will print all that is displayed so you may want to hide planes axes and other items gt To print 1 From the File menu select Print 2 Ifyou want to print using a white background check the option Use white background 3 Choose the printer and the number of copies and click OK 9 10 8 Annotations You can insert 3D annotations in part and assembly workspaces The following annotation types are supported in 3D workspaces e Notes e Datums Datum Targets e Feature Control Frames e Surface Finishes e Weld Symbols e The methods used to insert annotations for drawing and model workspaces are the same Refer to Inserting an Exploded View on page 223 for detailed information related to inserting annotations 182 Chapter 9 Working with Parts 9 10 9 Troubleshooting Failed Features A feature can fail to generate properly due to numerous reasons If a feature fails to generate correctly a message is generated after the initial creation and a red X is displayed on
132. Locks field set the lock requirements for the configuration a Lock All will check all of the properties b Unlock All will uncheck all of the properties The following table describes how each lock function will affect the model behavior Individual Lock Locked Behavior Checked Feature suppression Any features added to the active configuration will be added as suppressed features in each locked configuration Changes to suppression state Suppress unsuppress for already existing features in the active configuration will be ignored in locked configurations Parameter values Any parameters added to the active configuration will also be applied with their initial values to all locked configurations However any changes to parameter values will not be applied to locked configurations Part Data General Properties Changes to the active configuration s Part Data property values will be ignored in all locked configurations Note that the Name Number and Description fields in the Part Data will be the same for all configurations The locks apply to the property values Unlocked Behavior Unchecked Any features added to the active configuration will also be added to each unlocked configuration Changes to suppression state of already existing features in the active configuration will also be applied to each unlocked configuration Any parameters added to the active configuration will be applied wit
133. Me EEr File Edit View Favorites Tools New Operations Settings Help Qx S D pO search gt Folders E A Address Ly M libre Recently Modified by Me Search in metadata a v A Reset All by MeFiles Advanced Search Name gt Customer K Assembly 1 AD_ASM A E e New Part 4 AD_PRT o Project 9 inductor Assembly AD_ASM Mumber 34978 E Check Out Product Scooter Properties Project Personal Transportation Initiative we Customer City of Los Angeles Description Revision Version comment Modified Standard A 5 component casings A os SE AS gt A E Type Document Alibre Design Assembly Checked In MKT NOMAD Administrat Figure 107 Version Label for an Item 17 10 4 Rolling Back to Previous Versions Asa default the different versions of an object are listed from the oldest to the newest on the basis of the creation date You can restore old versions of documents with the Roll Back function This function creates a new version of the document with the contents of the old version This is useful when you have made and saved changes in a document but do not want them to take effect Note You can use the Roll Back function only when the document is not checked out gt l 2 358 To roll back to a specific version Find the item in the Vault you want to roll back Right click the item and select History The History dialog appears displaying all versions of the docum
134. Motion Explorer is used to control the starting and playback of Simulations From here you also control the X Y Plots dialog the Interferences dialog the Video Generation AVI dialog and the Settings Options dialog Note The Playback deck is only enabled when you are in Simulation Mode Select Simulation Mode from the Motion main menu es Chapter 16 Alibre Motion Frames Slider Gives a graphic indication of the number of simulated frames available for playback and the current frame To jump to another frame either drag the slider or click on the background on either side of it Whenever the slider is positioned at the far right during playback the Simulator will be running generating more Simulation frames Current Frame Total Frames 22082 Shows the current frame and the total number of simulated frames Current Time Total Time 021709 Shows the time t of the current frame and the total simulated time available Note Control the simulation frame interval step size in the Simulations Settings Tab of the Settings form Button Name Play Step Forward T Pause Stop During playback a When paused Step Back Play Backwards Video Generation AVI Loop Playback X Y Plot Interferences Collisions Settings Options a a E mija What it does Starts the simulation and animation process Steps forward by one frame During playback stops the animation at the current fram
135. Settings Control Panel depending on your operating system Select Add or Remove Programs From the Currently installed programs list select Alibre Design Click Remove At the prompt click Yes to confirm that Alibre Design should be removed The uninstall program removes program files folders and registry entries When the files are removed the uninstall program may indicate that the process is complete Click OK Chapter 2 Getting Started With Alibre Design CHAPTER 2 Getting Started With Alibre Design Alibre Design is a powerful mechanical design software application You can use Alibre Design to create complex 3D designs and 2D drawings This chapter provides a high level overview of the basic design capabilities in Alibre Design In This Chapter niego or Alre DESIO AA PP A o On NN man oe ET ee ee en oe ee The Home WindoW ctw cen cts cee sce ie ge gers tet nese asics ae rosado cae pbs ete roman ake aes eee vam cigs seen ad eee eee eee WORD atico RIMM PIN A ets secs asta o cee ee eee SS 2 1 Initial Launch of Alibre Design gt To launch Alibre Design From the Start menu select All Programs gt Alibre Design An initial startup screen is displayed 3 Home Alibre Design Expert File Tools Window Help ve Please select an icon to gel started Figure 1 Startup Screen If you have already registered with Alibre Inc 1 Enter the user name and password you obtained from Alibre Inc Not
136. Sheet Metal 149 closed corners 155 parameters 151 Sheet Metal Changes for Version 9 1 and Later 154 Sheet Metal Feature Creation 149 Sheet Metal Part Parameters 151 Sheet scale 234 Shells 123 Simulation Types 332 Simulation Types and Parameters 319 331 Simulation Warnings 335 Single Item Save vs Multi ltem Save 300 Sketch Constraints 54 Sketch figures 2D 29 3D 92 119 Sketch Figures 29 Sketch mode 2D 27 3D 92 119 Sketch Mode 26 Sketch Mode Overlay 27 Sketch nodes 46 Sketch Plane Guide Lines and Elevation 89 Sketch Shapes 38 Sketches open 69 Sketches and the Design Explorer 72 Sketching 25 251 auto dimensioning 60 chamfers 48 closed sketches 69 copying figures 72 editing 73 159 enclosed figures 71 extending 47 inference lines 68 menu 25 project to sketch 165 toolbar 25 trimming 47 Sketching 3D 87 constraints 98 current coordinate system 88 elevation 89 figures 92 sketch plane 89 toolbar 87 Snapping to the Working Plane 67 99 Sorting Data in Ascending or Descending Order 295 Special Options for IGES and STL Files 312 Specifying BOM Data 281 Spinner Controls 61 Spline 94 Spline Curves 33 Index Spline figure 33 Splitting a BOM View 287 Spreadsheet Driven Designs 168 Springs 328 Standard View 256 Standard views 234 256 Startup 5 STEP 310 STL 312 Supported File Types 305 3
137. Standard View You can insert an additional standard view as needed in one of two ways If you want the new standard views to be aligned with existing views see Inserting Additional Standard Views on page 236 If you do not want the new views to be aligned or if you want the new views to be of a different design use the steps below gt To inserta standard view 01 1 Select the Standard View 1I tool from the Detailing toolbar or from the Insert menu select Standard View The Insert Design dialog appears 2 Select the model see Selecting the Model on page 233 and choose which views you want to insert see Inserting Standard Views on page 234 12 4 2 Auxiliary View An auxiliary view is created by projecting an orthogonal view normal to a linear edge or sketch line in an existing view gt To create an auxiliary view 1 Select the Auxiliary View e tool from the Detailing toolbar or from the Insert menu select Auxiliary View 2 Select a linear edge or straight sketch line on an existing view The edge selected from the parent view must reside on a face that is perpendicular to the plane of the screen Note To use a sketch line as the projection line the sketch line must reside on the view To do this first select the view you want to use to create the auxiliary view Then select the Activate 2D Sketch tool from the sketching toolbar and sketch a line The line can intersect the view boundaries Exit Sketch Mode then
138. The open part in Alibre Design is modified to the new parameters Chapter 9 Working with Parts 9 9 4 Re linking a Spreadsheet to a Part If a spreadsheet file used in driving a design is moved or folders are renamed in the path to their locations their links to the parts they drive will be broken The next time you open the Equation Editor dialog this warning will appear E Missing External Reference One or more externally diven parameters have a missing source spreadsheet file Click Link in the Equation Editor dialog box to locate the associated spreadsheet Show this message next time To reestablish the links between spreadsheets and parts use the link button in the Equation Editor dialog gt To reestablish the link between a part and a spreadsheet 1 With the affected part open click the Equation Editor E tool Or From the Tools menu select Equation Editor The Missing External Reference dialog appears 2 Click OK The Equation Editor dialog appears with the affected parameters displayed in red 5 Equation Editor 1 x all parameters hi Search Parameters 3 Equation Result Width Length Height CAD Es and 5 ocuments an Madi C Documents and 5 Delete 1 000 CA Documents and 5 Import Export Link rette E Height Type Distance Owner Sketch lt 1 gt Dimension Comment thickness Cancel 173 Chap
139. To change the layer of an existing figure dimension or annotation 1 Right click the item you want to reformat and select Set Layer from the pop up menu The Layers dialog appears 2 Inthe Current column select the layer to which you want to move the selected item 3 Click OK to apply the change When the layer for an annotation or dimension is changed the entire dimension annotation including figures and text will be rendered in the layer s color All figures and leaders will be rendered with the line pattern of the layer continuous dashed etc The only exception to this rule is the Text Note annotation for which the text is always displayed using the font color specified in the Text Note dialog The leader will still be rendered in the color and line pattern associated with the layer 247 Chapter 12 Drawings You can change the properties of any figure on a layer without changing the layer on which the figure resides You do this by overriding the current layer style 1 Right click the figure whose properties you want to change 2 Select Set Layer The Layers dialog appears Current Pattern Weight Comment CONTINUOUS M i CONTINL CENTER Y Solid E 1 0 CENTER DASHED Dashed 5 ___ pg 1 0 DASHED HIDDEN Hidden 5x ___ 1 0 HIDDEN PHANTOM Phantom 53 1 0 PHANTO BEND CENTERS Center 85 EA 1 0 BEND CE VISIBLE Solid y ME 1 0 VISIBLE Pattern Color Scale Weight e 3 Check the Override Layer Styl
140. To set Simulation Options In Start simulation at time t specify the time t at which the Simulation should start The variable t is used internally by the Simulator in many of the equations that define the Physical Elements used in simulation including Harmonic sinusoidally varying functions Choose one of the following options a Simulate indefinitely while playing When selected the Simulator will continue generating frames as long as you are in Play mode When the current frame being shown reaches the last available simulation frame the Simulator is restarted and each frame is shown as it is generated Note The maximum number of frames that Alibre Motion can generate for a single simulation is 32 767 b End at specified time Specify the maximum amount of time in seconds that should be simulated When the Simulator reaches this point it is stopped In Simulation frame interval specify the output time step or simulation frame interval The Simulator produces an output frame after each interval If the Target Playback Speed matches this interval and your model and system allow playback at that speed you can produce a Simulation playback in real time Note The Simulator internally determines the time step required to produce an accurate simulation and this may vary throughout the simulation However it only produces an output frame for animation at intervals as specified by this parameter Chapter 16 Alibre Motion
141. Video with Alibre Motion Generating Video AVI files can be a useful way of easily sharing the results of simulating your designs with colleagues and others as generated files may be distributed via email internet download and many other means and may be played on a wide variety of systems Important Note Not all CODECs installed on your system will be able to generate video Though many are available as free downloads from Microsoft and other manufacturers some may only be capable of playing back video and not generating it To protect your system always be extremely careful when downloading programs and other files from the internet and only ever do so only from trustworthy sources How videos are created Clicking the Video option button E opens the Generate Video AVI Form giving you the opportunity to specify the name of the file to be created and various other settings that affect the video generation process Then during playback the main canvas is saved as a bitmap Each bitmap is combined together and packaged into an AVI file Whenever videos are generated on your system the software that does this is called a CODEC short for COder DECoder or Video Handler These are generally small programs that need to be installed and registered and it is likely that there are several of these already on your system Alibre Motion is able to utilize those CODECs that handle a color depth of 24 bits The list of CODECs currently installed o
142. a part item The Design Explorer also lists the assembly reference geometry assembly constraints redline views section views as well as the faces and edges associated with each part You can click the plus sign next to an item to expand it and see its associated details For example you will see a subassembly s constituents if you expand it El a H 337 6 00 E Blade Mount lt 1 gt El H 3308 41 4 15 H 6054 444 lt 7 gt H 6054 45 lt 7 gt 83 1901 lt 1 gt 983 1901 lt 2 gt H 3243 210 1 gt ia LH LT il E a H 33 76 5304 23 El lagi Blade Mounts 1 gt You can insert the same part or subassembly multiple times into an assembly When inserting duplicate parts or subassemblies the item will be listed in the Design Explorer with its original name followed by a numeric label to indicate how many instances have been inserted e g Part1 lt 1 gt Part1 lt 2 gt Part1 lt 3 gt etc 11 3 Assembly Basics You can create an assembly by inserting parts you have already designed inserting imported parts or designing new parts in the context of the assembly 205 Chapter 11 Assembly Design 11 3 1 Opening a New Assembly and Inserting Existing Parts gt To open a new assembly and insert existing parts 1 Open a new assembly workspace The assembly workspace and the Insert Part Subassembly dialog appear 2 Inthe Insert Part Subassembly dialog select the part to be inserted into the assembly 3
143. a dade stedtacdaadeceddeatnens ae aaia i aTa ea iaaa 122 O ie 123 Ait Dat Races o o e cae Sel 123 22 External Cosmetic Teal Sicilia 124 A WA OLE Siar ceria ETE EE E E deta E hate eee gala as hg ce ers eucag it ga E EE E NAAA E saee 126 TIE Cala lod Fe ales iii ais 127 2144 Saving Catalog Features cuen til o E 127 44 2 Inserting Catalog Features cai is 128 2 15 CODVINGEXISUING POQUUNCS a e a oa 128 TA A A A 128 Aio SA erm ener eee eee 130 Llas TODOIOGY Pates ca ici 132 RO Design Boolean FMI a e eta e cl oss a e uc nah 137 7 16 1 Design Boolean EaltorENVIFONMON Escondida dena AA RA 138 7AG 2 Greating Design Boolean Fai Sic a e EA EE ERA 138 7 16 3 Editing Design Boolean A v2 iecewcasistutes excertcnisoxcetet santnctteaneneitad iv ian deieveanteatieeeiicaerie liane 139 tir MIIPS CHE CUNO te 139 iti limplications of Using Direct EGNING ieir e is 140 LAIT PUSIWPUM RACE SKICE xi ekeata tots E a aaa iendcdeaeeaade e e E scans daetdardnaentdsauets 141 Velie 3 FUSMIPUN POCKCTOMRDOSS past A A ee EAE 142 Pld A 144 TENT REMOVE FACOS sara id o ee tal e ict oc oe de e 145 7 17 6 Tips for Successful Direct Edd seudo iento 146 TNS GCN all A A A 146 7 19 Managing Features in the Design Explorer oooccccconnncocononcccnconoconcnnononononanonononcnnnnnonnnconannnnnnnranenannnnenananinns 147 Sheet Metal Feature Creat On marciana tddi 149 8 1 The Sheet Metal Part Modeling Interface ccccccccccccecceeeesseeese
144. a part with a larger scale on a smaller size drawing sheet gt To insert a broken view Select the Select ls tool from the View toolbar if it is not already selected Right click the view you want to break in the Drawing Explorer or the work area and select Create Broken View from the pop up menu Lit or select the view and then from the Insert menu select Broken View or select the view and then select the Broken View tool from the Detailing toolbar Two break lines appear in the view and the Broken View dialog appears 261 Chapter 12 Drawings Select a break line Style You can use Straight Zig or Curve break lines Drag the break lines to the appropriate break locations in the view 6 Specify the break Width 7 Specify a break line Angle if desired 8 Click OK The part is displayed with a break in the geometry Reference dimensions and part dimensions associated with the broken area reflect the actual value gt To modify the broken view 1 Click the Select r tool from the View toolbar if it is not already selected 2 Move the cursor over one of the break lines Right click the break line and select Edit from the pop up menu The Broken View dialog appears 4 Change the Style Width or Angle as necessary 5 Drag the break lines to redefine the break position 6 Click OK when finished gt To restore the broken view to it original state Select the Select ls tool from the View toolbar i
145. a sketch still active select the Revolve Boss or the Revolve Cut tool from the Part Modeling toolbar or from the Feature menu select Boss gt Revolve or Cut gt Revolve The Revolve Boss or the Revolve Cut dialog appears 2 Revolve Boss Sketch to revolve F Sketche 1 gt Angle 360 000 Aris Label Revolution 1 gt o 2 Ifthe Sketch to revolve field is not populated with the sketch you want to revolve click in it to activate it then select the sketch you want to revolve 3 Select an edge axis or sketch line as the Axis centerline 4 Specify the rotation Angle 5 Entera custom Label to modify how the feature name is displayed in the Design Explorer 6 Click OK to create the revolution Fai Figure 38 Resulting revolve boss feature 109 E AA ER E 7 4 2 Thin Wall Revolve Boss and Cut Features Thin wall revolve features either create or remove a thin wall of material by revolving an open or closed sketch around a centerline gt To create a thin wall revolve boss or cut 1 With a sketch still active from the Feature menu select Thin Wall Boss gt Revolve or Thin Wall Cut gt Revolve The Revolve Thin Boss or the Revolve Thin Cut dialog appears Revolve Thin Boss Sketch to revolve men Angle 360 000 B Aris Gap Type Natural wi Wall Thickness Side 1 Side 2 100 jag om E Label Revoluionet gt o el 2 Specify the rotation Angle 3 Select an edge axis
146. acing of roughness peaks e Specify a value for the roughness Sampling length 5 Select the symbol Standard that you want to use Alibre Design supports ANSI Y14 16 ISO 1302 and JIS Symbols 6 In Material Removal specify the value for the amount of stock to be removed by the machining method that you selected 7 Inthe Waviness area e Type a value for the Waviness peak to valley height of the waves e Type a value for the Spacing between adjacent peaks 8 If you want to specify the Production Method to be used for the surface finish type it in the box provided 9 If you want to include a leader e Select Show e Select Bent if you want the line to have a short horizontal segment near the annotation e Click the Arrow down arrow and select a style 10 Move the mouse in the work area A preview of the annotation appears attached to the mouse pointer Left click once to place the leader line Left click again to place the annotation The text appears in light blue 11 Use the Rotation Angle to change the angle at which the symbol is displayed 12 Check the Flip Text box if you desire to flip the text 180 Note The Flip Text box will automatically become checked if the rotation angle goes above 90 However you can uncheck the box if you do not want the text flipped 13 Click Apply to accept the annotation placement or you can double click The dialog remains open so you can continue to place additional annotat
147. aeaeeeeessaeeeeesaaeeeessaaeeeeessaaees 65 4 8 7 Modifying Sketch Dimension Properties ccccccccconcnncccconcnncncnnncnnononnnnnnononnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnancnnnnnos 65 A o A A A 66 4 9 1 A A e base ccsvos 66 4 9 2 Snapping to the Working PIANC ui rd 67 4 9 3 Cursor Dimension Alai cnica 67 4 9 4 Cursor DIS Pinos iii 68 4 9 5 Merece HINIS 2 eas as ea esc oe E it Eee ened wack 68 4 9 6 DIREC COOL Iiale EMV cece ee O O aatoueee sae 69 4 9 7 FAI CHG I A A anced eae an A Aedes 69 4 9 8 Open and Closed Sketches iesene cdc sateeeeeendeesnesueeenncces desneseestaedsndadenesncccesasetateneee 69 4 9 9 Gheckinig Sketenes for Etrors a riaren isa aa E co aL 70 A910 ENCISO ES ade 71 4 9 11 Copying and Pasting Sketch Figures cccoconcnnccnnnccccconnnnonnnnnnononannnnnonononannnnnnnnononnnnannnnnnnnnnanannnnnns 72 4 10 Sketches and the Design Explorer cccccscssececcesseececcceseeeecccsseeeesccseneeescossenececcseneeescceseeeescosseseeteceeeeenses 72 Alr Eding SKICES ca ias 73 410 2 R namihg SKEICMN OS a2 ti ia 73 ANOS Deleg Sket hi ai ii 73 Reterence Geo melisa 75 5 1 FACT CREM CE PIES tits 75 5 1 1 CONG CL FANG auc so O EN 75 5 1 2 TAIANA ee S 76 1 3 PAG TE Ci LAIN caters cece cs cinta sie ana E EE AAS EE a E ade A E 77 5 1 4 Parallel Plane through a PON E einacias 77 5 1 5 lege sal IMG and Proein 77 5 1 6 TAS TPO UM AS sostenido niiciensnotoicte oidos 78 5 1 7 Plane Normal to 3D Sketch or 3D EdQE
148. ails of its geometry you may be able to add some or all of the following e Motor or Rotary Actuator Produces a torque or rotational motion For instance a car engine a winch or a DVD player motor e Rotary Spring Produces a torque opposing rotational displacement Real world equivalents include a door hinge spring and a coiled watch spring e Rotary Damper Produces a torque opposing rotational motion for instance a car clutch or an electric generator They can also be used to model wet friction e Linear Actuator Produces a force or motion in a particular direction for instance an hydraulic ram or an electric car window lifter e Linear Spring Produces a force which acts to oppose displacement in a straight line such as an elastic band or a car suspension spring Linear Damper Produces a force which acts to oppose motion in a straight line such as a shock absorber Can also model wet or sliding friction You can expect nothing to happen unless at least one physical element has been added In some circumstances enabling gravity may be all that you require but more often you will need to add the motors springs and dampers found in the mechanism you are designing 16 5 1 Adding Physical Elements Motors and Actuators Springs and Dampers gt To Add a Physical Element 1 Right click on a Constraint in the Motion Explorer 2 Choose Insert from the pop up menu 3 Select from the enabled options
149. ain Capl Active Sessions Repository File System Parameters Current Value Kew value e 1500000 in 2 000000 in 0 500000 in QO0000 in 000000 in 5 Anan in Mame Cell Reference Type Units Distance cm Reset opil Close In Parameters click one of the parameters Its name appears in the Name field Chapter 9 Working with Parts 8 gt For Cell Reference click the field then click the cell on the Excel spreadsheet that the parameter should reference Or Click the E button The cell reference box appears Click the desired spreadsheet cell then click the button to return to the Control Parameters dialog In Type select the parameter type distance angle or count In Units set the desired units of measurement for distance and angle parameters Click Modify To add a new parameter click Reset The entry fields are cleared In Name type a name for the new parameter then follow steps 7 11 above Click Close The open part in Alibre Design is modified to the new parameters To set more than one parameter at a time You can select more than one parameter at a time in the Control Parameters dialog 1 3 4 Select the first parameter you want to set then hold the Ctrl key down and select any other parameters to modify Each of the parameters will highlight Parameters New Value aoe 0 381000 cm a Sheet D 3 Sheetl 042 2 356194 rad 1 143000 cm
150. al popular file types are supported JPG GIF TIF BMP RLE DIB EMF WMF PNG JPE JPEG JFIF and TIFF Alibre Design does not support JPEG 2000 or lossless JPEGs as well as some types of TIFF files When you save the drawing the images are compressed and stored with the drawing Opening the drawing opens all the images inside it When you export a drawing in the Alibre Design STEP format the images are compressed and saved with it When the STEP file is opened the images are decompressed and loaded into the file When you save a drawing as a template after inserting an image the image will remain part of the template when it is used again in another drawing 249 Chapter 12 Drawings gt To insert an image in a drawing 1 From the Insert menu select Image The Select Image dialog appears 2 Click Look In to browse to the saved location of the image you want to insert 3 Click the image s file name 4 Click Open The image appears in the drawing workspace and the cursor changes to a dotted crosshairs icon 5 Click the crosshairs icon on the drawing sheet to place the upper left hand corner of the image The image is placed in the selected location 6 To resize the image right click it and select Scale from the pop up menu The Scale dialog appears 7 To make the image smaller decrease the value on the left To make the image larger decrease the value on the right 8 Click and drag the image to place it as necessa
151. alculations is known as Rigid Multi Body Dynamics 313 Chapter 16 Alibre Motion What does a Simulator do In reality time moves smoothly A simulator in contrast needs to break time into a series of calculation time steps or intervals much as a movie or animation is broken down into a series of frames Starting from a set of initial conditions at the beginning of a time step the new positions and accelerations of each body in the system are calculated using Newton s laws from the forces and torques acting on them and what is known about their physical characteristics What Makes up a Simulation e The type of simulation to perform and its driving parameters e The physical characteristics of the bodies that make up the system e The constraints that dictate the way the bodies influence each other e The forces and torques acting on or within the system e Any prescribed motions to be forced upon the system 16 2 Installing and Enabling Alibre Motion Installing Alibre Motion Before beginning to use Alibre Motion you must first install the Alibre Motion Add On Note You must have a license for Alibre Motion to install and enable it Alibre Motion is available for the Alibre Design Expert version Enabling Motion Once you have installed the Alibre Motion Add On you can enable Motion from the Home window or an Assembly Workspace gt To enable Alibre Motion 1 From the Tools menu select Add On Manager 2 Find Alibr
152. alog is invoked the Template list will be populated with all the custom templates located in the folder you last browsed to in step 2 above You can use the Default button to reset this list to the default template folder 12 5 4 Saving and Using a Custom Template as a Symbol gt To save a custom template as a symbol Select the Activate Sketch HH tool from the Sketching toolbar From the Sketch menu select Create Custom Symbol The Create Custom Symbol dialog appears In the workspace drag a selection box around the figures fields and labels that you want to include in the template These elements appear in the Figures to include list In the dialog move your cursor to Anchor Point and click in the X or Y boxes Click in the work area where you want the bottom left corner of the template to appear in a new Drawing workspace The coordinates appear in the Anchor Point area and are relative to the origin Maintaining a 0 0 anchor point is acceptable Click OK The Save Custom Symbol dialog appears Browse to the appropriate save location and select a folder Specify a name for the drawing template Click Save To use a custom template symbol Open a new drawing workspace The New Sheet Properties dialog appears Select Blank Sheet and the corresponding sheet size Click the Create An Empty Drawing checkbox Specify the drawing Scale Click OK A blank drawing workspace appears From the Sketch menu select Activate Sket
153. an one template in the same drawing file 204 Chapter 12 Drawings If you do use the same style names for styles in different templates you may see the following dialog when you attempt to use both templates in the same drawing ai Conflicting Dimension St x The following template dimension styles conflict with existing dimension styles centimeters meters millimeters keep Existing Styles Update Existing Styles Cancel This dialog is telling you that two styles with the same name cannot exist in a single drawing file The dialog in the above example has found three different styles in the second template brought into a drawing that have the same name as styles in the first template used in the drawing You must choose one of the options These options only apply to the styles that have the same name All other styles are unaffected In addition these options do not modify the template itself only the properties of the styles in this drawing file The original templates remain unchanged e Keep Existing Styles This option will keep the properties of the styles that are already in the drawing Update Existing Styles This option will keep the properties of the styles that are in the new template being added so the existing style properties will be updated to match e Cancel This option will cancel the action you just started whether it was inserting a new sheet or changing templates If you change the t
154. an tool dynamically moves the current view around the work area Click the icon and then click and drag the cursor around the work area Note You can also pan by holding the Shift key and the left and right mouse buttons down simultaneously while moving the cursor around the work area You can also pan by holding down the middle mouse button if you have one Cs The Rotate tool rotates a part or assembly around a given point Click the icon and then click and drag the cursor around the work area Note You can also rotate by holding the left and right mouse buttons down simultaneously while moving the cursor around the work area If you rotate the model with the left and right mouse button method you can switch dynamically between two types of rotation mouse centric or model centric To invoke mouse centric rotation click and hold the left and right mouse buttons while hovering over part of the model If you click while hovering over white space model centric rotation will be used The Zoom Mode tool dynamically changes the scale of the work area view Click the icon hold the left mouse button down and move the cursor up to zoom in or down to zoom out Note If available you can use the mouse wheel to dynamically zoom in and out The Zoom to Window tool changes the zoom level of the view so that a specified region fills the work area Select the tool click and drag a rectangle around the desired area Release the mouse button wh
155. and Pasting Sketch Figures You can cut copy and paste entire sketches or individual sketch figures within the same sketch or into new sketches altogether gt To copy and paste sketch figures within the same sketch Select the sketch Select tool from the Sketching toolbar Select the figures to be copied The figures become highlighted From the Edit menu select Copy or press Ctrl C on the keyboard From the Edit menu select Paste or press Ctrl V on the keyboard or right click and select Paste from the pop up menu The copied figure s are placed slightly offset from the originating figures To copy and paste sketch figures into a new sketch Select the sketch Select tool from the Sketching toolbar Select the figures to be copied If you are copying an entire sketch from the Edit menu select Select All or press Ctrl A on the keyboard The figures become highlighted From the Edit menu select Copy or press Ctrl C on the keyboard Exit sketch mode select the new sketch plane and enter sketch mode From the Edit menu select Paste or press Ctrl V on the keyboard or right click and select Paste from the pop up menu The figures are pasted into the new sketch in the same orientation with respect to the origin as the originating sketch 4 10 Sketches and the Design Explorer After creating a sketch and subsequently exiting sketch mode the sketch will be listed in the Design Explorer under the Features node in
156. and Vectors Traces can be extremely useful and efficient for visually examining simulation data They enable you to see at a glance how a Part moves during the simulation and to see how its velocity and acceleration changes Traces may also add greatly to the visual impact of Videos generated from simulations of your designs and Alibre Motion gives you several parameters that you can use to customize the way that Traces are displayed Traces are persistent 3D objects Traces are shown as lines and shapes on the main canvas but they are 3D reference geometry that dynamically change enabling you to easily visualize 3D paths as you pan zoom and tilt during playback Trace Options are stored with the Simulation setup data in your Assembly file Unless you have chosen not to by un checking the Save Simulation Setup Data in Assembly file Settings option then all information concerning your simulation including your customized Trace options are stored in the Assembly file This means you can share not just an Assembly and Simulations but also how they are displayed for maximum effect Display Vector Data Using Traces The Velocity and Acceleration of individual Parts can be displayed using traces The direction of these vector quantities is shown as a line connected to the center of gravity CG of a part or the Point of Action of a constraint The length of the displayed line represents the magnitude of the Vector Quantity Velocity
157. and display its associated sketch 2 Right click the sketch and select Edit from the pop up menu or double click the sketch 159 Chapter 9 Working with Parts Or 1 Select the feature in the work area 2 Right click and select Edit Feature Sketch from the pop up menu Or Double click the feature in the work area to edit the sketch associated with that feature The feature sketch appears in sketch mode and you can edit the sketch gt To edit a feature In the Design Explorer right click feature and select Edit from the pop up menu Or Select the feature in the work area then right click and select Edit Feature from the pop up menu The dialog associated with the feature type appears displaying the original feature properties You can change the properties as required 9 2 2 Suppressing Features in Parts You can suppress features to temporarily remove them from a part Suppressing features hides them in the display and prevents the feature from being used in any other modeling operations Suppressed features are not calculated during regeneration gt To suppress a feature Right click the feature in the Design Explorer and select Suppress from the pop up menu The feature becomes hidden in the work area The feature is listed in gray in the Design Explorer and the feature icon is shown in gray Note that if you suppress a feature features listed below it in the Design Explorer may fail if they depended on the supp
158. and select Constituents The Constituents dialog appears showing all items that are related to the selected item 9 10 11 Display Optimization Display Acceleration You can speed up the processing of large designs by entering Display Acceleration mode This is achieved by simplifying the design according to user defined options This option can be used in designs including parts assemblies sheet metal parts exploded assemblies and Design Booleans but not in drawings or BOMs Some menu items will be unavailable while in Display Acceleration gt To set preferences for Display Acceleration 1 In apart or assembly workspace from the File menu select Properties 183 Chapter 9 Working with Parts 2 Select the Display tab Display Acceleration Coarse display flat shading no reflectivity edges or silhouettes Simplified Display Meshes Remove details on view manipulation No rollover until mouse pauses Pause Length y Shorter Longer 3 Check your desired options for Display Acceleration e Coarse Display Flat shading will be selected no reflectivity will be used visible and silhouette edges will not be shown If this option is checked changing the display options wireframe shaded etc will not change the display of the model e Simplified Display Meshes The complexity of meshes will be reduced which will reduce the visual precision of the parts e Remove Details on View Manipulation During rotate pa
159. and the new template is displayed in the work area Note If the new template has dimension styles or layer properties that conflict with the existing template you will see the Conflicting Dimension Styles or Conflicting Entity Layers Dialog Conflicting Dimension Styles D Conflicting Dimension St The following template dimension styles conflict with existing dimension styles inches j Keep Existing Styles Update Existing Styles Conflicting Entity Layers Conflicting Entity Layers The following template layers conflict with ing layers CENTER Update Existina Layers 12 2 4 Deleting Views You can delete views at any time gt To delete a view Right click the view in the Drawing Explorer and select Delete from the pop up menu or select a view in the work area or Drawing Explorer A and press Delete or select the Delete tool from the Standard toolbar Note Any views that were created from the deleted view such as auxiliary views will also be deleted 12 2 5 Hiding Views You can hide unhide views at any time A hidden view is not displayed in the 2D work area It is displayed in the Drawing Explorer but is grayed out gt To hide a view Right click the view in the Drawing Explorer or the 2D work area and select Hide from the pop up menu gt Tounhide a view Right click the view in the Drawing Explorer and select the Hide toggle which should be marked with a check from the pop u
160. and the tool 137 Chapter 7 Feature Creation 7 16 1 Design Boolean Editor Environment Upon selecting a Design Boolean Feature the Blank part workspace transforms into the Design Boolean Editor Environment This special workspace exists within a part workspace but resembles an assembly workspace regarding toolbars and options Inside the editor environment you will create a dedicated assembly that contains the blank part and the tool s constrained as required for modifying the design The editor environment workspace is shown below mold Design Boolean lt Design Boolean Subtract Alibre Design Expert Pile Edit Wew Insert Tools Window Help E Sdci h E gt TELET ETIES Design Explorer a molds fb Sketch i lean Boolean 2o Redire Views E Corelrarke A Align 1 gy Align 2 el Blank mold anchored Tone Bl AlbreOriyc ts Y x 4 2 w Es ey e fil g g There are two ways to exit the editor environment you can commit or discard the Boolean feature Once you choose one of those options the workspace is transformed back into the blank part workspace From the Edit menu select Commit or Discard or click the appropriate icon lt l y Commit A Discard 7 16 2 Creating Design Boolean Features Although the Boolean Unite Subtract and Intersect features are different in end result the steps used to create them are identical The operations are the same as in set theory e Bo
161. anges Using Direct Editing can leave created dimensions as inaccurate representations of the new model As an example reference the images below If you created an extrusion with a height of 2 you will have a model as shown in image A You can perform a Push Pull Face operation to the top face image B and the resulting body will be as shown in image C The new height of the extrusion is most likely what you are now interested in The dimension of 2 is no longer an accurate representation of the height of the extrusion The new total height is 2 plus the Push Pull Face dimension Figure 66 Original Extrusion Figure 67 Performing Push Pull Face Operation Figure 68 Final Model Direct Editing and 2D Drawings Because of this 2D drawings will also be affected when you create drawings of models that have included Direct Edit functions When you create a 2D drawing in the Standard View Creation dialog you have the option to include Design Dimensions This option captures the dimensions you placed in the model and projects them into the drawing view If you create a drawing of the block in the previous example you will get a view similar to the one below You can see the 2 dimension is located at the original height of the block The 2 dimension is still the design dimension for that feature In this case if you want to represent the new height of the block you would have to manually place a dimension in this example it is the 3 185
162. annnconananenonens 324 TO OMIA Sat en cetera 3h at aia aN SG ae NS Bac eet Ne ae te A alan ah Nous ah ua aati Se 328 A O A E AN 329 A A AI 330 16 6 Simulation Types and Parametros 331 16 6 1 SIMUIalON TY DCS iR E dia 332 16 6 2 Producing Efficient and Useful SimulatiONS ooccccccconnnnnccconnonocnnncnnnnnnancnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnss 332 16 6 3 Automatic Constraint Mapping ACM in Alibre Motion cooocccnccccccnnnccnonnoncnonancnnnnonancnnnnconanonnnoos 333 10 6 4 MOVING And Fed Pas uni AA A A A E 333 16 60 Creatina SIMUIAIONS a A le 334 16 06 RENAMING SIMUIANONS acia ia stilo 334 TOG RUMANOS IMUIQUOAS iaa aaa 334 1068 SIMUIaton VV ANMNNGS serres e atten dada idea 335 16 6 9 Maintaining Multiple SIMUAIOA Sii A A A A a A 335 16 6 10 gt Delsting SimUlaONS att Nao ia cis 336 16 6 11 Activating a Different Simulation rca dida 336 16 7 Results and Feedback from Alibre Motion Simulations ooooonncccnncccnononnccnnnnnnnnnancccnnnnnonnnnnnonnnononnnnrennnnnonos 336 16 24 Traces Vistalizing Paths and Vecina s 337 16 7 2 Generating Video with Alibre Motion cccccnnnnooononnnnncnnnnnnnnncnononooonnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnss 340 16 7 3 Generating X Y Plots from Simulation Data ccccccoocnnnonocccocconnncnnncconnnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnononnnennnnnnss 342 16 0 DEIGCTING IMTGMGFENCOS aora ia 344 16 8 1 The Interferences Dialog cccc
163. anywhere in any open space in the workspace 5 Select the part you want to move by left clicking the part The part is highlighted To select multiple parts to move simultaneously continue to click additional parts while holding the Shift key Part Selected Figure 88 Manual Explode Mode Displaying Selected Part 6 Left click again and drag the part s in the direction defined by the highlighted reference arrow You can also move the part s in the direction opposite the arrow is pointing 225 7 Chapter 11 Assembly Design Release the mouse button to complete the separation Figure 89 Manual Explode Mode Displaying Final Part Location 226 Tip If you want to move an entire subassembly as one entity select it in the Design Explorer so that all of the parts in the subassembly highlight Then left click in the work area and drag the mouse to move the part s to the desired location By default trail lines are displayed in the work area which provide a visual guide between a part and the part to which it is constrained To hide the trail lines deselect the View Part Trails tool on the Assembly Modeling toolbar or from the View menu deselect Exploded View Trails To exit Manual Explode Mode deselect the Manual Explode Mode tool from the Assembly Modeling toolbar or from the Tools menu deselect Manual Explode Mode To automatically increase or decrease the explode distance after moving a part or parts click t
164. apply to this active configuration Only one configuration can be active at a time Unlocked All of the changes made to the active configuration will be applied to unlocked configurations i mm 8 Locked None of the changes made to the active configuration that are controlled by configuration lock properties will be applied to these locked configurations a Partially Locked Some of the changes made to the active configuration will apply to these partially locked configurations depending on the particular locks that are set for each one i Missing The configuration that was set for this assembly constituent is missing usually because it has been deleted To resolve this activate one of the other existing configurations by double clicking it 10 1 2 Editing Properties of Configurations You can edit the lock properties of configurations in a design to control how each of the configurations update when you are making changes to the active configuration gt To edit the lock properties of a configuration 1 From the Edit menu select Edit Config lt 2 gt The configuration that is available to edit from this menu will be the one you have highlighted in the Design Explorer Or Right click the configuration in the Design Explorer and select Edit The Configuration dialog appears This dialog is similar to the New Configuration dialog 186 Chapter 10 Design Configurations Configuration Configuration
165. apter 10 Design Configurations 1 Find the part or subassembly that you want to set a new configuration for and expand it to see each of the categories for that component Male Connector lt 2 gt Large R H Configurations 2 Constraints kg Edges hy Faces Male Connector lt 3 Large Male Connectore4 gt Large E Male Connectors gt Large H H A E 2 Expand the Configurations category In this example the configuration called Large is currently active Male Connectors 1 gt Large Male Connector lt 2 gt Large BS Configurations Ba Large E Small y Constraints kg Edges hy Faces 4 Male Connector 33 Large Male Connector 4 gt Large 3 Double click the configuration you want to make active in this assembly or right click the configuration and select Activate In this example double clicked the configuration called Small Male Connector 2 Small B Configurations ES Large S Male Connectors 1 gt Large kg Edges hy Faces Male Connector lt 3 gt Large Male Connector 4 gt Large The new configuration will become active in this assembly and will be shown in the work area This will not affect which configuration is active in any other assembly or in the original model workspace Note Configuration information is only displayed for immediate children of the root assembly Parts nested within sub assemblies do not have a Confi
166. aracteristics directly from your existing Part and Sub Assembly designs Location e Orientation 333 Chapter 16 Alibre Motion e Mass calculated from the Material specified e Location of the center of mass also known as center of gravity or CG Moments of inertia e The position of each point at which another body or force can act All of these are computed automatically by Alibre Motion from the Assembly whenever a Simulation is generated They come from the design of each part and the constraints in the Assembly Tip Ensuring that these characteristics are correct when designing your parts and assemblies is a crucial step in the process of producing accurate and useful simulations 16 6 5 Creating Simulations gt To create a new simulation 1 In the Motion Explorer right click on the name of the assembly and select New Simulation The New Simulation dialog appears Motion Explorer E Mery simulatio M a pm iwed Parts 2 In Name type a name for the new simulation 3 Inthe Copy From drop down list select the existing simulation you want to use as the starting point for the new one or choose None 4 Check the Active checkbox if you want to make the new simulation the active one 5 Click OK to create the new simulation 16 6 6 Renaming Simulations Alibre Motion supplies a default name for each new Simulation you create To help you keep track of them it is often a good idea to g
167. ard 4 10 3 Deleting Sketches You can delete a sketch as long as it has not been used to create a 3D feature To delete a sketch that has an associated feature you must first delete the feature gt To delete a sketch In the Design Explorer right click the sketch name and select Delete from the pop up menu or select the sketch and press Delete on the keyboard 73 Chapter 5 Reference Geometry CHAPTER 5 Reference Geometry Reference geometry consists of planes axes points and surfaces which are primarily used for feature construction aids Reference planes serve as the default sketch planes Axes are fundamental to creating features such as revolutions and patterns The primary reference point in a work area is the origin and is used extensively as a guide Additional reference geometry can be added as necessary In This Chapter ns APP E o PP o A 75 PN PE Po APP e 78 o rr eee ern ete ss ner ren gree or ee E E ne er eee ee ee eee ee eee een eee eee me 80 o A cree eee 81 Reierence SO Mey VISIO WNL estro dro debito tells 84 Penang Relerenco COM CUNY acta A A e arri TRE ar 84 Deleting Reterence Geome ny sessciceecusencceiecs se nE E EE E E 85 Editing Reference Geometry PrOP Ses ssscrciorninnia densa onntases scndetacwadesiansadeds haxneidseetaadessarsdeaienzecads 85 5 1 Reference Planes By default three reference planes are visible in a part and assembly workspace the XY plane YZ plane and ZX plane any can be used as
168. ars Browse to Program Files gt Alibre Design on your PC s local C drive and locate the file named Alibre Design Add In xla This is the default location for Alibre Design files at installation Click the file name Click OK The Alibre Design Add In appears in the Add Ins dialog with a checkmark next to it Click OK In Excel a new item appears in the Tools menu Alibre Design Add In gt Control Parameters Chapter 9 Working with Parts gt To setup Excel 2007 1 Launch Microsoft Excel 2 Click the Microsoft Office logo in the top left corner of the spreadsheet 3 In the dialog click the Excel Options button 4 Inthe Excel Options dialog choose Add ins 5 Inthe Add ins section in the Manage field select Excel Add ins from the drop down list then click the Go button Manage Excel Add ins 6 Click the Browse button and browse to Program Files gt Alibre Design on your PC s local C drive Open the file named Alibre Design Add In xla This is the default location for Alibre Design files at installation 7 Make sure Alibre Design Add In is checked then click OK 8 Click the Microsoft Office logo again 9 In the dialog click the Excel Options button 10 Click Customize and expand the Popular Command drop down list Choose commands from lt i Popular Commands a Popular Commands Commands Not in the Ribbon All Commands Macros Home Tab Insert Tab Page Layout Tab Fo
169. at are elusive the Alibre Assistant should be contacted Options set in the Design Options dialog apply to all imports unless changes are made in the Import File Options dialog All import options can operate simultaneously with the exception of Convert To Surface Model and Convert To Solid Model 15 2 Exporting Data You can export Alibre Design native data using a number of formats 309 15 2 1 Supported File Types Chapter 15 Importing and Exporting Data The table below summarizes the file types you can use to export data from Alibre Design Drawing Alibre Design file stp AutoCAD DWG file dwg AutoCAD DXF file dxf JPEG Image file jpg Bitmap file bmp Enhanced Metafile file emf Assembly Alibre Design file stp AP 203 file stp AP 214 file stp ACIS 3 0 R10 files sat STL file stl Part Alibre Design file stp AP 203 file stp AP 214 file stp ACIS 3 0 R10 files sat IGES file igs STL file stl BOM CSV file csv 310 Image Files JPEG Image file jpg Bitmap file bmp PNG file png TIFF file tiff GIF file gif Image Files JPEG Image file jpg Bitmap file bmp PNG file png TIFF file tiff GIF file gif Image Files JPEG Image file jpg Bitmap file bmp PNG file png TIFF file tiff GIF file gif Chapter 15 Importing and Exporting Data
170. at as part in BOM which is found in the General tab of the Design Properties dialog Now this assembly will be treated as a part whenever it is encountered in a BOM It will appear as a single item in the BOM Also the BOM properties assigned to it will be reported in the BOM The parts contained in this assembly will not appear as separate items in the BOM 281 Chapter 13 Bills of Material 13 2 Creating Bills of Material You can create a new Bill of Materials for an assembly and a part if necessary You must first create the design and save it before a BOM can be created 13 2 1 Creating a New BOM gt To create a new Bill of Materials a 1 In the Home window or any workspace from the File menu select New gt Bill of Materials or select the Bill of Materials icon from the main toolbar 2 The Bill of Materials dialog appears D Bill of Materials New Bill of Materials Choose Template 2 Standard Template BOM ANSI ABC Custom Template Design Workspace designenar motion tutonal actuator Configurations default vw New Bill of Materials template 2 Co 0 3 Select the New Bill of Materials option 4 Inthe Choose Template area select the Standard Template or Custom Template option 5 If you are using a Standard Template select the appropriate template size as well Note Alibre Design includes the BOM ANSI ABC and BOM ANSI D amp E bill of materials templates
171. at menu select Data Alignment gt Left or Center or Right Or Select the Align Left Center a or Align Right a tool from the View toolbar The column header and data alignment changes 13 4 6 Moving Rows and Columns in a Table You can drag and drop rows and columns to reposition data within the table 294 Chapter 13 Bills of Material To move a row or column Move the cursor over a table column header or row number Part Number Part Humber B 935 62 535 Click the column header cell or row number cell and drag to the new table position Release the mouse button to complete the move 13 4 7 Sorting Data in Ascending or Descending Order You can sort column data in ascending or descending order gt de To sort data in ascending or descending order Click the table header of the column you want to sort The entire column is highlighted 1 To sort the column data in ascending order select the Sort Ascending 54 tool from the main toolbar or from the Data menu select Sort gt Ascending Or 9 To sort the column data in descending order select the Sort Descending i tool from the main toolbar or from the Data menu select Sort gt Descending The data is sorted accordingly 13 4 8 Changing the Header Display Orientation You can change the table display so that the header is located at the bottom of the table and the row numbers increase going up the table By default the header is locat
172. aterials 2 New Bill of Materials Choose Template Standard Template BOM ANS ABC Custom Template Design Workspace default user Four Connectors Configurations Male Large Male Large Male Small Male Mixed Femal Large Female Small Female Mixed Mixed Large Mited Small Two standard properties are added to the available options for inserting a column in a BOM They are e Configuration Name The name of the active configuration of a part used in an assembly e Part Configuration Name The name of the active configuration appended to the name of the design E H Insert Column Standard Properties Property Display As Data Type Configuration Hame ltem Muro lem Num Number Cost Center Created By Created Date Remove Part Num Partum Text Creating Application Description Document Number Revision Revision Text Eng Approval Date y Comment Comment Text Eng Approved By Estimated Cost keywords Last Author Custom 4 gt Quantity Quantity Number Part Name Part Name Text Below are two examples of BOMs that were created for an assembly that calls out a bolt that has three different configurations The assembly uses at least one of each bolt configuration Example 1 The BOM does not have the column Configuration Name included in it You can see that the part Small Bolt is list
173. ating video OF Cancel 1 In Video handler select the CODEC you want to use to generate the video AVI file This drop down list shows all the video handlers or CODECs that are installed and registered on your particular system This list will vary from system to system and some systems may not have any Codecs installed 2 The Handler description field shows the internal description of the CODEC as provided by the CODEC itself 3 The Quality parameter is used by some CODECs to determine the quality of the video to generate Generally the higher the quality the larger the file size 4 The Key frame every field is used by some CODECs to determine how often the entire image should be stored within the generated video file Some CODECs use a process whereby an initial frame a key frame is stored then each subsequent frame is stored only as the difference between that frame and the last The purpose of this process is to minimize file size a Click OK to close the form If a suitable CODEC file and parameters have been chosen a video will be generated while the simulation is played If you do not want to create a video or save your changes click Cancel 16 7 3 Generating X Y Plots from Simulation Data You can generate X Y Plots if you have selected Dynamic Measurements for at least one of your moving parts or constraints gt To select a Dynamic Measurement 1 In the Motion Explorer right click on one of the moving pa
174. ation if you need to rotate the imported operation You can also use the Rotate and Move handles in the work area to locate the feature two dots appear on the preview Move your cursor over them to get the move or rotate arrows When you get the arrows click and hold to drag the feature around Click Apply and Close You will see in the new feature or sketch in the Feature Tree The new operation and the sketch created by the catalog feature is a first class operation that can be edited deleted 7 15 Copying Existing Features After features have been created they can be mirrored or patterned to easily create copies 7 15 1 Mirroring Features Mirroring a feature creates a copy of a feature mirrored about a reference plane or planar face If the original feature changes the mirrored copy will automatically change as well 128 Chapter 7 Feature Creation gt To mirror a feature 1 From the Feature menu select Mirror or select the Feature Mirror tool from the Part Modeling toolbar The Feature Mirror dialog appears Feature Mirror Features to mirror Mirror Geometry Wed Extrusions 1 gt Mirror plane el 2 Select the Features to mirror from the work area or the Design Explorer 3 Select the Mirror plane You can use a reference plane or planar face 4 Check the Mirror Geometry box if you want to mirror the geometry exactly You will normally be concerned with this option when you are mirroring a featur
175. ationship You can add new relationships by dragging objects to the list above Relationships 4 objects 606 KB ALIBRE ronb Figure 110 Relationships Dialog This dialog contains the following tabs e Relationships From this Object represents items that make up the item currently selected In the example below we are looking at an assembly file All the Relationships in this case are in the Relationships From this Object tab which means we re looking at the parts and subassemblies that comprise Cutter Assembly ad_asm and that nothing else such as a drawing is using the assembly Relationships Cutter AD_PRT Relationships From This Object 0 Relationships To This Object 1 All Relationships 1 Name A i cutter assembly AD_ASM Add Relationship You can add new relationships by dragging objects to the list above Relationships 1 object 99 5 KB ALIBRE ronb Check Out Figure 111 Relationships Example e Relationships to this Object represents where the item we are looking at is being used In the example below we re looking at cutter ad_prt one of the parts that is used in the assembly example above We can see that it has one relationship and that it points to Cutter assembly ad_asm Limitations of Relationships Relationships can only see one level deep in either direction For example if you have several parts that make up an assembly and then create a drawing of that assembly the
176. ature in the design explorer NOTE If a part or assembly in the tool is hidden in the dedicated assembly it will not participate in the Design Boolean feature until it is unhidden 7 16 3 Editing Design Boolean Features The Boolean feature is parametrically related to the tool part or assembly Therefore if the tool is modified and saved the Boolean feature will update upon reopening if you make changes to the tool inside the assembly context see Editing a Part in an Assembly on page 229 the changes will automatically update without saving and reopening You can also modify the dedicated assembly that contains the blank and the tool by repositioning parts as well as adding or removing parts gt To edit a Boolean design feature 1 In the Design Explorer right click the Design Boolean feature you want to modify 2 Select Edit The Design Boolean Editor Environment workspace appears 3 Make the necessary modifications to the dedicated assembly remembering that hidden parts and assemblies will not participate in the Design Boolean feature then from the File menu select Commit to apply the changes The workspace will transform back into the part workspace 7 17 Direct Editing Direct Editing is the ability to manipulate a model without explicitly editing a feature or a sketch Using the Direct Editing tools you can move remove or resize existing geometry Direct Editing tools are available in a part workspace or when you are
177. available once the view is converted to a Precise View gt To convert Fast Views to Precise Views Right click on the view and select Create Precise View If this option is not available then your view is already a Precise View Or Right click on the view in the Drawing Explorer and select Create Precise View If this option is not available then your view is already a Precise View 12 2 Working in a Drawing 12 2 1 Drawing Mark Up Mode Drawing mark up mode allows you to load a drawing without loading the underlying designs for the drawing You will enter mark up mode if the designs are unavailable or if you have modified any of the designs and choose not to update the drawing The features available in mark up mode are all of the features that are accessible immediately after opening a drawing while the parametric data continues loading as well as Insert Annotations and Insert Redlines One benefit to Drawing Mark up Mode is that you can send another user a drawing to review without sending the design files 23 Chapter 12 Drawings Opening a Drawing that References Missing Items When you open a drawing that references items that are missing you have two options replace the missing item or delete the views that use the missing items Immediately upon opening a drawing where this situation occurs you will see the Missing Designs dialog shown below In this case the last item is missing as indicated by Not Found Missing ite
178. awings e Can be modified globally or on an individual basis Dimensions can be placed between centermarks centerlines and any other applicable item in a view e Can be individually deleted edited or placed on a different layer e Can be inserted on a per view basis e Can be inserted individually for projected circular or cylindrical geometry gt To turn off automatic centermark and centerline display 1 From the File menu select Properties The Drawing Properties dialog appears 2 Click the Detailing tab 3 Under View Creation Options uncheck Centerlines and or Centermarks 4 Click Apply and Close 243 Chapter 12 Drawings gt To modify global centermark and centerline properties 1 From the File menu select Properties The Drawing Properties dialog appears 2 Click the Detailing tab 3 Under Centerlines modify the Centermark Style Short Dash Extension and Gap as needed 4 Click Apply and Close gt To modify individual centermark and centerline properties 1 Select the Select tool from the Viewing toolbar 2 Move the cursor over the centermark or centerline to be modified 3 Right click the centermark or centerline and select Edit from the pop up menu The Centerline Properties dialog appears 4 Modify the Centermark Style Short Dash Extension and Gap 5 If acentermark is being edited you can rotate it by specifying a Direction angle 6 Click OK to accept the changes gt To delete a
179. back and intelligence built into the constraint application system Two workflows can be used when in Quick Constraint mode e Drag and Drop e Explicit selection Note Quick Constraint mode is only used to apply constraints not to edit previously created constraints Drag and Drop Constraint Placement gt To enter Quick Constraint mode 1 Press Ctrl Q or select the Quick Constraint tool Es from the modeling toolbar The Quick Constraint button is depressed on the modeling toolbar and the dialog appears Assembly Constraints 214 Chapter 11 Assembly Design 4 Note You can choose whether to display the dialog at all times or only after two items to constrain have been selected If the dialog does not display immediately and you would like it to select the option Persistent Constraint Dialog from the Tools gt Options gt General tab Design Interaction Prompt for newer versions 4 Prompt to edit sketch 4 Prompt on detecting parameters with missing extemal link M Automatically Analyze Sketch I Persistent Constraint Dialog coes Click on the item you want to constrain and begin to drag it Clicking and dragging on a face or edge will make it become green This signifies that you are in the process of a drag and drop constraint While dragging the part hover the mouse over another part When the mouse hovers over an area of another part the area it is over will also turn green When this happ
180. basis or only to the current workspace 2 5 Common Terms Here are some of the most common terms you will need to be familiar with when starting out with Alibre Design Home Window The Home Window is the starting point for all activities in Alibre Design This is the first window to open and is always open while Alibre Design is running 3 Home Alibre Design Expert File Tools Window Help Please select an icon to get started ae Figure 6 Startup Screen Workspace Windows where design related tasks take place You can have multiple workspaces open at one time Each part sheet metal part assembly drawing or bill of material has a separate workspace Work area The area in a workspace where sketches and features are created Chapter 2 Getting Started With Alibre Design Design Explorer The area in a workspace where the history of the model creation is listed New Part 1 Alibre Design Expert File Edit view Insert Sketch 3DSketch Feature Tools Team Design Window Help 57 4 6 Q eee AG de De Dd Sco Be amp DA 08800880 EE E Design Explorer Toolbars ES Config lt 1 gt Axes Work Area Aris Y Bis 7 Z Axis w Planes SE S YZ Plane ZX Plane W Points 8 Origin oe Surfaces 29 Redline Views y Section Views W Features D Edges da Faces vertices Design Explorer BOOP CO A AAA AS AAA OA Figure 7 Part Workspace Sketch Mode You enter sketch mode in order to create a sk
181. bedded within the file This file is located in the folder C Documents and Settings All Users Application Data Alibre Design System Files Choose the Type thread desired Chapter 7 Feature Creation Specify the Length of the thread By default the thread will extend the entire length of the hole Choose the Source to specify the diameter to use for modeling the hole You may choose from the minor pitch major and drill tap diameters Click OK to create the hole and define the thread Note The thread information is now included with the hole data While a graphical representation of the threads is not displayed on the model when the 2D detailed drawing is created from the 3D design the threaded hole information can be automatically called out in the applicable orthographic view See Displaying Hole Callouts and Threads in Views see Threads and Callouts on page 271 7 14 Catalog Features Extrude boss and cut features hole features sheet metal cut and dimple features and sketches can be cataloged and reused in the same and other designs 7 14 1 Saving Catalog Features gt 1 To save a catalog feature From the Feature menu select Save Catalog Feature The Save Catalog Feature dialog appears Save Catalog Feature E Exported Feature Select the feature or sketch to save from the Design Explorer Click Save As The Save As dialog appears Use the Document Browser embedded in the Save As dialog to nav
182. ble ooncccccnnccccoconnncnnnnononnncnnnnnonononnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnss 294 13 4 7 Sorting Data in Ascending or Descending OrdeT coooonnccnncccccononcconnncnonnnnnccnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnanennnnnns 295 13 4 8 Changing the Header Display OrientatiON coooonncncccconccnnccncnnncnnonnnononnnnncnnnnnonnnnnnnnonannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 295 13 4 9 Customizing Header and Data Font Properties ooocccccnccccccconncnnnnccnnnnannnnnnnonononnnnnnnnnnnnonaneninnnnnos 295 194100 Overtidind Design Valle a a i e 296 13 4 11 Modifying the BOM View Styl8 oocccccccccccccncccnnncconononoconononononncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncns 296 to TRESCGUCNIGING Dla ase tenet ce sleet ce AC ica 297 13413 UBdatlng the Fale ti tee ye dec octet soe aday eao aE a asad etek coo 297 184 1d EXPONIT A BO Misco ad 298 BAIS set OM eis aaa Me oteheacnne secede tates beara a Pole steankede e a a a E 298 vil UPpenind and Saviano 299 tl Opening EF WSS sete cece ici 299 14 1 1 Opening Files from the File SySteM oooonnnccnncccccoconccononocononnnnnnnnnonononnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnanenennnons 299 14 1 2 Opening Files from the Alibre Vault ooocccccccccccconncconocononennncnnnnnonnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnanennnnnnnss 299 t42 SAVING Alesis iia 300 1421 General Saving Princes cusco 300 14 2 2 Single Item Save vs Multi ltem Save ooooooococonononnccnnnnnnnnnncnn
183. bly Mate and align assembly constraints must be applied before an exploded view can be created gt To insert an exploded view using Auto Explode mode 1 From the Insert menu select Exploded View The assembly changes to the exploded view An Exploded View item is listed in blue under the Exploded View node in the Design Explorer By default exploded views will be labeled Exploded View 1 Exploded View 2 etc You can rename an exploded view if desired right click the view and select Rename from the pop up menu Design Explorer ER Nags Rotor Blade yoke GL Axes So Planes a Points L s Redline views B Section Views EHER Exploded Views a T 1 E rei o m L iT CL iT ae The majority of the assembly modeling tools become dimmed and the explode view tools become available on the Assembly Modeling toolbar Manual Explode explode the parts manually Auto Explode allow the software to explode the parts automatically a Expand Explosion increase the distance parts explode auto mode k1 Contract Explosion decease the distance parts explode auto mode View Part Trails show hide the trail lines Edit Exploded View Steps view edit exploded view steps 2 To automatically explode the assembly click the Auto Explode Assembly tool from the Assembly Modeling toolbar or from the Tools menu select Auto Explode Assembly The assembly is exploded The distance
184. can also be applied manually to figures after they have been sketched with tools from the Constraints toolbar The Constraints fly out toolbar is available from the Sketching toolbar in part and drawing workspaces 4 7 1 Constraint Types Fourteen different constraints can be applied to sketch figures g ES Hae pe Lt Fixed Figures may be constrained to a fixed position in the sketch After the constraint is applied the node or figure may not be moved without first deleting the constraint Can be applied to a node or any sketch figure Vertical One or more lines may be constrained to be vertical Sketch nodes may also be constrained to be vertically aligned Lines may be vertically constrained automatically as they are sketched or after placement Can be applied to any line or any two nodes Horizontal One or more lines may be constrained to be horizontal Sketch nodes may also be constrained to be horizontally aligned Lines may be horizontally constrained automatically as they are sketched or after placement Can be applied to any line or any two nodes Intersection Two figures may be constrained to intersect at a point Can be applied to a point and any combination of arcs or lines Symmetric An axi symmetric relationship may be defined between figures After a symmetric constraint is applied the figures are arranged axi symmetrically and equidistant from a reference line or sketch line The figures will be
185. can be applied for imported data The selections for import are as follows Heal Recalculates inaccurate geometry in order to make the part more accurate upon import Make Tolerant Tags inaccurate geometry for more intelligent subsequent operations Discard Non Solid Faces Discards faces that are not part of a solid These faces may have been created for reference Unstitch To Standalone Faces Converts a solid part to a set of faces This can improve the visual representation of the part This option is not recommended if changes will be made to the solid Stitch To Solid Converts a surface model to a solid part Override Units Converts the units to those specified Note All import options can operate simultaneously with the exception of Convert To Surface Model and Convert To Solid Model Chapter 15 Importing and Exporting Data Select Import Advisor to generate an import summary after the file has been imported With this option selected a dialog appears after import displaying errors suggestions and options that can be changed for the specific import issue e Very High Warning and error checks plus edge convexity change point and face face intersection checks Recommended Settings z Import Option Current Suggested a Heal E m cle O U ae oo cues haa O O Y Sold Model gt Select Healing Analysis if Heal is checked under Import Options This produces a report on any data corrected as a result
186. can create a new reference plane parallel to an existing reference plane or planar face and tangent to an existing cylindrical face gt To create a tangent plane 1 Select the Insert Plane E tool from the Inspection toolbar or from the Insert menu select Plane or right click in the work area and select Insert Plane from the pop up menu The Insert Plane dialog appears 2 Select the existing reference plane or planar face to offset 3 Select the cylindrical face that the new plane will be tangent to A preview of the new plane is displayed 4 Check the Reverse option to choose the alternative tangent point 5 If desired you can select the Symmetry Axis option to create the plane parallel to the original plane or face and through the axis of the cylindrical face 6 Click OK to create the plane Figure 26 Tangent Reference Plane 76 Chapter 5 Reference Geometry 5 1 3 Angled Plane You can create a new plane through an edge or axis at an angle to an existing reference plane or planar face gt To create an angled plane Select the Insert Plane 55 tool from the Inspection toolbar or from the Insert menu select Plane or right click in the work area and select Insert Plane from the pop up menu The Insert Plane dialog appears Select an existing edge or axis Select an existing reference plane or planar face A preview of the new plane is displayed Enter the Angle value If necessary select Reverse to create
187. cccnnnonnccnnnnononnnoannnnnnns 214 11 4 3 Inserting Assembly Constraints Manual Method occcccccccccconccnnnncccnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnonononnnnnnnnnnos 217 TAA MEDESIN CONSTamiS ien a E deus nance ele a cecaiata N RA 218 1145 Managing Assembiy G OS tal Sii iii dai 218 T146 Failed Assembly Constraints tido 220 Flexible Subassemblies ceci ecc i oia sitiada iaa iio E 220 Checking Tor MiSneSrences ROD a are ted ae AN Ea eos Eon 222 nseningan Exploded VieW 2 oie 223 11 7 1 Inserting an Exploded View Using Auto Explode Mode coooccnccccoccconcccooccnnccnonccnncononncnnnnnonnnnnonnnas 223 11 7 2 Inserting an Exploded View Using Manual Explode cccccccccssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeessaaeeeeeeseaaeeeeeseas 224 11 7 3 Viewing and or Editing an Exploded VieW oooonncccccconccnccconccnnconononononnnnncnnnonnnncnonononnnnnnnnnanrnnnnnns 227 Pza Exploded VIEW SOS asc il coda 227 Deleting ans ExOlOGed VIEW a ie e e dead 228 Duplicatina an Explode VIEW son e daa 228 Editing and Designing Pans inthe Assembly oia A At ni 228 11 10 1 Creating a New Part within an ASSEMDIY cccccccseeeeceeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeesaeeeeeessesaaeeeeeseeseesesaaass 228 1110 2 Editing Part ham ASSOMDNY e a e a EEE a Ea E 229 11 10 3 Improving Assembly Performance when Editing PartS cooooccccconnnnoconnnnonononononcnnononcnnonanenonnnoos 230 Importing Parts into an Assembly oococonccnccccccnccnncnnccnnnnnnnnnnnnonn
188. ccconnnononoccnnnnnnnononnnnonononnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnrnnnnaannnrennnnns 169 9 9 3 Modifying Spreadsheet Driven ParameterS cccccccoccnnccccnccnncncnannnnnnononnnnnnononcnnnnononnnnnnonanrnnnnnnnnnennnns 171 9 9 4 Re linking a Spreadsheet toa Part muii coin e dd da a e a aD 173 ONO 2D PDOFRPUDIS NINO era a an E E ETE E N A 174 gT NS A a a a a rhe a neers eee 175 9 10 2 Continuing with an Existing PDF cooonnnnnnnncccccccnnccnnnncnononnncnnnnonononnncnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononenanenoss 179 9410 3 PDF Publishing Td cs 179 9 10 4 Viewihig Published PDF FICS ua ddan thee vane Solas ene ds 181 9 10 5 Improving the Quality of Published PDF Files ooooncccccccccononcconnccnnononcconnncnnnononannconcnnonananenoos 182 9106 PUDISRING a Modeltto HTM asnicar ir 182 FIOS do A anc eathennqtorsanceactesteenospaceeee EE 182 910 8 A EE 182 9 10 9 Troubleshooting Failed Features oooocccnccccnnnnnnccnnncnonononncononcnnonnanncnnonnnnonnnnnennncnnnnnannrnnnncnnonaaanennss 183 91010 WIG WING OASIS oa o 183 OO Display ODUIMIZA ION a S 183 DESIN Configura llos ui 185 10 1 Design Configurations Overview ccccssssssssssssseeeeeeceeeeeecaaaaeessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeaaaaaaaaaeeeeeeeeeeesseeaaaaaagsnseeeees 185 10 1 1 Lock properties represented in the Design Explorer ooocccccccconooncccnnccccononcccnnnnnnonnnnncnnnnnononnnncnnnnnnnos 186 10 1 2 Editing Properties of Configuration iia
189. ccssccccsssseecceeeeeccesececeaseeeceuseecsaueeeseueesseueeeessaueeeseueeesseseeesseseeessasees 344 16 9 Frequently Asked Questions FAQ ccccsssssssssseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaauaaessaseeeeeeeeeeeeeseseaaaaeassseeeees 345 THE Alibr Vault DY M Fil sS scort 347 1721 DESCUPUO MO Metadata ii 348 17 2 Differences Between the Vault and the File SySteM occcccconncnncccnocnnncccnoncnncnonncnnnonononononononcnnnnnnoncnnnonnanenns 348 vill 17 3 17 4 17 5 17 6 17 7 17 8 17 9 17 10 17 11 17 12 Enabling OF Disabling The AllOke Vai a A A e 348 Checking Items In and Out of the Alibre Vault ccccccccccnnnnoccnnonannncnnnnnononnnnnonononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnanannos 349 FIACIAO Hems ANS ANDON UI eses isos ocn 350 a A A N 350 A coe nee ences ee caret A E 352 micl ale lanl ate PloS erneta a a a eenes teri Seer eee ee teen eee eee a e ee ee a er ereer Te 354 GOD VIMO ETIS tactasciretets stat td io 354 O eons deem aan nines 354 DEHN Up INOUMEC AON Stadt di Ar tias 356 A A re tare eee eee ee oe eee 356 TAO VERSIONING GONCO DIS caida iio 356 1751022 WIEWING Veron ISO Vaart lio li ico 357 TOS Creating Version Labels rosier T a EA a E Ea A ERA 357 17 104 Roling Back to Previous Versions ceia is 358 A A a e E a e E 359 Genn ited SN as coer cee edie teem cs Saeco noc E A A eeuuiaetaet 361 O 363 Chapter 1 Installation CHAPTER 1 Installation Thank you for choosing
190. ce installed and enabled Alibre Motion is accessed from the main menu of the Assembly Workspace The Motion Explorer similar to the Design Explorer allows you to view and interact with all of the Parts Constraints Physical Elements Motors Springs Dampers and Motions and Settings that make up a simulation In This Chapter An Overview AAA A A CMO nn Wes fate A San ec Ea Wee hf ue rana Eea arii 313 Installing and Enabling Alibre MOON cian 314 ithe Alibre Motion Userintertace sa isa 314 OVEIVIEW Or SIMULatInG and PlAVING sxec EE A 322 Forces and Torques in SIMUIAUONS sessar ansarar saar E e aa ii 322 SIMULAUON Types and Paramele Sandra rs E E E E EE Aa 331 Results and Feedback from Alibre Motion Simulations ia a 336 POLS CHING INE TONCES ito e a o etre sete a a e aee a tates e a a eeetnbaatabitaes 344 Freguently ASked QUESTIONS FAQ raira E E S 345 16 1 An Overview of Simulation Newton s laws of motion provide an accurate description of how bodies move under the influence of forces However except in the simplest of situations applying those laws can be complex The motion of a body can rarely be described by a single equation predicting its position and acceleration at any time in the future Real designs usually involve multiple bodies and multiple forces or motions all interacting with each other in ways that are too complex to solve without the aid of computer simulation The field of physics and mathematics involved in these c
191. centermark or centerline 1 Select the Select tool from the Viewing toolbar 2 Move the cursor over the centermark or centerline to be deleted 3 Right click the centermark or centerline and select Delete from the pop up menu OR Right click the figure and select Remove Center from the pop up menu gt To insert a centermark or centerline on a per view basis 1 Select the Select tool from the Viewing toolbar 2 Move the cursor over the view in which centermarks and centerlines are to be added 3 Right click the view and select Insert Centers Note To insert the centerlines for individual holes select the hole then right click and choose Insert Center gt To insert a centerline on projected circular or cylindrical geometry 1 Select the Select tool from the Viewing toolbar 2 Move the cursor over the figure on which to insert a centerline 3 Right click the figure and select Insert Center from the pop up menu The centerline is displayed on the figure Note You can also choose to show centermarks and or centerlines during the view creation process In the Standard Views Creation dialog click the More Options button to see the View Creation Options Check the option s you want to display in the view Refer to nserting Standard Views on page 234 for more information 244 Chapter 12 Drawings 12 2 13 Optimizing the Drawing Display Optimizing your drawing display allows Alibre Design to choose how many segmen
192. ces You can select as many as necessary but you must select a complete pocket or boss For example in the previous image boss 3 has two faces that must be selected while boss 2 has five faces that must be selected 4 Click in the Direction field to activate it then select a linear edge axis plane or planar face Choosing an edge or axis allows you to move in one direction while choosing a plane or planar face allows you to move in two directions 5 Check the Snap Every option if you would like the value of the Depth to snap at a defined increment 6 Set the Depth to move the pocket or boss You can do this in two ways a Entera value in the Depth field and select the Refresh tool or press the Tab key to see a preview b Left click on the hot spot shown on the face and drag it until you have it placed approximately where you want it The Depth field will be populated with the new value 7 Click Reset to erase the current item from the Selection field and set the Depth value back to 0 143 8 9 Chapter 7 Feature Creation Click Apply to accept the new position The model is updated and the Push Pull tool remains active The Auto Apply option only applies if you are using the Push Pull Face Sketch tool Left click another face or sketch to perform another Push Pull Pocket or Boss operation or click Exit to leave the Push Pull mode Common Errors When Using Push Pull Pocket or Boss Selecting a face tha
193. ch From the Sketch menu select Insert Custom Symbol The Select Custom Symbol dialog appears Browse appropriate location and select the custom symbol you created to use as a template Click OK In the work area select a location corresponding to the anchor point defined in the custom template If your anchor point was defined at 0 0 pick the sketch node representing the origin of the sheet The custom template appears in the work area If any fields were created with the custom template a dialog appears containing the field properties Enter the text associated with the fields Click OK 267 Chapter 12 Drawings 12 5 5 Automatically Filling Title Block Information In Alibre Design there are two types of fields user input fields and Design Property fields User input fields prompt the user during drawing creation to enter in data This data then gets positioned and displayed according to the field location and settings Design Property fields pull information directly from the part or assembly files and do not allow or require user intervention This provides a high degree of consistency and accuracy since it reduces human error Any data located in the File gt Properties gt General tab of a part or assembly workspace can be used to automatically populate data in a drawing There are two ways you can use Design Property fields The first is to create a custom template that contains them The second is to create custom symbol
194. ch Figures You can create sketch figures while you are in Sketch Mode 4 4 1 Line gt To sketch a line 1 Select the Line tool from the Sketching toolbar or from the Sketch menu select Figures gt Line or right click and select Line from the pop up menu 2 Position the cursor at the location you want to start the line 3 Click in the Work Area to start the line and drag the cursor to sketch the line 4 Click again to complete the line segment You can continue to sketch additional line segments by clicking Double click or press ESC on the keyboard to end the line Note During sketching hints that provide step by step instructions are displayed in the lower left corner of the workspace gt To resize a line 1 Select the Select tool from the Sketching toolbar 2 Move the cursor over a node at the end of the line 3 Click hold the mouse button and drag the node to resize the line 4 Release the mouse button gt To move a line 1 Select the Select tool from the Sketching toolbar 2 Move the cursor over the line 3 Click hold the mouse button and drag the line to a new location 29 Chapter 4 Sketching 4 Release the mouse button gt Tochange the angle of a diagonal line 1 Select the Select tool from the Sketching toolbar 2 Move the cursor over a node at the end of the line 3 Click hold the mouse button and drag the node to change the angle 4 Release the mouse button
195. come equal in size after the constraint has been placed Can be applied to any two figures of like nature e g two lines or two circles Coradial Figures may be constrained to share the same center point and same radius Circles arcs can be coradially constrained automatically during sketching or after placement Can be applied to two or more arcs or circles Concentric Figures may be constrained to share the same center point Circles arcs can be concentrically constrained automatically during sketching or after placement Can be applied to two or more arcs or circles Collinear Figures may be constrained so that they lie in the same line Lines may be collinearly constrained automatically as they are sketched or after placement Can be applied to a combination of two or more lines axes reference lines edges Coincident A point can be constrained so that it lies on a figure Can be applied to a point and any sketch figure Midline A node can be constrained so that it is fixed at the middle of a line Midpoint constraints can be placed automatically as a figure is sketched or after a figure has been sketched Can be applied to a node and a line or arc Equal Figures can be constrained to be equal in size Equal constraints can be applied automatically during sketching or placed manually after a figure has been sketched Can be applied to any two or more sketch figures Tangent Figures can be constrained to be tan
196. ct the Publish to Acrobat PDF tool from the PDF Publishing toolbar The PDF Publishing Wizard opens and the BOM Drawing tab is active The BOM Template option is selected Click Next If you want to add a header select the Title tab and enter a title Click the Font button fo change the font of the Title Tip The Title can be one line only and the text will not wrap If you want to add a footer select the Footer tab and enter a footer Click the Font button to change the font of the Footer Tip The Footer can be one line only and the text will not wrap Click Next In the Page Layout section select the page layout to which you want to publish Check the Put my logo on the top right corner to include an image in the PDF then click Browse to find and select the image In Save Location browse to the location where you want to save the PDF file Chapter 9 Working with Parts 10 Note If you choose to save to an existing file after clicking Publish you will be prompted to choose if you want to overwrite the existing file or add the published page to the existing file at the end as an additional page Choose Preview if you would like to view the PDF file before saving it This creates a temporary file that is deleted if you do not publish the file Click Publish The PDF file will be created and saved to the location you specified and can be viewed Adobe Reader 7 0 8 or higher 9 10 2 Continuing with an
197. cted is listed in the Interference found box Each interference will also be listed individually specifying which parts are interfering as well as the interfering volume To further analyze interferences select interference Display Options e Show All Interfering Volumes displays the detected interferences in red e Wireframe Non Interfering Parts displays the parts that are not interfering in wireframe display mode e Hide Parts Not in Group 1 or Group 2 hides any parts that were not in the Group 1 or Group 2 selections To export the interference information to a CSV file click the Export button Chapter 11 Assembly Design 11 7 Inserting an Exploded View You can insert exploded views of the assembly during the design process The exploded view allows you to display a configuration of the assembly with the parts separated You can use the auto explode mechanism manually separate parts or a combination of both You can create multiple exploded views in an assembly workspace The exploded views are saved with the design and can subsequently be used as views in drawings The assembly parts must be constrained before the exploded view can be used The exploded view however has no effect on the interpretation of assembly constraints 11 7 1 Inserting an Exploded View Using Auto Explode Mode You can create multiple exploded views in an assembly workspace You can auto explode an assembly to quickly create an exploded view of an assem
198. d 89 Chapter 6 3D Sketching Coordinate guides are displayed while in 3D sketch to indicate the current location of the cursor with respect to the CCS Guides for the sketch plane are displayed on the sketch plane A guide extending from the base plane to the current cursor position indicates the current elevation Figure 27 Coordinate Guides Shown with the Sketch Plane Grid gt To change the sketch plane LN 1 Select the Cycle Sketch Plane tool from the Sketching toolbar or from the 3D Sketch menu select Cycle Sketch Plane 2 The sketch plane cycles to the next primary plane each time the tool is clicked If the grid is turned on it is displayed on the current base plane Notes This command can be issued during other commands You can also cycle the sketch plane by pressing the Tab or F key on the keyboard If you press one of these keys while in a figure creation command the cursor will remain in the same position in space rather than moving to an elevation of zero on the new sketch plane Elevation Elevation is controlled in two ways The first method is to drag the mouse while in elevate mode The second method is to use the Elevation Dialog gt To control elevation in Elevate mode 1 Select the Elevate tool from the sketching toolbar or from the 3D Sketch menu select Elevate This puts you into Elevate mode While in Elevate mode the coordinates on the base plane remain constant 2 Click an
199. d Parameter Values are locked 198 Chapter 10 Design Configurations The result will be A Female Connector lt 1 gt Small noo goog Hoag Female Connectors Female Connector 3 gt Female Connector 4 gt Female Connectors 5 gt Female Connector b gt Female Connectors gt ik A Female Connector 1 gt Small 350 Linear Pattern 1 Female Connector lt 4 Small Female Connector 3 gt Small Female Connectors 4 Small Figure 85 Design Explorer of Assembly Config 2 new pattern instances not included 10 3 4 Helpful Notes on Design Configurations in Assemblies e All configurations have the same set of constraints A constraint added to one configuration will be added to all configurations However constraint values are parameters that can differ between configurations e All configurations have a common set of available components A component deleted from one configuration is deleted from all configurations however you can suppress components in individual configurations In the Design Explorer configurations are listed in the order they were created e You cannot delete the active configuration If only a single configuration exists it is by default the active configuration and the Delete option will be disabled If you change configurations in the assembly while editing an exploded view that configuration will open in the exploded view the next time you
200. d drag the cursor to the desired height from the base plane 3 To exit Elevate mode select the Elevate tool again from the sketching toolbar or from the 3D Sketch menu select Elevate Notes To change the elevation of an existing figure click and drag the figure while in Elevate mode Elevate can be issued during other commands 90 Chapter 6 3D Sketching While in a figure creation command Elevate can be accessed at anytime by pressing the E key on the keyboard and holding it down while placing the figure Figure 28 Elevation Height at the Base Plane Figure 29 Elevation Height Changed by Dragging Mouse Pointer 91 Chapter 6 3D Sketching gt To control elevation using Elevation Dialog 1 Select the Elevation tool from the sketching toolbar or from the 3D Sketch menu select Elevation The Elevation dialog appears 2 Enter the desired elevation in the dialog This dialog can remain open and in use during other commands 3 Click the X in the upper corner of the dialog to close when finished 6 5 Entering and Exiting 3D Sketch Mode 6 5 1 Entering 3D Sketch Mode You must enter 3D sketch mode before you can begin sketching gt Toenter 3D sketch mode Select the Activate 3D Sketch EN Or tool from the Sketching toolbar From the 3D Sketch menu select Activate 3D Sketch The activate 3D Sketch tool will appear in the active state while in 3D sketch mode 6 5 2 Exiting 3D Sketc
201. d helix 118 Chapter 7 Feature Creation 12 If applicable click the Advanced tab to specify start and end conditions other than the Natural default condition e Natural or Flat Conditions for each of the two ends of the coil The ends can have different end conditions If Flat is chosen you will also need to specify the Transition Angle and the Flat Angle e Transition Angle The distance in degrees over which the coil achieves the transition normally less than one revolution The example shows the top with a natural end and the bottom end with a one quarter turn transition 90 degrees and no flat angle e Flat Angle The distance in degrees the coil extends after transition with no pitch flat Provides transition from the end of the revolved coil to a flattened end The example shows the same coil as the Transition angle shown above but with a half turn 180 degree flat angle specified 13 Specify a Parallel or Normal Profile Orientation condition 14 Click OK to create the helical feature Figure 51 Helical Cut Feature 7 8 Fillet Fillet features create a rounded face on a part You can place a fillet on individual edges and all edges of a face You can create a constant radius fillet or a variable radius fillet 119 Chapter 7 Feature Creation 7 8 1 Constant Radius Fillets Constant radius fillets create a rounded face of constant radius on an edge gt To create a constant radius fillet
202. d reference geometry item Right click the reference geometry item in the Design Explorer and select Delete from the pop up menu or select the reference geometry item in the Design Explorer or work area and press Delete on the keyboard 5 8 Editing Reference Geometry Properties You can modify the properties associated with an inserted reference geometry item gt To edit an inserted reference geometry item 1 Right click the reference geometry item in the Design Explorer and select Edit from the pop up menu or right click the reference geometry item in the work area and select Edit from the pop up menu The dialog associated with the item appears displaying the original properties 2 Modify the properties as necessary 3 Click OK to apply the change 85 Chapter 6 3D Sketching CHAPTER 6 3D Sketching 3D Sketching allows you to create guide curves for better control of lofts In addition using 3D sketches allows you to create sweeps that are ideal for modeling piping and cabling systems In This Chapter The 3D Sketching Interface simimnon donas aoco toa 87 o A 88 Current O0raina So Vel adosado esco 88 Sketch Plane Guide Lines and Elevation tiorren rennene EnEn EEEE EEE EEE EEE EEED EEOAE O EEE EEE AEREE E ERE EREEEE EEEE EE DEEDEE EEEn nn 89 Entenng and Exing 3D Sketch ModE srera o o E 92 E E 92 okee NOJO S ico ia AE S 94 Workmng with Existing 3D SKEICH FIGUICS erosi A ac 95 a nn A eee ee eee eee 97 Ci
203. d view the details of any Interferences found on the Playback deck while in Simulation Mode The Interferences dialog opens which allows you to set Note Interferences can be a calculation intensive operation since it checks for clashes with each part against every other part in your assembly It is usually best to simulate first and then check Interferences only during playback because during simulation the Simulator may be using a large part of the capacity of the CPU in your computer 16 8 1 The Interferences Dialog Note Depending on the complexity of your model and the speed of your system checking for Interferences can slow playback performance 344 Check Stop playback when found to automatically stop playback whenever any Interferences are found This allows you to find the configuration where two parts first collide for instance Check Show interference extents to draw a red box around any interferences found at the current frame enabling you to quickly identify which parts are interfering and where In Interferences found Alibre Motion displays the number of interferences found in the assembly The Interferences List displays the details of each interference For each Interference the names of the two parts are shown as well as the volume of interference which is the amount the two parts overlap Chapter 16 Alibre Motion 16 9 Frequently Asked Questions FAQ e What is Dynamic Simulation Please see the o
204. drawing automatically links the BOM to the drawing gt To link a BOM to a drawing 1 From the Tools menu select Bill of Materials gt Link or in the Drawing Explorer right click the drawing name and select Link Bill of Materials from the pop up menu The Bill of Materials dialog appears 2 Tolink a new BOM select the New Bill of Materials option Specify the Standard Template or Custom Template option and select a size or template accordingly Click Browse to select the applicable design 3 To link an existing BOM select the Existing Bill of Materials option 4 Click Browse The Choose Design Part or Assembly dialog appears 5 In the Document Browser navigate to the location of the BOM 6 Select the applicable BOM in the item list 7 Click OK The BOM name appears in the Bill of Materials dialog 8 Click OK The BOM item appears in the Drawing Explorer under the drawing name You can insert callout balloons after the BOM has been linked to the drawing 13 3 3 Unlinking a BOM from a Drawing Unlinking a BOM from a drawing removes all association between the BOM and drawing If the BOM view has been inserted into the sheet unlinking a BOM will delete the BOM view from the sheet automatically gt To unlink a BOM from a drawing 1 In the Drawing Explorer right click the BOM item beneath the drawing name and select Unlink from the pop up menu or from the Tools menu select Bill of Materials gt Unlink If a BOM view e
205. e 6 Select Cut Out Material if you want to cut out the bottom of the dimple resulting in a drawn cutout operation 7 In Include Rounding you can include automatic fillets for the dimple operation Die Radius is the user specified radius for external fillets created by the dimple operation Punch Radius is the user specified radius for internal fillets created by the dimple operation 8 In Round Profile Corners you can optionally round hard corners in the tool profile sketch 9 In Label enter a unique name for the dimple feature if desired 10 Click OK 8 7 Cut Cutting removes material from a model based on the profile of a sketch The cut will be punched through a single stock thickness of the sheet metal gt To Create a Cut ct 1 From the Feature menu select Cut Or select the Cut tool from the Sheet Metal Modeling Toolbar The Cut dialog appears 2 In Sketch select the sketch you want to use for the cut Note The sketch used in a cut must be placed on a sheet metal face 3 In Label enter a unique name for the cut feature if desired 4 Click OK 8 8 Corner Rounds and Chamfers You can create a round or chamfer on any corner of a sheet metal part 156 Chapter 8 Sheet Metal Feature Creation 8 8 1 Rounding a Corner 1 From the Feature Menu select Corner Round Or select the Corner Round tool from the Sheet Metal Modeling Toolbar The Corner Round dialog appears 2 In items to Round select the edg
206. e gt To create a new color scheme 1 Click New The New Color Scheme dialog appears 2 Entera name for the new custom color scheme then click OK Note You cannot modify the default color schemes If you attempt to change a color without creating a new color scheme you will automatically be prompted to create a new scheme 3 Select a category to modify from the Category drop down list Next select a Field in that Category The diagram will show the current color scheme 4 Click in the Color field to set a new color Select the desired color then select OK to apply the setting Note A gradient background can be achieved by setting different colors for the General Background Top and General Background Bottom fields A solid background can be achieved by setting these to be the same color 5 Click OK to finish creating the new color scheme 3 1 5 Multiple Views You can split the work area into as many as four different views You can zoom rotate and set the view mode in each view independently gt To split the work area into multiple views 1 In a workspace from the Window menu select Split View 2 Select Horizontal Vertical or Both The Horizontal and Vertical options split the work area into two views The Both option splits the work area into four views gt To select a view and make it active Click anywhere in the view border A red arrow appears in the upper right corner of the active view Y
207. e Shortly after purchasing Alibre Design new customers receive an email from Alibre containing a user name and a temporary password lf you register and or purchase on the website your user name and password are displayed at that time Chapter 2 Getting Started With Alibre Design 2 Click Submit If an internet connection is detected your license key will be automatically retrieved from the Alibre server Otherwise you will see a message with a 5 character Site Key and instructions to follow to obtain a license key Note If you call Alibre Support for help in obtaining your license key you will have to provide this 5 character Site Key as well as your computer s Machine Name 3 After several seconds the startup screen will be replaced by the Alibre Design Home Window Also the Set Default Workspace dialog will appear 4 Choose which default workspace you would like to see when starting Alibre Design from the drop down menu You can select None if you do not want any default workspace to open If you have not yet registered with Alibre Inc Choose one of the available options e Register Alibre Design Xpress Register your free copy of Alibre Design Xpress to gain additional functions You will be directed to a web form where you can register with Alibre Inc You will select a user name and be provided with a password to enter in the startup screen shown above e Buy Alibre Design Products Purchase Alibre Design software
208. e When paused resets to the first simulation frame Steps backward by one frame Plays the simulation backwards from the current position Opens the Video Generation AVI form to enable you to generate movies of your simulations See Generating Video for more information Loops the playback between specified start and end points Opens Closes the X Y Plot Opens Closes the Interferences form Opens the Settings form where you can specify Simulation Playback Trace and other settings and options 321 Chapter 16 Alibre Motion 16 4 Overview of Simulating and Playing Once you have Alibre Motion installed and enabled there are simple steps to follow to create and animate a Simulation from your Assembly design The Basic Steps 1 Activate the Motion Explorer Select Motion Explorer from the Motion main menu 2 Add Physical Elements right click on constraints and other headings in the Motion Explorer enable gravity and add any motors actuators springs and dampers required 3 Enter Simulation Mode Select Enable Simulation Mode from the Motion main menu 4 Press Play Press the Play button on the Playback deck In addition you may want to 1 Show a Trace of the position of a moving part Right click a Moving Part and select Trace then select a quantity to trace 2 Create a Video of the animation Press the Video button on the Playback deck 3 Show an X Y Plot of the position velocity or anoth
209. e specify two distances one for either side of the chamfer edge Angle Distance specify a distance and angle for the chamter Equal Distance specify an equal distance for either side of the chamfer edge 4 Specify the chamfer Distance s and or Angle values accordingly 5 Deselect the Tangent Propagate option if necessary The Tangent Propagate option creates a chamfer on the selected edge as well as any other edges that form a path in which a tangent condition can be resolved 6 Click OK to create the chamfer 7 9 2 Vertex Chamfers gt To create a vertex chamfer 1 From the Feature menu select Chamfer gt Vertex The Chamfer Vertex dialog appears Chamfer Vertex Vertices to chamfer Verterc13 gt Distance 1 Distance 2 Distance 3 4 gt 4 gt 4 gt Label Vertex Chamfer lt 3 gt e OOH 2 Select the vertex or vertices to chamfer 3 Specify the three Distance values for the three chamfer edges 4 Click OK to create the chamfer 122 Chapter 7 Feature Creation 7 10 Shells Shell features hollow out a part removing the face s you select and leaving thin walls on the remaining faces The shell can be simple a single uniform wall thickness or complex multiple non uniform wall thickness gt To create a shell 1 Select the Shell tool from the Part Modeling toolbar or from the Feature menu select Shell The Shell dialog appears
210. e Design Explorer allowing you to insert other features such as a cut between an unbend and rebend pair gt Tounbend a flange 1 From the Feature menu select Unbend Or select the Unbend tool from the Sheet Metal Modeling Toolbar 2 In Fixed Face Edge choose a face or an edge to remain fixed throughout the operation 3 In Bends select the bends of the flanges to unbend or choose Select All Bends to unbend all flanges 4 Click OK gt Torebend a flange 1 From the Feature menu select Rebend Or select the Rebend tool from the Sheet Metal Modeling Toolbar 2 In Unbent Bends select the bends to rebend or choose Select All Unbent Bends to rebend all the unbent flanges 157 Chapter 8 Sheet Metal Feature Creation 8 11 Catalog Feature After features or sketches have been created they can be cataloged see Saving Catalog Features on page 127 and saved for use in other part models 8 12 Copying Existing Features After sheet metal features have been created many of them can be mirrored or patterned to easily create copies Please note that you cannot mirror Flange features Flange features are dependent on the edge chosen during creation Refer to the Feature Creation chapter for comprehensive information on creating patterns and mirrors see Copying Existing Features on page 128 8 13 Managing Features in the Design Explorer After creating a feature it is listed in the Design Explorer under the Featur
211. e Design Properties Fields Choose this design for your selected sheet below New Part 1 AD_PRT Config lt 1 gt 2 Select the Sheet and Design combination you would like to use You can also select None under Choose Design to ignore any Design Property Values on the selected sheet 3 Review the available Design Properties of the design This section is read only and provides a sanity check of the values before using them 4 Click Apply 269 Chapter 12 Drawings 12 6 Annotations You can insert various annotation types into a part assembly or drawing workspace to describe and clarify design and manufacturing information You can insert notes datums and datum targets feature control frames surface finishes weld symbols and balloon callouts To insert annotations in any workspace from the Insert menu select Annotations and then select from the available annotation types In a drawing workspace the annotation tools are also displayed on the Detailing toolbar Fi Note insert a note annotation Ho Datum insert a datum annotation LE Datum Target insert a datum target annotation Ei Feature Control Frame insert a feature control frame notation N Surface Finish insert a surface finish annotation p Weld insert a weld symbol annotation Callout insert a balloon callout annotation You can pre define certain display characteristics for annotations including arrow types and sizes text font and the shape of balloo
212. e Motion Explorer will switch to that Simulation If not a new default Simulation Setup will be generated for the newly activated Configuration 16 6 10 Deleting Simulations If you have more than one simulation for a particular assembly you can delete all of them except one One simulation will always remain in the Motion Explorer gt To delete a simulation In the Motion Explorer right click the simulation you want to delete and select Delete 16 6 11 Activating a Different Simulation If you have more than one Simulation Setup for the currently active Configuration they are displayed under the Configuration name at the top of the Motion Explorer Currently inactive Simulations are shown grayed out gt To Switch Between Simulations 1 In the Motion Explorer right click the Simulation you to which you want to switch Config lt 1 gt a Motions Orly Ml With Forces 1 gt BJ Fixed Parts Ls 2 Select Activate The Simulation is activated and checked and any relevant Simulation Warnings are shown 16 7 Results and Feedback from Alibre Motion Simulations There are several different ways to obtain and view the results of simulations in Alibre Motion each of which may be most useful in any given circumstance Any combination of these may be used at the same time e Traces e Video Generation e X Y Plots e Dynamic Measurements e Exporting Data 336 Chapter 16 Alibre Motion 16 7 1 Traces Visualizing Paths
213. e Motion in the list of available Add Ons and check the box beside it 3 Alibre Motion loads immediately You will notice that there is now a Motion main menu item in the Assembly Workspace O ALGOR DesignCheck ae Alibre M pl ibrary M Alibre PhotoRender Hg LAD Register Library Oe PAAR T solutions Library 314 Chapter 16 Alibre Motion 16 3 The Alibre Motion User Interface Once installed and enabled Alibre Motion is accessed from the main menu in an Assembly Workspace The three main components of Alibre Motion are e The Motion main menu allows you to enter Alibre Motion when you are in an assembly workspace e The Motion Explorer similar to the Design Explorer allows you to view and interact with all the Parts Constraints Physical Elements Motors Springs Dampers and Motions and Settings that make up a Simulation e The Playback Deck allows you to start the generation of a simulation and control playback of the animation 16 3 1 The Main Alibre Motion Menu The Motion main menu can be accessed in an Assembly workspace when Motion is installed and enabled Design Expert Team Design Aya Window Help DD METETE Motion Help About Alibre Motion Motion Explorer This activates Alibre Motion for the current Assembly When this is selected the Motion Explorer is shown where you can add and change any physical elements that you want to use in your simulation Enable Simulation Mode
214. e accessible on the Sheet Metal Part Modeling toolbar are accessible from the Feature menu as well The Feature menu also contains tools that do not have a corresponding toolbar icon Note These features are all solid modeling features using them in a sheet metal part may create a model that is incapable of unfolding to a flat pattern Use with caution Refer to Feature Creation on page 101 for information on creating each of these features Features gt Boss create extruded revolved sweep or loft boss features Features gt Cut create extruded revolved sweep or loft cut features Features gt Thin Wall Boss create a thin wall extruded revolved or sweep boss feature Features gt Thin Wall Cut create a thin wall extruded revolved or sweep cut feature Features gt Fillet create a fillet feature 150 Chapter 8 Sheet Metal Feature Creation Features gt Draft create a draft feature Mirror mirror a feature about an edge or axis Pattern gt Linear create copies of a feature in a linear pattern Pattern gt Circular create copies of a feature in a circular pattern Save Catalog Feature save a feature for use in other models 8 2 Sheet Metal Part Parameters Sheet metal parts have parameters that govern the way the part can be designed The parameters are used as defaults in many sheet metal features This allows a flat pattern to be resolved 1 From the File Menu select Pr
215. e allowance for the bend OR choose Use unfold length set the unfold length used when unfolding this bend d In Label type in a unique name if desired 4 Click OK to create the feature 8 4 1 Sheet Metal Changes for Version 9 1 and Later In version 9 1 of Alibre Design modifications were made to the way flanges are created in sheet metal parts These modifications ensure that the final dimensions of the sheet metal part are correct They will affect the dimensions of the part and the dimensions of the flat pattern Your models will be affected in the following ways Flanges that were created in a previous version of Alibre Design will continue to be generated using the old method and the final dimensions of your model will remain the same e New flanges created in the model after opening the part in v9 1 or later will follow the updated process for creation The final dimensions of your model will be correct but may not behave as you expect based on your past experience with the software It is possible to have flanges in your model that are calculated differently This is because you can have flanges in your model that were created in a previous version as well as new flanges created in version 9 1 or later How model dimensions are calculated The tab length and flange length determine the overall dimensions of the final sheet metal part The flange alignment type and length type that are selected during flange creation determines
216. e box then select the Pattern Color Scale and Weight for the figure 4 Click OK to apply the changes The properties of the figure will be changed but the figure will still reside on the original layer 12 2 15 Adding Sheets You can add additional sheets to the drawing as needed gt To add a sheet to the drawing 1 Select the Insert New Sheet E dialog appears tool from the Detailing toolbar or from the Insert menu select New Sheet The New Sheet Properties 2 Follow the steps outlined in Selecting a Drawing Template on page 233 and Specifying Standard Drawing Information to specify the information included in the new sheet After inserting a new sheet into the drawing the sheet will be listed in the Drawing Explorer under the Sheets node Drawing Explorer E New Drawing 2 E C3 Sheets E New 5heet lt l gt mi New Sheet lt 2 gt 3 The new sheet will initially be blank Refer to Inserting Additional Views on page 256 for information related to inserting views 4 To switch between sheets select a sheet in the Drawing Explorer to view it 5 To delete a sheet right click the sheet in the Drawing Explorer and select Delete from the pop up menu 248 Chapter 12 Drawings 12 2 16 Reordering Sheets You can quickly change the order of the sheets in the drawing file gt To reorder the sheets 1 Select the Reorder Sheets tool from the Detailing toolbar or from the Edit menu select Reorder Sheets
217. e constraint system can move the point of coincidence to any other location along the curve However any coincidence established at either endpoint of the B spline remains fixed e Tangent constraint can be placed between a B spline curve and any other figure in the sketch that can participate in the constraint system Note The note above on floating and fixed constraint applies to this constraint also Perpendicular constraint can be placed between a B spline curve and any other figure in the sketch that can participate in the constraint system Note The note above on floating and fixed constraint applies to this constraint also e Intersection point constraint can be placed between a B spline curve and any other figure in the sketch that can participate in the constraint system e Fixed constraint allows the B spline curve to be locked in place Moving a B spline curve The main distinguishing feature of the B spline is that it retains its shape at all times That is it can only translate and rotate rigidly in order to satisfy the constraints imposed on it Other items to note include e Dragging a B spline by its endpoint to existing sketch geometry introduces a fixed coincident constraint between the B spline and that figure e Otherwise dragging a B spline to an existing reference point introduces a floating coincident constraint between the B spline and that figure Dragging an existi
218. e initial views you created For example you can create a Front and a Right view initially and then create a Left view later gt To create additional standard views 1 Find the Principal View of the view set This is the Front View It is represented in the Design Explorer by the Eicon 2 Right click on this view in the Drawing Explorer or directly within the drawing workspace Select Other Standard Views 3 Select the views you want to add by pressing the buttons that represent them Views marked with a green check mark already exist in the drawing 0 Dependent Views Creation r View Selections lr i adl T m iud e E Front s m More Options gt gt Cancel Figure 91 Dependent Views Creation Dialog 4 Select the View Creation options you want for those views using the More Options button These options are identical to the options in the regular View Creation dialog 5 Click OK The new view s are created and are aligned with and scaled to the Principal View you used during step 2 Note You can create as many orthographic top left top right bottom left bottom right views as you want They will never be checked in this dialog 12 1 6 Fast Views When you insert views into a drawing you can choose one of two different modes to create the new views Fast View or Precise View Precise View mode is the standard mode and will always be used as the default Fast Views are useful for large or comple
219. e made in the assembly e g adding or removing parts and subassemblies is automatically applied to the BOM You can launch the BOM workspace directly from the drawing Changes made in the BOM workspace will be updated automatically in the drawing Manual changes to the BOM are not reflected in the associated assembly or part In This Chapter DSOECIIV ING BOND Alea es aks oa e aed eee ia ee ae 281 CREATING BINS ON MAEN asiri a a a a a lao 282 Wong With a BOM ma Draw ereen a a a E EN 283 Working maA BOM WOKS DIC Oena ER 290 13 1 Specifying BOM Data You can specify BOM related properties for a part or for an assembly that you want to treat as a part for BOM purposes Consequently these properties can be displayed in a BOM of any assembly that contains the part or assembly gt To save BOM data with a part 1 From the File menu select Properties The Design Properties dialog appears 2 Select the General tab 3 Scroll through the Property list to find the applicable BOM property 4 To enter BOM property data click in the corresponding value field The cursor appears 5 Type in the appropriate text 6 Continue specifying value fields as required 7 Click Apply 8 Click Close 9 Save the part When you add the part to an assembly and subsequently create a BOM the BOM data will automatically be displayed gt To save BOM data with an assembly Follow the procedure above for a part but also check the option Tre
220. e resulting pattern cannot overlap itself Setting the Angle too low can make the bodies overlap resulting in an invalid body 6 Check the Change Direction box to reverse the direction if necessary 7 Check the Check Results box to have Alibre Design detect whether or not the resulting bodies from the pattern are valid It is good design practice to leave this box checked on If this box is unchecked you may inadvertently create a pattern that appears to be valid but in reality is not 136 Chapter 7 Feature Creation If you do not use the Check Results option you should go to the Tools menu and select Check Part after creating the pattern to verify that your model is a valid body 8 In Label change the name of the pattern if desired 9 Click OK to create the pattern Figure 65 Circular Topology Pattern Completed 7 16 Design Boolean Features You can use the Design Boolean Features to model parts for special applications such as packaging and mold design This is accomplished by using a tool or tools a collection of other parts or assemblies to modify a blank the current part The creation of a Design Boolean is done in a special workspace called the Design Boolean Editor Environment The Boolean feature is parametrically related to the tool part Therefore if the tool is modified and saved the Boolean feature will update upon reopening You can also modify the dedicated assembly that contains the blank
221. e spring to enable this spring or uncheck to disable it 4 In Spring constant enter the Spring Coefficient or Spring Constant Note the units shown to the right of the text box 5 Select Initially un stretched if you want the spring assumed to be initially unstretched in the design at the start of simulation Any subsequent deflection will cause the spring to produce a force or torque acting towards this initial point 6 Select Unstretched Length Unstretched Angle if you want the spring assumed to be already stretched in the original design at the start of animation You can specify the natural length or angle of the spring in the text box to the right 7 Select OK to save and apply the changes you made or click Cancel to abandon your changes gt To Edit a Spring Right click the Spring in the Motion Explorer and select Edit or simply double click on the spring item gt To Re Name Delete or Suppress Springs Right click the Spring in the Motion Explorer and select the required option Suppressed Springs are shown grayed out 16 5 4 Dampers Dampers in Alibre Motion have no non linear behavior and produce a force or torque that is perfectly proportional to the linear or angular velocity The force or torque produced by a damper always opposes the motion EE Dampers gt To Add a Damper 1 In the Motion Explorer right click on a constraint and select Insert 2 Choose either Linear or Rotary damper The Damper dialog
222. e that has been created using references to existing geometry such as extrude to geometry Below are two models The first shows a mirror created with the Mirror Geometry box unchecked and the second with the box checked Feature Mirror Features to mirror Mirror Geometry Wed Extrusions 3 gt Mirror plane el Figure 54 Feature Mirror Dialog Showing Mirror Geometry Unchecked Figure 55 Example of Feature Mirrorred Without Mirror Geometry Option 0 Feature Mirror Features to mirror Mirror Geometry ea Extrusions 3 gt Nee Labet aK Cv 0 Figure 56 Feature Mirror Dialog Showing Mirror Geometry Checked Figure 57 Example of Feature Mirrorred Using Mirror Geometry Option 129 Chapter 7 Feature Creation 5 Click OK to create the mirror 7 15 2 Feature Patterns Feature patterns create copies of a feature by repeating it in a linear or circular array Linear Patterns You can use a linear pattern to repeat a feature in one or two linear directions gt To create a linear pattern 1 From the Feature menu select Pattern gt Linear or select the Linear Feature Pattern tool from the Part Modeling Toolbar The Linear Pattern dialog appears Linear Pattern Features to Patter Pattern Geometry First Direction Second Direction Linear path Linear path Change direction Change direction Spacing Spacing f2co LJ oo0 Ele Copies q Copies ho q m al 2 Selec
223. e while in an exploded view only available if you have a license for full publishing a Exploded View Full Pa ge Exploded view Half Page Exploded view Top H with Exploded View Step Information Exploded view Left with Exploded View Step Information The published PDF file will have one page which shows the assembly in its exploded view and a title if one is specified The published PDF file will have one page which shows the assembly in its exploded view and a title if one is specified only in the upper half of the PDF page The rest of the PDF page will be blank The published PDF file will show the assembly in the exploded view in the upper half of the PDF page with all of the steps listed under it The published PDF file will show the assembly in the exploded view on the left side of the PDF page with all of the steps listed on the right Templates available when creating a PDF of an image or of text only Cover Page The published PDF file will have one page which shows the image in the top half and your custom text in the bottom half Image with Text The published PDF file will have one page which shows the image in the top half and your custom text in the bottom half along with any specified Title and Footer Pa Text Only The published PDF file will include your custom text Templates available when creating a PDF from a Drawing Workspace 180 Drawing The published PDF file
224. earch For example you can search for all objects for documents only or for customers You can search for documents from a specific project The following table lists the available Quick Search options All words Objects found contain all specified search words Any word The search will return all objects that contain at least one of the specified search words Boolean The search allows you to use more specific search phrases and different operators You can use different expressions to find documents and objects that strictly meet your search criteria The table below lists the search operators available for use in the Alibre Vault OF Put a plus sign in front of a search word to make sure that all of the documents and other objects found contain the word Use a minus sign to make sure that none of the documents and other objects contains the word Example search technical amp endash construction phrase Enclose the search words in double quotation marks to find objects where the words appear adjacent to each other Example search functional specification AND boolean search only The AND operator combines two search terms Documents found contain both terms Example search functional AND specification OR boolean search only The OR operator retrieves all documents containing at least one of the terms entered Example search agenda OR minutes 351 Chapter 17 The Alibre Vault by M Files b
225. ears The values for the FIRST dimension selected will be shown in the dialog All values that are common between the selected dimensions will be shown with a white background If any values differ between the selected dimensions that field will be shown with a slightly gray background 3 To change which style is used for these dimension select a new style from the Dimension Style drop down list 293 Chapter 12 Drawings 4 To set the properties for this dimension independent of any style uncheck the Use Style checkbox You can then set the properties as desired for each tab 5 Click OK 12 3 6 Dimension Styles Dimension styles are used to set the dimension properties in a 2D detailed drawing When a dimension is created it is automatically assigned to the dimension style that you have set as your default dimension style You can create multiple dimension styles in a drawing The styles are saved with the drawing file not with your system profile so you will not see the styles you have created in another drawing If you anticipate that you will use the same styles again and again you can save them in your drawing template Then each time you use the template the styles you created will be available Setting Your Default Style All newly inserted dimensions will automatically be assigned to the default style you can change the style used for an individual dimension after it has been created You can change the default style
226. eature Creation ocio 101 7 1 The Part Modeling Intendencia lidia 102 ka O A A A A E dia 103 7 2 1 ESAS IDO Sis 103 3 Extrude Boss and Extrude Cll cidad 103 7 3 1 Creating Extrude Boss and Extrude Cut Features cccccccccccccccnoooonnnnnnnnnnnnncnonononannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnons 104 7 3 2 Creating Thin Wall Extrude Boss and Cut Features occcccccccccconnnoonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnannnnnnnnnnnonononenennnnnns 106 74 Revolv BOSS and Revo We Cul tvn aiii diia 108 7 4 1 Revolve Boss and Revolve Cut Features ccccccccccccconcccnccnnnoonncnnnnnonononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 109 7 4 2 Thin Wall Revolve Boss and Cut FeaturesS ooccccccnnccccoconnonncccnnoonnnnnnnonononancnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnonnnannnnnnnnns 110 Td LOT BOSS and LOU e do es al 111 7 6 Sweep Boss and Sweep CUL ccccccccccccccceccceeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaueeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeaseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeaaagaas 113 7 6 1 Sweep Boss and Sweep Cut Features indiaan a aeia e a a ea a aa E a 114 7 6 2 Thin Wall Boss Sweep and Cut Sweep Features ccccccccccccccnnnnoononcncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 115 Ta Helical Boss and Helical Gul renser r a A dl A 117 A a a a a a 119 7 8 1 Constant Radius Alle cr a ica 120 7 8 2 Varable Radius Fillets ars a dd dido 120 ES NANO So A sce swe gece 121 7 9 1 elo O Ar AL S PA A taunt Ao acces hetiem tonne ee Agee Shc tae ae icaseaee ts 121 7 9 2 Vende Chami ls reien eeta e e
227. ecail Mime BAL Documents NA Customer la Projects Bl Assigned to Me Mi Checked Gut to Me 2 C lme Bi Recently Modified by Me E 3 gt sby Searches Figure 104 Quick Search Quick Search is a useful way to search for documents and other objects in the Vault Quick Search looks for objects that have the search word contained in the file contents or metadata In the search field enter a search string that has to do with the object such as the title the login name of a person who has edited it or a customer related to it and click the Search button The search string does not need to be a whole word you can truncate the word by using an asterisk e g tender For example if you have a part named Inductor ad_prt you could find it by searching for ind Words and phrases searched for are saved in a pull down menu making it easy to repeat the searches With the menu items on the search bar you can choose to search within document and object properties metadata file contents or both You can also restrict the search to the current folder In the top right corner there is a button with which you can clear all search criteria Quick Search Options There are two search functions simple and detailed You can use advanced or detailed search criteria by selecting Advanced Search on the right hand side For more information refer to Detailed Search on page 352 The advanced or detailed search allows you to restrict the s
228. ecome highlighted Right click in the table area and select Row gt Unhide from the pop up menu or from the Format menu select Row gt Unhide 13 4 4 Resizing Rows and Columns You can resize rows and columns to customize the look of the table gt 1 3 4 5 To resize a row or column by dragging In the row number or column header area move the cursor near the edge of the row or column you want to resize The cursor changes appearance l a di 3 Click and drag the row or column border to change the respective width or height Release the mouse button when finished resizing To resize a row by specifying a row height value Click the row number you want to resize The entire row is highlighted Right click in the table area and select Row gt Height from the pop up menu or from the Format menu select Row gt Height The Row Height dialog appears Row Height Row height 2 000 e Apply to all rows Specify the Row height value Check the Apply to all rows option if desired Click OK 293 Chapter 13 Bills of Material gt To automatically adjust a column s width 1 Inthe main column header area move the cursor over the right edge of the column you want to automatically resize 2 Double click the right edge The column width automatically adjusts to the widest field in the column Or Click the table Header of the column you want to automatically resize The entire
229. ect any of the line segments that you sketched in step 1 A preview of the section view appears in the drawing 4 Drag the section view preview to the appropriate location on the sheet You will only be able to move the view in a direction normal to the section line 5 Click to place the view gt To redefine the section location either normal or stepped 1 Select the Select ls tool from the View toolbar if it is not already selected 2 Move the cursor over the section line annotation The annotation is highlighted and the cursor changes 3 Click and drag the line to the desired location 4 Release the mouse button to place the line The section view updates automatically based on the new section line location 260 Chapter 12 Drawings gt To change the direction of the section view Right click the section view in the work area and select Reverse Section View from the pop up menu Or Right click the section view in the Drawing Explorer and select Reverse Section View from the pop up menu The section line is flipped and the section view is displayed from the opposite direction To change the hatch pattern for all parts in the section view Right click the section view in the work area and select Change Cross Hatch from the pop up menu or right click the section view in the Drawing Explorer and select Change Cross Hatch from the pop up menu The Hatch Properties dialog appears Select a new cross hatch pattern f
230. ect the weld symbol from the pull down menu You can also type text into the boxes on both sides of the weld symbol 8 Inthe Joint with spacer area select the spacer type from the pull down menu 9 Select the applicable weld placement options e All around e Field or site weld e Display pointing down enabled if you select Field or site weld e Stagger weld enabled if you select a fillet for both the Near and Far tabs 10 In the Specification process area type any additional instructions to be included with the weld symbol 11 If you are specifying both a Near and a Far weld click the other tab and repeat the steps for the other weld 12 If you want to include a leader e Select Show e Select Bent if you want the line to have a short horizontal segment near the annotation 13 In Arrow select an arrow style 14 Move the mouse in the work area A preview of the annotation appears attached to the mouse pointer Left click once to place the leader line Left click again to place the annotation The text appears in light blue 15 Click Apply to accept the annotation placement or you can double click The dialog remains open so you can continue to place additional annotations 2 9 Chapter 12 Drawings Before choosing Apply you can reposition the annotation while it is light blue in color To do this left click on the leader line or the text whichever you want to move and release the mouse button Move the mouse
231. ection by moving your mouse pointer over the overlay To turn this option on and off from the Tools menu select Options On the Overlays tab check or uncheck Show Full Overlay Or you can click the Pin button to pin or unpin the bottom section Click in the Selection field to activate it Left click to select one or more cylindrical faces Check the Snap Every option if you would like the value of the Radius Offset to snap at a defined increment Choose the type of operation you want to apply by selecting Radius Offset or Final Radius from the drop down list Radius Offset applies the designated offset value to each cylindrical face you selected Final Radius is only available if you choose only one face or if all of the faces you choose have an equal radius to start with This option will change the value of the radius or radii to the designated value Set the new radius for the cylindrical face s You can do this in two ways a Entera value in the Final Radius To or Offset Radius To field and select the Refresh tool or press the Tab key to see a preview b Left click on the hot spot shown on the face and drag it until you have it placed where you want it The To field will be populated with the new value Click Reset to erase the current item from the Selection field and set the Radius To value back to 0 Click Apply to accept the new position The model is updated and the Push Pull tool remains active The Auto Apply opt
232. ection rectangle over the desired sketch figures or select the appropriate sketch figures one at a time The figures are highlighted after selection From the Sketch menu select Analyze or from the Sketch Overlay select the Analyze tool The Analyze Sketch dialog appears In the Analyze section check the items you would like to search for Disjoint Ends Open Loops Overlaps Self Intersections and or Degenerate Figures Click the Analyze button The sketch errors will appear in the Results area of the dialog Click the result you want to view and the area will highlight in the part work area In some instances you can use the Heal option to resolve the sketch The Heal option is typically available for Disjoint Ends Open Loops and Degenerate Figures Select the Tolerance option in the Heal area of the dialog Enter a Tolerance value that is larger than the existing gap distance between the open nodes Once the Tolerance value is set the Heal button will become active Click the Heal button to resolve the figure Click Close to exit the dialog 4 9 10 Enclosed Figures A simple way to reduce steps when modeling a part is to create a sketch with enclosed figures Enclosed figures are figures that are sketched within the profile of another figure Material will be removed from the enclosed figure profile when a feature is created The sketches illustrated below contain enclosed figures 71 Chapter 4 Sketching 4 9 11 Copying
233. ed at the top of the BOM table and the row numbers increase going down the table gt To change the header display orientation Select the Bottom Up Display tool from the View toolbar or From the View menu select Bottom Up Display The column headers are positioned at the bottom of the table and the row numbers increase going up the table To return to the default orientation repeat step 1 13 4 9 Customizing Header and Data Font Properties You can change the font properties associated with column headers and tabular data You cannot change font properties for individual items in the table gt 1 To customize header font properties Right click in the table area and select Header Font from the pop up menu or from the Format menu select Header Font The Font dialog appears Modify the Font Font Style Size Effects Color and Script as desired Click OK 295 Chapter 13 Bills of Material gt To customize data font properties 1 Right click in the table area and select Header Font from the pop up menu or from the Format menu select Header Font The Font dialog appears 2 Modify the Font Font Style Size Effects Color and Script as desired 3 Click OK 13 4 10 Overriding Design Values When you create a BOM the table contains information based on the design e g part number part name quantity etc These items are referred to as design values since they are dictated by the design You can ma
234. ed three times but the total quantity is listed by the first Small Bolt and there is no indication given of which configuration is used 201 E Bearing Stand Assembly Alibre Design Expert File Edit View Format Data Tools Team Design Window Help N da gt oE aD Part Name Part Number Revision Comment Bearing Stand Main Bearing small bolt small bolt small bolt Example 2 The Configuration Name column has been added to the BOM Now you can see that again the Small Bolt part is listed three times but the total quantity is split up correctly between the configurations used E Bearing Stand Assembly Alibre Design Expert File Edit View Format Data Tools Team Design Window Help BE 8 Part Name Part Number Configuration Name Revision Comment Bearing Stand Config lt 1 gt Main Bearing Config lt 1 gt small bolt small bolt small bolt 10 6 Using the Equation Editor with Configurations Although all configurations of a design have a common set of dimensions the values of those dimensions are parameters whose values can vary from configuration to configuration Modify Equation Mame D7 Equation 150 Comment Depth of base feature Type Loun For each dimension the Name and Comment fields will be the same between configurations The Equation which is either an equation or the specific value of the dimension field can vary between configurations You can edit the val
235. editing a part in the context of an assembly Direct Editing has several useful applications You can use it to modify models that have been imported into Alibre Design and therefore contain no design history which means there are no features or sketches available to modify You can use Direct Editing when you are designing a part in Alibre Design there are instances when this would be easier than editing a feature or sketch explicitly You can also use Direct Editing for conceptual design You can move and resize parts of the model until it looks approximately like you want it which gives you an idea of how the design will fit together Then you can go back to the sketches and features and add precise dimensions to finalize the design Using the Direct Editing tools does not edit or delete any existing feature or sketch in the Design Explorer It creates a new feature in the tree Depending on which tool you use the new feature may be an Offset Face Move Face or Remove Face feature 139 Chapter 7 Feature Creation 7 17 1 Implications of Using Direct Editing Direct Editing tools are not intended to replace feature creation tools or the editing of features and sketches to achieve your desired results They are intended to supplement the design process by enabling you to quickly modify the size of sketches and features on your model You should use the traditional methods such as editing a sketch or deleting a feature for simple design ch
236. edundant Knots Remove existing knots that can be removed without changing the curve shape Alibre Design will automatically remove any possible knots then a dialog will appear summarizing the results DXF DWG import export of NURBS curves NURBS geometry defined by control points present in DXF DWG files can be read and precisely represented by the same mathematical representation in Alibre Design DWG files can also contain splines that are defined by interpolation points Alibre Design will read these and convert them into B spline curves While for most parts these curves will appear very similar to what they look like in AutoCAD their shapes may not exactly match Also AutoCAD allows users to specify tolerance while defining splines by interpolation Alibre Design will assume this value is always zero Using Offset on a spline curve The offset tool can be used to select either B spline curves or reference point spline curves for creating an offset curve For more information see Offsetting Figures on page 49 As with other offset figures this offset will not be associative to the original curve This means that if the original curve is modified the offset figures will not update as a result In addition the offset curve will not contain any reference control or interpolation points 4 4 6 Ellipses gt To sketch an ellipse 1 Select the Ellipse tool from the Circle fly out on the Sketching toolbar or from the Sketch menu
237. eeeeeeeeeessaaaeeessseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeessaaaaaassseeeeeeeeees 150 82 oneet Metal Part Parameters vcciccc a a A aae N A 151 A en ee ete AS 152 8 4 E E e LEEREN A A O e EE 152 8 4 1 Sheet Metal Changes for Version 9 1 and Later ooonnnccncccccconnnccnnncnnnononanonnncnnnonanncnnnnnnnonnaanennns 154 69 Closed COME td it ii 155 00 Diles e bibi 156 A O O R 156 6 9 Comer ROUNGS and Chamiers aer iii 156 8 8 1 o As A eer nedcam ene 157 8 8 2 CGhamienng a comer aida td aiii 157 B29 JOSS wash o gig O O 157 8 10 MUnbend and Rebend caida 157 BT Catalog Peal 158 8 12 COpVING Existing FSE ni O A AA RA A o es 158 8 13 Managing Features in the Design Explorer atea ees 158 VV OF KING WIN Pals cd 159 9 1 ISIC he DS SIG EXPO asiatica 159 Or2 gt A ON 159 9 2 1 Eqgiling Sketehes and Features ita pit aci 159 9 2 2 S ppressing Features in Pals daldedipbenc Sel uieh a a a e aba aa at 160 9 2 3 Feo rde ind Fett ada 160 9 2 4 RONO BACK FC A Usar 161 93 Using the Measurement Tool mision 162 94 Par DiDa OPINAS sas a a E A RA a do ad 163 TI pL SCHON VIEWS odia nese 163 g6 RAM FMV SICAI I MODGIMICS crol 164 97 CO MAIO DSSS sensi e Sates sca cea sana ace cea ateeaate caeaceendsnacceccavaaes E a 165 0 6 Usha The Projectto sketch TOO iia EE E E id 165 399 Spreadsheet Driven Designs scusa e i aa 168 9 9 1 Setting Wp Excel to Dive DESIGNS eirean dl e a AL 168 9 9 2 Driving Designs by SpreadSheet ooocccccnnnnncccccc
238. eeeseaaas 46 46 Working with Existing Sketch Figures ccccccssseecccceeseeeeeceeeeeeeecseusceeecseusceeeseaaeceesssaueceeesseeceesssageeessseeseeessnas 47 4 6 1 Extending IQUE CS ia nr 47 4 6 2 o tela ra dana a a seed Meesery 47 4 6 3 Adding 2D Fillets to Sketch Figures cstiiaci dl id eu enteehaesdentvcc 48 4 6 4 Adding Chamier 10 Sketen FIQUES enano E E AS EAS 48 4 6 5 Offsetting FIQUISS iaa o in E E EEE 49 4 6 6 o o E uk eaerauen mao 51 4 6 7 Creating Patterns of Sketch Figures ccsccccccseseeccesccesecensccsseeeescceseceesccsseeeesccsseeeesccseneenseceeeess 51 4 6 8 Moving and Rotating Sketch Figures ccccooocccnnccccooconccononcnnnnnnnnnonononnnnnnononnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnannnnnnonnns 53 e aisa A 54 4 7 1 Constant TYPE coa 55 4 7 2 Manually Applying Sketch COMSIFAINIS x6 ai aid 56 4 7 3 PCIA rota oa oniestied nae O EEEE ET E A E E 56 4 7 4 Controlling the Display of Sketch Constraint Symbols ccccccccconccccccnnncononnncnnnncnononanonononnnonononanenons 57 4 7 5 Checking Ne Status Of A SKEICM necer A r ta ces veda AE 57 4 8 Placing Dimensions on Sketch Figures a 58 4 8 1 Dim sioning Sketch FIQUTES sruk n a a a e me ne oe Reo eae nee ee ee 59 4 8 2 Auto DIMENSIONING ASKO iii A A dl 60 4 8 3 UR A ie eae 61 4 8 4 Using Eguations A DIMENSIONS tt ss din 62 4 8 5 Changing Sketch Figure DIMENSIONS ir io 64 4 8 6 Deleting Sketch Figure Dimensions ccccccssseecceceeeeeeeccseeeceeecaeuceeec
239. efault rotation points the origin model s center of mass and center of volume as well as custom rotation points e The Model Shading tools change the display to wireframe so that only the edges of the model are shown or shaded so that the faces of the model are shaded A Y Lo des e ch eb ce E gt BR a bP ae BP a a The Toggle tools allow you to toggle on and off the following options Design Explorer Silhouette Edges All Reference Geometry Coordinate System Planes Axes Points Surfaces Annotations Redlines Sketches Grid Sketch Dimensions and Constraint Symbols 3 5 Getting Help Help can be accessed numerous ways while you are using Alibre Design Integrated Help e The integrated Help is automatically installed during installation of Alibre Design e To access Help related to a specific dialog click the Help button el in the dialog e When you mouse over an icon on a toolbar a Tooltip will popup that identifies the function of the tool e The status bar in the lower left corner of a workspace displays hints related to completing a command and provides a brief description of a tool or function Tutorials e Tutorials are available in the Help system under the Tutorials book 21 Alibre Support website Chapter 3 Introduction to the Design Interface You can obtain help from many areas on the Alibre Inc website Go to www alibre com support and you will find links to Frequently Asked Ques
240. eference line or another sketch figure You can NOT choose a reference geometry axis such as the X axis Click OK to create the mirrored figure 4 6 7 Creating Patterns of Sketch Figures You can create linear and radial patterns of an existing sketch figure Linear patterns can be created in one or two directions gt To create a linear pattern in one direction Select the Linear Sketch Repeat tool Repeat dialog appears from the Sketching toolbar or from the Sketch menu select Repeat gt Linear The Linear Select the figure to be patterned Select the linear path for the first pattern direction Lines reference lines axes and edges can be used as the linear path Enter the appropriate value in the Copies field this value includes the original figure Enter the appropriate Spacing value that controls the distance between each figure in the pattern If necessary select the Change Direction option Click OK to create the pattern OOOO 91 92 Chapter 4 Sketching To create a linear pattern in two directions Select the Linear Sketch Repeat tool Repeat dialog appears from the Sketching toolbar or from the Sketch menu select Repeat gt Linear The Linear Select the figure to be patterned Select the linear path for the first pattern direction Lines reference lines axes and edges can be used as the linear path Enter the appropriate value in the Copies field this value includes the original figure
241. emplate of any sheet in the drawing the default style for the drawing will update to match the default style of the template you have changed to 12 3 7 Aligning Dimensions There is an option to turn on alignment snapping for annotations This option allows dimensions to snap to other dimensions and annotations to snap to other annotations gt To turn on and use dimension alignment snapping 1 Select Tools gt Options in a Drawing workspace 2 On the General tab make sure that Align annotations when dragging is checked 3 Exit the Options dialog 4 Ensure you are not in Sketch Mode 209 Chapter 12 Drawings 5 Drag dimensions near other dimensions You will see inference lines indicating the dimensions are lined up Several types of inferencing are available left edge right edge top edge bottom edge vertical center and horizontal center 12 4 Inserting Additional Views In addition to the standard views you can insert additional custom views to further clarify design intent You can insert auxiliary detail section and exploded views You can also insert flat pattern views of sheet metal parts in Alibre Design Professional Note When you insert additional views that are dependent views such as the detail view the new view will be created with the same projection method as the parent view Fast View or Precise View Once the new view has been placed you can control the projection type independently 12 4 1
242. en the rectangle borders the correct area The Zoom to Fit tool restores the view so that the entire design is displayed in the work area The Previous View tool reorients the work area to views that preceded the current view The Next View tool becomes available after the Previous View tool has been used The Orthographic tool changes the display of the work area so that parallel edges faces etc appear as infinitely parallel e The Perspective tool changes the display so that all parallel edges faces etc appear to converge into one point 20 Chapter 3 Introduction to the Design Interface The Display Acceleration tool optimizes your display by simplifying the designs according to user defined preferences Refer to the section on Display Acceleration on page 183 for more information e The Orient tools store default views of front back left right top bottom and isometric The Orient to Sketch Plane tool changes the display so the sketch plane is displayed This is only available in sketch mode This is a toggle between the front and back view of the sketch plane The Isometric to Sketch Plane tool changes the display so that it is an isometric view of the sketch plane The Orient to Plane tool allows you to reorient the view to a plane of your choosing A 2 The View Orientations tool stores default views e g front back left etc as well as custom views The Rotation Points tool stores d
243. ence figure option Select the Maintain association to source entity option if you want the new sketch or reference figure to reflect any changes made to the originating profile 165 Chapter 9 Working with Parts 8 Click OK to create the new sketch or reference figure If you selected the Maintain association to source entity option project to sketch constraint symbols are displayed on the new figures to indicate that they are constrained to the originating profile You will not be able to place dimensions on figures that were created with the Project to Sketch Maintain association to source entity option You can however delete the constraints and subsequently add driving dimensions to the figure The following images demonstrate using Project to Sketch to create a new part in an assembly workspace The assembly is shown slightly transparent in the background and the reference planes for the new part are visible The assembly is currently in Edit Part mode on the new part 166 Chapter 9 Working with Parts The Project to Sketch dialog is open and the face of an existing part is selected This will allow creation of a new part that will fit directly onto the existing face with mounting holes in the correct location Maintain association to source entity is selected so if the existing face is modified the new part will update as well MPa ec Dl ete Entities bo project 1 tmm nae Opiiore Create sketch f
244. ens a constraint will automatically be previewed In this case an Align constraint is applied which makes the axis of the cylinder and the face of the other part parallel Continue dragging the first part around the second part Whatever part you hover over will change and as it does so will the constraint preview In this example we want to insert the bolt into the hole While dragging the bolt we will hover the mouse over the interior cylindrical face The bolt will orient itself appropriately when we do this and the interior cylindrical face turns green hidden When the constraint preview appears as you want release the mouse button The dialog will now populate with options that are relevant to the two types of geometry that you are constraining In this case we can make the items parallel set an angle create an offset or flip the bolt in the other direction Assembly Constraints oll 2 vin Offset 000 lei TT Reverse When you are ready to apply the constraint click the check mark To cancel click the Cancel button You can now begin the process again 215 Chapter 11 Assembly Design Note You can only use drag and drop constraints if the item you are dragging is completely unconstrained After you apply the first constraint to it you will need to continue with the second mode shown below Explicit Selection Constraint Placement The only difference between this mode and the previous mode is that you do
245. ent Chapter 17 The Alibre Vault by M Files 3 Select the version to which you want to roll back and then click the Roll back button History Name Version Status Time User 9 inductor Assembly AD_ASM 7 28 2008 3 51 PM MKT NOMAD Administri inductor Assembly AD_ASM 7 28 2008 3 50 PM MKT NOMAD Administr 7 28 2008 3 50PM MKT NOMADlAdministr 2 inductor Assembly AD_ASM 7 28 2008 3 49 PM MKT NOMAD Administr inductor Assembly AD_ASM 7 28 2008 3 48 PM MKT NOMAD Administr inductor Assembly AD_ASM 7 28 2008 12 12 PM MKT NOMAD VAdministr lo A TERS gt Inductor Assembly Created 7 28 2008 11 01 AM MKT NOM Alibre Assembly ID 4 version 4 Last modified 7 28 2008 3 50 PM MKT NOMA Number 34978 Revision Product Scooter Version comment Project Personal Transportation Initiative Keywords Customer City of Los Angeles Material Description Add Label to This Version Modify Version Details Roll Back Type Document Alibre Design Assembly Checked In 61 0 KB MKT NOMAD Administrate Figure 108 Roll Back to Previous Version 4 A confirmation dialog appears Click Yes Confirm Rollback 7 Rolling back to an old version creates a new version of the object based on the contents of the old version Intermediate versions will be preserved Are you sure you want to roll back to the selected version Figure 109 Roll Back Confirmation Message A new version is created containing the contents of the old
246. enu select Axis or right click in the work area and select Insert Axis from the pop up menu The Insert Axis dialog appears 2 Select an existing axis or edge A preview of the new axis is displayed 3 Click OK to create the axis 78 Chapter 5 Reference Geometry 5 2 2 Axis through Two Points You can create an axis through two points or vertices This method can be used to create an axis at an angle gt To create an axis through two points 1 Select the Insert Axis tool from the Inspection toolbar or from the Insert menu select Axis or right click in the work area and select Insert Axis from the pop up menu The Insert Axis dialog appears 2 Select an existing point or vertex 3 Select the second point or vertex A preview of the new axis is displayed 4 Click OK to create the axis 5 2 3 Axis Using Cylindrical Face You can create an axis using a cylindrical face as reference gt To create an axis using a cylindrical face 1 Select the Insert Axis tool from the Inspection toolbar or from the Insert menu select Axis or right click in the work area and select Insert Axis from the pop up menu The Insert Axis dialog appears 2 Select an existing cylindrical face A preview of the new axis is displayed 3 Click OK to create the axis 5 2 4 Axis through Two Planes You can create an axis at the intersection of two existing reference planes or planar faces gt To create an axis through two planes
247. er dynamic measurement of a moving part Right Click a moving part and select Dynamic Measurement Make sure Show In XY Plot is checked and after specifying the measurement press the X Y Plot button on the Playback deck 4 Make changes to your design and regenerate the Simulation Right click the Simulation item on the Motion Explorer and select Regenerate or select Regenerate from the Motion main menu 5 Detect Interferences Press the Interferences button on the Playback deck 6 Export dynamic measurements for analysis Right Click a Part and select Dynamic Measurement After specifying the measurement right click that Measurement item in the Motion Explorer then select Export 16 5 Forces and Torques in Simulations Within any but the simplest of mechanical systems there are numerous forces and torques acting on each body within the system Some are specified by the person who created the simulation model and usually many more are a result of the interactions of the constrained bodies according to Newton s third law Newton s third law states that for every action there is an equal and opposite reaction and is encapsulated in physics terms by the laws of Conservation of Momentum and Conservation of Angular Momentum Forces External to the System The law of Conservation of Momentum states that in the absence of any external forces the total momentum of a system is conserved For simulation purposes the only ways to add external force
248. er of Copies including the original feature 6 Specify the Spacing between each copy 7 Click the Change direction option to create the pattern in the opposite direction on the path 8 If required repeat steps 4 7 to create the pattern in a second direction as well 9 Click OK to create the pattern 131 O E RA ERE EA Circular Patterns You can use a circular pattern to repeat a feature in a radial direction around a centerline gt To create a circular pattern 1 From the Feature menu select Pattern gt Circular or select the Circular Feature Pattern tool from the Feature Patterns fly out on the Part Modeling toolbar The Circular Pattern dialog appears Circular Pattern Features to Pattern Pattern Geometry Copies El Angle 30 000 Change direction Label Pate o el 2 Select the features to be patterned 3 Check the Pattern Geometry box if you want to pattern the geometry exactly See the previous section on Linear Patterns for more information on Pattern Geometry 4 Select the Circular path center An axis or linear edge can be used as the center 5 Specify the number of Copies including the original feature 6 Specify the Angle in degrees to control the spacing between the copied features 7 If necessary select Change direction to create the pattern in the opposite radial direction 8 Click OK to create the pattern 7 15 3 Topology Patterns Topology patterns are similar to
249. er the view in the work area The view is highlighted and the cursor changes N CI A iria m Click and drag the view to the desired location on the sheet pn Release the mouse button to place the view 13 3 6 Hiding the BOM View You can hide the BOM view in a sheet gt To hide a BOM view 1 In the Drawing Explorer right click the BOM item listed under the sheet and select Hide from the pop up menu Or Click the Select ls tool from the View toolbar 2 Move the cursor over the BOM view in the work area right click and select Hide from the pop up menu The view is hidden in the work area and the associated text is dimmed in the Drawing Explorer Mew Sheetal gt gt To show the BOM view Right click the dimmed BOM item in the Drawing Explorer and deselect Hide from the pop up menu 286 Chapter 13 Bills of Material 13 3 7 Deleting the BOM View You can delete a BOM view from a sheet at anytime gt 1 To delete a BOM view In the Drawing Explorer right click the BOM item listed under the sheet and select Delete from the pop up menu Or Click the Select ls tool from the View toolbar Move the cursor over the table in the work area right click and select Delete from the pop up menu The table is deleted from the work area and Drawing Explorer Note The BOM is still associated with a drawing after you delete a table from a sheet You must unlink the BOM from the drawing to remove
250. ere using the right click menu on headings and individual items you can create new Simulations insert Physical Elements specify measurements that should be taken and Traces to be shown gt To launch the Motion Explorer 1 In an assembly workspace from the Motion main menu select Motion Explorer 2 The Motion Explorer opens and either loads existing Simulation Setup Data if the open Assembly file contains it or automatically generates a new Simulation reading in all the physical data and characteristics of the parts and constraints that make up the assembly SS A a fll Simulation 1 gt ve Fined Parts 32 Moving Parts a Constraints m Actuators E Springs gt Dampers Gravity Lo Measurements Traces E E E E Figure 103 Motion Explorer Automatic Simulation Creation The first four group headings Configuration Fixed Parts Moving Parts and Constraints contain all of the Simulation elements that Alibre Motion creates automatically for you by analyzing your Assembly design using Automatic Body Mapping see Moving and Fixed Parts on page 333 and Automatic Constraint Mapping see Automatic Constraint Mapping ACM in Alibre Motion on page 333 Additional Simulation Elements The remaining group headings contain those elements you may choose to add to create your Simulations and to define any feedback and results you may require 16 3 3 Motion Explorer Groups Configuration and Simulati
251. ersions are created in two scenarios 1 You manually check something into the Vault 2 You check Make Version in the save dialog when saving something to the Vault When you do this the item marked for a version is checked in and then checked back out automatically so you can continue editing the item Note Versions are not created every time you save an item They are only created when an item is checked into the Vault or when you explicitly select Make Version from the Save dialog 356 Chapter 17 The Alibre Vault by M Files Where to find the current version information While browsing the Vault you can see the version information of any item by clicking on it The properties of the item will be shown near the bottom of the window amp Recently Modified by Me Selle File Edit View Favorites Tools New Operations Settings Help Q sa amp D Ka Search ee Folders EIN A y XK Ez Address m WAlibre Recently Modified by Me Search in metadata and file conten Y M Reset All Name Size Date Modified ena Assembly 1 AD_ASM 64KB 7 28 2008 3 44 PM New Part 4 AD_PRT 19KB 7 28 2008 3 44PM 4 Y Inductor Assembly AD_ASM 61KB 7 28 2008 3 51PM ma Jpart 3 AD_PRT 19KB 7 28 2008 3 12PM as Inductor Assembly Created 7 28 2008 11 01 AM MKT NO Checkout Alibre Assembly 1D 4 version 6 Last modified 7 28 2008 3 51 PM MKT NOM E PTA Number 34978 Version comment Modified Standard A 5 B History x Product Sco
252. erted into an assembly Linear Pattern You can use a linear pattern to repeat a part in one two or three linear directions gt 1 208 To create a linear pattern of a part in an assembly From the Insert menu select Part Subassembly Pattern gt Linear The Linear Part Subassembly Pattern dialog box appears Linear Part Subassembly Pattern Part Subassembly to Pattern a small boltt lt 3 gt 6 mm Row Direction Column Direction Layer Direction Kbs Y axis Columns Rows Layers aL aL Row Spacing Column Spacing Layer Spacing 2 mm e 11 mm 4 lal Label Linear Pattem 1 Cancel Chapter 11 Assembly Design 2 In Part Subassembly to Pattern select the part you want to 3 In Row Direction select an edge axis or face that can be used to define an axis as on a cone or cylinder to set the direction for the row 4 In Column Direction select an edge axis or face that can be used to define an axis as on a cone or cylinder to set the direction for the column 5 In Layer Direction select an edge axis or face that can be used to define an axis as on a cone or cylinder to set the direction for the layer 6 Enter the number of copies you want in each direction including the original A value of 1 will make no additional copies in that direction 7 Enter the distance you want between each copy in the spacing fields 8 In Label enter a unique name for the pattern 9 Choose OK
253. ertex You can create a point at a vertex gt l 2 To create a point at a vertex Select the vertex A preview of the new point is displayed Click OK to create the point 5 3 6 Point along Edge You can create a point along an edge at a specified location gt le To create a point along an edge Select the edge A preview of the new point is displayed Enter a Ratio value A ratio of 5 will place the point at the midpoint of the edge 1 0 will place the point at the end of the edge Click OK to create the point 5 3 7 Point between Two Points You can create a point between two points at a specified location gt 1 To create a point between two points Select a point or vertex Select a second point or vertex Enter a Ratio value A ratio of 5 will place the point at the midpoint between the two existing points or vertices Click OK 5 4 Reference Surfaces You can insert surfaces as reference geometry similar to application planes in order to trim or extend solids to the surfaces In addition you can thicken a reference surface into a solid 5 4 1 Inserting Reference Surfaces Surfaces can be inserted from IGES or SAT files only gt 1 To insert a surface Open the part workspace into which you want to insert the surface From the Insert menu select Surfaces or select the Insert Surfaces tool from the Inspection toolbar The Insert Surface dialog appears Select
254. ertices or edges In drawing workspaces you can place datum annotations at any location gt To insert a datum annotation bo 1 In any type of workspace from the Insert menu select Annotation gt Datum In a drawing workspace select the Datum tool from the Detailing toolbar The Datum Annotation dialog appears Leader M Show Bent Label TO lA M Smart Anchor Position ft a en el 2 Inthe Datum Label box specify the letter with which you want to start the datum series 3 Select the Show option if want to use a leader with the datum Select the Bent option if you want the leader line to have a short horizontal segment near the annotation 4 From the Position pull down menu select the position in which the text will be placed in relation to the leader 5 Select Smart Anchor if desired The smart anchor option will automatically adjust the position of the text if the leader is re positioned The smart anchor option overrides the position selection in step 4 6 From the Arrow pull down menu select the type of arrow to use with the leader 7 Inthe work area select the face edge or view to attach the annotation If a leader is used two clicks are required 8 Continue to click to populate a series of datums 9 Click Apply and Close when finished 274 Chapter 12 Drawings Datums can be resized and repositioned by clicking the text and dragging This will change t
255. es between selected assembly parts selected groups of parts or all assembly parts gt 222 To check for interferences Select the Check for Interferences a tool from the Inspection toolbar or from the Tools menu select Check for Interferences The Interferences dialog appears 2 Interferences Global Check Check Reset User Specified Groups Check Group 1 Against Group 1 Group 2 Group 1 4 plastic cover 3 lt H left_upright lt 1 gt e Group 2 All Other lems gt Display Options e Show All Interfering Volumes T Hide Parts Not In Group 1 Or Group 2 Interference found 1 EA CI O E q plastic cower_3 lt 1 gt left_upright lt 1 gt 4 776441 3226 42 J Select Global or User Specified Groups The Global option checks for interferences considering all parts of the assembly The User Specified Groups option checks only the parts you select If you selected User Specified Groups you must select at least one part in Group 1 You can then choose to check for interferences between the selected Group 1 part s against e Group 1 checks for interferences within the selected Group 1 parts requires at least two selections e Group 2 checks for interferences between Group 1 parts and parts selected in Group 2 e All Other Items checks for interferences between Group 1 parts and all other parts in the assembly Click the Check button The number of interferences dete
256. es node Additional features are listed in the order in which they were created This feature order defines the part s construction history Eee Features Let Tabe1 gt Ba Cute 2 gt s Cuts 3 gt ate Cute 4 Lage Comer Rounds 5 EF E Flange lt b gt dh Unbende7 gt phe Lute 8 E E Flange 10 E By right clicking a feature in the Design Explorer you can s Edit the features properties e Suppress the feature e Rename the feature e Delete the feature e Check the Status of the feature 158 Chapter 9 Working with Parts CHAPTER 9 Working with Parts Parts are the fundamental component of a 3D design Detail drawings are created from parts and assemblies are built by integrating multiple parts In This Chapter SUM thle CSIC o AM ane pane ane ann amcevaneandoeee cae a aioe pone neancad eaacanenes E 159 NOG IAG GT da A A ated sesamin edie me owen tios 159 sing the Measurement TOO hss austin ii esate 162 UAB AA e AAEE a inca male eat ea naka ek eae a aaa ale aac ack eat rama eae nea 163 AP o A 163 e ctdiccess bears ets tine esac aise gatcineis eset eis wets acts ears a iss aem ncis ue isa e ee eed saad amie 164 e A aise ece tater cnn 165 USing the Project 1G SKETCH TOO las aii 165 Spread sheet Diven DOSIS 2 are a A a ae 168 SEHD EF PUBIS neta ronda tdt tddi tl eeu 174 9 1 Using the Design Explorer The Design Explorer on the left side of a workspace provides an outline of the part s design hi
257. es or features just like you would in a part workspace You can also add new features if required 3 After making the necessary changes return to assembly edit mode by right clicking the part being edited in the Design Explorer and select Edit Root Assembly or right click the top level assembly in the Design Explorer and select Edit Part Subassembly gt To edit a part in a separate window 1 Right click the part you want to edit in the Design Explorer or in the work area and select Edit in Separate Window The part opens in a separate workspace 2 Make any necessary changes to the part The changes will be applied to the assembly automatically 3 When finished editing close the part workspace In this case you do not save the part from the part workspace You are returned to the assembly workspace and can continue working When you save the assembly any parts that you modified will also be saved 11 10 3 Improving Assembly Performance when Editing Parts When editing a part in the context of an assembly you may notice that editing is a little slower than if you were editing it as a stand alone part outside the context of an assembly The reason for this is that if your part has inter part relationships the assembly must re evaluate these relationships each time you make an edit the edits could be any modification including adding dimensions to a sketch creating a new sketch creating a new feature etc The more inter part re
258. es you want to round You may also select faces which will round all corners adjacent to that face Any combination of faces and edges may be selected 3 In Radius type the desired radius for the round A preview will be displayed 4 Enter the desired values in the distance fields A preview will be shown of the chamfer 5 Click OK 8 8 2 Chamfering a corner 1 From the Feature Menu select Corner Chamfer Or select the Chamfer Corner tool from the Sheet Metal Modeling Toolbar The Corner Chamfer dialog appears 2 In Edges Faces to Chamfer select the edges you want to chamfer You may also select faces which will chamfer all corners adjacent to that face Any combination of faces and edges may be selected 3 In Chamfer Type select Distance Distance Angle Distance or Equal Distance 4 Enter the desired values in the distance fields A preview will be shown of the chamfer 5 Click OK 8 9 Holes Alibre Design provides several standard holes You can insert these standard holes on any planar face The holes can be inserted to a specific depth blind through an entire model or up to an intersection of a face Holes are always inserted perpendicular to a face Refer to the Holes section in the solid Features Creation chapter for comprehensive information on creating holes see Holes on page 125 8 10 Unbend and Rebend You can unbend and then rebend one or more flanges at a time A feature is added to the feature tree in th
259. esign Tree and consequently do not have features or sketches for you to edit gt ll To use the Remove Faces tool Select the Remove Faces tool from the Direct Editing fly out on the Part Modeling toolbar or from the Feature menu select Direct Edit gt Remove Faces The Remove Faces overlay appears You may need to maximize your workspace in order to view the entire overlay Check the Use inferencing for option if you want Alibre Design to infer additional faces based on the selections you make Then select either a Pocket or Boss used for most selections except fillets attempts to identify faces comprising a complete pocket or boss b Fillet Chain attempts to identify a chain of fillets that are tangent to each other and have the same radius Select faces in the model You can select as many faces as necessary You can change the Inferencing options at any time or uncheck it to turn it off if necessary Click Reset to erase the current item from the Selection field Click Apply to accept the selection The model is updated and the Remove Faces tool remains active Left click another face to perform another Remove Faces operation or click Exit to leave the tool 145 Chapter 7 Feature Creation Common Errors When Using Remove Faces The most common error that will occur with this tool is not selecting everything necessary for the operation to succeed If you select only a portion of a boss or pocket you may get
260. ess Enter on the keyboard The dimension is defined Note You can enter fractions e g 3 8 and simple equations e g 1 5 3 into the dimension control box You can also enter a value with units other than the current display units e g 5 mm The value will be converted to the display units automatically Supported unit abbreviations are mm cm and m To dimension distances or angles between figures Follow the steps below to place distance dimensions or angular dimensions between figures e g between lines between nodes between arc or circle center nodes etc Select the Dimension tool from the Sketching toolbar or from the Sketch menu select Dimension or right click in the work area and select Dimension from the pop up menu Move the cursor over the first figure from which you want to dimension Click the figure A preview may appear but do not place the dimension at this time Move the cursor over the second figure you want to dimension to and click again A new dimension preview appears Move the cursor to position the dimension and click a third time A dimension control box appears 59 Chapter 4 Sketching 6 Enter the appropriate dimension value in the box and press Enter on the keyboard The dimension is defined e es 38 010 1 000 L 4 8 2 Auto Dimensioning a Sketch You can automatically place driving dimensions on an entire sketch or on a selected subset of sketch figures The number of di
261. etch that will later be used to create a 3D feature Sketch A 2D profile made up of one or more entities such as lines circles and rectangles Sketch Constraints Relationships applied to sketch geometry that controls their size orientation position or symmetry 10 Chapter 2 Getting Started With Alibre Design Feature The result of a solid geometry operation that adds or removes material from a part such as a boss cut hole fillet or chamfer Figure 8 Extruded boss result Part A single 3d object that is comprised of one or more features Assembly A model comprised of two or more parts and other assemblies called subassemblies Assembly Constraints Relationships that define the location and motion limitations of parts relative to other parts in an assembly Alibre Vault A secure complete Product Data Management PDM solution available in some versions of Alibre Design 11 Chapter 2 Getting Started With Alibre Design 2 6 Toolbars Many of the commands you will utilize while modeling are found in the toolbars along the right side and top of the workspace Each workspace has toolbars specific to the tasks performed in that workspace In addition to the workspace specific toolbars there are other general toolbars that are available in all workspaces To access the toolbars from the View main menu select Toolbars Or you can right click in the toolbar area of a workspace and select Toolbars In the T
262. exit the dialog Note You can copy and paste feature control frame annotations on the same sheet or paste them on another sheet in the same drawing file To copy the annotation click on it to select it press and hold the Shift key to select multiple annotations Then either right click and choose Copy or from the Edit menu select Copy To paste the annotation you can choose Paste from the Edit menu or you can move your mouse to the location you want to paste the annotation and press CTRL V on your keyboard 12 6 6 Surface Finish Symbol In drawing part or assembly workspaces you can specify the surface texture of a face by using a Surface Finish Symbol In a part or assembly you can attach annotations to solids In a drawing you can attach annotations to any view or to the projected edge of a model gt To create a surface finish symbol 1 In any type of workspace from the Insert menu select Annotation gt Surface Finish In a drawing workspace select the Surface Finish y tool from the Detailing toolbar The Surface Finish dialog appears 2 From the Symbol pull down menu select the machining method for the surface finish 3 From the Lay Direction pull down menu select the direction of the surface pattern 4 Inthe Roughness area e Specify a value for the Maximum allowable height deviation from the surface mean plane e Specify a value for the Minimum allowable height deviation e Specify a value for the average Sp
263. f it is not already selected 2 Move the cursor over one of the break lines Right click the break line and select Delete from the pop up menu The break lines are deleted and the view is restored to its unbroken state 12 4 6 Partial View You can modify an existing view to create a partial view A partial view allows you to only show a portion of an existing view gt To insert a partial view Click the Select ls tool from the View toolbar if it is not already selected Select the view that you want to transform into a partial view then select the Sketch Mode tool from the Sketching toolbar Partial views can be created from any other view including primary and dependent views Sketch any closed figure enclosing the area that you want to keep in the partial view 262 Chapter 12 Drawings 38 4 Select the Partial View tool from the Detailing toolbar or from the Insert menu select Partial View 5 Select the sketched closed figure The view will transform into a partial view gt To change the partial view area size 1 Select the Select Is tool from the View toolbar if it is not already selected 2 Move the cursor over the partial view area dashed outline 3 Right click the dashed outline and select Edit The Partial View Annotation dialog appears 4 Partial View Annotation Modify the boundary for the partial view and press UE to accept the change x Cena e Make any necessary changes to the pa
264. f the sketch plane Note When using the To Depth or Mid Plane options you can dynamically resize the extrusion in the work area by dragging the node 104 associated with the sketch profile As you drag the node the extrusion length will automatically increase or decrease increments based on the Spinner Increment value File gt Properties gt Units tab Chapter 7 Feature Creation To create the extrusion in a different direction other than normal to the sketch plane deselect the Along Normal option Then select a linear edge or axis to define the extrusion direction Specify a Draft Angle if required and click the Outward option to change the direction of the draft if necessary You can enter a custom Label if you would like to customize the feature name as it is displayed in the Design Explorer Click OK to create the extrusion i Peas A a ee A a Se or E i l i Figure 32 Extruded boss result E AA sn ee S a gt _ pri the 50h A To Geometry extrusions To Geometry Creates an extrusion up to another reference plane or face E Select a Target by selecting a reference plane surface or face You can also specify an Offset value to create the extrusion up to a specified distance from the Target To create the extrusion in a different direction other than normal to the sketch plane deselect the Along Normal option Then select a linear edge or axis to define the
265. ference Figure 4 6 Working with Existing Sketch Figures Several tools are included in Alibre Design to assist you in working with existing sketch figures 4 6 1 Extending Figures You can use the Extend tool to extend a line or arc to meet another line arc circle spline or reference line gt To extend a sketch figure 1 Select the Extend tool from the Trim Extend fly out on the Sketching toolbar or from the Sketch menu select Extend or right click and select Extend from the pop up menu 2 Move the mouse pointer over the line or arc that you want to extend A dashed preview will appear showing the direction of the extended entity If the direction is incorrect move the mouse pointer to the opposite end of the entity 3 To generate the extension click once on the entity 4 6 2 Trimming Figures You can use the Trim tool to delete portions of sketch entities based on intersections with other entities You can trim a line arc ellipse circle and spline that intersects with other lines arcs ellipses circles splines and reference lines gt To trim a sketch figure 1 Select the Trim Figure tool from the Sketching toolbar or from the Sketch menu select Trim or right click and select Trim from the pop up menu 2 Move the cursor over the portion of the sketch figure that you want to trim The portion becomes highlighted 3 Click the highlighted portion to delete it up to its intersection with another sketch fi
266. follow steps 1 and 2 above to create the new view After the auxiliary view is created the sketch line can be deleted 256 Chapter 12 Drawings A preview of the auxiliary view is displayed 3 Move the cursor to position the auxiliary view to the correct location 4 Click to place the auxiliary view The auxiliary view is placed on the sheet aligned to the edge from which it was created You can only move the auxiliary view in the direction normal to the edge from which it was created Note To break the alignment between the auxiliary view and the parent view right click the view that is currently aligned and select Align Selecting Align will uncheck that option and you can then drag the view unconstrained 12 4 3 Detail View A detail view is a view that shows a portion of an existing view at an enlarged scale gt To create a detail view 1 Select the Sketch Mode HH tool from the Sketching toolbar 2 Sketch any closed figure enclosing the area that you want to detail Figure 93 Drawing view with closed shape outlining detail area 257 Chapter 12 Drawings 3 Select the Detail View pa tool from the Detailing toolbar or from the Insert menu select Detail View 4 Select the sketch figure A preview of the detail view appears 5 Move the mouse to position the detail view appropriately The detail view can be placed anywhere on the sheet Click to locate the view The default scale for the detail view
267. ful for visualizing the paths taken by Parts If no Individual Trace Types have the Show Trail option selected or no Traces are currently being generated no trails will be shown Note Trails are always shown stretching backwards in time from the current frame even during Reverse playback 3 Check Show Position trails as lines to show the Position indicator for previous frames as a series of straight lines joining each previous Position If this box is NOT checked previous Positions are shown as a series of discreet Position indicators 4 In Trail length specify the maximum number of previous frames for which to show trails Note that during the first frames of animation when the current frame number is less than this figure trails will be shorter than this number Specifying extremely long trails may degrade playback performance 5 In Settings for individual trace types you may specify how individual trace types are displayed Select in the list box the trace type you want to change and for that type you may specify a Check Show trace to see visual indicators at the current frame during animation playback Check Show trail to see visual indicators for previous frames during animation playback c Check Fade trail color to see visual indicators for previous frames fading to black over the length of the trail d In Color set the color of the visual indicator for the selected trace type To select a different color press the Browse b
268. fy the display of various 3D sketch items from the view menu gt To modify the display of sketch items 1 From the View menu select Sketch Display The following items can be turned on or off in the display e Grid e Sketch Dimensions e Constraint Symbols e Guide Lines e Current Coordinate System Indicator 2 Select an item to turn it on or off A checkmark next to an item means it is visible on This is a toggle on off gt To modify the view orientation From any orientation back to the sketch plane From the View menu select Orient gt To Sketch Plane or select the Orient to Sketch Plane tool from the Orient View Toolbar From any orientation to the isometric view of the sketch plane From the View menu select Orient gt Isometric To Sketch Plane or select the Isometric To Sketch Plane tool from the Orient View Toolbar 6 3 Current Coordinate System In the 3D sketching environment all position related data is entered with respect to the Current Coordinate System CCS The CCS is depicted graphically by a 3D coordinate system in the work area This graphical coordinate system is called the CCS indicator Upon entering 3D sketch mode the CCS is automatically created using the active plane which becomes the XY Plane of the CCS The direction of the axes is determined automatically by the system 88 Chapter 6 3D Sketching gt To Define A New 3D Coordinate System The CCS can be changed using the Define 3D C
269. g to place as many sketch nodes as you need 94 Chapter 6 3D Sketching 6 7 2 Inserting Sketch Nodes from a File You can insert sketch nodes from a comma delimited text file These nodes can then be used to create features such as Sweeps gt 1 To insert sketch nodes from a file From the 3D Sketch menu select Figures gt Insert from File The Insert Nodes from File dialog appears O Insert Nodes from File Insert Nodes from this File ESD ocuments and Settings lbre Design 4 Number of Points Detected 5 After Inserting the Nodes 3 Fit a Spline Through the Nodes Connect Consecutive Nodes with Lines Do Nothing o Enter the required information File Name Type in the file name or use the Browse button to designate the file containing the nodes Choose one of the following Fit a Spline Through the Nodes the system will interpolate a spline through the nodes e Connect Consecutive Nodes with Lines each node will be connected by a straight line e Do Nothing the nodes will be placed in the sketch without connecting figures Click OK to insert the nodes 6 8 Working with Existing 3D Sketch Figures 6 8 1 Adding Fillets gt To add a fillet to a sketch figure Select the Fillet tool from the Sketching toolbar or from the 3D Sketch menu select Fillet The Fillet Figures dialog appears Select the first figure by clicking it The figure name appears in the Figures to Fillet fie
270. g toolbar 2 Move the cursor over the dimension right click and select Properties from the pop up menu The Dimension Properties dialog appears Dimension Pro perties Dimension Style New Dimension Style E Units and Tolerance Lines and Arrows Text Alternate Units and Text Primary Units Tolerance Format Lengi Methods Unit Inches wt Lengi Format Decimals w Precision 3 we Angl Zero SuDDres Leading Trailing Disol Unite As Reference Dimension a taa 0 Figure 24 Dimension Properties Dialog 3 Select one of the four tabs Units and Tolerance Lines and Arrows Text and Alternate Units and Text 4 Make the desired changes to the dimension settings 5 Click OK to apply the changes 65 Chapter 4 Sketching 4 9 Working in a Sketch By default a new part workspace contains three reference planes XY YZ and ZX Refer to Reference Geometry on page 75 for details related to inserting additional reference planes Any reference plane can be used as a sketch plane To select a reference plane to be used as the sketch plane simply select it either in the work area or the Design Explorer before entering sketch mode or enter sketch mode and then select the desired sketch plane You can refer to Entering Sketch Mode on page 46 for more information 4 9 1 The Sketch Grid Upon entering a sketch by default a sketch grid will be displayed that can be used as reference du
271. gent to a curve Tangent constraints can be applied automatically during sketching or placed manually after a figure has been sketched Can be applied to a curve and a line or two curves 55 4 7 Chapter 4 Sketching Perpendicular Lines can be constrained to be perpendicular to other linear entities Perpendicular constraints can be applied automatically during sketching or placed manually after a figure has been sketched Can be applied to two lines or a line and a circle or circular arc Parallel Lines can be constrained to be parallel to each other Lines can be constrained parallel automatically during sketching or can be manually constrained after placement Can be applied to at least two lines 2 Manually Applying Sketch Constraints To manually apply a sketch constraint Click the small black options arrow on the Sketching toolbar to access the Constraint fly out or from the Sketch menu select Constraints Select the applicable constraint tool The mouse pointer changes to show the corresponding constraint symbol For example after yy selecting the Coincident constraint tool the mouse pointer changes to In the sketch select the figures to constrain Many of the constraint types require multiple selections For example applying a symmetric constraint first requires selecting a reference line or sketch line and then selecting two other sketch figures Simply click all the required entities one by one to apply
272. gle Count or Scalar and the equation that will define its value You can also add a comment if you desire When you are finished Close the Add Equation dialog Type in the new variable name new equation or variable value and press Enter on the keyboard 4 Click OK in the Equation Editor dialog to apply the changes Functions available for use The following functions are available for use in equations in Alibre Design Function abs x Returns the absolute value of the argument acos x asin x atan x sin x Name absolute value arc cosine inverse sine arc tangent sine Description acos a c a in radians x lt 1 asin b c a in radians x lt 1 atan b a ain radians x lt 1 Returns the sine of an angle The argument can be any valid numeric expression in radians The sin x function takes an angle and returns the ratio of two sides of a right triangle The ratio is the length of the side opposite the angle divided by the length of the hypotenuse To convert degrees to radians multiply degrees by pi 180 To convert radians to degrees multiply radians by 180 pi sin a b c 63 Chapter 4 Sketching Function Name Description cos x cosine Returns the cosine of an angle The argument can be any valid numeric expression in radians cos a a c tan x tangent The argument can be any valid numeric expression that expresses an angle in radians tan a b a int x integer Returns the
273. go back to it 10 4 Using Configurations in Drawings When inserting new standard drawing views you can choose which configuration you would like to see in the view The Standard Views Creation dialog has a field called Configurations with a drop down menu for you to select the configuration you want to see in the views Since all models contain at least one configuration Config lt 1 gt by default the Configurations field will always be populated with a selection If your model contains more than one configuration you can select the one you want from the menu 199 Chapter 10 Design Configurations Standard Views Creation Design models microscope E pePlece Configurations Exploded Views J View Selections t H ofa m a Frot Right Scale f1 CN More Options gt gt a JL toos OI Notes You cannot create drawing views of assemblies with missing configurations If you have an assembly that includes BOTH design configurations AND inter design constraints on page 218 in the same assembly or subassembly you will not be able to use Fast View mode when creating drawing views for the assembly 10 5 Using Configurations in a BOM When creating a BOM for a design you can choose which configuration you would like to include The Bill of Materials dialog has a field called Configurations with a drop down menu for you to select the configuration 200 Chapter 10 Design Configurations G Bill of M
274. greater Arc Pattern creates an arc pattern of the selected shape When Arc Pattern is selected the dialog options will look like this Pattern Type Pattern Parameter Pattern Radius A 1 000 Start Angle 54 g Pitch Angle P4 18 000 C Number N 5 E Shape Angle Yector 41 Chapter 4 Sketching You will set the values for e Pattern Radius The radius of the arc pattern e Start Angle The angle of the first shape of the pattern with respect to the positive X axis Pitch Angle The angle between two successive shapes in the pattern e Number The number of shapes in the pattern must be a value of 1 or greater Check the box for Shape Angle Vector if you want the shapes in the pattern aligned along the radius of the arc pattern This option is not available for the round shape Figure 13 Shape Angle Vector Unchecked Figure 14 Shapes Angle Vector Checked Circular Pattern creates a circular pattern of the selected shape When Circular Pattern is selected the dialog options will look like this Pattern Type R Pattern Parameter Pattern Radius A 2500 B Start Angle 5A 0 z al Number M 5 a Shape Angle Vector 42 Chapter 4 Sketching You will set the values for e Pattern Radius The radius of the circular pattern e Start Angle The angle of the first shape of the pattern with respect to the positive X axis e Number
275. gs from other CAD systems into Alibre Design In This Chapter WO spaces SA A O 13 SCA AU AA A A O A A A II A A IN 17 o eaten e eine neice ants cetulnanaresetcayetcet leaner E E E E A debunaaaatennedceeuenauesn bean 19 VOW MANDO Mn Rat rato RIO rocio 19 Er alo A pamper yA Se tee er eee Een ere een een ee 21 Keyboard HotKey DESCrPUOMSe sssrin ia A A A liad Maine eae 22 3 1 Workspaces All design work in Alibre Design is done in windows called workspaces You can open a part sheet metal part in Alibre Design Professional and Expert assembly drawing or bill of materials workspace Each workspace is displayed in a separate window however a drawing workspace can contain multiple drawing sheets You can have as many workspaces open as needed 3 1 1 Workspace Terms Alibre Design workspaces are divided into two distinct areas e The Design Explorer is located on the left side of the workspace and lists all information related to a design including reference geometry and feature geometry 13 Chapter 3 Introduction to the Design Interface e The work area is the section of the workspace in which you create all parts assemblies and drawings Toolbars may be located above and to the right of the work area Dis p Yew rest eeh eih Pesa Lge bre CAM STLimpat Wincor Help 040006080 Toolbars a a El ia al El a ig a a i if 3 1 2 Opening a New Workspace gt To open a new part sheet metal
276. gurations gt To change an instance in an assembly pattern 1 Click the plus symbol next to the instance that you want to change This will expand the tree to show the configurations available 2 Double click the configuration you want displayed for that instance to make it the active one The model will update in the work area to reflect the new configuration A Female Connector 1 gt Small neo Linear Pattern 1 Female Connectors 2 gt Small k Female Connector 3 gt Large E Configurations F EN Constraints Edges hy Faces a Female Cormectorz4 gt Small Figure 81 Design Explorer showing pattern when one instance is changed Figure 82 Pattern displayed in the work area one instance displays a different configuration Behavior of pattern instances in different configurations The number of instances in a pattern is a parameter How the instances behave in different configurations depends on the lock properties of each configuration Example 1 The example assembly above has 1 configuration Config 1 Assembly Config 1 has a pattern of 4 Female Connectors Create another configuration of the assembly Config 2 Lock all options except Parameter Values which will be unlocked Assembly Config 2 is at this point is identical to Assembly Config 1 Next activate Assembly Config 1 and edit the pattern so that it has seven instances instead of four Then activate Assembly Config 2 In the
277. gurations category node however the activate configuration name is appended to the part name You can see this illustrated below Notice the root assembly is called FourConnectors_w_Leads Female Mixed Short FourConnectors_w_Leads is the name of the assembly model file and Female Mixed Short is the name of the active configuration There is a subassembly called Four Connectors lt 1 gt Male Large This means that Male Large is the active configuration of the model Four Connectors in this assembly You can see the Configurations category under this component which lets you know you can change the active configuration from Male Large to something else if desired 194 Chapter 10 Design Configurations The Four Connectors subassembly has several parts under it You will see one called Male Connector lt 1 gt Large This tells you that Large is the active configuration of the part called Male Connector Under that component there is no configuration category Since this component is nested in a subassembly of the root you cannot change the active configuration here Design Explorer PourConmectors_ ww Lead Female Mised Short B Configurations A cP Redline Views 29 Section Views ce Exploded Views El E l mi o C o T o i a L Ar Er T E Cv la T Constraints Mate 1 Mate 2 Mate 3 E Base lt 1 gt 4nchored Male Connectors 1 gt Large kg Edges
278. gure The entire figure will be deleted if it does not intersect with another figure O 47 Chapter 4 Sketching 4 6 3 Adding 2D Fillets to Sketch Figures You can use the 2D Fillet tool to place a tangent arc at the intersection of two sketch figures and subsequently delete the corner You can also place a fillet on non intersecting figures the figures will be extended and a fillet will be placed accordingly at the resultant intersection gt To add a 2D fillet to a sketch figure Select the 2D Fillet tool from the Sketching toolbar or from the Sketch menu select Fillet The Fillet Figures dialog appears Select the first figure by clicking it The figure name appears in the Figures to Fillet section of the dialog Select the second figure by clicking it The figure name appears in the Figures to Fillet section of the dialog Enter the fillet radius value in the Radius box Click Apply to create the fillet The Apply button will be inactive if the radius value is not possible The Fillet Figures dialog remains open so you can continue to place fillets on other figures Note Consecutive fillets with a diameter equal to the first fillet will not be dimensioned instead an equal constraint will automatically be placed Click Close to close the Fillet Figures dialog 4 6 4 Adding Chamfers to Sketch Figures You can use the 2D Chamfer tool to place a beveled edge at the intersection of two sketch figures and subsequent
279. h Adobe Reader 7 0 8 and above 174 Chapter 9 Working with Parts Full Publisher Module Features e Ability to publish PDF files with Interactive 3D model including rotate pan and zoom e Assembly tree e Drawings e BOMs e Exploded view animation with ordered steps e Saved views e PDF file can be viewed with Adobe Reader 7 0 8 and above 9 10 1 Creating a PDF File gt To create a PDF file of a part sheet metal part or assembly From the File menu select Publish to PDF or select the Publish to Acrobat PDF tool from the PDF Publishing toolbar The PDF Publishing Wizard opens and the 3D Model tab is active Select a template to use See PDF Publishing Templates on page 179 for more information Click Next If you want to add a header select the Title tab and enter a title Click the Font button to change the font of the Title Tip The Title can be one line only and the text will not wrap If you want to add a footer select the Footer tab and enter a footer Click the Font button to change the font of the Footer Tip The Footer can be one line only and the text will not wrap If you selected a template that includes text select the Body Text tab s and enter text as necessary Click the Font button to change the font of the text To include a carriage return press CTRL Enter on your keyboard Click Next Check the Views you want to include in your PDF if any The default v
280. h Mode The same methods used to enter 3D sketch mode can be used to exit 3D sketch mode gt To exit 3D sketch mode use any one of the following options e Click the Select tool from the View toolbar e Create a feature from the sketched profile For example select a feature tool such as the Sweep tool from the Part Modeling toolbar e Select the Regenerate ESP tool from the Part Modeling toolbar e From the Feature menu select Regenerate All 6 6 3D Sketch Figures 6 6 1 Line gt To sketch a line 1 Select the Line tool from the Sketching toolbar or from the 3D Sketch menu select Figures gt Line or right click and select Line from the pop up menu 2 Position the cursor at the location where you want to start the line 3 Click to start the line and drag the cursor to sketch the line 4 Click again to complete the line segment You can continue to sketch additional line segments by clicking Double click or press ESC on the keyboard to complete the line 92 Chapter 6 3D Sketching 6 6 2 Arc You can sketch three different circular arc types 1 Center Start End 2 Start End Radius 3 Tangent Start End gt To sketch a circular arc using Center Start End Select the Circular Arc Center Start End tool from the Sketching toolbar or from the 3D Sketch menu select Figures gt Circular Arc gt Center Start End or right click and select Circular Arc from the pop up menu Click in the
281. h their initial values to all unlocked configurations In addition any changes to parameter values will also be applied to all unlocked configurations Changes to the active configuration s Part Data property values will be applied to all unlocked configurations 189 Individual Lock Locked Behavior Checked Color Properties Changes to the edge and or face colors of the active configuration will be ignored in all locked configurations Reference Geometry Hiding Hiding and unhiding of reference geometry in the active configuration is ignored in all locked configurations Active Section View Choosing to activate or deactivate the view of a 3D section view in the active configuration is ignored in all locked configurations Chapter 10 Design Configurations Unlocked Behavior Unchecked Changes to the edge and or face colors of the active configuration will also be applied to all unlocked configurations Hiding and unhiding of reference geometry in the active configuration will be applied to all unlocked configurations Activating or deactivating the view of a 3D section view in the active configuration also changes the view state of all unlocked configurations 5 Check the Active checkbox to make the new configuration the active one 6 Select OK to create the new configuration The new configuration will appear in the Design Explorer In addition once a second configuration has been created the part
282. h you want to publish 11 Check the Put my logo on the top right corner option to include an image in the PDF then click Browse to find and select the image 12 In Save Location browse to the location where you want to save the PDF file Note If you choose to save to an existing file after clicking Publish you will be prompted to choose if you want to overwrite the existing file or add the published page to the existing file at the end as an additional page 13 Choose Preview if you would like to view the PDF file before saving it This creates a temporary file that is deleted if you do not publish the file 176 Chapter 9 Working with Parts 14 Click Publish The PDF file will be created and saved to the location you specified gt 12 To create a PDF file of images or text From the File menu select Publish to PDF or select the Publish to Acrobat PDF tool from the PDF Publishing toolbar The PDF Publishing Wizard opens Select the General tab Select a template to use See PDF Publishing Templates on page 179 for more information Click Next If you selected a template that includes an image click Browse to find and select the image you want to publish Depending on which template you selected select the Title Footer and or Body Text tabs and enter the text you want to appear in each location Tip The Title and Footer can be one line only and the text will not wrap To include a carriage return in
283. have not been used to create 3D geometry This constraint is associative If the object associated with the constraint moves the corresponding 3D node moves with it Inferred constraints can be broken by holding the CTRL key then clicking and dragging the node away Fixed Direction During the creation of lines that are horizontal or vertical with respect to the sketch plane an implied fixed direction constraint will be placed on them 6 9 2 Explicit Constraints Explicit constraints are applied in a fashion analogous to their 2D equivalents through the use of a toolbar button or menu selection The Constraints fly out toolbar is available from the Sketching toolbar Coincident A node can be constrained so that it lies on a figure model edge or planar face Fixed Figures may be constrained to a fixed position in the sketch After the constraint is applied the node or figure may not be moved without first deleting the constraint Direction The direction of a 3D line can be constrained so that it is held constant if Parallel Lines can be constrained to be parallel to each other In addition a line can be constrained to be parallel to a linear edge a reference plane or a planar face For planes and faces the constraint indicates that the line is perpendicular to the normal of the plane or face Perpendicular Lines can be constrained to be perpendicular to other lines reference planes reference axes or planar faces
284. he Parts involved There are situations in which this may produce a useful simulation for instance if the reason for simulating is to detect the range of motion of a part possible interferences or for generating demonstration movies Manually moving constrained Parts in Assemblies using the mouse can sometimes produce results similar to a Kinematic Simulation Though purely Kinematic Simulation may sometimes be acceptable there are some cases in which it will produce a very different result from a Dynamic one For instance a piston and arm moving up and down will normally produce a smooth rotation in the crank to which they are connected However a purely Kinematic Simulation may show the crank rotating back and forth 180 degrees never completing a full circle Normally the angular momentum of the crank and arm would carry the motion through the top dead center position but angular momenta are ignored in Kinematics For this reason Alibre Motion does not use this type of simulation Quasi Kinematic Simulation The other type of simulation used by Alibre Motion is a new development of Kinematic Simulation Rather than ignoring the mass inertia and momentum of a Part Alibre Motion substitutes values such as 1 wherever possible which means that solutions to large and complex problems can often be found much more efficiently This type of simulation may be best for very large or complex assemblies when generating demonstration animations de
285. he Expand Explosion tool to 1 increase or the Contract Explosion pr tool to decrease from the Assembly Modeling toolbar or from the Tools menu select Expand Explosion or Contract Explosion Continue to expand or contract the exploded view until the desired view is achieved To restore a part back to its original position right click the part and select Restore To Default Position from the pop up menu To exit the exploded assembly view and return to normal assembly mode right click the exploded view in the Design Explorer and select Exit Exploded View from the pop up menu or from the Edit menu select Exit Exploded View or right click in the work area and select Exit Exploded View from the pop up menu The assembly is returned to its normal view Chapter 11 Assembly Design 11 7 3 Viewing and or Editing an Exploded View You can view and edit an exploded view at anytime gt To view and or edit an exploded view 1 Inthe Design Explorer right click the Exploded view you want to edit and select Edit from the pop up menu or select the Exploded view and from the Edit menu select Edit Exploded View The Exploded view ds edited is listed in blue text in the Design Explorer and is displayed in the work area ea Bearings Mod Partial 2 Make any necessary changes to the Exploded view 3 To return to the normal assembly view right click the Exploded view being edited and select Exit Exploded View from the pop up menu 11 7
286. he length of the leader as well as reposition the datum box Datums can also be moved to another location by clicking the arrow as opposed to the text 12 6 4 Datum Targets In part or assembly workspaces you can attach datum target annotations to faces of models but not to vertices or edges In drawing workspaces you can place datum annotations at any location gt To insert a datum target 1 In any type of workspace from the Insert menu select Annotation gt Datum Target In a drawing workspace select the Datum Target tool from the Detailing toolbar The Datum Target Annotation dialog appears Datum Target Target Area O Point target rea Lo BE O Circular target Show 2 Rectangular target L Show size outside symbol Target notation a Target Point 121 84 The top area of the Datum Target dialog previews the annotation as you build it 2 Select the target type Point Circular or Rectangular 3 Inthe Area fields specify the target size 4 Select the Show option to show or hide the datum target 5 Select the Show size outside symbol option if desired 6 Inthe Target notation fields specify the datum reference label s 7 Click in the Target field 8 In the work area select the face edge or view to attach the annotation Drag the target away from the selection to lengthen the leader 9 Select the Bent Leader option if necessary 10 Click to anchor the annotation 11 Click O
287. he options at the bottom of the dialog if they are not visible click the More Options button In the View Creation Options section a Check the Fast Views box to use Fast View Mode on these views Fast View mode produces a less precise image visually but is substantially faster for large or very complex assemblies Refer to Fast Views on page 236 for more information b Enter a value for the view scale into the Scale field or check the option Use Sheet Scale which will select the Sheet scale that was set in the New Sheet Properties dialog c Select the Project as Flat Pattern option if desired for sheet metal parts In the View Detailing Options section a Check Select All to use all of the available options b Check Hidden Lines to display the entities that would not be directly visible c Check Centermarks and or Centerlines if you want to display them d Check the Design Dimensions box if you want to display the driving dimensions from the model These will be the original model dimensions If you have used any Push Pull functions the final model dimensions resulting from those will not be displayed e Check Hole Callouts to display the full hole callout for holes created using the Hole feature f Check Cosmetic Threads to display a representation of the threads on a threaded hole g Check Tangent Edges to include the tangent edges in the view h Check Bend Centerlines to add center lines to bends in sheet metal par
288. he rollback point not at the end of the feature list gt To roll back features in the Design Explorer 1 In the Design Explorer move the cursor over the blue Feature History gt line 2 Click and drag the Feature History line above the features you temporarily want to disable 3 Release the mouse button Or Double click the feature listed immediately above the features you want to disable 161 Chapter 9 Working with Parts The Feature History line moves to the rollback point the features below the line become gray and the part is rebuilt to only reflect the features above the Feature History line a a Extrusion lt 3 gt gt _ lt 3 T gt To roll features forward Drag the Feature History line below the feature or features you want to reactivate Or Double click the feature that you want to reactivate All inactive features above the feature you double click will also become active again Note To simultaneously reactivate all disabled features select the Regenerate g tool from the Part Modeling toolbar or from the Feature menu select Regenerate or press F5 on the keyboard 9 3 Using the Measurement Tool You can use the measurement tool to measure items as well as distances and angles between edges faces vertices planes axes and points in a design gt To take a measurement 1 Select the Measurement bo tool from the Inspection toolbar or from the Tools menu select Measurement Tool
289. hecked out If the item is checked out to you the file will open normally If the item is checked out to someone else the file will open in Read Only mode Checking In Files When you want to check in files you must do so manually gt To check in files 1 Browse the Vault interface through the Windows Explorer to find the files you want to check in 2 Right click the files and select Check In or press Ctrl I gt To find all files checked out to you 1 Browse the root folder of the Vault 2 Select the Checked Out to Me view All files checked out to you are displayed You can multi select them and then right click and select Check In or press Ctrl I File Edit View Favorites Tools New Operations Settings Help Beck ki O i JO Search m Folders Hab A He Address E M Alibre Search in metadata and file contents by M Files Name Type gt Customer S 1 By Product View _2 Document a2 By Project View fener 233 CAD Files View Ma Documents View Ea 5 Customers View M6 Projects Views 9 Assigned to Me View View offine View yRecently Modified by Me View atest Searches View 17 5 Finding Items in the Alibre Vault 17 5 1 Searching The Alibre Vault has several ways to sort and search your data These various capabilities allow you to sift through extremely large amounts of data almost instantly 350 Chapter 17 The Alibre Vault by M Files Quick Search issardimmetadata ar le O sp
290. her that will be included in the pattern Selecting a different face as the Seed Face may or may not change the group of inferred related faces depending on your model The inferred faces will be highlighted in the work area and the number of selected faces will be displayed in the dialog next to the Seed Face Figure 60 Model with Seed Face Selected 3 Complete all of the requirements for the First Direction In Linear Path select an edge or axis to determine the direction for the pattern creation A preview will be displayed in the work area Figure 61 Linear Topology Pattern Preview 4 Check the Change Direction box to reverse the direction if necessary 5 Enter the desired Spacing between each copy The resulting pattern cannot overlap itself Setting the spacing too low can make the bodies overlap resulting in an invalid body 6 Enter the number of Copies including the original 7 If you would like to create the pattern in two directions fill in the information for the Second Direction section as well 134 Chapter 7 Feature Creation 8 Check the Check Results box to have Alibre Design detect whether or not the resulting bodies from the pattern are valid It is good design practice to leave this box checked on If this box is unchecked you may inadvertently create a pattern that appears to be valid but in reality is not If you do not use the Check Results option you should go to the Tools menu and select Check Pa
291. her SLDS lic gee 0 gcc et ee eee er ee eee 99 6 1 The 3D Sketching Interface The 3D Sketching toolbar is shown by default on the right side of the workspace Commonly used sketch tools are accessible on the Sketching toolbar Activate 3D Sketch with options flyout activate 3D sketch mode Select select sketch figures and entities Constraints with options flyout place manual constraints on a sketch Dimension place dimensions on sketch figures Line with options flyout create a line figure Arc with options flyout create an arc figure Spline with options flyout create a spline figure Sketch Node create a sketch node Direct Coordinate Entry create sketch figures by entering Cartesian or Polar coordinates Define Coordinate System define the current coordinate system Cycle Sketch Plane change the sketch plane El Pe Le Le lol IN El y 87 Chapter 6 3D Sketching Elevate change the elevation by dragging the cursor Elevation change the elevation by entering coordinates Fillet place a fillet on two existing figures All of the tools accessible on the 3D Sketching toolbar are also accessible from the 3D Sketch menu 6 2 3D Sketching Context Just as 2D sketching is done in 2D Sketch Mode 3D sketching takes place 3D Sketch Mode The 3D sketching environment has a dedicated toolbar and right click menu which allow you to access the 3D sketch functions You can modi
292. ia ita 28 Ciao AAA o E E EE gt A A ev A e reer errr etree 29 Reference Figures and Sketch Nodes ccccccccccccsseeesseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeaaaueeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaaeaasdeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaaaaagedeeeeeeeeeeseesesaas 46 Working WIN EXISTING Sketen FUESE 47 o A N E EE acco AE E E EA E EE A 54 Placing Dimensions on SKSICA FIGUICS ir A a 58 A nn e o PEA 66 Sketches and the Design Explorer barcos iii renttpicosiea 72 4 1 The Sketching Interface The Sketching toolbar is shown by default on the right side of the workspace T 0 Ud NASA E a m G Activate Sketch with options fly out activates sketch mode Select select sketch figures and entities Constraints with options fly out place manual constraints on a sketch Dimension place dimensions on sketch figures Line with options fly out create a line figure fly out includes Reference Line create a reference line figure Circle with options fly out create a circle figure fly out includes Ellipse create an elliptical figure Arc create an arc figure options for circular and elliptical Rectangle with options flyout create a rectangle figure fly out includes Polygon create an n sided polygon figure B Spline with options flyout create a spline figure Sketch Node create a sketch node Direct Coordinate Entry Creates sketch figures by entering point to point Cartesia
293. ial by extending a sketch in a linear direction by a specified distance 103 7 3 Extru gt Chapter 7 Feature Creation 1 Creating Extrude Boss and Extrude Cut Features de features require a closed sketch see Open and Closed Sketches on page 69 To create an extrude boss or extrude cut a T 1 With a sketch still active select the Extrude Boss tool or the Extrude Cut a tool from the Part Modeling toolbar or from the Feature menu select Boss gt Extrude or Cut gt Extrude The Extrude Boss or the Extrude Cut dialog appears Extrude Boss Type Direction Baath Along Normal 5000 OO 4 Reverse To Geometry Draft Angle Outward Label Extrusions 2 gt 7 Cena e Click in the Sketch field to activate it then the sketch you want to extrude Select a Type from the pull down menu Follow the steps below depending on the Type To Depth Mid Plane Through All extrusions To Depth Creates an extrusion of a specified depth on one side of the sketch plane Mid Plane Creates an extrusion of a specified depth on both sides of the sketch plane Half the extrusion length is proportional to each side of the sketch plane Through All Applies only to extrude cut Creates the cut through the entire solid in the specified direction a Specify the extrusion Depth value If using To Depth you can select the Reverse option if necessary to create the extrusion on the opposite side o
294. ially placing the views you can re position views on the sheet as necessary Note that the standard views are initially aligned Moving the front view will cause related standard views to move You can break the view alignment if necessary gt To move a view 1 Select the View selection filter if it is not already being applied 2 Select the Select ls tool from the View toolbar if it is not already selected 3 Move the cursor over the view A red view boundary appears and the mouse pointer changes to resemble a hand 241 Chapter 12 Drawings 4 To reposition a view or the views click and hold the mouse button and move the cursor The selected view and all associated views move 5 Release the mouse button to place the views Note You can break an individual view s dependence on other views by right clicking the view and unchecking the Align toggle in the pop up menu You can again establish the alignment by rechecking the Align toggle 12 2 8 Updating Drawing Views It is likely that you will need to make changes to your part and assembly models even after you have created 2D drawings of the models When you make a change to a part or assembly model and save the model the 2D drawing becomes outdated because it does not contain the most recent model information You can update the drawing to bring in the new model data gt To update drawing views 1 Select the Reproject Outdated Views tool from the Detailing toolbar or
295. ialog File gt Properties gt Layers tab Mame Visible Locked Pattern Color Scale Weight Comment e A Solid 2 1 00 0 10 CONTINUOUS CENTER E Solid T 1 00 0 10 CENTER DASHED E Dashed 5x __ _ 1 00 0 10 DASHED HIDDEN a Hidden 53 1 00 0 10 HIDDEN PHANTOM E Phantom 5 1 00 0 10 PHANTOM BEND CENTERS mu Center 5 1 00 0 10 BEND CENTERS VISIBLE E Solid a 1 00 0 25 VISIBLE TANGENT EDGES Solid 4 1 00 0 10 TANGENT EDG DIMENSIONS E Solid e 1 00 0 10 DIMENSIONS Add Layer Settings Current Layer CONTINUOUS Current Dimension Layer DIMENSIONS cuca The layer attributes are described as follows e Current checkbox Layer to be used for new drawing items Only one layer can be designated as current e Name The layer name e Visible checkbox When checked all drawing items assigned to that layer are visible Clear the checkbox to hide items in a particular layer 245 Chapter 12 Drawings Locked checkbox When checked the corresponding layer is locked and changes cannot be made to layer attributes Pattern A preview of the layer line style Click to access a menu of additional styles Color The layer color in the drawing Double click the colored box to access the Color dialog and select a different color Scale Maximum length of line segments in dashed lines Comment Insert a comment to indicate the layer purpose All dimensions will be created on the dimension layer All other
296. ibre ea Ed File Name save Action Make Version i Pulley Assembly NEW i Wheel 1 NEw K Chord Holster New LD Mount NEW K Wheel 2 New ES Bracket Mount 2 NEW Ade New 302 Chapter 14 Opening and Saving 3 You will notice there is no location field Instead you are given the option of opening the meta card for the file which contains all the supplementary data you may use Click the meta card button El The item s meta card appears El Pulley Assembly a cles Fad connai for aliniem users v 4 Enter the data that you want to use for organizing filtering and searching this item It is highly recommended that you always input either Product or Project data as these are considered the primary filters Do not change the Class data located at the top This is automatically populated 5 Click OK 6 Continue to set the metadata for each item in the list Er 7 If you have several items that share similar data such as Product you can use this oH tool located at the top left of the dialog to copy meta data from one object to multiple objects This is useful if you are saving a large assembly into the Alibre Vault for the first time and setting individual metadata for each file would be time prohibitive or error prone 8 Select Make Version if you want to version the file Versions are created every time a file is checked into the Alibre Vault Make Version essentially checks the file i
297. ical holes the type of thread and the thread depth 2 1 Chapter 12 Drawings Setting hole callout and thread default options You can control whether hole callouts and internal and external cosmetic threads are automatically created with new views gt To set default view creation options 1 From the File menu select Properties 2 On the Detailing tab in the View Creation Options section check on all of the options that you want to include by default in all newly created views View Creation Options Centerlines Design Dimensions Centermarks lw Hole Callouts W Cosmetic Threads Bend Centerlines W External Thread Callouts Projection Third Angle OE Setting hole callout and thread options during view creation You can also choose to include the hole callouts and cosmetic threads during the creation of the view in the Standard Views Creation dialog 1 From the Insert menu select Standard Views 2 Fill out the information in the Standard Views Creation dialog as necessary 3 Click the More Options button to see the View Creation options 4 Check the Cosmetic Thread and Callout options as desired to include them automatically 5 Click OK to continue with the view creation Manually adding editing or deleting hole callouts cosmetic threads and external thread callouts gt To manually apply hole or external thread callouts 1 Move the cursor over the hole or external thread The item is high
298. ick the Exploded view you want to delete and select Delete from the pop up menu or select the Exploded view in the Design Explorer and press Delete on the keyboard 11 9 Duplicating an Exploded View You can create a copy of an existing exploded view gt 1 11 To duplicate an existing exploded view Make sure you are not currently editing any Exploded views In the Design Explorer right click the Exploded view you want to duplicate and select Duplicate from the pop up menu or select the Exploded view in the Design Explorer and from the Insert menu select Duplicate Exploded View A copy of the Exploded view is listed in the Design Explorer EP eat Exploded Views Sat Mair at Internal Bearings ae Partial 10 Editing and Designing Parts in the Assembly You can edit existing parts as well as design new parts in the context of the assembly You can reference existing geometry while editing exist ing parts and designing new parts 11 10 1 Creating a New Part within an Assembly gt 228 To create a new part in the assembly Click the Insert New Part L tool on the Assembly Modeling toolbar Or From the Insert menu select New Part or New Sheet Metal Part or press Ctrl Shift N for new part on the keyboard The work area changes from assembly edit mode to part edit mode The Sketching and Part Modeling toolbars are displayed on the right side instead of the Assembly Modeling too
299. ide length along X field enter the desired value for the side length of the square In the Angle field enter the desired angle measured from the x axis Obround In the Side length along X field enter the desired value for the length of the shape In the Side length along Y field enter the desired value for the width of the shape In the Angle field enter the desired angle from the x axis if any Rectangle In the Side length along X field enter the desired value for the side length of the rectangle In the Side length along Y field enter the desired value for the width of the rectangle In the Angle field enter the desired angle measured from the x axis Rectangle with R corner In the Side length along X field enter the desired value for the side length of the rectangle In the Side length along Y field enter the desired value for the width of the rectangle In the Radius field enter the value for the radius of the corners 45 Chapter 4 Sketching In the Angle field enter the desired angle measured from the x axis Single D In the Side length along X field enter the desired value for the side length of the single D In the Side length along Y field enter the desired value for the width of the single D In the Angle field enter the desired angle if any measured from the x axis Double D In the Side length along X field enter the desired value for the side length of the double D In the Side length along Y field
300. idth of the header row and the widest row in the table The Maximum value represents the combined width of the header row and all the rows in the table except for the last row In the Split At field specify a split value This value must fall between the Minimum and Maximum view height values Click OK The view is split into multiple views 287 Chapter 13 Bills of Material You can move the views independently on the sheet You can also move individual views onto a different sheet if necessary However if you delete or hide one view the rest of the views will be deleted or hidden as well If you add a row to the BOM after is has been split the row will be added to the last BOM view To restore the view back to its original configuration enter a Split At value outside the Minimum Maximum range 13 3 10 Adding Callout Balloons After you have linked a BOM with a drawing or inserted a BOM view into a drawing you can add callout balloons to drawing views gt To add callout balloons 1 Select the Callout tool from the Detailing toolbar or from the Insert menu select Annotation gt Callout The Callout Annotation dialog appears EN Callout Annotation E xj Upper ltem Number Override Lower Custom bead A __ 7 I Show Arron F Bent M Show dialog when inserting callouts gue Heb 2 Select Regular or Split from the Style pull down menu The Regular style will by default disp
301. iew the state the model was in at the time you began the publishing process is always included Click Next In the Page Layout section select the page layout to which you want to publish Check the Put my logo on the top right corner option to include an image in the PDF then click Browse to find and select the image In Save Location browse to the location where you want to save the PDF file Note If you choose to save to an existing file after clicking Publish you will be prompted to choose if you want to overwrite the existing file or add the published page to the existing file at the end as an additional page Choose Preview if you would like to view the PDF file before saving it This creates a temporary file that is deleted if you do not publish the file Click Publish 175 Chapter 9 Working with Parts The PDF file will be created and saved to the location you specified and can be viewed with Adobe Reader 7 0 8 or higher gt To create a PDF file of a section view 1 You must be viewing the section view in the work area 2 From the File menu select Publish to PDF The PDF Publishing Wizard opens and the 3D Model tab is active 3 Continue following the steps listed above for creating a PDF file of a part assembly or sheet metal part gt To create a PDF file of an assembly in an exploded view Note You must have a license for full publishing You must be viewing an assembly in the exploded state 1 From
302. iews The Standard Views Creation dialog appears In the Design area select the assembly item from the drop down list that you want to insert an exploded view of or click Browse to select the assembly from the Document Browser Any exploded views that were saved with the assembly are subsequently listed in the Exploded Views drop down list Select the appropriate exploded view to insert Use the arrow buttons in the Front View area as well as the View Selection buttons to select the appropriate exploded view orientation s Click OK A preview of the exploded view appears in the work area Move the cursor to position the view Click to place the exploded view on the sheet Note You can toggle on and off the trail lines of an exploded view by right clicking on the view and selecting Show Part Trails 12 4 8 Flat Pattern View of a Sheet Metal Part You can insert a flat pattern representation of any sheet metal part you created Bend lines will be shown in a flat pattern view and they can be used to create dimensions gt 1 264 To create a flat pattern view of a sheet metal part Select the Standard Views tool from the Detailing toolbar or from the Insert menu select Standard Views The Standard Views Creation dialog appears Follow steps 1 4 for creating standard views and then click the More Options button to see all of the View Creation Options Refer to Inserting Standard Views on page 234 for more information
303. ify the predefined hatch patterns that ship with Alibre Design by editing the text file alibre_unicode pat You can use Notepad to edit this file A definition of the file format is embedded within the file This file is located in the folder C Documents and Settings All Users Application Data Alibre Design System Files 259 Chapter 12 Drawings gt To modify a section view e To edit the letter label on the section line or the note on the section view double click the item or right click and select Edit from the pop up menu The Note dialog appears containing the original text Enter the new text and click OK e To change the cut direction right click the section view and select Reverse Section View from the pop up menu e The section view crosshatch pattern is set in the Detailing tab on the Design Properties dialog File gt Properties You can modify the crosshatch pattern for an individual section view Right click the section view and select Change Cross Hatch from the pop up menu The Hatch Properties dialog appears Select a new crosshatch pattern from the list or modify the Scale or Angle Click OK to apply the changes gt To create a stepped section view 1 Sketch a series of line segments across the view to define the section location Figure 95 Drawing view showing stepped outline for section view 2 Select the Section View tool from the Detailing toolbar or from the Insert menu select Section View 3 Sel
304. igate to the desired location in the file system When you click Save the feature will be saved to this location In Name enter a name to give this feature Click Save to complete the save Once you have a saved feature or sketch you can create several instances of this feature in any model by using Insert Catalog Feature 127 Chapter 7 Feature Creation 7 14 2 Inserting Catalog Features gt 1 To insert a catalog feature after it has been saved From the Feature menu select Insert Catalog Feature The Insert Catalog Feature dialog appears Insert Catalog Feature Catalog Feature designenar catalog features estuded feature Placement Rotation Base Plane ie Faces 4 Alignment 0 y Li Reference eme J cose 0 Type in the saved name of the feature or sketch you want to use or click the button to bring up the Insert Design dialog In the Insert Design dialog select the feature or sketch to use and click OK In Placement select the Base Plane field in the dialog Select the face on which you want to insert the feature or sketch In Alignment Reference select a linear edge to orient the catalog feature How this feature is placed will depend on how it was created When exported the alignment reference is the bottom of the window of the sketch Therefore the bottom of the feature as it was originally sketched will be aligned with the edge selected here Enter a value for rot
305. igning nodes Inference lines appear as dashed lines and are automatically generated when your cursor is vertically or horizontally aligned with existing nodes or points including the origin You can change the color of inference lines in Tools gt Options gt Color Schemes by selecting Inference Lines under the Sketch category 68 Chapter 4 Sketching Midpoint Hints While hovering over a line or arc a midpoint hint will be displayed Starting a figure on this hint will ensure the item starts on the midpoint 4 9 6 Direct Coordinate Entry You can enter Cartesian and or Polar coordinates while sketching to define start endpoints center points and angular and radial values gt 1 To use direct coordinate entry Select any sketch figure tool Right click in the work area and select Direct Coordinate Entry from the pop up menu OR from the Sketch menu select Direct Coordinate Entry Ea OR click the Direct Coordinate Entry tool Es from the toolbar The Direct Coordinate Entry dialog appears Select either the Cartesian or Polar tabs Select either the Absolute or Relative options The Absolute option will define all nodes with respect to the origin at 0 0 0 The Relative option will define all new nodes with respect to the last node entered Enter the Cartesian or Polar coordinates depending on which system is being used Click Set to define a node Click Close when finished 4 9 7 Right click Menu During
306. igure Create reference figure Maintain association to source entity Cance e An Extrude Boss feature is created from the sketch 167 Chapter 9 Working with Parts The assembly is put back in Edit Assembly mode and the new part can be constrained as necessary 9 9 Spreadsheet Driven Designs You can create variations of a design by using a spreadsheet of parameters Additionally a single spreadsheet of parameters can be shared by multiple designs The spreadsheet must be created in Microsoft Excel Excel 2000 Excel 2007 and Excel XP are supported Before you can drive a design with a spreadsheet of parameters you must first set up Excel by installing the Alibre Design Add In in Microsoft Excel Next you may either create a design with a desired set of dimensions or create a spreadsheet first with a set of varying parameters for those dimensions Then you are ready to drive the design with the spreadsheet Note When using Excel 2007 you must be running Excel as Administrator lf you are not you will receive an error message 9 9 1 Setting Up Excel to Drive Designs Before you can drive a design with a spreadsheet of parameters you must first install the Alibre Design Add In to Microsoft Excel gt 1 168 To set up Excel 2000 or XP Launch Alibre Design Launch Microsoft Excel From the Tools menu in Excel select Add Ins The Add Ins dialog appears Click Browse The Browse dialog appe
307. ing a part in assembly mode you can reference geometry on other parts while sketching or creating new features You can also edit a part in an independent workspace as well After saving and closing the workspace the changes made to the part will automatically be reflected in the assembly gt l To edit a part in the context of the assembly Right click on any part in the work area and select Edit Here Or Right click the part in the Design Explorer and select Edit Here from the pop up menu The work area changes from assembly edit mode to part edit mode The Sketching and Part Modeling toolbars are displayed on the right side of the work area instead of the Assembly Modeling toolbar All other parts in the assembly remain visible but are displayed semi transparently The part you are editing remains fully shaded Part to edit is shaded Figure 90 Editing Part in Assembly Displaying Part Shaded 229 Chapter 11 Assembly Design The part being edited is listed in blue in the Design Explorer and all the associated reference geometry sketches and features can be accessed E lg Right Sub Frame Right Sub Frame lt 1 gt Anchored E E Ball Joint Mount 12 a Axes Paints ee Redline Views 29 Section Views O Tl Features E gra Revolutior lt 1 gt fle Sketch lt 1 gt E da Extrusion lt 2 gt fle Sketche 2y E 3 Extrusion lt 3 fle Sketch 33 El 3 Extrusions 4 fle Sketch lt 4 gt 2 Edit the part sketch
308. ing everyone to see and share the same data while never creating duplicates of items The Alibre Vault can be used with any and all of your programs such as Excel Word PowerPoint and any other program you may have This allows you unparalleled freedom and control over your documents and projects In This Chapter DESC PURO Metadata loa 347 Differences Between the Vault and the File SYStemM cccccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaeeeeeeeeaeaaeeeeeeesaauaaeeeeeeeeeeageeeeeeseaeageeeseesssaaaeeeeessenaaees 348 Enabling or Disabling Ne Albert ol nada 348 Checking Items In and Ourorihe Alibre VAL A A iaasa aeania aa iaa aaia asiasi 349 Finding ems inthe Alibre Vall acotado t cs rra lit idas 350 A cher Sash acl ese saccharate ESE T A E E delet S culties dG eels ela E A N 353 0 aaa AO eee tere eee En ne nN NREL aS Het O A A II II A ERR Tn EMCR TT 354 USMO IP OTIS SIONS esse cage dd etree ade as o ode ste 354 Setra UP NOUNCA ION S it e tio eae eae 356 NY OV SIO UNG ti AAN AAN A AD 356 Relalon SIS assi in 359 A NNN WNAS ovEU SEER ATAN Iona MC MENT ENN 120 E URLE RR NTIS ONC EA ERE UR ANAN NC ERNEST Winn IPOCEeTRTUR MAN NMP CRN ECR MeN RIT CEE TINT 361 347 Chapter 17 The Alibre Vault by M Files 17 1 Description of Metadata Metadata is what the Alibre Vault uses to categorize your data In effect it is a replacement for a folder structure but its use goes far beyond simple file organization Metadata can basically co
309. ing the Status of a Sketch 57 Circle 30 Circle figure 30 Circular Arc figure 31 93 Circular Arcs 31 94 Closed Corner 155 Closed corner feature 155 Color properties 165 Color Properties 165 Color Scheme 15 Common Terms 9 Constant Radius Fillets 120 Constraint Types 55 Constraints assembly 213 sketching 54 Continuing with an Existing PDF 179 Controlling the Display of Sketch Constraint Symbols 57 Copy features 158 sketches 72 Copying and Pasting Sketch Figures 72 Copying Existing Features 128 158 Copying Items 354 Corner chamfer feature 156 Corner round feature 156 Corner Rounds and Chamfers 156 Cosmetic Threads 124 Creating a Custom BOM Template 283 Creating a Custom Template 265 Creating a New BOM 282 Creating a New Drawing 233 Creating a New Part within an Assembly 228 Creating a PDF File 175 179 Creating Bills of Material e 282 Creating Design Boolean Features 138 Creating Extrude Boss and Extrude Cut Features 104 106 Creating Part and Sheet Metal Part Configurations 188 Creating Patterns of Sketch Figures 51 Creating Simulations 334 Creating Thin Wall Extrude Boss and Cut Features 106 Creating Traces 339 Creating Version Labels 357 Current Coordinate System 88 Current Values 339 Cursor display 68 hints 67 Cursor Dimension Hints 67 Cursor Display 68 99 Custom Templates 265 Customizing an Existing Template 266 Custom
310. integer portion of the argument The argument can be any valid numeric expression If the argument is negative int x returns the first negative integer less than or equal to the number If the argument is a positive decimal number less than 1 such as 0 885 null is returned frac x fraction Returns just the decimal portion of the argument sign x sign Returns the sign of the argument The argument can be any valid numeric expression If the number is greater than zero sign x returns 1 If the number returns 0 and if negative the sign x returns 1 sqrt x square root Returns the square root of the argument x gt 0 xn x x gt 0 In the preceding table x is a real number n is an integer and a b c and a have the following relationship Dimensionality of equations Each parameter has a specified dimensionality that is length angle scalar count When you write an equation for a parameter the equation s dimensionality must match that of the parameter If the equation s dimensionality is different the equation will be displayed in red and a popup error message will appear when you rollover the equation For example If D1 and D2 are the lengths of two line figures you can write the equation D2 D1 0 50 which has the correct dimensionality length but you cannot write D2 D1 D1 because this equation has dimensionality length squared If A1 is the angle between tw
311. ion Revolve Boss create a revolve boss feature which adds material in a circular fashion Revolve Cut create a revolve cut feature which removes material in a circular fashion Loft Boss create a loft boss feature which adds material between 2 or more cross sections Loft Cut create a loft cut feature which removes material between 2 or more cross sections Sweep Boss create a sweep boss feature which adds material as a profile is swept along a path Sweep Cut create a sweep cut feature which removes material as a profile is swept along a path Helical Boss create a helical boss feature which adds material in a helical fashion Helical Cut create a helical cut feature which removes material in a helical fashion Fillet with options fly out create a fillet feature fly out includes Edge Chamfer create an edge chamfer feature Push Pull Face Sketch with options fly out modify features by dragging faces and or edges of a sketch fly out includes additional Push Pull tools as well as Remove Tool modify features by removing faces and Draft Surface add a draft to a face on the model Hole create a hole feature External Cosmetic Thread Apply an external cosmetic thread to a cylindrical face This thread information can be displayed in drawings Shell create a shell feature Linear Feature Pattern with options fly out create a pattern of a feature in one or two
312. ion only applies if you are using the Push Pull Face Sketch tool Chapter 7 Feature Creation 8 Left click another face to perform another Push Pull Radius operation or click Exit to leave the Push Pull mode Common Errors When Using Push Pull Radius Some file types import cylindrical items as 2 separate faces rather than one face IGES is a common format that this occurs with In these cases you will notice that when you choose the cylindrical face only half of it will highlight If you click Apply only half of the cylinder will resize To correct this you simply need to select the other half of the cylinder as well Using this tool on items that are not cylinders or cylindrical holes can cause unexpected results Fillets are the most common example of this You can use this tool on a fillet but you may not get the result you were expecting Below are examples of results you will see Figure 71 Model showing fillet selected for Push Pull Radius Figure 72 Model showing result of increasing radius on a fillet Figure 73 Model showing result of decreasing radius of fillet 7 17 5 Remove Faces You can use the Remove Faces tool to remove design items from a model such as features fillets and portions of features This operation does not delete any previously created feature or sketch it creates a new Remove Face feature in the Design Explorer This tool is especially useful for manipulating imported files that do not have a D
313. ions 2 8 Chapter 12 Drawings Before choosing Apply you can reposition the annotation while it is light blue in color To do this left click on the leader line or the text whichever you want to move and release the mouse button Move the mouse to reposition Left click again to place it 14 Click Close to exit the dialog Note You can copy and paste surface finish annotations on the same sheet or paste them on another sheet in the same drawing file To copy the annotation click on it to select it press and hold the Shift key to select multiple annotations Then either right click and choose Copy or from the Edit menu select Copy To paste the annotation you can choose Paste from the Edit menu or you can move your mouse to the location you want to paste the annotation and press CTRL V on your keyboard 12 6 7 Weld Symbol gt To create a weld symbol 1 In any type of workspace from the Insert menu select Annotation gt Weld In a drawing workspace select the Weld x tool from the Detailing toolbar The Weld dialog appears 2 Click the Far or Near tab depending on where you want the annotation placed in relation to the design 3 From the Finishing method pull down menu select the method that you want to specify 4 From the Contour pull down menu select the shape that you want for the weld surface 5 Specify a Groove angle value in degrees 6 Specify a Root opening value 7 In the Weld symbol area sel
314. ions However every part sheet metal part and assembly workspace will contain one configuration when it is opened This is true regardless of which version of Alibre Design you are using In versions that do not include the ability to create or edit configurations this will be the only configuration For example if you open a design model in Alibre Design Basic that was originally modeled in Professional and has multiple configurations you will see the configurations listed in the Design Explorer but you will only be able to edit the configuration that was active when the model was last saved In This Chapter DESIGN Configurations CV CTS cece sects access het arent E tiecttoe stereo trios italiano 185 Creating Part and Sheet Metal Part Configurations cccssssssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaesssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaaeessaaeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaaaaasaadeeeeeeeeeseesessaaaaaeness 188 ASSEMbI COn Urantia 190 Using Configurations in Drawings fecetcesecsieessecsteesdehacneseanientdekatanssecaiansceiasszacsaiantdeiatapnecestenadebacaasecestantceeatenarcsaientieiadannscestessdestdenarcerieatie 199 SINGS OFM OMS ma BOM esop o E O a EATE 200 Using the Equation Editor with Configurations cccccccccececcccceeueeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaeseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeaaceeeeeeeeeeeeesseaaaaaaasedeeeeeeeeeeesesaaas 202 10 1 Design Configurations Overview Below are illustrations for the use of Design Configurations in a part model named Male Connecto
315. items e g sketch figures annotations etc will be displayed using the current layer s attributes If you change the pattern visibility color or scale of a layer used in the drawing all existing drawing items will be updated with the new settings gt 1 To select a different layer as the current layer Click the Current checkbox corresponding with the layer you want to make current Click Apply Click Close To change the pattern Double click the appropriate Pattern entry An arrow appears in the cell Dash dot 5 You can scroll through the list or type the first letter of the desired pattern name For example type the letter i to jump to the first ISO style Continue pressing the i key to page through all of the ISO styles Select the pattern you want from the list Check Current to use this layer for new items Click Apply to implement the new settings Note For advanced users who want to customize the available line patterns in Alibre Design You can modify the predefined line patterns that ship with Alibre Design by editing the text file alibre_unicode lin You can use Notepad to edit this file A definition of the file format is gt 1 246 embedded within the file This file is located in the folder C Documents and Settings All Users Application Data Alibre Design System Files To change the color Double click the appropriate Color cell The Color dialog appears Select a preset col
316. ive them more meaningful names as you might with Design Configurations For instance you might name one Motions Only and another Forces Active gt To Rename a Simulation 1 Inthe Motion Explorer right click the Simulation you want to rename and select Rename c Configs 1 Achivate y ar i Regenerate H A Fixed Parts Clear Simulation 2 Type the new name for the Simulation 3 Press Enter to save or Escape to cancel the renaming Simulations will be listed in alphabetical order in the Motion Explorer 16 6 7 Running Simulations After you have all of the necessary simulation options set you can begin the simulation To do this make sure you have Enable Simulation Mode checked from the Motion main menu Click the Play tool to begin the simulation Choose the Pause tool 01 then Stop to end the simulation 334 Chapter 16 Alibre Motion Optimizing Playback Performance While the Alibre Motion Simulator is generating the simulation playback will normally be slowed These data are only calculated once for any given simulation and playing the simulation back for the second time will be faster A good visual indication is the Frame Slider Indicator on the Playback Deck if the pointer is at the far right of the Slider the Simulator is running and performance should be expected to be slowed If the pointer is running over an already blue section the Simulator is not running e Set the Target Playback Rate Make su
317. izing Colors of Items in Sketch Mode 28 Customizing Header and Data Font Properties 295 Customizing the Look of Sketch Figures 28 Customizing the Size of Nodes 28 Cut 156 Cut feature 103 156 Index D Dampers 329 Datum targets 275 Datum Targets 275 Datums 274 Deleting sketches 73 Deleting an Exploded View 228 Deleting Constraints 56 Deleting Reference Geometry 85 Deleting Simulations 336 Deleting Sketch Figure Dimensions 65 Deleting Sketches 73 Deleting the BOM View 287 Deleting Views 240 Description of Metadata 348 Design Boolean Editor Environment 138 Design Boolean Features 137 Design Configurations 185 Design Configurations Overview 185 Design Explorer 8 13 17 147 158 159 Design properties 8 Design Property Fields 269 Detail View 257 Detail views 257 Detailed Search 351 352 Detecting Interferences 344 Differences Between the Vault and the File System 348 Dimension properties 65 253 Dimension Properties 253 Dimension Styles 254 Dimensioning 250 Dimensioning 3D Sketch Figures 96 Dimensioning Sketch Figures 59 Dimensioning Slots and Holes 251 Dimensions 58 editing 253 Dimple 156 Dimple feature 156 Direct coordinate entry 69 Direct Coordinate Entry 69 Direct Editing 27 139 Display Acceleration 8 9 21 183 Display Optimization 183 Draft Faces 123 Drag and Drop Constraint Placement 214 Drawing Explorer 234
318. ketch Figures 95 Working with Existing Sketch Figures 47 Working with Parts 159 369 Index
319. l be ignored in all locked configurations Hiding and unhiding of reference geometry in the active configuration is ignored in all locked configurations Choosing to activate or deactivate the view of a 3D section view in the active configuration is ignored in all locked configurations Changing the configuration of a component that is used in the active assembly configuration does not affect any locked assembly configurations Components that are inserted in the active assembly configuration will be inserted as suppressed components in all locked assembly configurations For already existing components changing between suppressed and unsuppressed will not affect their suppression states in any locked assembly configurations Unlocked Behavior Unchecked Any parameters added to the active configuration will be applied with their initial values to all unlocked configurations In addition any changes to parameter values will also be applied to all unlocked configurations Changes to the active configuration s Part Data property values will be applied to all unlocked configurations Changes to the edge and or face colors of the active configuration will also be applied to all unlocked configurations Hiding and unhiding of reference geometry in the active configuration will be applied to all unlocked configurations Activating or deactivating the view of a 3D section view in the active configuration a
320. l situations where you will be saving multiple files simultaneously The single file save dialog is the Windows Standard Save dialog The multi file save dialog is not and allows you to perform some common operations that make saving multiple files easier Examples of single file saves e Saving a part in a part workspace after modifying it e Saving an assembly after inserting some existing parts that have not changed since you inserted them e Saving a drawing after projecting a view Examples of multi file saves e Saving a new assembly in which you have created new parts using top down design In this case the assembly and all new parts must be saved simultaneously e Opening a drawing of an assembly and changing the driving dimensions of some items In this case the drawing assembly and affected part files will need to be saved simultaneously e Doing a Save As All operation In this case all items in the current design will be saved to a new copy simultaneously 14 23 Saving Files to the File System Alibre Design will determine for you whether multiple files must be saved simultaneously and will present you with the appropriate save dialog Single item saves will use Windows Standard dialog Multi item saves will use a special save dialog gt To save to the File System 1 Determine which kind of save you want based on the previous section 2 Select the appropriate option from the File menu of the workspace that contai
321. late as a Drawing on page 266 or as a symbol see Saving and Using a Custom Template as a Symbol on page 267 Note When you use the template all of the entities will be placed on the continuous layer You can right click on an entity and choose Explode Symbol to explode the format and all entities will revert to their original layer Most of the time you will not need to do this It is only necessary if you need to see the different line styles for the entities in the template 12 5 3 Saving and Using a Custom Template as a Drawing gt 1 266 To save a custom template as a drawing From the File menu select Save As The Save As dialog appears Navigate to the desired location in the file system Specify a name for the drawing template Click Save To use a custom template drawing Start a new drawing In the New Sheet Properties dialog choose Template and select the Browse button In the Custom Drawing Template dialog browse through your file system to find the desired template which you have already saved and click it Click OK in the Custom Drawing Template dialog The OK button is slow to activate here Click OK Chapter 12 Drawings You will be prompted to fill in any default and user added text if you put any text fields in your template Enter the desired information then click OK Your drawing format will appear with the prompt to select a model Note The next time the New Sheet Properties di
322. lationships you have the more time is required to evaluate the model Inter part relationships are dependencies that one part has on other parts For example projecting the edge of a feature with Maintain Associativity checked on into another part to use it to create a feature in the second part Another example would be creating a sketch and creating a dimension to a feature in another part You can control whether or not Alibre Design evaluates all of these relationships on the fly or all at once when you are ready for it to happen You do this using the Auto Regenerate tool If Auto Regenerate is checked ON this is the default behavior all relationships will be evaluated on the fly If Auto Regenerate is checked OFF relationships will be evaluated at a specific time as determined by one of the situations listed here e At any point during edit of the part you turn ON Auto Regenerate The immediate effect of turning ON this switch is that all relationships are evaluated and all pending changes take effect and get displayed on the screen From this point all new edits will result in on the fly evaluation e f you do NOT explicitly turn on Auto Regenerate but you exit edit part mode then at that time all the pending evaluations will be performed and the assembly will be brought up to date and its display updated As a result exiting edit mode could take a little longer to complete Auto Regenerate will continue to remain turned OFF for s
323. lay only the item number in the callout balloon The Split style will divide the callout balloon into halves The upper half displays the item number by default and the lower half displays custom information Figure 98 Regular Callout Figure 99 Split Callout 3 If necessary select the Override option to manually enter an item number 4 Ifthe Split type was selected enter custom text in Lower Custom text box area 5 In the Leader area select e Show if you want to display a leader with the callout balloon e Bent if you want to display a bent leader with the callout balloon e An Arrow type from the pull down menu 288 Chapter 13 Bills of Material 6 Move the cursor over a part in the drawing view The part is highlighted 7 Click once to create the callout balloon The callout balloon appears 8 Drag the balloon to the appropriate position and click to place 9 Click Apply in the Callout Annotation dialog The balloon is placed 10 Continue to select parts and click Apply to add additional balloons 11 Click Close when finished Notes The Callout Annotation dialog appears by default when you insert a callout If desired you can specify the callout settings you want to use in the dialog and then deselect the Show dialog when inserting callouts option You will then be able to insert callouts quickly without using the dialog After selecting the Callout tool simply click a part in a view to create
324. lbar All other parts in the assembly will be displayed semi transparently Note New Sheet Metal Part is only available in Alibre Design Professional and Alibre Design Expert Chapter 11 Assembly Design Additionally the new part is listed in blue in the Design Explorer to signify that it is currently being edited E lige New Assembly 11 E fg New Part 1 lt 1 gt anchored Ames Planes w Ponts Construct the part features using the same techniques used to create a part in a part workspace You can use edges and faces on other parts as the sketch plane in the new part You can also use edges and faces on other parts as references or targets as you model the new part You can also project entities from existing assembly parts onto a sketch plane in the new part to create sketch or reference figures While in part edit mode if you use a face on an existing part as a sketch plane or to create a new reference plane an inter design constraint will automatically be created See nter Design Constraints on page 218 for more information You can switch back to assembly edit mode at any point To do so right click the part listed in blue in the Design Explorer and select Edit Root Assembly from the pop up menu or right click the top level assembly in the Design Explorer and select Edit Part Subassembly from the pop up menu 11 10 2 Editing a Part in an Assembly You can edit a part without leaving the context of the assembly While edit
325. ld in the dialog Select the second figure by clicking it The figure name appears in the Figures to Fillet field in the dialog Enter the fillet radius value in the Radius field Click Apply to create the fillet The Fillet Figures dialog remains open so you can continue to place fillets on additional figures Note Consecutive fillets with a diameter equal to the first fillet will not be dimensioned instead an equal constraint will automatically be placed Click Close to close the Fillet Figures dialog 95 Chapter 6 3D Sketching 6 8 2 Dimensioning 3D Sketch Figures To fully define the 3D sketch you must place dimensions on sketch figures 3D sketch dimensions function similar to 2D sketch dimensions lt is not required to dimension sketches before they are used to create features In addition sketch dimensions can easily be changed and modified at any time Linear radial and angular dimensions can be created Linear dimensions are placed on a plane running through an axis created by the endpoints and parallel with the screen at the time of creation The dimension will always lie on this plane from that time forward The dimension can be dragged along this plane from place to place Radial dimensions may be created for circular arcs Angular dimensions may be created between two non parallel lines Figure 30 Examples of 3D Linear Dimensions Figure 31 Examples of 3D Radius Dimensions 96 Chapter 6 3D Sketching
326. lighted 2 Right click the item and select Insert Hole Callout or Insert External Thread Callout from the pop up menu The callout is displayed OR 3 Select the item 4 From the Insert menu select Hole Callout or External Thread Callout Note You can show the callouts for an entire view by right clicking a view in the Drawing Explorer or right click a view in the work area and selecting the appropriate option gt To edit the hole callout 1 Move the cursor over the hole callout The cursor changes and displays the annotation symbol 2 Right click the hole callout and select Edit from the pop up menu The Hole Callout dialog appears 3 Modify the Callout Note as necessary 4 Modify the Leader parameters as necessary 5 Click OK when finished 272 Chapter 12 Drawings Note You must edit external thread callouts from the Part workspace gt To manually apply cosmetic threads 1 Move the cursor over hole or over an edge of the cylinder that has threads 2 Right click and select Insert Cosmetic Threads from the pop up menu The cosmetic threads are displayed for the selected hole or thread cylinder OR 3 Select the hole or cylinder 4 From the Insert menu select Cosmetic Thread for View Note You can show the cosmetic threads for an entire view by right clicking a view in the Drawing Explorer or right click a view in the work area and select Insert Cosmetic Threads gt To delete a cosmetic thread
327. linear directions fly out includes Circular Pattern as well as Linear and Circular Topology Patterns create a pattern of a portion of the model Feature Mirror mirror a feature about an edge or axis Scale scale a part model in any direction Design Boolean with options flyout create Boolean feature Chapter 7 Feature Creation Trim Model with options fly out trim a model with respect to a reference surface fly out includes Thicken Surface thicken a reference surface Equation Editor open the Equation Editor Insert Catalog Feature insert a feature that you previously saved Regenerate regenerate the part to update changes The tools that are accessible on the Part Modeling toolbar are accessible from the Feature menu as well The Feature menu also contains tools that do not have a corresponding toolbar icon e Thin Wall Boss gt Extrude create a thin wall extrude boss feature which adds material to the model in a linear fashion e Thin Wall Boss gt Revolve create a thin wall revolve boss feature which adds material in a circular fashion e Thin Wall Boss gt Sweep create a thin wall sweep boss feature which adds material as a profile is swept along a path e Thin Wall Cut gt Extrude create a thin wall extrude cut feature which removes material in a linear fashion e Thin Wall Cut gt Revolve create a thin wall revolve cut feature which removes material in a circular
328. ll beyond their endpoints in straight lines until they intersect Original sketch Figure 36 Result Using Extend Gap Type 6 Specify an extrusion direction Select the Along Normal option to create the extrusion normal to the sketch plane Deselect the Along Normal option and select an edge or axis to create the extrusion in a direction other than normal to the sketch plane 7 To taper the extrusion specify a Draft Angle To change the draft orientation select the Outward option 8 Specify the Wall Thickness by entering values for the Side 1 and Side 2 wall thicknesses Specifying a Side 1 value will create or remove material inward from the sketch and a Side 2 value will create or remove material outward from the sketch 9 Click OK to create the thin wall extrusion Figure 37 Resulting thin wall boss extrusion 7 4 Revolve Boss and Revolve Cut Although the revolve boss and revolve cut features are different in end result the steps used to create them are identical Revolve features also referred to as revolutions either create or remove material by revolving a sketch by a specified angle around a centerline 108 Ghapter7 FeatureCreation 000 7 4 1 Revolve Boss and Revolve Cut Features Revolve boss and cut features require a closed sketch see Open and Closed Sketches on page 69 gt To create a revolve boss or cut 1 With
329. lofted models This option is applicable only when a single guide curve is present and the Guide Curve Type is tangent Chapter 7 Feature Creation 9 Click OK to create the loft o Q Figure 41 Cross Sections for Loft Figure 42 Resulting Loft Boss Feature The following pictures illustrate the results of a loft created using the same sketches but with different types of guide curves fy Figure 43 Loft Using No Guide Curve Figure 44 Loft with Global Guide Curve Figure 45 Loft with Tangent Guide Curve Figure 46 Loft with Local Guide Curve 7 6 Sweep Boss and Sweep Cut Although the sweep boss and sweep cut features are different in end result the steps used to create them are identical Sweep features simply referred to as sweeps either create or remove material by moving a sketch along a path defined by a second sketch The following guidelines should be followed when creating sweep features e The sketch that defines the profile must be closed see Open and Closed Sketches on page 69 e The sketch es that define the path can be open or closed but cannot be self intersecting 113 Chapter 7 Feature Creation e The sketch path cannot lie on the same sketch plane as the profile e The sketch path must either start on the profile plane or pass through the profile plane e The sketch path can be multiple 2D or 3D sketches as well as Edges of Parts or Surfaces e The sketch path must be continuous
330. lose 151 Chapter 8 Sheet Metal Feature Creation The parameters set here are accessible in the Equation Editor see Using Equations in Dimensions on page 62 8 3 Tab A Tab is the first feature created in a sheet metal part and inserts flat stock based upon a sketch This is the only allowed initial feature Tab thickness is obtained from the parameters set in the sheet metal part parameters The name of the thickness parameter is AD_thickness The AD_thickness value corresponds to the stock thickness parameter specified in the Design Properties Parameters tab gt To create a tab 1 Create a sketch and draw the profile you want to extrude 2 From the Feature Menu select Tab Or select the Tab tool from the Sheet Metal Modeling Toolbar The Tab dialog appears Sketch Reverse O 3 Select the sketch you want to extrude 4 Check Reverse if you want the Tab to project off the other side of the sketch plane from what the preview shows 5 In Label enter a unique name for this feature if desired 6 Click OK to create the feature 8 4 Flange A flange is a section of the sheet metal that is bent from the original flat shape You can add a flange to any straight layer edge of flat stock material The flange places a bend and a rectangular or trapezoidal for taper conditions tab of flat stock material on the selected edge Please note that Flange features can not be mirrored gt 152 To create a flange
331. lso changes the view state of all unlocked configurations Changing the configuration of a component that is used in the active assembly configuration will also be changed in all unlocked assembly configurations Components that are inserted in the active assembly configuration will also be inserted in all unlocked assembly configurations in the same state For already existing components changing between suppressed and unsuppressed will change their suppression states in all unlocked assembly configurations Chapter 10 Design Configurations Individual Lock Locked Behavior Checked Part Subassembly Hiding and unhiding of assembly Hiding components in the active assembly configuration is ignored in all locked assembly configurations Constraint Newly added constraints are Suppression Positions Make Flexible suppressed Modifying the suppression state of an existing constraint has no effect Changes to the make flexible state are ignored The position of unconstrained constituents is locked Unlocked Behavior Unchecked Hiding and unhiding of assembly components in the active assembly configuration also applies to all unlocked configurations Newly added constraints are also applied to unlocked configurations Modifying the suppression state of an existing constraint is applied to unlocked configurations Changes to the make flexible state are applied to all unlocked assembly co
332. ly delete the corner You can also place a chamfer on non intersecting figures the figures will be extended and a chamfer will be placed accordingly at the resultant intersection gt 48 To add a 2D chamfer to a sketch figure Select the 2D Chamfer tool from the Sketching toolbar or from the Sketch menu select Chamfer The Chamfer dialog appears Select the first figure by clicking it The figure name appears in the Figures to Chamfer section of the dialog Select the second figure by clicking it The figure name appears in the Figures to Fillet section of the dialog Enter the chamfer distance value in the Distance box Click Apply to create the chamfer The Apply button will be inactive if the distance value is too large The Chamfer dialog remains open so you can continue to place chamfers on other figures Click Close to close the Chamfer dialog Chapter 4 Sketching 4 6 5 Offsetting Figures You can use the Offset tool to automatically create sketch figures offset from another selected figure or sketch by a specified distance gt To offset a sketch figure or figures 1 Select the Offset tool from the Sketching toolbar The Offset dialog appears 2 Select the figure s to offset either one at a time or drag a selection rectangle around all figures The figure name s appears in the Figures to Offset section of the dialog 3 Enter the offset distance value in the Distance box 4 If necessary select the Flip
333. m the Sketching toolbar 2 Move the mouse pointer over the elliptical arc or one of the associated nodes 3 Click hold the mouse button and drag resize the elliptical arc 4 Release the mouse button Note You can also edit the dimensions of the figure if you have placed one gt To move an elliptical arc 1 Choose the Select tool from the Sketching toolbar 2 Select the entire spline curve by dragging a selection window around it 3 Hold the Shift key click and hold the mouse button and drag the elliptical arc 4 Release the mouse button 3 Chapter 4 Sketching 4 4 8 Polygons gt To sketch an n sided polygon 1 From the Sketch menu select Figures gt Polygon or select the Regular Polygon toolbar The Regular Polygon dialog appears tool from the Sketching 2 Enter the number of sides for the polygon 3 Choose to measure the internal or external diameter 4 Left click once in the sketch window to locate the center of the polygon Move the mouse to size the polygon Left click again to place the polygon 5 Choose Apply then Close gt To resize an n sided polygon 1 Choose the Select tool from the Sketching toolbar 2 Move the mouse pointer over the circle that defines either the internal or external diameter of the polygon 3 Click hold the mouse button and drag to resize the polygon 4 Release the mouse button gt To move an n sided polygon 1 Click on the center node of
334. mensions placed automatically will vary depending on the number of sketch constraints that exist in the sketch If you want to automatically place as many dimensions as possible initially it is recommended you minimize the use of sketch constraints gt To auto dimension the entire sketch 1 From the Sketch select Auto Dimension The Auto Dimension dialog appears Auto Dimension E Appl To All figures Selected figures Remaining DOF 11 e 2 Choose the option All figures and click the Apply button Note The Remaining DOF field shows you how many degrees of freedom you currently have remaining You cannot modify this value 3 Dimensions appear on the sketch You can Close the dialog and modify any of the dimensions as required Figure 22 Before Applying Auto Dimension 60 Chapter 4 Sketching E1 2704 Figure 23 After Applying Auto Dimension To auto dimension a subset of the sketch figures From the Sketch select Auto Dimension The Auto Dimension dialog appears Choose the option Selected figures Select one or more figures to dimension and click the Apply button Dimensions appear for the selected figures You can either select and dimension additional figures or Close the dialog and modify the created dimensions 4 8 3 Using Spinner Controls When you place dimensions on sketch figures you can enter the dimension value manually by typing a value You can also use the s
335. mmon Teme ersa a Los dia 9 20 FOODS ainne E NE EA EE NEE 12 Introduction to the Design Interface oocconncccnccocnccocnceonnconanconnnenancnnanenanrenanrnnnrenanrnnarrnnnrenanrnnarenannn 13 3 1 A A ok ena coca eae 13 a WOMKSDace elisa picada 13 3 1 2 Opening a New WORKS ACC nessen sta a a a ae e E a a E 14 3 1 3 Model Terms di estroncio Dis 15 3 1 4 Work Area Color ocn A s 15 3 1 5 MUI MW Sis e e a dd tag emit at ie 16 3 1 6 A A A gant 17 3 1 7 ASE A A 17 32 Selecuon Menor EOL 18 39 TODAS ie as 19 A 20 A E A REE 21 36 Keyboard Hol Key DESC MONS mreneo a E E A a EE sesunendesveeanecesesecace 22 SKIN aaa ae 25 4 1 The Sketching ta e e e ea are ee 25 42 O e oe 26 4 2 1 Enterina Sketch Mode nica ii odo R ti E 27 4 2 2 EXIN OKEM MOGE stes 27 4 2 3 Sketch Mode Ova tada A e 27 4 3 Customizing the Look OF Sketch FIQUICS sacara ileso A 28 4 3 1 Customizing Colors of Items in Sketch Mode ooococcnnccccccconcccnnncconcoonncnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnononnnanennnnnnnnnnannnnnns 28 4 3 2 SUSTOMIZING WHE SIZE Ol NOGCS ciao dilo 28 e A A ICE a SN 29 4 4 1 A A eR ea eee 29 4 4 2 GIE a A ne eee 30 4 4 3 GICUla NOS idad iaa 31 4 4 4 A A ee 32 4 4 5 A A 33 4 4 6 AAA PR A Mast eseence ss 36 4 4 7 EDUCA til e do ad loc de daa 37 4 4 8 FONDOS sti ir ii lis 38 4 4 9 A PRO neva PORE ee er ee ee eee 38 45 Reference Figures and Sketch NOCES ccccccccccccceesseeceeeeeeeeeeseeceeeeeseeeceeeeeseeeaeeseeeeeeeessaeeseeeeeeesseaaeee
336. mplish your goal For example if you create a fillet that you later do not want delete the Fillet Feature Do not use the Remove Tool to remove the fillet In general these tips do not apply to the modification of imported geometry or conceptual design because the same potential issues will not typically arise 7 18 Scaling Parts You can increase or decrease the size of a part by using the Scale feature Note that sheet metal parts cannot be scaled only non sheet metal solid parts You can also use the Scale feature to mirror an entire part gt To scale a part 1 From the Feature menu select Scale The Scale dialog appears Scale type About origin Uniform Scale factor 11 000 AL Scale factor 1 000 Li Scale factor Z 1 000 AL Lo JL teca 0 2 In Scale Type choose About Origin or About Centroid 3 Check Uniform if you want to uniformly scale the part in all three directions If you want a different factor for each direction leave uniform unchecked and type in the desired values in Scale Factor X Y and Z boxes A scale factor of 1 0 leaves the model unchanged A feature is created in the design explorer when the scale operation is performed 146 Chapter 7 Feature Creation When modifying features before the scale operation the model will roll back to the original dimensions 7 19 Managing Features in the Design Explorer After creating a feature it will be listed in the Design Explo
337. ms are also indicated by their red node color g Missing Designs SECS Documents and Settings Administrator Desktop missingitem 2 DRW Current E Y C Documents and Settings Administrator Desktop New Assembly 4 1 ASM Curent Es Documents and Settings Administrator Desktop 1 PRT Not Found Figure 92 Missing Designs Dialog gt To replace the missing item with an existing item 1 Select the item that you want to update The Replace button becomes available 2 Click Replace The Open dialog appears 3 Select the item with which you want to replace the missing item 4 Click OK The description of the item in the Missing Designs dialog changes from Not Found to Replaced 5 Continue the process until all missing items are resolved 6 Click OK to finalize the replacements and open the drawing Note If you replace parts that are part of an assembly in your drawing saving the drawing will also cause the assembly file to be overwritten using the new parts in place of the missing ones gt To delete views that reference outdated items If you do not want to replace missing items in your drawing you will have to work in Markup Mode until all views that reference missing items are deleted When you open a drawing with views that reference missing items those views will be shown in red in the Drawing Explorer Click each item in red that was indicated to have missing components in the Missing Designs dialog and press Delete
338. mulated See Optimizing Playback Performance for more information 2 Check the Loop playback checkbox if you wish to loop between the loop start and loop end points This is also achieved by pressing the Loop button on the Playback Deck 3 In Loop from choose either 317 4 Chapter 16 Alibre Motion a start of simulation to loop to the first simulation frame when playback reaches the loop end point or b frame to loop to the specified frame number when playback reaches the loop end point In Loop to choose either a end of simulation to continue the playback all the way to the final simulation frame available or b frame to loop to the loop start when it reaches the specified frame number Note If you change the Playback settings after a simulation has been started and the current frame of the simulation is already past the frame you set as your Loop to frame the playback will continue on without looping Simulation Tab Settings on the Simulation tab are stored in the assembly You can specify different settings for each Simulation in the assembly 5 Motion Options im x Traces General Start simulation at time t O Seconds f Simulate indefinitely while playing f End at specified time End tirme 1 5 Second Simulation frame interval 07 Seconds Error tolerance 1 000E 0E Simulation type Dynamic Make these the default settings Cancel gt 318
339. n and then immediately checks it back out so you can continue to edit it 9 Click OK to finalize the save to the Alibre Vault 303 Chapter 15 Importing and Exporting Data CHAPTER 15 Importing and Exporting Data Alibre Design s import and export functionality enables interaction with data from other CAD systems Furthermore machine tools and rapid prototyping can be driven from exported data created in Alibre Design The STEP format is an ISO standard that is driven by industry Alibre Design s native format is STEP AP 203 and AP 214 two protocols in the STEP standard Alibre s STEP schema allows for the creation of parametric features along with geometry This powerful capability and platform choice allows the data created in Alibre Design to be available for use beyond Alibre Design itself In This Chapter IMPORTA Data O AS A A AA TO 305 EXPO Data ia rd ia 309 Special Oplons for IGES aNd Wks Elise 312 15 1 Importing Data 15 1 1 Supported File Types A variety of file formats are supported for interoperating with data from other CAD systems The import data types available are e Solid Works Parts and Assemblies sldprt sldasm e STEP AP 203 214 stp step ste STEP Standard for the Exchange of Product model data An ASCII format set and driven by industry that all major CAD tools have adopted e Alibre STEP stp Feature based STEP data inherent from Alibre s STEP schema e SAT sat ACIS file format
340. n and zoom operations some faces and small parts will be left out of the display These will be returned to the display after the operation is completed e No rollover until mouse pauses If this option is checked you will not see any items highlight as you move the cursor until the mouse has paused for the designated amount of time At that time the item where the cursor is paused will highlight 4 Choose Apply then Close gt To enter Display Acceleration From the View menu select Display Acceleration Or Select the Display Acceleration tool ad from the View Toolbar gt To exit Display Acceleration From the View menu select Display Acceleration Or Select the Display Acceleration tool from the View Toolbar Note If you save a model with Display Acceleration active it will remain in Display Acceleration when it is opened again 184 Chapter 10 Design Configurations CHAPTER 10 Design Configurations Design configurations allow you to create multiple variations of a part sheet metal part or assembly and maintain them in a single workspace When a part with configurations is included in an assembly you can specify which configuration you want to see in the assembly In addition when you are creating a drawing you can specify which configuration of a part or assembly will be inserted into a drawing view The ability to create and edit Design Configurations is available in Alibre Design Professional and higher vers
341. n Angle set the angle of rotation 5 Check Copy if you want the original figures to be copied to the new location 6 Click Apply then Close 4 7 Sketch Constraints Figures in a sketch may be constrained to a size orientation and relationship to another 2D figure or 3D edge Some constraints are used to apply relationships between figures for example perpendicular tangent parallel equal size or between figures and reference lines planes axes vertices and edges Other constraints are applied to individual figures including those that control a figure s orientation for example horizontal or vertical and dimension Some sketch constraints are applied automatically as figures are sketched Horizontal vertical coincident midpoint tangent intersection and perpendicular constraint types are automatically placed depending on the type size and orientation of the figure s Sketch constraints are shown in proximity to the applicable sketch figure In this example the sketch constraints are shown enlarged A Ama Note When you sketch a new figure on an existing figure or on a node on an existing figure e g start a new line on the node at the end of an existing line a coincident constraint is automatically applied The coincident constraint is not displayed in this case To break this coincident constraint move the cursor over the coincident nodes hold the Ctrl key click and drag 94 Chapter 4 Sketching Constraints
342. n callouts in the Annotations tab of the Drawing Properties dialog 12 6 1 Note You can create a free floating note or a note with a leader pointing to an edge or face The note can contain both text and symbols gt To insert a note 1 In any workspace from the Insert menu select Annotation gt Note or in a drawing workspace select the Note A tool from the Detailing toolbar The Note dialog appears Type note in this box Rotation Angle fo E Leader C Show Location Point 0 0 ok E 2 Inthe Note area type the annotation text You may align the text vertically and horizontally by clicking the text alignment icons above the Note field 3 Click Font to specify the font font style size color and effects 2 0 Chapter 12 Drawings F 4 To insert a symbol click the Symbols button The Insert Alibre Design Symbols dialog appears Click a symbol to insert it Click Close to close the symbols box 5 Specify a Rotation Angle if required 6 If you want to include a leader click the Show option in the Leader area 7 Select the Bent option if you want the leader line to have a short horizontal segment near the annotation 8 From the Arrow pull down menu select the arrow type you want to use 9 From the Position pull down menu select the position in which the text will be placed in relation to the leader 10 Select Smart Anchor if desired The smart anchor option will automatically adjust the position
343. n in with your user name and password and go to the Downloads page Click Alibre Design Client to download the version of Alibre Design associated with your license We recommend that you save the installer to your hard drive in case the installation process is interrupted Once you have saved the installer to your hard drive double click the file to begin the installation process Continue the installation as described below beginning with step 4 To Install Alibre Design from the DVD Insert the DVD Within a few seconds a window appears If the window does not appear open the Windows Explorer and double click your DVD drive icon to open the window Click Customers on the DVD menu Select your product level Click Install Alibre Design 11 0 The Alibre Design installation begins Follow the prompts in the Installation Wizard By default Alibre Design is installed in the Program Files directory on the C drive If desired select a different destination folder Choose where to place shortcuts Select the language you prefer Click Install When the installation is complete a message will appear prompting you to install PDFCreator Click OK to continue PDF Creator Install Thank you for installing Alibre Design Please continue with the installation of PDF Creator If you do not install POF Creator you may not have certain functionality available to you through the PDF creation wizard Click OK to proceed and Ca
344. n or Polar coordinates 25 Chapter 4 Sketching Trim with options fly out delete part of a figure that extends beyond another one fly out includes Extend extend a figure up to another figure Fillet with options fly out place a fillet on two existing figures fly out includes Chamfer place a chamfer on two existing figures Linear Sketch Repeat with options fly out pattern a sketch figure in one or more linear directions fly out includes Circular Sketch Repeat pattern a sketch in a radial direction Sketch Shapes with options fly out create an individual or a pattern of a common shape Offset offset an existing figure by a precise distance Mirror create a symmetric copy of a figure about a reference Project to Sketch use existing feature edges to create new sketch figures Note The Extend Trim Fillet Chamfer Offset Mirror and tools on the Sketching toolbar are only active when applicable sketch figures are in the sketch For example the Extend tool will not become active until at least two figures have been sketched The tools that are accessible on the Sketching toolbar are also accessible from the Sketch menu The Sketch menu also contains tools that do not have a corresponding toolbar icon 4 2 Ordinate Dimension Creates ordinate dimensions in 2D drawings Auto Dimension Automatically place dimension to place sketch Reference Figures Create reference figure
345. n rectangle around a group of items Using a Selection Filter Apply a filter to make selecting a specific item type easier Filter on Solid gt Features Faces Edges and or Vertices in addition to Surface gt Surfaces Faces Edges and or Vertices To apply a selection filter from the Tools menu expand Selection Filters and choose the appropriate filter You can also activate the Selection Filters toolbar and control filters easily with icons e Face Edge and Vertex Cursors As you move the mouse pointer over faces edges and vertices the mouse pointer will change to provide a visual indication of the item type Vertex Selection Edge Selection Face Selection e Modifying a Selection Many dialogs require a selection or multiple selections in order to complete the command The selected item name will often populate an area in a dialog To change the selection either make another selection which will override the previous selection or right click the item name in the dialog and choose Clear Selections or Remove Selected Item s e Advanced Selector On occasion other items may obscure the item you want to select Use the Advanced Selector to accurately select an item To use the Advanced Selector move the mouse pointer over the item right click it and choose Advanced Selector from the pop up menu The Select dialog appears containing all the items in the vicinity of the click location including items hidden behind othe
346. n the Motion Explorer and in any Dynamic Measurements 3 In Type choose either a Specify motor torque or Specify actuation force for a motor that produces a force or a torque b Specify rotation or Specify motion for a motor that produces a prescribed motion Actuator Force Tab Note Applying changes to the values in this dialog will reset the current simulation A a a e Y 327 Chapter 16 Alibre Motion Select either Constant force or Constant Torque or Harmonic force or Harmonic Torque e Constant torque force specifies that the Torque or Force produced does not vary over time e n Force Torque enter the force to be produced by the actuator Note the units displayed e Check Reverse to reverse the sign of the force torque Harmonic force Harmonic torque specifies that the force or torque produced by the actuator varies sinusoidally over time Prescribed Motion Tab Note Applying changes to the values in this dialog will reset the current simulation x Constant velocity ration O Feet Per Second T Reverse Oscillating mation Peod Ds Frequenos O Hz fe Oime are relative Upper lint g In Initia alee Lower liri O lr Initially f increasing e decreasing Select either Constant velocity motion or Constant rotation or Oscillating motion or Rotary Oscillation If you select Constant velocity motion the motion produced does not vary over time 1 S
347. n the work area and select Dimension from the pop up menu 2 Move the cursor over the first figure from which you want to dimension 3 Click the figure A preview may appear but do not place the dimension at this time 4 Move the cursor over the second figure you want to dimension to and click again A new dimension preview appears 5 Move the cursor to position the dimension and click a third time A dimension control box appears 6 Enter the appropriate dimension value in the box and press Enter on the keyboard The dimension is defined N a 30 00 1 000 97 Chapter 6 3D Sketching 6 9 3D Sketch Constraints Figures in a 3D sketch may be constrained to a size orientation and relationship to another figure or model edge These constraints are similar to their 2D sketch constraint counterparts Tip When you are active in 3D sketch mode you can constrain sketch figures to other existing sketches This is particularly helpful when you are sketching guide curves for lofts to ensure that your guide curves touch each profile used in the loft 6 9 1 Inferred Constraints Location During the creation of a figure a Location constraint will be applied automatically when a 3D node is created while hovering over the following objects e Reference Points e Vertices e An Existing 3D Node e An Edge e 2D Nodes in visible 2D sketches that have not been used to create 3D geometry e 2D Figures in visible 2D Sketch that
348. n to the Design Interface CHAPTER 3 Introduction to the Design Interface Alibre Design is a parametric solid modeling system Parametric solid modeling involves applying dimensions and other parameters such as angle values and offset distances to define a 2D profile and ultimately the 3D shape of an object These dimensions and parameters can be changed at anytime to easily modify designs and alter the shape of a model To begin creating your model you first create a sketch which is a 2D profile From this profile a 3D feature is created Examples of features include holes fillets cuts and revolutions You can add as many features as necessary to fully define the part From there multiple parts can be put together to create an assembly Using a solid modeling tool to create assemblies shortens the length of the design process by giving you an early look at how your parts will fit together You can correct small errors in the fit between parts without having to spend time and money on a prototype early in the process Using Alibre Design you can also create 2D drawings and Bills of Material from either parts or assemblies Alibre Design is fully associative which means that the parametric capabilities propagate through the parts assemblies 2D drawings and Bills of Material This means that if you modify a parameter in one location the models are updated everywhere that parameter is used You can also import parts assemblies and drawin
349. n your machine is shown in the drop down box in the Advanced Tab of the Generate Video AVI Form The CODEC used to play a video must be compatible with the CODEC used to generate the video so each AVI file holds information about how it was generated A video player program examines the file determines whether a suitable CODEC is already installed and some video players may optionally download and install them automatically if one is not It is worth noting that the speed of generation the quality of the generated video and the number of systems on which it may be easily played are all heavily dependent on the choice of CODEC used to generate it A great deal of information concerning CODECs and video generation is available online Note During Video generation some CODECs may show an options form or other display to allow you to monitor progress or change features Playback may also be considerably slowed while videos are being generated It is also possible that some CODECs may cause your system to slow or hang though this is rare Not all CODECs can Generate Video Since CODECs are often written by third parties your operating system generally cannot distinguish between those that may be used to both generate and playback videos and those that cannot and are only useful for playback Since it may also be hard to predict the effect of the Quality and Key Frame parameters it is worth experimenting to find settings that work best for you
350. name in the Design Explorer and in the workspace title bar will change to read Part Name Active Configuration Name Note If you have only a single configuration the part name in the Design Explorer and in the workspace title bar will read only Part Name There will be no configuration name appended to the name 10 2 1 Helpful Notes on Design Configurations in Parts e Moving or resizing a sketch figure manually such as by clicking and dragging applies to all configurations Moving or resizing a sketch figure using dimensions does not necessarily apply to all configurations Dimension values are parameters that can be different in each configuration e All configurations have the same set of dimensions A dimension added to one configuration will be added to all configurations Values of dimensions are parameters that can differ between configurations e All configurations have a common set of available features A feature deleted from one configuration is deleted from all configurations Features can be suppressed in individual configurations e All configurations have a common feature order Features reordered in one configuration are reordered in all configurations e In the Design Explorer configurations are listed in the order they were created You can reorder them if you are aware that relationships between features that are broken as a result of reordering will cause the affected features to fail e You cannot dele
351. ncel to skip installation Note PDFCreator cannot be installed on the Vista operating system In addition if you do not install PDFCreator you will be unable to fully publish BOMs or Drawings to PDF If you choose to install a different PDF Printer application you can print to PDF but you will be unable to add a header or footer to the PDF Select the language you want to use and click OK Click Next in the Welcome Dialog Read the license agreement then check l accept the agreement and click Next Choose the Standard or Server Installation then click Next Enter a name for the PDF Printer the default is PDFCreator then click Next 20 21 22 23 Chapter 1 Installation Select the Location to install PDFCreator then click Next Read the information in the PDFCreator Toolbar dialog then click Next Choose the components you want to install then click Next Choose where to place the program s shortcuts then click Next If you do not want a shortcut check the Don t create a Start Menu folder option In the Select Additional Tasks dialog check the items that you want performed during the installation and then click Next Click Install in the Ready to Install dialog Click Finish to exit the wizard The Alibre Design Install Wizard will indicate that the installation is complete Click Finish 1 4 Uninstalling Alibre Design To Uninstall Alibre Design From the Start menu select Control Panel or
352. nd select Insert 3D Section View from the pop up menu The 3D Section View dialog appears 2 Click in the Parts to Section field Select the part to be affected by the section 3 Selecta Slicing Plane A reference plane or planar face can be used A plane with arrows appears representing the cut 163 Chapter 9 Working with Parts 4 If necessary select Reverse to change the direction of the section view The slicing plane points to the section side that will remain visible 5 Enter a value in the Offset field to shift the cutting plane and create the section view the specified distance from the slicing plane 6 Click OK to create the section view The section view is also listed in the Design Explorer under the Section Views node gt Managing 3D section views You can turn section view visibility on and off as well as delete section views from the Design Explorer To hide or display a section view right click the section view in the Design Explorer and select View from the pop up menu A check mark next to View indicates the view is currently displayed To delete a section view right click the section view in the Design Explorer and select Delete from the pop up menu You can insert multiple section views into a part however you can only display one section view at a time 9 6 Part Physical Properties You can calculate and display the volume mass surface area center of mass inertial tensor and principal axes of iner
353. ndex 3 3D PDF Publishing 174 3D Section Views 163 3D Sketch Constraints 98 3D Sketch Figures 92 3D Sketch Nodes 94 3D Sketching 87 3D Sketching Context 88 A Activating a Different Simulation 336 Actuator Settings 326 Actuators Motors and Linear Actuators 324 Adding 2D Fillets to Sketch Figures 48 Adding and Deleting a Row in a BOM 292 Adding and Deleting Columns in a BOM 291 Adding Callout Balloons 288 Adding Chamfers to Sketch Figures 48 Adding Fillets 95 Adding Physical Elements Motors and Actuators Springs and Dampers 323 Adding Sheets 248 Adjusting Column Header and Data Alignment 294 Alibre Assistant 21 Alibre Motion 313 Alibre Motion Explorer 316 Alibre Vault 347 Aligning Dimensions 255 An Overview of Simulation 313 345 Anchored Parts 206 Angled Plane 77 Annotations 182 270 Applying Color Properties to a Part 212 Arc 93 Arc figure 31 93 Assembly design methodologies 203 editing a part 228 flexible subassemblies 220 hiding a part 212 importing parts 231 inserting a pattern 208 inserting duplicates 208 inserting parts 206 moving parts 210 rotating parts 210 toolbar 203 Assembly Basics 205 Assembly boolean 231 Assembly Configurations 190 Assembly Constraint Types 213 Assembly constraints 213 viewing 218 Assembly Constraints 213 286 Assembly Design 203 Assembly Design Methodol
354. nding sketch figures 47 External Cosmetic Threads 124 Extrude Boss 103 Extrude Boss and Extrude Cut 103 Extrude Cut 103 Extruding to Geometry 84 F Face 15 18 Failed Assembly Constraints 220 Fast Display 183 Fast Views 235 236 250 Feature menu 150 mirror 127 Feature control frames 276 Feature Control Frames 276 Feature Creation 69 70 84 101 150 Feature Patterns 130 Feature Terminology 103 Feature Types 103 Features 101 copying 127 128 editing 159 menu 102 reordering 160 rolling back 161 suppressing 160 toolbar 102 Fillet 119 Fillets 3D 119 constant radius 120 sketching 48 variable radius 120 Finding Items in the Alibre Vault 350 Flange 152 Flat Pattern View of a Sheet Metal Part 264 Flexible Subassemblies 220 Force and Torque Type Actuators 325 Forces and Torques in Simulations 322 Frequently Asked Questions FAQ 345 Functions 62 G General Saving Principles 300 Generate Video Settings 341 Generating Video with Alibre Motion 340 345 Generating X Y Plots from Simulation Data 342 Getting Help 21 361 Getting Started With Alibre Design 5 Gravity 330 H Helical Boss 117 Helical Boss and Helical Cut 117 Helical Cut 117 Help 21 Alibre Assistant 21 How Do 21 tutorials 21 Helpful Notes on Design Configurations in Assemblies 199 Helpful Notes on Design Configuration
355. ne 4 Specify the draft Angle 5 If necessary check the Outward option to create the draft in the opposite direction 6 Click OK to create the draft 7 12 External Cosmetic Threads Note Modeling external threads using the Helical Feature tools for items such as screws is not the preferred workflow This is because helical geometry is very expensive in terms of system resources when many items such as fasteners have helical geometry it can dramatically slow down your modeling experience Typically you will not need to actually see the screw threads most often they simply need to be accurately represented in a 2D drawing but not necessarily in the 3D workspace To accomplish this you can create External Cosmetic Threads External Cosmetic Threads are features you can put on cylindrical faces and effectively show that a thread has been defined without the overhead of modeling the threads You can also enter callout information Both the external thread and the callout information can be displayed in a 2D drawing gt To create an external thread 1 Click Feature on the menu bar and select External Cosmetic Thread Or Select the item from the toolbar y T 4 124 Chapter 7 Feature Creation 2 The External Cosmetic Thread dialog appears G External Thread Select major diameter Circular edges Major diameter Set minor diameter Minor Diameter Set thread length Thread Length Extemal Thread lt 1 gt
356. ne at any time From the View menu select Orient gt Isometric To Sketch Plane or select the Isometric to Sketch Plane tool from the Orient View Toolbar 4 9 3 Cursor Dimension Hints As you sketch new figures dimensional properties are by default displayed near the mouse pointer For example as you sketch a line the line length and angle are displayed and updated automatically as you move the mouse pointer You can hide the cursor dimension hints if desired 67 Chapter 4 Sketching gt To hide the cursor dimension hints 1 From the Tools menu select Options 2 Select the General tab if not already selected 3 Inthe Hints area deselect the Cursor hints option This turns off ALL cursor hints 4 Click OK 4 9 4 Cursor Display For the most part during sketching the mouse pointer s appearance will change depending on which sketch tool is selected as well as the position of the mouse pointer e The default symbol appears as when the sketch Select tool is selected e When another sketch tool is selected the symbol will change to indicate the tool s function For example when the circle tool is selected the symbol appears as e The mouse pointer also changes automatically depending on its position over an existing figure Ls E On the Figure Midpoint of Figure Node on Figure 4 9 5 Inference Hints Inference Lines During sketching inference lines are displayed to provide a visual aid for al
357. nent casings Recently Modified by Me Project Personal Transportation Keywords i Initiative Material Assigned to Me l Customer City of Los Angeles Version label Final Build wm Checked Out to Me Description Revision Type Document Alibre Design Assembly Checked In MKT NOMAD Administratc With the detailed advanced search you can define more specific search criteria The more search criteria you use in the advanced search the more likely you are to find the exact object you want This allows you to prevent the search from returning too many results For example you can select a project definition from the property list Each object has property values that are assigned to it via the document card These property values can be used to search for documents in a precise manner The document property could be Project and the value of this project could be Hospital Expansion Florida If you perform an advanced search with these values the search returns all documents for which Hospital Expansion Florida has been specified as the value of the Project property You can also restrict the search to a specific object type such as customers or contact persons If necessary you can also define additional detailed search conditions Deire the addsonal condibora Ha tobiects muat match inorder do be shown Fi seart reata Look nal vero Stabs pyopentes Files Permissions F Obtect type z Cisest JE Yi Ohee oui
358. new extrusion direction Specify a Draft Angle if required and click the Outward option to change the direction of the draft if necessary You can enter a custom Label if you would like to customize the feature name as it is displayed in the Design Explorer Click OK to create the extrusion 105 Chapter 7 Feature Creation To Next extrusions To Next Creates an extrusion up to the nearest face s of the part For a To Next Extrusion to be successful the sketch must lie within the boundaries of the Next Face If it is not an error message will be displayed and the feature will fail a Select the Reverse option if necessary to create the extrusion on the opposite side of the sketch plane b To create the extrusion in a different direction other than normal to the sketch plane deselect the Along Normal option Then select a linear edge or axis to define the new extrusion direction c Specify a Draft Angle if required and click the Outward option to change the direction of the draft if necessary d Youcan enter a custom Label if you would like to customize the feature name as it is displayed in the Design Explorer e Click OK to create the extrusion 7 3 2 Creating Thin Wall Extrude Boss and Cut Features Thin wall extrude features either create thin walled bosses or cuts by extending a sketch in a linear direction by a specified distance As opposed to normal extrude boss and cut features discussed previously thin wall extru
359. nfigurations If the position of a component in the active configuration is modified the position of that component in all unlocked assembly configurations will change to match 5 Check the Active checkbox to make the new configuration the active one 6 Select OK to create the new configuration The new configuration will appear in the Design Explorer In addition once a second configuration has been created the assembly name in the Design Explorer and in the workspace title bar will change to read Assembly Name Active Configuration Name Note If you have only a single configuration the assembly name in the Design Explorer and in the workspace title bar will read only Assembly Name There will be no configuration name appended to the name 10 3 1 Inserting Configurations of Parts or Subassemblies When you insert a part or subassembly into a higher level assembly workspace the active configuration of that model will automatically be inserted After it has been inserted you can change the configuration of the part or subassembly that is used gt To change the configuration that is used in an assembly mp headline views a Section Views ot Exploded Wiews Constraints Base lt 1 gt 4nchored Male Connectors 1 gt Large Male Connector 2 gt Large Male Connector 3 gt Large Male Connector 4 gt Large A El El El E A A BA E Figure 78 Design Explorer Showing a List of Parts in an Assembly 193 Ch
360. ng has determined should take part in the Dynamic Simulation If a constraint is suppressed at the time when the Simulation is Created or Regenerated it is not used by the simulator Note The Automatic Constraint Manager creates a Motion Equivalent Constraint for almost all permissible Alibre Constraints If a constraint cannot be used by Alibre Motion the icon is shown with a question mark and is excluded from Simulations If the constraint is important to the Assembly you need to try to constrain it differently in your assembly then regenerate the Simulation 16 3 4 Motion Settings Settings for Alibre Motion can be specified by choosing Settings from the Motion main menu Playback Tab Settings on the Playback tab are stored in the assembly You can specify different settings for each Simulation in the assembly Motion Options _ x Simulation Traces General Target playback speed 10 Frames Per Second Loop playback Loop from start of simulation frame gt Loopto end of simulation C frame 10 Make these the default settings Cancel gt To set Playback options 1 In Target playback speed specify the maximum speed at which Motion should animate the simulated frames Note that the actual playback speed that can be achieved is dependent on many factors particularly the speed of your system and its graphics capabilities and the complexity of the model being si
361. ng reference point to a B spline introduces a coincident constraint between the point and the B spline It is fixed or floating depending on whether the point was dragged to the B spline s endpoint or an internal location respectively gt To move a B spline curve rigidly 1 Choose the Select tool from the Sketching toolbar 2 Click and hold the mouse button on the curve and drag the spline curve 3 Release the mouse button to place the curve Trimming and extending B spline curves The B spline curve can be trimmed using other figures lines arcs circles ellipses and B splines Open figures like lines and arcs can be extended to the intersection point with a B spline curve However the B spline curve itself cannot be extended 35 Chapter 4 Sketching B spline curve shape modification An assortment of methods is available to modify or tweak the B spline curve s shape while still honoring all the constraints placed on the curve These tools take advantage of the excellent local shape modification properties of B splines gt To modify a spline curve s shape From the Sketch menu select Figures gt Spline gt Edit gt Desired Action Possible Actions e Move Control Points Modify shape by moving a control point e Move Curve Points Modify shape by moving a point on the B spline curve to a new position e Insert Knots Insert new knots on the curve knot vector without changing curve shape e Remove R
362. nnnnnnnos 264 1259 CUSTOM Templates arcaicos 265 12591 Greatina a CUSToOmT Template susi cairanicin stare et oveeateeesteu 265 125 2 Customizing an Existing Templates a dea a Aa a 266 12 5 3 Saving and Using a Custom Template as a DrawinQ cccccccccccocccnnncccnnnoncnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonanennnnss 266 12 5 4 Saving and Using a Custom Template as a SyMbOl ooooncccnnncccconcccnncccnnnnnnccnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnncnnnnnos 267 12 5 5 Automatically Filling Title Block Information oooccccconnnccconnncnnonnncnnnnnnnnoncnnnnonononnncnnnnnnrnnnnanennnnanos 268 12 5 6 Managing Design Property Value Fields ooccccooncococonococononoconcnnocononcnnanonononnnononannnconannnnnnnos 269 12 07 AMO AOS it dl sere aces isc 270 1261 NOE recess area sth a aati ale tae a a eather lia ah intact Oty ize 270 1262 Threads GIG GalQUiIS 8 cece eclatedeiaed clean dekcaicings Aas caiedntnclod a Mancetier adie du a eN 271 120 3 DAMM A A O 274 a O A ce re eo tn Ce ea eer 275 12659 FEAlUre CONTO FLAMES 1 ca 276 1200 2SUMaCe FNS SYMDOl estsaiion said iaa dados iaa 278 1267 NV GIG ES VIMO Lita diodos 279 126 8 Editing and Deleting ANMOLAUONS eseina A a 280 BINS OF Matet da 281 18 1 Speciivi o BOM Data e le de o dt haat A 281 132 Creating BIS or Mata as 282 13 21 Creating a NEW BOM taaan e dd nono ol de ed 282 13 2 2 Creating a Custom BOM Template s ra aa a Ea O E E E A IAE 283 T33 Working Withee BOM
363. nonononcnonnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnrnnrnnnrnnrnnrnnnnnnrnrrnnrnnnnnnes 231 Joining Parts amp Removing Material in an ASSsemMbly oocccccccccnnnccccncconcnononcnnnnononnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnonnrnnonannnnnnnnnns 231 EEE ENEE E AN A A EA ANA N N EA E A E A E A ON E 233 Creating a New Drawing cesedi a a di 233 12211 Openinga NeW Drawing estes a 233 12152 Selecting a Drawing Template e co dd 233 12 9 Oee O TAS MOE a r r A AN 234 taia Insenng Standard VIEWS srities gales de atlas E EEE E ERE ii 234 12 1 5 Inserting Additional Standard ViWS 0 00 ads 236 Tao Fa S TAEWA E eassecaaees ean 236 vo A A A eee ee rere 237 12 2 1 Drawing Mark Ub Mode cional didas 237 122 2 JREMAMING NS a 239 1223 Changing the Drawing Template ociosa das dt ica 239 T224 Deleting WIC WS uaisa cere heel es cele eh aed nt ces ru sated dapat cue a hed cane 240 22 0 MAN VIC WS serio listo io or ica 240 1226 DRAWING Selecion Fiers casi reirte 241 t227 MOMIA VIEWS OM ING SCC hx mete cei a nies nee le iis a headland 241 1228 Updating Drawing VICWS set sts cot seh beck ct dee ieee caseeeast a ae 242 1229 Viewand Sheet Boundaries ssiri a aeaeaie e 242 12 2 10 Changing the View Scale ccccoocnnncconccoccconoonnncnnnonononononononononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnennnnnns 242 P2220 Me DIS IA MI WS tacos 243 12 2 12 Centerlines and CentermarkS ccccooconnccnnncccononnncnnnnononononononnnononnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 243 12218
364. not fully constrained or dimensioned figures can move unexpectedly as a result Over defined A figure has conflicting constraints and or dimensions that may or may not cause an additional constraint to fail If a constraint fails delete one or more constraints or dimensions Fixed A figure is fully constrained and the figure cannot be modified Other figures can be constrained to it Not changed The indicated constraint was not applied to this geometry The figure is dependent on another figure with conflicting constraints Not consistent The assigned dimension value s and constraints are in conflict and cannot be applied to the geometry Unknown Occurs when a component of a constraint has been removed It is not necessary for figures in a sketch to be well defined before you use the sketch to create a feature However it is good design practice in general to ensure that sketches are well defined 9 Chapter 4 Sketching Status of entire sketch By default the number of remaining degrees of freedom DOF in the entire sketch is displayed in the status area in the lower right corner of a workspace The DOF value will increase or decrease automatically as you sketch or delete figures and add or delete dimensions and constraints A fully defined sketch will have zero degrees of freedom It is not required to fully define a sketch before it can be used in a feature operation DOF Remaining 6 gt To hide the DOF hints
365. ns the items 300 Chapter 14 Opening and Saving 3 Ifthe item has never been saved or if you are doing a Save As or Save As all you must name the file if it is a single item and press Save to finalize the save My Documents of My Computer ny Network Places _ 4 0 1808 52 5 Alibre_Design E ClientCo Demo 5 Desktop Florida Roland Files l2 AD PRT g threadexample AD PRT File name readexcample tt e Save as type 4 If multiple items must be saved simultaneously you have some options The multi save dialog will display In this case we are saving a new top level assembly and some new parts we created in the context of the assembly All of the items are new and we will need to select names and locations for them Previously saved items that may also need to be saved may also appear occasionally depending on your workflow You cannot change the name or location of previously saved items from this dialog cCAD Files Drag Mount ACAD Files kai Container Mount e CAD Files py Hange Cap c CAD Files cACAD Files ED NEW cACAD Files NEW c NCAD Files NEW You can manually set the location for each file if desired There are also two tools available to assist you copies the location of the top level item in this case the main assembly to all new files ma e allows you to specify a location for all new files
366. nstitute any property you can think of Some basic properties include items such as File Type or File Name Any items in the File gt Properties gt General tab of part or assembly workspaces are also available metadata for you to use You can create new metadata types such as Export Restrictions or Launch Date or anything else you might need to help you define CAD data projects work flows press releases contacts or any other business related item Metadata is used to organize your data and is the most important Vault concept All items within the Vault are differentiated based almost strictly on their metadata Metadata is also used to search your Vault The Alibre Vault comes with default metadata for each type of Alibre Design file This metadata reflects items in the File gt Properties gt General tab of any workspace 17 2 Differences Between the Vault and the File System The Windows File System and the Alibre Vault are fundamentally different and operate completely differently Internalizing the differences early on will save you a lot of time and make the transition to the Vault substantially easier The File System e Uses folders to store data e Uses folders and file names to differentiate data e Lets you browse a Folder Structure to find your data e Allows only one file of a name to be in a particular folder e Has no inherent versioning capability check in out security or other PDM capabilities The Alibre Vault
367. nually override design values in a BOM workspace Overriding a design value in the BOM workspace will not have an effect on the actual design gt To override a design value 1 Select the field containing the design value that you want to override 2 Change the value as necessary and press Enter on the keyboard The cell containing the overridden value becomes blue 10 11 aid 1 partio 11 12 a5 5 part5 12 13 ai 1 parti gt To restore a value to its design value 1 Select the cell containing the overridden value 2 Right click the cell and select Use Design Value from the pop up menu or from the Edit menu select Use Design Value The cell s value is restored to the value dictated by the design 13 4 11 Modifying the BOM View Style You can control how the BOM view is displayed in the drawing You can choose to show or hide row and column lines only column lines only row lines or no lines The table style setting only applies to the BOM view in the drawing Table lines are always visible in the BOM workspace regardless of which table style setting is used By default row and column lines are visible gt To modify the table style 1 Click the Options arrow on the View toolbar to display the Table Style drop down toolbar 2 From the toolbar select e No Lines the BOM table will be displayed without lines e Row Lines the BOM table will be displayed with row lines only e Column Lines the BOM table will be
368. o design parts while referencing other assembly parts Both methods have disadvantages and advantages The bottom up design methodology is perhaps the simpler of the two and enables you to manage the design more efficiently The top down design is somewhat more complex but is valuable when the design of one part is heavily dependent on other parts You can also use a combination of the bottom up and top down design methods 11 2 The Assembly Design Interface Assemblies are designed in assembly workspaces An assembly can be comprised of parts and other assemblies referred to as subassemblies The parts and subassemblies that constitute an assembly are referred to as constituents A typical assembly could have the following structure Top Level Assembly Subassembly A e Part A1 e Part A2 e Part A3 Subassembly B e PartBi 203 Part B2 Part C Part D vor Ldn brim Beg ye pa A ee po 14 78 4970 E A E A A E EE TS rg mo aa amp Pie Pho Kk r Assembly Workspace The assembly workspace looks similar to the part workspace However the Sketching and Part Modeling toolbars are not displayed in the assembly workspace Instead the Assembly Modeling toolbar is displayed by default on the right side of the workspace A Insert Part Subassembly insert a part into the assembly Insert New Part insert and begin designing a new part Insert New Sheet Metal Part Insert and begin designing a new sheet
369. o line figures you cannot write A1 D1 because D1 is a length that will carry a unit such as inches The angle will be in degrees These two do not have the same dimensionality 4 8 5 Changing Sketch Figure Dimensions gt To change the value of an existing dimension 1 Select the sketch Select tool from the Sketching toolbar 2 Move the cursor over the dimension The dimension is highlighted 3 Double click the dimension The dimension control box appears displaying the current dimension value 4 Enter a new dimension value in the dimension and press Enter on the keyboard The dimension is updated and the figure reflects the new dimension 64 Chapter 4 Sketching 4 8 6 Deleting Sketch Figure Dimensions gt To delete an existing dimension 1 Select the sketch Select tool from the Sketching toolbar 2 Move the cursor over the dimension The dimension is highlighted 3 Select the dimension by clicking it 4 Press the Delete key on the keyboard Or right click and select Delete from the pop up menu Or from the Edit menu select Delete 4 8 7 Modifying Sketch Dimension Properties You can change individual dimension properties such as dimension line size and style dimension value format and precision dimension text size and orientation dual dimension display and tolerance information gt To modify sketch dimension properties 1 Select either the sketch Select tool or the Dimension tool from the Sketchin
370. o mtanan 152 Fango eio atadeacsnctar aan E tation itadabaneete thas saGuiaitee T E ouas tata anttbatn Cade bated omental bares eam ada ate naetatee 152 Closed A e o a 155 DM lid ad 156 A AA re nenenateae E sac esten cess 156 Corner Rounds and Chamters ocd 735 coin Guts acc a E E a a a aE E a aE a aa a a a aaa 156 AAA a e e A T acea heen 157 Unbendand RODEN rare A A S 157 catalog Fedil E n nn O a A A AE 158 COPAA E XIS UNG Feat G o 158 Managing Features In the Desig A EXplOsen SS AA SD E ness 158 149 Chapter 8 Sheet Metal Feature Creation 8 1 The Sheet Metal Part Modeling Interface The Sheet Metal Part Modeling toolbar is shown by default on the right side of the workspace Commonly used modeling tools are accessible on the Part Modeling toolbar Flat Tab create a flat tab feature Flange create a flange feature Closed Corner close a corner between two flanges Formed Dimple create a dimple or drawn cutout Cut create cut feature Round Corner round a corner Chamfer Corner chamfer a corner Hole create a hole feature Insert Catalog Feature insert a saved feature or sketch Unbend unbend one or more flanges Rebend rebend one or more unbent flanges Flat Pattern view the model in a flattened state Equation Editor open the Equation Editor Generate to Last regenerate the part to the last feature to update changes E E 8 e 8 8 e l Le 8 E e 4 The tools that ar
371. o remove a Guide curve from the box select it from the list and press the Delete key on the keyboard or choose an option from the right click menu Guide curve types Global Creates virtual guide curves providing the ability to make one guide curve globally affect the lofted surfaces Local These guide curves provide the ability to make one guide curve locally affect the lofted surfaces Tangent Forces the loft surface to follow the tangent vector of the guide curve at the point where the curve intersects the profile s plane If necessary select a loft creation option e Simplify Surface Converts the resultant loft face from a spline type to an analytic type when possible A simplified surface contains less data is of higher quality and is faster to process in subsequent modeling operations e Minimize twist Aligns the profiles so that the start of the second sketch is aligned to the start of the first sketch e Connect ends The first cross section is treated as if it is also the last cross section This is not available when using Guide Curves as the Guide Curves can be used to connect the first and last cross sections You must have at least three cross sections to use this option e Minimize Curvature This determines the Tangent Magnitudes based on maximizing the minimum radius of curvature of the lofted body as a whole This not only helps to create more pleasing surfaces but also ensures greater ability to shell and blend
372. o start the arc 5 Move the mouse to sketch the arc 6 Click a third time to complete the arc DN gt To sketch a circular arc using Start End Radius 1 Select the Circular Arc Start End Radius tool from the Sketching toolbar or from the Sketch menu select Figures gt Circular Arc gt Start End Radius 2 Position the mouse pointer at the arc starting location 3 Click to start the arc 4 Click a second time to place the arc endpoint 5 Move the mouse pointer to size the arc 6 Click a third time to complete the arc gt To sketch a circular arc using Tangent Start End 1 Select the Circular Arc Tangent Start End tool from the Sketching toolbar or from the Sketch menu select Figures gt Circular Arc gt Tangent Start End 2 Click the line or circular arc that will be tangent to the new arc Click close to the side from which you want the new arc to originate 3 Move the mouse pointer to size the arc 4 Click a second time to complete the arc 31 Chapter 4 Sketching gt To increase or decrease a circular arc s diameter 1 Click the Select tool from the Sketching toolbar 2 Move the mouse pointer over the circular arc 3 Click hold the mouse button and drag the figure to resize the circular arc 4 Release the mouse button gt To reshape a circular arc 1 Click the Select tool from the Sketching toolbar 2 Move the mouse pointer over the circular arc center node 3
373. ocument Virtual Folder ee a Project Virtual Folder y Virtual Folder Virtual Folder im Root wm Recently Modified by MM J ji wm Assigned to Me gt al f s m Type View 6 objects MKT NOMADAdministratc Clicking on a Product listed in this view will show all documents such as CAD files Word documents Excel sheets PDFs etc that have been associated with the selected Product 353 Chapter 17 The Alibre Vault by M Files 17 6 Renaming Files You can rename files in the Vault without implication on your designs Alibre Design relies on data beyond the file name to determine which parts assemblies drawings and BOMs go together Notes You must use the Vault interface not Alibre Design to rename files Alibre Design does not rely on metadata to link files This means that you can change any metadata without affecting constituent links of your design for example which parts belong to an assembly or drawing gt To rename a file 1 Find the file in the Vault 2 Make sure the file is checked out to you 3 Right click the file and select Rename 4 Type the new name for the file and press Enter 17 Copying Items You can copy items in the Vault using one of two methods 1 Open the item in Alibre Design and perform a Save As operation 2 Find the file in the Vault interface right click it and select Make Copy 17 8 Using Permissions Setting the permissions of a documen
374. of the Heal Check Do Not Show Options When Importing to bypass this dialog in the future Options set in the Design Options dialog will be used Check Set As Default Import Options to use these settings for future imports Settings in the Design Options dialog will be updated If any Analysis and Reporting options are selected the Import File Analysis and Reporting dialog appears 3 Import File Analysis and Reporting Imported Parts Import Advisor Part Name Errors Analysis Z PRODUCT_ID N A E anal ay ae File Imported Without Errors PRODUCT_ID N A l No errors detected in the imported file if you suspect undetected errors exist in the model try increasing the accuracy level used when vnporting E 4 Select the Check Part option to obtain information about the integrity of the file 5 If Import Advisor or Check Part is checked select an Accuracy level for the report e Low Fast error checks e Medium Slower error checks plus D cubed curve and surface checks e High Slower warning and error checks plus D cubed and surface checks 6 command 7 Select Conversion Log to view a report about import 8 automatically 9 10 Notes To save report data highlight the text and press Ctrl C to copy The text can be pasted into another application for viewing or printing The tools that are available through the import options will provide a high degree of success in working with data from other CAD systems For issues th
375. of the text if the leader is re positioned The smart anchor option overrides the position selection in step 9 11 Click in the Location box and then click in the work area to select the location of the note If you are using a leader click a figure or face to attach the note to The selection coordinates or displayed in the Location box 12 Click OK to finish placing the note Note In drawings if you insert a note while a view is active the note will be attached to that view If you insert a note while the sheet is active the note will be attached to the sheet To copy the annotation click on it to select it press and hold the Shift key to select multiple annotations Then either right click and choose Copy or from the Edit menu select Copy To paste the annotation you can choose Paste from the Edit menu or you can move your mouse to the location you want to paste the annotation and press CTRL V on your keyboard 12 6 2 Threads and Callouts Internal and external thread information if applied in the 3D design will automatically be called out upon creation of views in the 2D drawing Cosmetic threads also displayed by default are represented graphically by dashed lines 5 Drawing Properties Intemal Thiesd I Visible Runout DASHED Dash CONTINUOUS DASHED Dash we Shark Ange Empty Angle AN gt DASHED Dash f DASHED Dash The default callout for holes includes the number of ident
376. og appears Move Figures E Figures ls From CH Click the Figures selection button Select the figures you want to move in the work area Click the From button Click the location in the work area that you want to move the figures from Click the To button Click the location in the work area that you want to move the figures to Check Copy if you wan the original figures to be copied to the new location Click Apply then Close Ea Note If you want to move the figures using coordinates click the Direct Coordinate Entry button To drag sketch figures Choose the sketch Select tool from the Sketching toolbar Select the figures to be moved If you are moving an entire sketch from the Edit menu choose Select All or press Ctrl A on the keyboard The figures become highlighted Hold the Shift key on the keyboard and click and drag the sketch figure s to the new location 53 Chapter 4 Sketching gt To rotate sketch figures 1 From the Sketch menu select Rotate The Rotate Figures dialog appears Rotate Figures x Figures Center 5 Angle 10 000 F _ Copy MT 2 Click the Figures selection button Select the figures you want to rotate in the work area 3 Click the Center button Click the location in the work area around which you want to rotate the figures es Note If you want to move the figures using precise coordinates click the Direct Coordinate Entry button 4 I
377. ogy 203 Auto Dimensioning a Sketch 60 Automatic Constraint Mapping ACM in Alibre Motion 316 333 Automatically Filling Title Block Information 265 268 Auxiliary View 256 Auxiliary views 256 Axes 78 Axis 15 creation methods 78 Axis Offset and Parallel to Axis or Edge 79 Axis through Axis or Edge 78 Axis through Two Planes 79 Axis through Two Points 79 Axis Using Cylindrical Face 79 Background Color 15 Balloons 288 Bill of Materials 281 creation 282 custom templates 283 editing 290 inserting into drawing 283 linking 285 reordering 297 unlinking 285 Bills of Material 281 BOM 281 BOM View 283 move to another sheet 287 splitting 287 Boolean feature 137 creating 138 Boolean operations 231 Boss feature 103 Broken View 261 Broken views 261 B spline figure 33 C Callout balloons 288 Catalog feature 127 158 Catalog Feature 158 Catalog Features 127 CD 2 Centerlines 243 Centerlines and Centermarks 243 Centermarks 243 Chamfering a corner 157 Chamfers 121 3D feature 121 edge 121 sketching 48 vertex 122 Changing Sketch Figure Dimensions 64 Changing the Drawing Template 239 Changing the Header Display Orientation 295 Changing the View Scale 242 Checking for Interferences 222 363 Checking Items In and Out of the Alibre Vault 349 Checking Measurements 213 Checking Sketches for Errors 70 Check
378. ol from the Assembly Modeling toolbar Or From the Tools menu select Rotate Part 3 Move the cursor over the part you want to rotate 4 Click and drag the cursor to rotate the part 210 Chapter 11 Assembly Design 11 3 9 Moving and Rotating Parts Precisely You can move or rotate a part precisely if necessary as long as a part is not anchored or constrained in such a way that limits movement gt To move or rotate a part a precise distance or angle Select the Precise Placement tool from the Assembly Modeling toolbar or from the Tools menu select Precise Placement The Precise Placement dialog appears 5 Precise Placement Selected component s Translation Entry a bore_1 DX DY 000000 os u 000000 Rotation Entry Reverse Anis e Ange Degrees o EGJ aoe cose Select the part to move or rotate To move a part in the Translation Entry area specify the relative translation distance by entering values for DX DY and DZ Or To rotate a part in the Rotation Entry area select the rotation Axis and specify the relative rotation Angle in degrees The rotation axis can be an axis or linear edge on a part Click Apply to move or rotate the part Click Close to close the dialog 11 3 10 Moving Parts to Simulate Assembly Physical Motion To position a part or subassembly While holding the left mouse button down drag the part or subassembly to the new position Or From the T
379. olean Unite will add tool material to the blank part material e Boolean Subtract will remove tool material from the blank part material e Boolean Intersect will show the overlap of the tool material and the blank part material Before you begin You will need to have a part that you want to modify This will be your blank In addition you will need to have an existing part or assembly to use as a tool The tool must be saved to the file system 138 Chapter 7 Feature Creation gt To create a Boolean design feature 1 Open the blank part 2 From the Feature menu select Feature gt Boolean gt Subtract or Unite or Intersect The Insert Part Subassembly dialog appears OR Select the appropriate tool from the Design Boolean Feature fly out on the Part Modeling toolbar 3 Highlight the part or assembly you want to use for the tool then click OK The part workspace window transforms into the Design Boolean Editor window Click in the Editor workspace to place the tool Click Finish when you have the number of copies desired NOTE You can repeat steps 2 and 3 to add as many parts or assemblies as required 4 Constrain the tool s to the blank using the assembly constraints available in the Boolean editor workspace 5 Click the Commit icon or from the Edit menu select Commit to complete the Boolean feature The window transforms back into the blank part workspace and the Boolean feature will be listed as a fe
380. om the Sketching toolbar 2 Move the mouse pointer over an edge or a node 3 Click hold the mouse button and drag the sketch entity to resize the rectangle 4 Release the mouse button gt To mowe a rectangle 1 Choose the Select tool from the Sketching toolbar 2 Select the entire rectangle by dragging a selection rectangle around it 3 Hold the Shift key click and hold the mouse button and drag the rectangle Release the mouse button 4 4 5 Spline Curves Alibre Design provides NURBS B spline curve functionality in sketches The main distinguishing feature of the B spline compared to simple splines is that it retains its shape at all times That is it can only translate and rotate rigidly in order to satisfy the constraints imposed on it In addition to the B spline curve you can also create a spline curve by reference points This spline curve does not retain its shape as a B spline does Creation of spline curves by reference points Splines created using this method are not B splines You specify a set of reference points in the work area to define the spline You can use the Offset Figures tool on this spline as described in the Using Offset on a Spline Curve segment below 1 From the Sketch menu select Figures gt Spline gt Create gt Spline by reference points 2 Left click to start the spline curve 3 Move the mouse pointer and click a second time to place a reference point 4 Move the mou
381. on will be displayed but not the value D1 2 500 You can reference existing parameters as you create new dimensions You can then manage the equations using the Equation Editor gt To use the Equation Editor 1 You can access the Equation Editor directly when placing dimensions Press the Edit Equation button on the dimension control box 62 Chapter 4 Sketching The Equation Editor dialog appears In this dialog you can add new equations and constants use an existing equation to set the value of the dimension or set the value equal to another dimension The dimension parameters are listed under the Name column the current values of the parameters are listed under the Result column and the dimension type is listed under the Type column Equatio Parameters n Editor 26 Name Equation DB 07 De D3 DG Type Distance Chainer Sketch 2 gt Dimension Comment x 1o00 fo 200 lara 200 1 000 2 Cena e You can access the Equation Editor at anytime From the Tools menu select Equation Editor or press Ctrl E on the keyboard 2 To modify an equation select the equation from the list and click Modify or double click in the field that you want to modify i e name or equation 3 If necessary you can click Add to create new parameters In the Add Equation dialog specify the name of the new parameter the type of parameter you want to create Distance An
382. onoonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnannnnennnnnnnss 300 t429 Savno FileS lo Me Flo Systemsin E EES 300 142 4 Saving Files to the Alibre Vall d a a idad 302 importing and Exporting Datura ii 305 lae AMPON Data tato T 305 Sist Supponea FIG Type Sisa a a ore 305 T3 k2 AMPORINO Alora 306 15123 Importsetinas and IMport AVISO uva neciucc n iii ie 308 o gt EXPO Di ai 309 19 21 Supported FIG TYPOS ini ia ii 310 T922 EXPONO A RIG nal 311 15 3 Special Options for IGES and STL FilesS cccccccconcnnnccnnncccnnoonnncnnncnonnnnnncnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnaneninnnnns 312 ANDES MIQUOR ai 313 16 1 An Overview of Simulation lt a A ltda 313 162 i staling and Enabing AIDS MOUGN kennus a cid 314 163 The Alibre Motion User Interface ainia A A ea a P eselackeet 315 1631 Ine MalAlbre Motion Me AU e a da a reat a hale naan 315 16 322 Alibre MOON EXDIO Slater 316 10 33 Moton Explorer GroUDS stas 316 1634 i MOUOMMS CHING Sextet a a a a 317 16 3 95 Playback DECK pto ari ie 320 16 4 Overview of Simulating and Playing 2 ti o a dara edi 322 16 5 Forces and Torques in Simulations ooocccnncccconnncoononnnnnnnnnncnnnnonannnnnnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnrnnnrnnnnonnnnnnnnrnnnrannnonanens 322 16 5 1 Adding Physical Elements Motors and Actuators Springs and DaMperS oooccncccconccnnccnnnccnncnnno 323 16 5 2 Actuators Motors and Linear AcCtuatorS oonncccoconnncccononoconnncononnncnnnnnnnonnnconannnonnnnrnnon
383. ons The currently active Assembly Configuration is shown with all existing simulations based on it In the Motion Explorer image in the previous section the default configuration Config lt 1 gt is active and there is only one Simulation Simulation lt 1 gt which is active Fixed Parts Those parts that Alibre Motion has determined cannot move during the simulation are shown under this heading These are anchored Parts and those anchored Sub Assemblies that are not Flexible These do not affect the dynamics of the simulation but may hold the points to which constrained Moving Parts attach Under each Fixed Part is a Constraints sub heading listing all attached constraints This duplicates a portion of the Constraints list 316 Chapter 16 Alibre Motion Moving Parts These are the dynamic Parts that have the potential to move during the simulation Each Moving Part is shown with a Part icon or a Sub Assembly icon depending on which it represents Under each Moving Part is a Constraints sub heading listing all attached constraints This duplicates a portion of the Constraints list Note This list of Moving Parts will not necessarily be the same as the Parts and Sub Assemblies in the top level of the Design Explorer For instance if a Sub Assembly is made Flexible there will be Moving Parts that come from that Sub Assembly Constraints This contains a list of all the constraints that the Automatic Constraint Mappi
384. ons of larger systems where the required output of the system is specified in advance and for examining the ranges of motion of parts Prescribed Motions can be defined in the following ways Constant Motion e Harmonic Motion or Sinusoidal Motion Some characteristics of Prescribed Motions and Rotations e Prescribed Motion Actuators are Incompatible With Springs and Dampers Since Springs and Dampers produce force or torque effects any Prescribed Motions acting on the same constraints will completely override them In this situation any Springs or Dampers will be automatically excluded from the simulation Springs and Dampers on other constraints remain unaffected and their effects will be calculated normally e Prescribed Motion Actuators Can Produce Locking If you prescribe a Motion that cannot continue past a certain point due to other constraints you have created a situation where an irresistible force meets an immovable object as the Simulator does not decide which constraint or motion should be ignored at that point Metaphysical considerations aside this produces a simulation condition for which there is no viable solution so the simulation stops at that point and a warning message is displayed e Quasi Kinematic Simulations Always Use Prescribed Motion Types The inputs to Quasi Kinematic simulations that you create are always prescribed motions as forces torques and inertias are effectively ignored in this type
385. oolbars dialog check the toolbars you want to display and uncheck the ones you do not want to display General Toolbars Filters Turns on and off various selection filters to enable you to click on and select the desired entity more easily Select Features Select Surfaces Select 2D Sketches e Inspection Insert reference geometry use the measurement tool calculate physical properties e Orient View Orient the model to various pre defined positions such as front right and top e PDF Publishing Publish a model to a PDF file availability depends on your license e Redline Mark up a model with redline shapes or text e Standard Basic operations such as file save import and export e View Manipulate the view with functions such as pan zoom rotate e Visibility Manipulate the display of reference geometry and change the model between various shaded or wireframe modes Workspace Specific Toolbars Part amp Sheet Metal Part Workspaces e Part Modeling or Sheet Metal Part Modeling Create common Part or Sheet Metal Part features e Sketching Common sketching functions such as entity creation trimming and patterning Assembly Workspace e Assembly Modeling Common assembly functions such as inserting parts inserting assembly constraints moving and rotating parts Drawing Workspace e Detailing Common drawing functions such as inserting views inserting notes managing layers 12 Chapter 3 Introductio
386. oolean search only Brackets are used to group search terms together Example search agenda OR minutes AND market This search returns all objects that contain the words agenda or minutes and that also contain a word or words beginning with market You can make the results more specific by selecting the Search within this folder option When this option is selected the folder is searched using the criteria from the previous search This means that the search will also cover the objects found in the previous quick search The Alibre Vault ranks the search results by counting the number of occurrences of the search words in each document The document with the greatest number of occurrences is displayed first The latest searches are saved in a specific view This allows you to easily return to previous search results later on in the day Detailed Search Search in metadata and file conten Y H Reset All sy PFs Advanced Search o Document l of Project Additional Conditions 1 A Check Out Name Size Date Modified Y i Assembly 1 AD_ASM 64KB 7 28 2008 3 44 PM New Part 4 AD_PRT 19KB 7 28 2008 3 44PM Properties EL History orkfiow E Make Copy Inductor Assembly Created 7 28 2008 11 01 AM MKT NO Alibre Assembly ID 4 version 6 Last modified 7 28 2008 3 51 PM MKT NOM gductor Assembly AD A 61KB 7 28 2008 3 51PM 3 Number 34978 Version comment Modified Standard A 5 Root Product Scooter compo
387. ools menu select Move Part Click the Minimum Motion tool on the Assembly Modeling toolbar Click and drag the part or subassembly The part or subassembly moves a minimum number of parts 211 Chapter 11 Assembly Design 11 3 11 Hiding a Part You can hide individual parts in an assembly A part that is hidden still fully participates in the regeneration of the model as well as all physical property calculations It is simply not visible gt To hide an individual part Right click a part in the Design Explorer and select Hide from the pop up menu or right click a part in the work area and select Hide from the pop up menu The part is hidden in the work area and is listed in gray in the Design Explorer a Bearing Stand lt 1 gt ell small botet 4mm el small bolt lt 2 gt 4 mm el small bolt lt 4 gt 6 mm gt Tounhide the part Right click the part in the Design Explorer and select Hide again 11 3 12 Suppressing a Part You can suppress individual parts in an assembly A part that is suppressed does not participate in the regeneration of the model or any physical property calculations gt To suppress an individual part Right click a part in the Design Explorer and select Suppress from the pop up menu or right click a part in the work area and select Suppress from the pop up menu The part is hidden in the work area and is listed in gray in the Design Explorer a Bearing 5tand lt 1 gt oa a small bolt
388. oordinate System command 1 Select the Define Coordinate System tool from the Sketching toolbar or from the 3D Sketch menu select Define Coordinate System The Define Coordinate System dialog appears Define Coordinate System Plane Apo Plane Reverse Vector C Reverse o dren e 2 Enter the following information e Plane Required Enter the desired reference plane planar face or 2D sketch to be used as the plane Checking Reverse will toggle which Z axis direction is positive e X Vector Optional Enter the reference axis linear edge 2D sketch line or 3D sketch line to be used for the X Vector Checking Reverse will toggle which X axis direction is positive e Origin Optional Enter a reference point vertex 2D node or 3D node to be used as the origin If Project is checked the point is projected to the plane to become the origin otherwise the plane is moved to intersect the point that becomes the origin 3 Click OK to apply the changes gt To turn off the CCS indicator From the View menu select Sketch Display gt Current Coordinate System Indicator This is an on off toggle 6 4 Sketch Plane Guide Lines and Elevation The sketch plane is defined by any of the planes of the CCS and an elevation The sketch plane can be offset along its normal by an elevation distance By default the sketch plane is the XY Plane of the CCS The sketch plane can be altered by using the Cycle Sketch Plane Comman
389. opens 329 gt Note Depending on the constraint you may be able to add one both or neither type of Damper E 1 Linear Damper xj W Enable damper Parameters Damping coefficient 4 biln is JO Cancel Check Enable damper to enable this damper or uncheck to disable it Chapter 16 Alibre Motion In Damping coefficient enter the coefficient of damping to be applied at the constraint Note the units shown to the right of the textbox Click OK to save and apply changes or click Cancel to abandon changes To Edit a Damper Right click the Damper in the Motion Explorer and select Edit OR Double click the Damper item gt Re Naming Deleting and Suppressing Dampers Right click the Damper in the Motion Explorer and select the required option Suppressed Dampers are shown grayed out 16 5 5 Gravity By default the acceleration due to gravity often approximated as 9 81 m s or 32 185 ft s at the Earth s surface is NOT enabled in Alibre Motion You can enable gravity and change the values and direction used by the Alibre Motion simulator from the Motion Explorer gt To Enable Gravity Note The Gravity Node is shown grayed when gravity is not enabled 88 Springs gf Dampers ii Gravi E rre uni i Traces li 330 Right click on Gravity and select Enable Gravity Right click on Gravity and select Edit The Gravity dialog appears Chapter 16 Alibre Mo
390. operties The Design Properties dialog appears Click the Parameters Tab General Units Dimension Material Display Parameters Apple Options Stock Thickness jos ES Minimum Bend A adius Global Bend Radius AD_Thickness 2 4 K Factor Global Bend Relief Type Rectangular e width AD_Thickness 2 Depth ADT hickness ES Set your sheet metal material parameters of e Stock Thickness The thickness of the sheet of metal used to manufacture the part e Minimum Bend Radius The minimum Bend Radius to be allowed in the model If you attempt to enter a radius smaller it will automatically go to this minimum Default Value thickness 2 e Global Bend Radius The default bend radius used in all instances unless otherwise specified during feature creation Default Value thickness 2 K Factor During a forming process elongation of the material occurs a changing of shape due to the radius pushing material into another location The elongation is called the K Factor or bend deduction K factors can be determined by using material charts e Global Bend Relief A small cut made in the material to prevent the bend radius from causing a distortion in the metal Type can be Rectangular produces a rectangle shape cut or Round produces a rectangular cut with a round on the short edge Default values e Type rectangular e Width thickness e Depth thickness 2 Choose Apply then C
391. or or click Define Custom Colors to create a specific color Click OK to close the Color dialog Click Apply to implement the new settings To change the layer name scale weight or comment Click the cell containing the text or value you want to change A gray box borders the cell Click again A blinking cursor appears You can now edit the contents of the cell Chapter 12 Drawings 3 Click Apply to implement the new settings gt To add a layer 1 Click Add A new row appears at the bottom of the table temporarily named New Line Style Name Visible Locked Pattern Calor Scale Weight Comment CENTER Solid E 1 00 010 CENTER DASHED Dashed 5x ___ ETA 100 D010 DASHED HIDDEN Hidden 5 __ 1 00 010 HIDDEN PHANTOM Phantom 5x ee 1 00 010 PHANTOM BEND CENTERS T Center 5 ET 1 00 010 BEND CENTERS VISIBLE Solid E E 0 25 VISIBLE TANGENT EDGES Solid a 010 TANGENT EDG 4 lt i ll al 4 DIMENSIONS Solid a E 0 10 DIMENSIONS New Line Style 5 de New Line Style 5 SSS Add Delete Layer Settings Current Layer CONTINUOUS Current Dimension Layer DIMENSIONS Y a 9 2 Modify the layer attributes as necessary including the layer Name 3 Click the Current checkbox to use this style for new items 4 Click Apply to implement the changes 5 Click Close when finished gt To delete a layer 1 Select the layer you want to delete from the list 2 Click Delete gt
392. or press Ctrl M on the keyboard The Measurement Tool dialog appears Gi Measurement Tool Type Mode Measurements 2 Linear 2 Pairs Angular Chain From First Select Geometry 2 Select a measurement Type either Linear or Angular 3 Selecta Mode Pairs measurement is taken between two entities e g distance from edge to edge Chain cumulative measurement is taken between sequential selections e g distance along multiple edges From First measurement is taken between two entities with first selection always remaining constant 4 Select an entity to measure or an entity to measure from 162 Chapter 9 Working with Parts Note You can also pre select entities and then open the Measurement Tool dialog When pre selecting you must hold the Shift key down to select multiple items 5 If applicable select an entity to measure to Note To measure to or from the center of cylindrical shapes select the associated cylindrical face Need new graphic 6 Select the Projected on Plane option to project the measurement to another plane Select the Projection plane A measurement preview line is displayed in the work area and measurement information is displayed in the Measurements area in the dialog 7 New measurements can be taken without closing the dialog Adjust the Type and Mode as necessary and select the new entities 8 Click Close when finished 9 4 Part Display Options You can selec
393. ored Post lt 1 gt Fibs 1 q Circular Pattern 1 e H H a 1 From the assembly workspace select the Assembly Boolean command from the Tools main menu The Assembly Boolean dialog appears 2 Select the parts to join from the Design Explorer or the 3D work area These will be listed in the Blanks field 3 Check the Join All Blanks option 4 If you want the resulting joined part to be placed in the original assembly check the option Insert results into current assembly If you want the joined part in a separate workspace uncheck this option 5 Keep the Tools field empty Click OK The selected parts are joined together The joined part is represented in the Design Explorer as a new part with an Imported SAT File feature 231 Chapter 11 Assembly Design 8 Assembly_Boolean_ 1 Hoc RES e H i Planes H 1 Points Ep Redline Views jj Section Views Gg Features gt To remove material in an assembly You remove material from parts in the assembly by specifying one or more parts that will be used as tools for cutting away material From the assembly workspace select the Assembly Boolean command from the Tools main menu The Assembly Boolean dialog appears 1 Select the parts from which you want to remove material from the Design Explorer or the 3D work area These will be listed in the Blanks field 2 Click in the Tools field and then select the parts you want to use for cutting 3 Use the
394. oter component casings Workflow EN S Project Personal Transportation Keywords S Initiative Material Customer City of Los Angeles Description Revision se Document a Project Checked In MKT NOMAD Administrat Figure 105 Item Properties Showing Versions 17 10 2 Viewing Version History gt To view all the versions for an item 1 Find the item in the Vault for which you want to view the version history 2 Right click it and select History The History dialog appears displaying all versions of the document History Name Version Status Time User 9 inductor Assembly AD_ASM 7 28 2008 3 51 PM MKT NOMAD Administri inductor Assembly AD_ASM 7 28 2008 3 50 PM MKT NOMAD Administr 7 28 2008 3 50PM MKT NOMAD Administr inductor Assembly AD_ASM 7 28 2008 3 49 PM MKT NOMAD Administr inductor Assembly AD_ASM 7 28 2008 3 48 PM MKT NOMAD Administr inductor Assembly AD_ASM 7 28 2008 12 12 PM MKT NOMAD Administr x Inductor Assembly Created 7 28 2008 11 01 AM MKT NOM Alibre Assembly ID 4 version 4 Last modified 7 28 2008 3 50 PM MKT NOMA Number 34978 Revision Product Scooter Version comment Project Personal Transportation Initiative Keywords Customer City of Los Angeles Material Description Add Label to This Version Modify Version Details Roll Back Type Document Alibre Design Assembly Checked In 61 0 KB MKT NOMAD Administrat Figure 106 Version History for an Item 17
395. oth Rotary elements and Linear Elements to this type of constraint Constraints Define Attachment Points of Physical Elements Any physical element produces transmits or modifies a force or torque between two Attachment Points or points of action These points are taken directly from the features used to create the Constraint in your Assembly 16 5 2 Actuators Motors and Linear Actuators When you add a Motor or Actuator to your Simulation they may be specified in either one of two ways For Motors Rotary Actuators e Torque type Prescribed Motion Rotation type For Linear Actuators e Force type e Prescribed Motion Translation type pued Actuators el Electric Motor 1 Each type has its own characteristics and uses Force Torque Actuators These actuator types are used to specify the force linear or torque rotary acting on the connected parts Depending on the physical characteristics of the parts and any other parts and physical elements connected to them these actuators may or may not produce any resultant motion in the same way that pushing on a door does not necessarily open it e Prescribed Motion Actuators These actuator types are used to specify the actual motion of the connected parts disregarding the force or torque that that motion would require gt To Add an Actuator 1 In the Motion Explorer right click on a constraint 2 Select Insert then select either Linear or Rotary Actua
396. ow you can choose whether you want to save items to the Vault or the File System 348 Chapter 17 The Alibre Vault by M Files gt To save all items to the Vault 1 From the Alibre Design Home Window select Tools gt Options 2 Select the Use Vault option and choose the Vault you want to use It is recommended that you use the default Alibre Vault since it contains a default metadata structure that mimics the Design Properties structure within Alibre Design in the File gt Properties gt General tab of 2D and 3D workspaces Also it has a native concept of Alibre Design file types Note The Use Vault option is only selectable if the Vault is detected as being installed and at least one Vault is available and selected gt To save all items to the File System 1 From the Alibre Design Home Window select Tools gt Options 2 Make sure the Use Vault option is not selected Note Items that currently exist on the File System will always be saved to the File System using the Save command Only new items will be saved to the Alibre Vault if you have enabled the option If you have existing files on the File System that you want to put onto the Alibre Vault use the Save As or Save As All commands instead of Save 17 4 Checking Items In and Out of the Alibre Vault The Alibre Vault allows you to check items out for editing This prevents concurrent editing of an item by multiple users When you have checked out an item other u
397. p menu 240 Chapter 12 Drawings 12 2 6 Drawing Selection Filters By default you can select any item in a drawing When you move the cursor over an item in the work area the item is highlighted You can select the following items individually in a drawing workspace Parts e Part edges and vertices Dimensions e Sketches e Annotations e Redlines e Views As you work in a drawing workspace you may find it advantageous to select a certain group or groups of items as opposed to all items In this case you can apply selection filters and specify which item groups you want to select gt Touse selection filters On the Filters toolbar see below select the tools corresponding to the item groups you want to be able to select A filter is applied when the corresponding tool is in the pressed state The following filters are available in order as they appear below e Select Segments drop down list includes Select Parts and Select Views e Select 2D Sketches e Select Dimensions e Select Annotations e Select Vertices Select Redlines Only items in the selected groups can be selected in the work area so as you move your mouse pointer over a view only applicable items will be highlighted You can also apply filters by going to the Tools menu and choosing Selection Filters If a check mark is displayed next to a filter the filter is currently being applied 12 2 7 Moving Views on the Sheet After init
398. page 101 for information on extruding To Geometry The sketch you are extruding must lie completely within the outline of the surface or the extrusion will fail 5 5 Reference Geometry Visibility You can hide reference geometry on an individual basis by group or altogether 5 5 1 Hiding Individual Reference Geometry Items gt To hide reference geometry items 1 Select the reference geometry item in the Design Explorer or work area You can also select multiple items The selected items become highlighted in the Design Explorer as well as the work area 2 Right click in the work area and select Hide from the pop up menu or press Ctrl H on the keyboard or from the Edit menu select Hide Selection The selected reference geometry items are hidden The text in the Design Explorer associated with the items will also become light gray 5 5 2 Hiding Reference Geometry Groups You can hide groups of planes axes points surfaces the 3D view indicator or the world coordinate system independently From the View menu select References gt Coordinate System References gt 3D View Indicator References gt Planes References gt Axes References gt Points or References gt Surfaces depending on which group you want to hide The group becomes hidden and the text in the Design Explorer associated with the items will also become light gray You can also press Ctrl Shift P on the keyboard to hide planes Note Upon hiding
399. part assembly drawing or bill of materials workspace Select the appropriate button on the Home Window Or Click the new Part Sheet Metal Part Assembly Drawing or Bill of Materials workspace tool in any open workspace In the Home window from the File menu select New and then select either Part Sheet Metal Part Assembly Drawing or Bill of Materials Note that sheet metal BOMs and drawings are not available in all versions of Alibre Design 14 Chapter 3 Introduction to the Design Interface 3 1 3 Model Terms The following terms are consistently used throughout the documentation and refer to geometric elements in a model faces edges and vertices as well as construction geometry reference planes axes and the origin Axis MAKE Suain Reference Plane y 3 1 4 Work Area Color Scheme You can change the color of the work area background and all other display components in a part or assembly workspace gt To change the color scheme 1 In a part or assembly workspace from the Tools menu select Options Options Scheme Wery Light Background Scheme as Delete Category Field Color Genes 9 Beagondto A a Cenes 0 2 Choose one of the four pre defined color schemes e g Dark Background Scheme from the Scheme drop down list then click OK to apply the setting Or 15 Chapter 3 Introduction to the Design Interface Customize your display by creating a new color schem
400. parts will only know they are being used in the assembly but will not have a relationship to the drawing Likewise the drawing will know it is using the assembly but will not know about relationships to the specific parts within the assembly You can double click on items that show up in the results list to drill deeper and overcome this limitation For example if you need to see all the drawings that use a part you would 1 Open the Relationships dialog for the part 2 Select the Relationships to this Object tab to find out what items are using the part 360 Chapter 17 The Alibre Vault by M Files 3 Click on any assemblies that use the part to open their Relationship screen 4 View any drawings that use the assembly and therefore the original part in question 17 12 Getting Help The Alibre Vault is a very deep product with many available options We have attempted to cover the most common workflow issues here However there may be several additional use cases you want to learn about There is a complete Help system for the Alibre Vault accessed by right clicking the M icon on the lower left of your screen in the System Tray The Alibre Vault Help is comprehensive and includes advanced topics such as e Setting up advanced user scenarios e Setting up regular backups of the Alibre Vault Server e Changing or adding new Meta Data to the data structure e Connecting the server to your existing database 361 Index I
401. pecify the velocity or angular velocity to be produced by this actuator then select the units from the drop down list 2 Check Reverse to reverse the direction of the motion If you select Oscillating motion the displacement produced by the actuator varies sinusoidally over time When you have finished making changes on each of the tabs choose OK to save and apply the changes you made and close the dialog or choose Cancel to abandon changes and close the dialog 16 5 3 Springs Springs in Alibre Motion are assumed to perfectly obey Hooke s law at all times and have no non linear behavior Fl Say Springs E Spina 1 328 Chapter 16 Alibre Motion gt To Add a Spring 1 In the Motion Explorer right click on a constraint 2 Select Insert then select either Linear or Rotary spring The Spring Settings dialog appears To define a Spring you must specify the Spring constant which is the force or torque produced per unit of linear or angular displacement from the unstretched position The force produced by a Spring always opposes the displacement Note Depending on the constraint you may be able to add one both or neither type of Spring 159 Linear Spring xl le Enable spring Parameters Spring constant 8 45 Ibi In i Initially un stretched f Un stretched length 5 038E 31 Inches i Cancel Note Applying changes to the values in this form will reset the current simulation 3 Check Enabl
402. pinner arrows to incrementally change a dimension value based on a pre determined increment value gt 1 To set the spinner increment From the File menu select Properties The Design Properties dialog appears Select the Units tab if it is not already selected In the Spinner Increment area enter a Length increment value i e 125 250 375 etc Also enter an Angle increment value based on degrees Click Apply and then click Close To use the spinner arrows Select the Dimension tool from the Sketching toolbar and dimension a figure When the dimension control box appears click one of the two black arrow buttons to increase or decrease the dimension by the spinner increment value 61 Chapter 4 Sketching 4 8 4 Using Equations in Dimensions You can create dimensions using mathematical relations between dimensions or parameters using dimension names as variables in the equations gt To use equations in dimensions You can type an equation in any text box where you would enter a dimension or in the Equation Editor D1 2 a gt To show equations in sketches and models 1 From the File menu select Properties The Design Properties dialog appears 2 Select the Dimension tab 3 Select the Show Equations option 4 Click Apply and then click Close 5 Place a dimension on a figure The parameter name associated with the dimension is now displayed If you included an equation the equati
403. planes as a group all planes are hidden except for the plane that is currently selected To hide all the planes at once including the selected plane select the Planes node in the Design Explorer right click in the work area and select Hide from the pop up menu 5 5 3 Hiding All Reference Geometry Groups You can hide all reference geometry groups at one time gt To hide all reference geometry groups From the View menu select References gt All All reference geometry groups become hidden except the plane that is currently selected The text in the Design Explorer associated with the items will also become light gray 84 Chapter 5 Reference Geometry 5 6 Renaming Reference Geometry New reference geometry items are by default sequentially named beginning with 4 e g Plane lt 4 gt Axis lt 4 gt Point lt 4 gt etc You can rename default reference geometry as well as inserted reference geometry items gt To rename reference geometry items 1 Right click the reference geometry item in the Design Explorer and select Rename from the pop up menu Or click the reference geometry in the Design Explorer twice with a short pause between clicks The name is highlighted and the cursor appears next to the name 2 Type a new name 3 Press Enter on the keyboard 5 7 Deleting Reference Geometry You can delete inserted reference geometry items You cannot delete default reference geometry gt To delete an inserte
404. pop up menu A dialog appears containing information related to the cause of the constraint failure e Right click the constraint and select Edit The Assembly Constraint dialog appears Modify the constraint conditions if applicable In some cases you may need to delete and reapply the constraint 11 5 Flexible Subassemblies By default subassemblies inserted into an assembly are rigid This means that a subassembly is treated as a rigid body for purposes of positioning and constraining it in the context of the parent assembly Consequently if multiple instances of a subassembly are inserted into an assembly the components in each instance will be in identical relative positions You can easily convert a subassembly from rigid to flexible When a subassembly is made flexible all of the parts in that subassembly can be positioned and constrained independently within the context of the top level assembly 220 Chapter 11 Assembly Design 5 gi Sees nT m Ep Redline Wiews iy Section Views et Exploded Wiews E Constraints e Align 1 Mate 1 y Align 5 y Align 6 e Align 8 Block lt 1 gt nchored crankshatt lt 1 gt E hal Piston Asmbe 1 gt a Piston lt 1 gt heal Rod Assy lt 71 gt heal Piston Asmbx gt a nig Aaa ae In the example shown here two instances of a piston assembly are placed in the engine assembly By default these subassemblies are rigid Since
405. ppression Positions Make Flexible Active x Ce 0 2 Inthe Name field enter a name for the configuration 3 Inthe Copy From drop down menu choose which configuration to use to start the new one The Lock properties from the configuration you choose will populate in the Locks field You can modify these as needed 4 Inthe Locks field set the lock requirements for the configuration a Lock All will check all of the properties b Unlock All will uncheck all of the properties 191 Chapter 10 Design Configurations The following table describes how each lock function will affect the model behavior Individual Lock General Parameter values Part Data General Properties Color Properties Reference Geometry Hiding Active Section View Assembly Part Subassembly Configuration Part Subassembly Suppression 192 Locked Behavior Checked Any parameters added to the active configuration will also be applied with their initial values to all locked configurations However any changes to parameter values will not be applied to locked configurations Changes to the active configuration s Part Data property values will be ignored in all locked configurations Note that the Name Number and Description fields in the Part Data will be the same for all configurations The locks apply to the property values Changes to the edge and or face colors of the active configuration wil
406. quirements and specifications gt To create a custom BOM template 1 In the Home window or any workspace from the File menu select New gt Bill of Materials or select the New Bill of Materials con from the main toolbar The Bill of Materials dialog appears 2 Select the New Bill of Materials template radio button 3 Click OK A New Bill of Materials workspace appears The workspace contains one empty row by default The default column headers are Item Number Part Number Quantity and Part Name El New Bill of Materials 1 Alibre Design Expert Sele File Edit view Format Data Tools TeamDesign Window Help GH dao HH ltem Humber Part Humber Quantity Part Hame Header tem Number Part Humber Quantity Part Marne Note If you choose to leave a blank row in the custom template the blank row will be listed first any time you use the custom template Delete the blank row if you do not want to include it in the custom template 4 Modify the table see Working in a BOM Workspace on page 290 as necessary to meet your requirements 5 Select the Save tool from the Standard toolbar or from the File menu select Save The Save dialog appears 6 Inthe Document Browser select the location in which you want to save the custom template 7 Specify a Name for the custom template 8 Select Alibre as the Save as type 9 Click Save 13 3 Working With a BOM in a Drawing 13 3 1 Inserting a BOM View into a Drawing
407. r Configuration of the Large Version of a Male Connector Design Explorer Male Connector Large Configurations CO a ES Small Sf Ames a Bans a Anis a zAnis 4 Planes In the Design Explorer the part model name has Large appended to it noting the active configuration The configuration called Large has the active icon next to it see Lock Properties Icon Descriptions see Lock properties represented in the Design Explorer on page 186 for information about each icon The configuration called Small has the inactive unlocked icon The model in the work area is displayed as shown 185 Chapter 10 Design Configurations Configuration of the Small Version of a Male Connector Design Explorer E Male Connector Small E Configurations Large Small Axes a KARS Y Anis at n Planes In the Design Explorer the part model name now has Small appended to it noting the new active configuration The configuration called Large has the inactive locked icon next to it The configuration called Small has the active icon The model in the work area is displayed as shown 10 1 1 Lock properties represented in the Design Explorer Each configuration of a part sheet metal part or assembly listed in the Design Explorer has an icon that represents the lock properties of that configuration The table below describes each icon Lock State Description Active All changes made
408. r faces Select the item you want from the list Note You can also Ctrl click with the middle mouse button if you have one to access the Advanced Selector Figure 10 Advanced Selector Options 18 Chapter 3 Introduction to the Design Interface e Selecting from the Design Explorer Select any item in the Design Explorer by clicking the item name The associated item will change color in the work area Select non consecutive items in the Design Explorer by holding down the Ctrl key as you click Select consecutive items in the Design Explorer by holding down the Shift key as you click 3 3 Toolbars You can control toolbar visibility as well as toolbar position in a workspace gt To turn toolbars on and off 1 In any open workspace from the View menu select Toolbars or right click in the toolbar area at the top of the workspace and select Toolbars The Toolbars dialog appears Toolbars Toolbars on top Toolbars on right Standard Sketching Views z Part Modeling C Team Design B e Redline Figure 11 Toolbars Dialog 2 To hide a toolbar that is currently displayed click the checked box next to the toolbar name 3 To display a toolbar click the empty checkbox next to the toolbar name 4 Click Close to apply changes and exit the dialog Note You can also turn individual toolbars on and off by right clicking in the toolbar area at the top of the workspace A list of toolbars appears Toolbars with
409. r location is where the mouse pointer is in relation to the first shape of the pattern when you are placing the shapes in the work area Examples of two of the available options are shown below From these examples you can see how the First Shape Anchor Location option works This example pattern is a grid pattern of 2 shapes in the x direction and 2 shapes in the y direction using the square shape If you choose the center position First Shape Anchor O O O O When placing the sketch shapes in the work area the mouse pointer will be located in the center of the first shape In the image below and all of the following images the first shape is the square on the bottom left of the pattern PIL A If you choose the top left position First Shape Anchor O NON Led O O When placing the sketch shapes in the work area the mouse pointer will be located at the top left of the first shape 44 Chapter 4 Sketching gt 1 To create a shape Select the desired Shape tool from the Shapes fly out 3 The Shape dialog for the chosen shape appears and a preview of the figure is shown in the work area This example shows the Round Shape Dialog E Round Shape G Diameter D i a Pattern Type Pattern Parameter First Shape Anchor O O e sa O O Fill in the appropriate values for the chosen shape Round In the Diameter D field enter the desired value for the diameter Square In the S
410. r sheet metal part workspace is opened the Configurations category will appear in the Design Explorer as the first category in the list Design Explorer Mew Part 1 BS Configurations Ee Configs 1 gt 7 Anes ft Anis tt Anis wf Anis Planes A Plane YPlane A Plane Under the Configurations category Config lt 1 gt is listed Every part contains at least one configuration This is true for all versions of Alibre Design gt To create a new configuration Note Not all versions of Alibre Design include the ability to create new configurations 1 From the Insert menu select Configuration Or right click on Configurations in the Design Explorer and choose New Configuration Or select the Configuration tool from the Inspection toolbar The New Configuration dialog appears 188 Chapter 10 Design Configurations New Configuration Name Contigs 2 gt Copy From Locks Lock All Unlock All Feature Suppression Parameter Values Part Data General Properties Color Properties Reference Geometry Hiding Active Section View Config lt 1 gt y Active L o toca 2 Inthe Name field enter a name for the configuration 3 In the Copy From drop down menu choose which configuration to use to start the new one The Locks field is populated with the properties from the configuration you choose You can modify these as needed 4 Inthe
411. rame Profile of Surface Primary Secondary Tertiary Tolerance Tolerance z ooo e Mido y Albaround Leader Projected tolerance q CI Show i Standard Height E Ce 4N51 114 5Mm 1982 Arrow O ANSI 714 5M 1994 Between Points Position Face or Paint smart Anch i an 276 Chapter 12 Drawings If the geometric tolerance is related to a datum specify as many as three datum references that form the Datum Reference Frame For the primary secondary and tertiary datums e Click the Datum reference letter The reference letters were created when you inserted the Datum annotations e Click the MC arrow for the datum and select the material condition for that datum Click the Symbol arrow and select one or more of the displayed tolerance symbols The geometric tolerance symbols indicate controls for form profile orientation location and runout Symbol Control Type Z Orientation Angularity O Form Circle El Location Concentricity E Form Cylindricity Er Form Flatness EZ Orientation Parallelism ple Orientation Perpendicularity p Location Position a Profile Line Edge a Profile Surface A Runout Simple Form Straightness Locations Symmetry i Runout Total Specify the allowed Tolerance values Select the Diametrical Tolerance di symbol if the tolerance is associated with a diameter zone Select a material condition from the MC pull down menu for each tolerance value Repeat
412. re Dimensions 98 Chapter 4 Sketching 4 8 1 Dimensioning Sketch Figures Linear radial diametrical and angular dimensions may be created Linear dimensions may be placed on a line between two parallel lines or between nodes Diameter and radius dimensions may be created for circles and arcs Angular dimensions may be created between two non parallel lines gt To dimension individual figures Follow the steps below to place length dimensions on lines and diameter dimensions on arcs and circles gt Select the Dimension tool from the Sketching toolbar or from the Sketch menu select Dimension or right click in the work area and select Dimension from the pop up menu Move the cursor over the figure you want to dimension The figure is highlighted Click the figure to show a preview of the dimension Move the cursor to move the dimension preview Note You can press the Esc key on the keyboard to cancel the current dimension operation Depending on the type of figure you are dimensioning as well as where you move the preview dimension a new dimension may be inferred For example depending on where the cursor is moved three different dimensions could be placed on an angled line N l Y 12 S 21121 Figure 20 Actual Length Figure 21 Vertical Distance After the dimension has been positioned properly click again A dimension control box appears Enter the appropriate dimension value in the box and pr
413. re that the Target Playback rate is set to a reasonable value using the Target playback frame rate check box in the Playback Settings tab of the Settings dialog Note This target rate will not be achievable in all cases e Stop Other Programs If you have other calculation intensive programs running in the background they may have some effect Usually programs that are not doing anything at the time will have a negligible effect but often starting other programs will completely monopolize the CPU slowing simulator performance e Hide Reference Geometry Hiding Planes and Axes improves playback performance as Alibre Design will not have to resize the features at each frame as the various parts of your assembly move Press CTRL SHIFT P on your keyboard to hide all the reference geometry in your model e Optimize Your Graphics Card performance The Graphics Card in your machine will have a great influence on the speed at which graphic images can be displayed The manufacturer of the card or your computer may well have information on the best settings for your situation e Suppress Irrelevant Parts Excluding parts which have no influence on the simulation may improve playback performance especially if they are complex or irregularly curved shapes e Close Information Windows Generating the XY Plots of dynamic measurements and generating Interferences demands a great deal from your computer and you will usually find that hiding the
414. ready for use The BOM ANSI ABC template is for use with drawing templates ANSI A Portrait ANSI A Landscape ANSI B and ANSI C The BOM ANSI D amp E template is for use with drawing templates ANSI D and ANSI E 6 If you are using a Custom Template click Browse The Select Bill of Materials Template dialog appears Select the appropriate template and click OK 7 Inthe Bill of Materials dialog Design area click Browse The Choose Design Part or Assembly dialog appears 8 Select the assembly or part for which you want a bill of materials 9 Click OK in the Choose Design Part or Assembly dialog 10 Click OK in the Bill of Materials dialog 11 The BOM workspace appears containing the BOM data When using a new BOM template the first row will be blank by default The default headers are Item Number Part Number Quantity and Part Name Chapter 13 Bills of Material 12 Modify the BOM see Working in a BOM Workspace on page 290 as required 13 From the File menu select Save or select the Save tool from the main toolbar The Save dialog appears 14 In the Document Browser select the location in which you want to save the BOM 15 Enter the BOM Name 16 Click Save The BOM can now be opened independently or inserted into a drawing see Inserting a BOM View into a Drawing on page 283 if necessary 13 2 2 Creating a Custom BOM Template You can create a custom BOM template to meet your own design purchasing and production re
415. rer under the Constraints node when you switch back to assembly edit mode The inter design constraint label by default lists the two related parts the parent part and the associated part After an inter design constraint has been created any change made to the parent part will automatically update the associated part To break the interdependency delete the inter design constraint in assembly edit mode If you do not want the new part to change as a result of other parts changing it is good practice to immediately delete the inter design constraints from the main assembly as soon as you are finished working on the newly created part 11 4 5 Managing Assembly Constraints Each new assembly constraint that you insert will be listed under the Constraints node in the Design Explorer and or under the constituent that it references You can choose how you would like to display the constraints 218 Chapter 11 Assembly Design a Exploded Views at Exploded View 1 EF Constraints a Constraints node with y Align 3 all constraints listed a Displacer Con Rod Saddle F ace lt 5 gt a Displacer Con Riod Face lt 29 gt E a Align 4 Br Displacer Con Rod Saddle F ace lt b gt 7 Displacer Con Riod Face lt 28 gt te Mate 1 bj Displacer Con Rod Face lt 33 gt a Displacer Con Rod Saddle Face lt 12 gt e Align 5 My 111 6 E cheese head Face lt 3 gt bo Displacer Con Rod Faces 29 gt a Mate 2 e Align 6
416. rer under the Features node Additional features will be listed in the order in which they were created This feature order defines the part s construction history E a Features Shell lt 2 gt a Drafts 3 gt af Sweeps do Shells 52 Fillets 6 gt g Edge Chambers 7 gt po By right clicking a feature in the Design Explorer you can Edit the features properties e Suppress the feature e Rename the feature e Delete the feature e Check the Status of the feature 147 Chapter 8 Sheet Metal Feature Creation CHAPTER 8 Sheet Metal Feature Creation Sheet Metal Part creation is not available in all versions of Alibre Design Users of versions other than Alibre Design Professional and Expert can contact Alibre sales for information on adding Sheet Metal to your package Like other solid parts sheet metal parts are modeled by creating features Features are individual 3D shapes representing common mechanical design elements like tabs and cuts which either create material or remove material in a part Some features such as tabs require an associated sketch to define the 2D profile of the 3D shape Other features such as corner round and corner chamfer can be created without a sketch and are applied to existing edges and faces In This Chapter The Sheet Metal Part Modeling nieta es 149 SheeiMelal Pan arameo td la la de 151 A E rape E A had scene act ha eaten an se cae Radiata eee hal S E A E ac A P dee ates Ada ie T ate t
417. ress Ctrl Shift I on the keyboard The Insert Part Subassembly dialog appears 2 Inthe Insert Part Subassembly dialog select a design to be inserted into the assembly You can also select multiple items to be inserted simultaneously Hold the Ctrl key when selecting multiple items 3 Click OK to insert the design A preview of the design s appears in the assembly workspace The Inserting dialog appears Inserting Each mouse click vall add ano her copy Press Escape o click tha Finer bution when done Select the bos below to view a pele Shoa prev icy 4 To insert the design so that the design s origin is initially coincident with the assembly s origin deselect the Show preview option 5 If the Show preview option is left on you can move the cursor to position the design s at any location if necessary 206 Chapter 11 Assembly Design 6 Click once to place the design s in the workspace 7 If necessary continue to click to insert duplicates 8 Press Esc or click Finish in the Inserting dialog to complete the insertion 11 3 4 Selecting Parts in the Assembly You can select individual parts in the assembly from the Design Explorer or the work area When you move your cursor over a part in the Design Explorer the part is highlighted in the work area When you select a part in the Design Explorer the part is selected and highlighted in the work area and vice versa gt To select a part in the work area ty
418. ressed feature for successful regeneration im Features i Extrusion lt 1 gt fl Sketch lt 1 gt kg Extrusions 2 gt fle Sketche 2 Magy Es E id To remove the suppress state right click the suppressed feature and select Suppress from the pop up menu 9 2 3 Reordering Features You can reorder features in the Design Explorer to alter the sequence in which features are created Reordering features will change a part s construction gt Toreorder features 1 In the Design Explorer click and drag a feature up or down in the feature list When you drag a feature in the Design Explorer the cursor will change fle Sketch lt 1 gt Shells 2 gt F Extrusion lt 3 gt o Feature Pattern lt b 2 Release the mouse button when the feature has been dragged to the appropriate location in the feature list The part will regenerate to reflect the new construction order 160 Chapter 9 Working with Parts Original feature list a Extrusion lt 1 gt fle Sketch lt 1 gt m Shel 2 gt dq Extrusion lt 3 gt de Feature Pattern lt E gt After reordering features a Features a Extrusion lt 1 gt fle Sketch lt 1 gt iG Extrusions 3 gt Feature Pattern 5r a helk 2 9 2 4 Rolling Back Features You can roll back a part to an earlier state in the design When you roll back to an earlier state features below the rollback point become inactive When a part is rolled back new features are inserted at t
419. right click a sketch and select Edit a Ej Revolution 16 gt Q Extrusion lt 17 gt Fillet lt 18 gt Fillet lt 19 gt e Track and control the display of redline markups e Check the status of a feature or part to resolve errors I Edges ly Faces Qy Vertices 17 Chapter 3 Introduction to the Design Interface 3 2 Selection Methods The majority of design tasks require that an item be selected For example a reference plane or planar face must be selected before you can begin sketching e Selecting Individual Items To select faces edges vertices etc first click the Selection tool or choose Select from the View menu Move the mouse pointer over an item and then click once to select the item An item will highlight as you move the mouse pointer over it and will change color after you select it Note Selection highlight colors will vary depending on the work area background color scheme used e Selecting Multiple Items To select multiple items in the work area hold the Shift key while you select the items In cases where a multiple selection is required you do not need to hold down the Shift key except when using Advanced Selector In the Design Explorer holding the Shift key will select everything in between the items you selected Hold the Control Key while selecting to choose only the items you click e Selecting by Dragging In a sketch or a 2D drawing select multiple items by dragging a selectio
420. ring sketching New Part 1 Alibre Design Expert File Edit View Insert Sketch 3D Sketch Feature Tools Team Design Motion Window Help 2 58 44083 3 BOBO FAY Za Design Explorer New Part 1 BS Config lt 1 gt Axes Axis Y Axis Z Asis Planes Jos Plane gt YZ Plane gt 2 Plane W Points Y Origin oe Surfaces eS Redline Views y Section Views W Features a Edges Re Faces vertices o 600050132 2 Yue 89 PU QS OA DOF Remaining 0 4 75 5 48 The grid acts as an additional reference during sketching You can customize the grid spacing as well as choose to automatically snap to grid during sketching snap to grid is not on by default Both grid display and snap to grid are optional and can be turned on or off at any time gt To turn the grid off 1 Uncheck the option Show Grid on the Sketch Overlay this is a toggle check the box to turn it on Or From the Tools menu select Options The Options dialog appears 2 Select the Grid tab 3 Uncheck the Display grid checkbox to turn the grid off this is a toggle check the box to turn it on 4 Click OK in the Options dialog 66 Chapter 4 Sketching gt To turn snap to grid on 1 Check the option Snap to Grid on the Sketch Overlay this is a toggle uncheck the box to turn it off If you cannot see the Snap to Grid checkbox you need to maximize your workspace Or From the Tools menu select Options The
421. rmulas Tab Data Tab Review Tab View Tab Developer Tab Add Ins Tab 11 Select Add ins Tab 12 Click OK 13 The Add ins tab is added Microsoft Exc Home Insert Page Layout Formulas Data Review View Add Ins Alibre Design Add in 9 9 2 Driving Designs by Spreadsheet You can use Microsoft Excel spreadsheets to store and manage design information for use in driving one or more designs in Alibre Design You may either set up the spreadsheet first or design the part first TIP You must go through the steps to set up Excel see Setting Up Excel to Drive Designs on page 168 before you can drive a design 169 Chapter 9 Working with Parts 7 170 To drive a design by spreadsheet Launch Alibre Design Open the desired part Launch Microsoft Excel Save the workbook spreadsheet Enter the desired settings for the parameters For each parameter enter a value type and units You may also enter a name and comments From the Tools menu in Excel select Alibre Design Add In gt Control Parameters The Control Parameters dialog appears The part name is displayed in the Design field and its dimensions appear in the parameters table Or For Excel 2007 select the Add Ins tab Choose Alibre Design Add In gt Control Parameters Note When using Excel 2007 you must be running Excel as Administrator If you are not you will receive an error message Control Parameters Design Front M
422. rom the Pattern pull down menu Specify the cross hatch Scale Specify the cross hatch Angle If desired you can also modify the color line weight and offset distance for the hatch pattern Click OK to apply the new cross hatch pattern Note You can also access the cross hatch settings from the Drawing Properties dialog From the File menu select Properties and then select the Detailing tab in the dialog To change the hatch pattern for individual parts in a section view In the Drawing Explorer expand the assembly under the section view to reveal the individual parts displayed in the section Right click the desired part and choose Change Cross Hatch from the pop up menu The Hatch Properties dialog appears Modify the hatch pattern properties as desired Click OK to apply the new cross hatch pattern to the selected part To exclude parts from being sectioned in a section view Create the section view All parts will be sectioned at this point In the section view you just created right click on any edge of the part you would like to not be sectioned in the section view Select Do Not Section The section view is recomputed and the part you indicated is no longer sectioned Note Do Not Section is only available when the section view contains more than one part 12 4 5 Broken View You can create a broken view in a drawing of a long part that has a uniform cross section Creating a broken view is useful when you want to display
423. row 1 Click the table row number you want to delete The entire row is highlighted 2 Right click in the table area and select Row gt Delete from the pop up menu or from the Edit menu select Delete 13 43 Hiding a Row You can hide rows in a BOM Hidden rows are not displayed in the BOM view in the drawing gt To hide a row 1 Click the table row number you want to hide The entire row is highlighted 2 Right click in the table area and select Row gt Hide from the pop up menu or from the Format menu select Row gt Hide The row becomes hidden Note A distinct line is displayed between the rows that border above and below the row that has been hidden In the illustration below row 2 has been hidden Header tem Mumber Quantity Part Number Part Name dw 1 Long Crank Pin aw 14 Short Crank Pin awl Offset Crank Pin 292 Chapter 13 Bills of Material gt To display hidden rows From the View menu select Hidden Rows The hidden row is displayed and the corresponding table row number field is orange iuantity Part Number Part Name Long Crank Pin Crank Plate Short Crank Pin Offset Crank Pin To unhide a row If hidden rows are displayed select the table row number of the hidden row The entire row is highlighted Or If hidden rows are not displayed select table row number above the hidden row and then hold the Shift key and select the table row number below the hidden row Both selected rows b
424. rt after creating the pattern to verify that your model is a valid body 9 In Label change the name of the pattern if desired 10 Click OK to create the pattern Figure 62 Linear Topology Pattern Completed gt To create a circular pattern 1 From the Feature menu select Topology Pattern gt Circular or select the Circular Topology Pattern tool from the Part Modeling Toolbar available in the Feature Pattern fly out The Circular Topology Pattern dialog appears Seed Face graces gt Pallemed Faces Lanter LAM we eC Change diesli Check Res Labet Toho Paten Ese 135 Chapter 7 Feature Creation 2 Select the Seed Face Using the Seed Face Alibre Design will infer a group of related faces adjacent to each other that will be included in the pattern Selecting a different face as the Seed Face may or may not change the group of inferred related faces depending on your model The inferred faces will be highlighted in the work area and the number of selected faces will be displayed in the dialog next to the Seed Face Figure 63 Circular Topology Pattern Model with Seed Face Selected 3 In Center select an edge axis point or cylindrical face for the axis the pattern will be created about A preview will be displayed in the work area Figure 64 Circular Topology Pattern Preview 4 Enter the number of Copies including the original 5 Enter the desired Angle between each copy Th
425. rtial view outline You can only modify the exiting sketch lines you cannot sketch new ones pi In the Partial View Annotation dialog select Cancel to discard the changes or OK to update the partial view 263 Chapter 12 Drawings To move the partial view area Click the Select ls tool from the View toolbar if it is not already selected Move the mouse pointer over the partial view area dashed outline Click and drag the outline to a new position in the view You will see a dialog letting you know that moving the annotation will update the dependent views Choose Yes to continue or No to cancel the operation If you choose Yes the partial view is updated automatically to reflect the view outline s position change You can turn the prompt off if desired from the Tools menu select Options On the General tab uncheck Prompt when detail section or partial view annotation moved To transform the partial view back to its original state Choose the Select ls tool from the View toolbar if it is not already selected Move the mouse pointer over the partial view area dashed outline Right click the dashed outline and select delete 12 4 7 Exploded View You can insert a 2D exploded view representation of any exploded view you created in the assembly workspace gt To create an exploded view of an assembly Oo Select the Standard Views HI tool from the Detailing toolbar or from the Insert menu select Standard V
426. rts or constraints and select Dynamic Measurement The Dynamic Measurement dialog appears 2 In Name enter a name for the measurement 3 In Measurement select which type of measurement you want to take for this part or constraint 4 In Component choose which component to measure X Y Z or total magnitude 5 In Display Color choose the color you want to represent this measurement when plotted 342 Chapter 16 Alibre Motion 6 Check the Show in X Y plot option if you want this measurement to appear on the graph when you have X Y plot turned on Once you have created your Dynamic Measurements they will appear in the Motion Explorer under the Measurements category Any measurements that you have selected to show in the X Y plot will appear on the graph when you have the Show Hide X Y Plots button selected You can turn on the plot option before or after the simulation has been run amp Dynamic Measurements Alibre Motion gt To Copy and Paste Chart Data 1 You can copy and paste the chart data from Alibre Design into another application for use in reports and presentations 2 Right click in the graph area and select Copy You will see the following dialog Alibre Motion Chart data has been copied both as text and as an image Depending on the target application You may need to use Paste Special or similar to access the image W Show me this again nert time This tells you that if you go into ano
427. ry Note You may also move images into Alibre Design by dragging them from a Windows folder onto the Home window A blank drawing sheet opens with the image placed on it 12 2 20 Printing a Drawing You can print one all or a specified list of sheets in a drawing You can also print just a portion of the current sheet gt To print 1 From the File menu select Print 2 Use the Sheet range to specify what you want to print e All sheets in the drawing e The currently displayed portion of the current sheet e The entire current sheet e Only the sheets checked in the print dialog 3 Specify the number of copies you want to print 4 If you want the printed drawing to be fit to the size of the paper check the Scale to fit option 5 If you want to print using only black and white check the Print black and white option 6 Click OK gt To see a print preview of the current sheet From the File menu select Print Preview The Print Preview window appears with a preview of the drawing gt To optimize the quality of your print If your drawing contains Fast Views on page 236 you should convert them to Precise Views before printing for better print quality 12 3 Dimensioning Typically as you create features in part mode you place driving dimensions that define the associated sketch profiles Additionally dimensions that define a feature s size such as extrusion depth are also considered driving dimensions 250
428. ry such as holes and extruded cuts to be applied to the resulting solid Only one surface can be thickened at a time gt 1 To thicken a surface From the Feature menu select Thicken Surface or select the Thicken Surface tool from the Part Modeling toolbar The Thicken Surface dialog appears S Thicken Surface Surface g Surlace lt 1 gt Thickness Ja Directions W se Label Thicken Surface lt 4 gt x Cesa In Surface select the surface you want to thicken In Thickness enter the desired thickness value In Direction choose forward reverse or both sides Arrows in the workspace will display the direction the thickness will be applied Click OK to apply the Thicken feature 5 4 4 Trimming a Solid You can trim a solid model with respect to a surface gt To trim a model From the Feature menu select Trim Model or select the Trim Model tool from the Part Modeling toolbar The Trim Model dialog appears Trim Model Surface Reverse a Select the Surface you want to use to trim the model Arrows in the workspace will show the direction the surface will trim Check the Reverse box if necessary Click OK to apply the Trim Model feature All features contained in the model will be trimmed 83 Chapter 5 Reference Geometry 5 4 5 Extruding to Geometry You can use a reference surface in the To Geometry option of an extrusion or sweep See Feature Creation on
429. s your own custom templates or a blank drawing of varying size ANSI DIN and ISO drawing templates are supported gt To select a drawing template 1 In the New Sheet Properties dialog select Template or Blank Sheet 2 If you selected Template also select a standard drawing template from the list To use a custom drawing template not listed click Browse and select the template from the Custom Drawing Template dialog Or If you selected Blank Sheet select a sheet size from the list Note If you have previously browsed to another template folder you can use the Default button to reset the template list back to the system template folder 3 Inthe Default View Scale area specify the scale to use in the drawing The scale can be changed later if necessary 4 To create a drawing with no models associated with it check the Create An Empty Drawing box 5 Click OK If you selected a standard or custom template the Fill In Text dialog may appear 233 Chapter 12 Drawings 12 13 Selecting the Model You can create 2D drawing views automatically using the views from a part or assembly gt To select the model 1 Inthe Insert Design dialog use the Document Browser to select the part or assembly from which the 2D drawing views will be created 2 Click OK The Standard Views Creation dialog appears and the selected design populates the Design field 12 1 4 Inserting Standard Views You can select which standard views
430. s in Parts 190 Hiding a Part 212 Hiding a Row 292 Hiding All Reference Geometry Groups 84 Hiding Individual Reference Geometry ltems 84 Hiding Parts in a View Assemblies Only 249 Hiding Reference Geometry Groups 84 Hiding the BOM View 286 Hiding Views 240 Hole features 157 Holes 126 157 Home Window 6 IGES 310 312 Images in a drawing 249 Implications of Using Direct Editing 140 365 Import Advisor 308 Import Settings 308 Import Settings and Import Advisor 306 308 Importing 310 Importing a File e 306 Importing and Exporting Data 231 305 Importing Data 305 Importing Parts into an Assembly 231 Improving Assembly Performance when Editing Parts 230 Improving the Quality of Published PDF Files 182 Inference Hints 68 Inferred Constraints 98 Initial Launch of Alibre Design 5 Inserting a BOM View into a Drawing 283 Inserting a Duplicate Design Into an Open Assembly 208 Inserting a Pattern of Parts in an Assembly 208 Inserting Additional Standard Views 236 256 Inserting Additional Views 248 256 Inserting an Existing Design Into an Open Assembly 206 287 Inserting an Exploded View 182 223 Inserting an Exploded View Using Auto Explode Mode 223 Inserting an Exploded View Using Manual Explode 224 Inserting Assembly Constraints Manual Method 217 Inserting Assembly Constraints Quick Constraint Mode 214 Inserting Catalog Features
431. s must be applied before an exploded view can be created You can use manual explode mode in conjunction with auto explode mode gt 1 224 To insert an exploded view using Manual Explode mode From the Insert menu select Exploded View An Exploded View item is listed in blue under the Exploded View node in the Design Explorer By default exploded views will be labeled Exploded View 1 Exploded View 2 etc You can rename an exploded view if desired right click the view and select Rename from the pop up menu To enter Manual Explode mode select the Manual Explode Mode tool from the Assembly Modeling toolbar or right click in the work area and select Manual Explode Mode from the pop up menu or from the Tools menu select Manual Explode Mode Chapter 11 Assembly Design 3 To specify the explode direction select an axis reference plane model edge model planar face or model cylindrical face You can specify a different explode direction for each part you want to separate Reference arrows will subsequently be displayed near your selection Reference Arrows Figure 87 Manual Explode Mode Displaying Reference Arrows 4 The reference arrows allow you to specify the direction in which you want to manually move a part The arrow that is currently selected is displayed in yellow and defines the direction the part will move in To select a different direction select a different arrow To remove the reference arrows click
432. s of Fast Views The primary difference between Fast Views and Precise Views is that the image created using Fast Views is not as high quality as the image created using Precise View mode In addition Fast Views are visually affected by the circular faceting see Curve Smoothness value you are using in the 3D workspace Fast Views should be considered to be drafts of the final 2D drawing You can convert a Fast View to a Precise View at any time to improve the visual quality You will want to convert your views to Precise Views before printing the 2D drawing for a higher quality print There are certain functions you will not be able to access within a view that was created using Fast Views If an assembly or subassembly contains BOTH inter design constraints AND design configurations Fast View mode will not be available when creating drawing views of the assembly e You cannot refine edges e You cannot set the layers of edges e You do not have control over the appearance of hidden or visible lines e Fast Views must be reprojected every time you open a drawing which uses them If the 3D model data for parts and assemblies cannot be located the views cannot be created and will be blank e The ability to dimension segment data is not available in Fast Views The majority of standard 2D drawing detailing practices do not involve using segment data so this will not likely be a problem for most users Note All of these functions become
433. s of various shapes Move Move sketch figures from one location to another Rotate Rotate sketch figures about a center axis Analyze Determines if open ends overlaps or self intersections exist in a sketch also available on the Sketch Overlay Insert gt Axis Inserts a 3D axis sketch figures can be used as references Insert gt Point Inserts a 3D point sketch figures can be used as references Create Custom Symbol Creates a custom symbol using sketch figures Text gt Field Inserts a text field into sketches Text gt Label Inserts a text label into sketches Sketch Mode Before creating a 3D feature you must first create a 2D sketch which serves as the profile cross section for the feature All 2D sketching is done in Sketch Mode You must sketch on a reference plane or planar face You will enter Sketch Mode to create new sketches or modify existing sketches 26 Chapter 4 Sketching 4 2 1 Entering Sketch Mode You must enter sketch mode before you can begin sketching gt Toenter sketch mode Select the Activate 2D Sketch tool from the Sketching toolbar Or From the Sketch menu select Activate 2D Sketch Or Right click in the work area and select Activate 2D Sketch from the pop up menu Or Press Ctrl K on the keyboard You must sketch on an existing reference plane or face You can select your sketch plane before or after entering sketch mode If you did not
434. s or torques to a system are e Enabling Gravity When it is enabled gravity acts on the entire system and a constant magnitude and direction is used throughout you can specify the components of gravity or choose the default value of 9 81 m s in the direction of the negative Y Axis e Constraining a Part to a Fixed or Anchored Part or a Geometry Feature Planes Axes within the main Assembly Forces Internal to the System Internal forces can change the configuration of your assembled designs but on their own they cannot influence the total momentum either linear or angular of the system Constraints between Moving Parts can be considered as entirely internal to the system 322 Chapter 16 Alibre Motion Note You don t need to explicitly distinguish between these in any way Alibre Motion will simulate the Assembly as you have designed it Physical Elements Motors and Actuators Springs and Dampers One step in the process of producing a simulation is specifying any physical elements that transmit produce or modify forces and torques The Assembly constraints within your designs specify where physical elements can be placed and there may be times that you add constraints to your design solely for the purpose of adding a physical element such as a spring An enormous number of real world interactions can be accurately modeled by using combinations of these Depending on the type of constraint and the det
435. s placed between assembly parts are automatically calculated based on part size and orientation 223 Chapter 11 Assembly Design By default trail lines are displayed in the work area which provide a visual guide between a part and the part it is constrained to To hide the trail lines deselect the View Part Trails tool on the Assembly Modeling toolbar or from the View menu deselect Exploded View Trails a Al To increase or decrease the explode distance click the Expand Explosion tool to increase or the Contract Explosion tool to decrease from the Assembly Modeling toolbar or from the Tools menu select Expand Explosion or Contract Explosion Continue to expand or contract the exploded view until the desired view is achieved To restore a part back to its original position right click the part and select Restore To Default Position from the pop up menu To exit the exploded assembly view and return to normal assembly mode right click the exploded view in the Design Explorer and select Exit Exploded View from the pop up menu or from the Edit menu select Exit Exploded View or right click in the work area and select Exit Exploded View from the pop up menu The assembly is returned to its normal view 11 7 2 Inserting an Exploded View Using Manual Explode You can create multiple exploded views in an assembly workspace You can use the manual explode mode to create a custom exploded view of an assembly Assembly constraint
436. s referred to as workspaces New workspaces can be opened from the Home window or other open workspaces From the File menu select New to open a new workspace Five workspace types are available part sheet metal part assembly drawing and bill of materials Note Sheet metal part drawing and bill of materials workspaces are not available in all versions of Alibre Design The Design Explorer displayed on the left side of a part or assembly workspace lists all reference geometry such as planes and axes and feature geometry associated with the design Toolbars are located on top and to the right of the main work area The workspace can be customized a number of ways From the Tools menu select Options Use the Color Scheme tab to change the background color of the main work area Default colors can be selected and custom colors can be added Additionally the toolbars can be positioned and toggled on and off from the View menu select Toolbars To set workspace properties from the File menu select Properties The Design Properties dialog includes six tabs Design Properties General Units Dimension Material Display Apply Options C Show Units for Dimension Display Units L Show Dual Dimensions Spinner Increment Length Length Length Unit Inches 100 Format Decimals wt Angle Precision 1 000 Zero Suppression Zero Suppression Symbols Leading Trailing Diameter Angle Fadius Angle Degrees e TH
437. s that contain them and insert the custom symbols into the drawing where needed gt To create a Design Property field 1 Open the template you want to contain Design Property fields 2 Determine the information you want to pull from the part or assembly files Review what is available in the File gt Properties gt General tab of the part and assembly workspaces 3 Right click on the white space of your template and select Activate sketch on sheet You are now in Sketch Mode 4 From the Sketch menu select Text gt Field The Field Text dialog appears 5 Select Design Property Value under the Set Type option Set Type User Input e Design Property Value Set Properties Value Par Mame Part Name Prompt Part Number Description Version Comment Configuration Name Part Name File Path Comment Cost Center Default Value Default value for Design Tag is Blank Appropriate value will be set on view creation Position and Rotation X Value 5 504 Rotation jo Angle _ Carcel css Figure 96 Field Text Dialog 6 Select the Design Property you want to use under the Set Properties section In this example we are using the Configuration Name 7 Select the text alignment font and color options you would like A preview of the output is shown as you change the options 8 Position the field on the sheet by dragging it to the desired location or by typing in an exact value in
438. se as well as the Motion Status Window will give the best performance e AVI Generation Generating AVI s will slow playback performance and the amount to which they do so will vary greatly depending on the Video Handler or CODEC that you use 16 6 8 Simulation Warnings While reading your Assembly design and also before and during simulation there may be times when Alibre Motion detects a condition which may affect the accuracy or some other aspect of the Simulation you want to perform For example you will be warned when any Moving Parts in your assembly have extremely high or low densities as this may be an indication that the results you get will not be realistic In all of these cases the Motion Status window opens automatically if it is not already showing and the warnings are displayed If you are satisfied that the situation described is as you intended you can close the window and ignore the messages if you so choose Simulator Messages Just before and during Simulation the Alibre Motion Simulator displays various messages showing its status and the progress of the simulation calculations These are displayed in the bottom half of the Motion Status Window unless you have turned them off by unchecking Show Simulation Messages on the General Tab of the Settings dialog In some situations such as when you specify a prescribed motion that cannot continue the Simulator will stop and display various messages here If the Simula
439. se pointer to shape the curve 5 Continue clicking to place additional reference points Note You may choose to specify one or more reference points by invoking the direct coordinate entry tool and keying in the X Y coordinates 33 Chapter 4 Sketching Double click or hit Escape to complete the spline curve Note By making the last reference point to be the same as the first reference point a closed spline curve can be created To modify a reference point spline curve You can change the shape of a reference point spline curve by clicking on and dragging any of the reference points along the curve You can move the entire spline curve in the same way you move other sketch figures by selecting the Move tool from the Sketch menu You must select the entire curve by dragging a selection rectangle around it Creation of NURBS curves by control points Using this method you specify a set of control points in the work area to define the B spline Existing points can be identified A preview is shown as you move the mouse Select the B spline by control points select Figures gt Spline gt Create gt B spline by control points tool from the Sketching toolbar or from the Sketch menu Left click to start the spline curve Move the mouse pointer and click a second time to place a control point Move the mouse pointer to shape the curve Continue clicking to place additional control points Note You may choose to specify
440. sers can view it in Read Only mode Items are checked out e When you open an item within Alibre Design e When you open an item within the Vault and select Check Out e When you get into Edit mode on an item that is not checked out For example when you open an assembly only the assembly file is checked out If you were go into Edit mode on one of the parts in the assembly that part would be checked out at that time automatically Items are checked in e When you explicitly check an item in inside the Vault interface e When you check Make Version in the save dialog Make Version checks the item in and then immediately checks the item back out so you can continue to edit it Opening an item that is not checked out If an item is not checked out when you open it using the File gt Open command within Alibre Design the item is automatically checked out during the open function If you want to open an item in Read Only mode even though it is not checked out to someone else browse to its location in the Vault outside of Alibre Design When you try to open the file outside of Alibre Design you will see the Check Out dialog below which allows you to open the file in Read Only mode by selecting Do Not Check Out M Files A The object InductorCase AD_PRT is currently in read only mode Do you want to check it out so that you can edit it Do Not Check Out 349 Chapter 17 The Alibre Vault by M Files Opening an item that is c
441. sions can be created with open or closed sketches see Open and Closed Sketches on page 69 gt To create a thin wall extrude boss or cut 1 With a sketch still active from the Feature menu select Thin Wall Boss gt Extrude or Thin Wall Cut gt Extrude The Extrude Thin Boss or the Extrude Thin Cut dialog appears Extrude Thin Boss Sketch Type A Sketch lt 1 gt To Depth v Direction Depth Along Normal 2 000 E ld Reverse To Geometry joo Outward Wall Thickness Side 1 Side 2 Gap Type 1007 3 ooo AE Netra Label Essen o el 2 Ifthe Sketch field is not already populated with the correct sketch click in the Sketch field to activate it then select the sketch you want to use to create the feature 3 Select a Type Refer to Creating Extrude Boss and Cut see Creating Extrude Boss and Extrude Cut Features on page 103 for information related to the Type condition 4 Specify a Length Depth value or select a Target 106 Chapter 7 Feature Creation 5 Select a Gap Type Original sketch Figure 33 Original Sketch Example Natural Extends the edges of the wall along their natural curves until they intersect Original sketch Figure 34 Result Using Natural Gap Type Round Creates fillets on any corners of the wall profile Original sketch Figure 35 Result Using Round Gap Type 107 Chapter 7 Feature Creation Extend Extends the edges of the wa
442. sketching a number of sketch tools are available from a menu that is quickly accessed by a right click in the work area Utilizing the right click menu often provides the most efficient method in selecting a tool 4 9 8 Open and Closed Sketches Sketches define the profile of a 3D feature Most sketches will be closed because the majority of 3D features require closed sketches You can reference Feature Creation on page 101 for more information related to features A closed sketch contains no open ended figures The sketches below are examples of closed sketches 69 Chapter 4 Sketching E An open sketch contains open ended figures Open sketches can only be used in Thin Wall Boss and Thin Wall Cut features You can reference Feature Creation on page 101 for more information related to features The sketches illustrated below are examples of open sketches 4 9 9 Checking Sketches for Errors For complicated sketches involving many figures and nodes it may be helpful to check for errors in the sketch such as open ends intersections and overlaps before creating a feature If any of these errors exist it may prevent you from successfully creating a 3D feature Checking for these is also a valuable troubleshooting tool to resolve sketch problems Auto Analyze Functionality Alibre Design has an auto analyze function that will analyze a sketch by default when you exit the sketch You can turn the auto analyze function off if desired
443. st be closed see Open and Closed Sketches on page 69 e The sketch that defines the cross section of the helix must also contain a reference line that represents the helical axis gt Tocreate a helical boss or cut Sketch the cross section of the helix The cross section is not limited to a certain profile but must be a closed sketch mb 2 From the Sketching toolbar select the Reference Line tool 3 Sketch a reference line of any length in the axial direction in which the helix will be created This reference line will represent the axis of the helix 4 If necessary place a dimension between the reference line and sketch figure s created in step 1 117 Chapter 7 Feature Creation 5 Select the Helical Boss or the Helical Cut tool from the Part Modeling toolbar or from the Feature menu select Boss gt Helix or Cut gt Helix The Helical Boss or the Helical Cut dialog appears and the Main tab is initially displayed by default 2 Helical Boss Main Advanced Sketch fle Sketch lt 1 gt Axis Reference Line Clockwise Reverse Counter Clockwise O Type Height 9043 Revolutions A O0000 ee EE a 7 r A r Taper Label Helical Boss lt 1 gt el 6 In the Sketch to Revolve field select the sketch representing the helical cross section The Reference Line as Axis field is automatically populated with the reference line located within the sketch If more than one reference
444. sted in the Design Explorer under both Surfaces and Features 5 4 2 Positioning Reference Surfaces The default same origin location of the inserted surface is such that its coordinate system matches the current part workspace coordinate system with the orientation and scale You can modify the location of the surface by positioning it gt To position a surface 1 In the Design Explorer right click the surface you want to position 2 Select Edit The Position Surface dialog appears Position Surface Method Apply Values Reverse Asis Edge Offset ao E Cera e 3 In Method select the method you want to use to position the surface Axis and Offset The surface will be moved the offset distance in the direction of the specified axis or edge Planar Choose points or vertices to use for the start of the move and the end of the move These points will be projected onto the chosen plane and the surface will move parallel to the plane Coordinates Change the location of the surface by designating X Y and Z distances Axis and Angle Rotate the surface about the specified axis by the given angle 4 Fill in the appropriate data for the chosen method 5 Click OK to apply the change 82 Chapter 5 Reference Geometry 5 4 3 Thickening Reference Surfaces Once a reference surface has been inserted you can thicken the surface to transform it into a solid This will allow geomet
445. story and structure The Design Explorer lists all features sketches faces edges vertices planes axes points section views and redline views associated with a design The Design Explorer is displayed by default You can hide the Design Explorer although it is recommended that you keep it displayed when working To hide the Design Explorer from the View menu select Design Explorer A check mark next to a menu item indicates the item is currently displayed Numerous tasks can be accomplished from the Design Explorer e Moving the cursor over an item or selecting an item in the Design Explorer will subsequently highlight or select the corresponding item in the work area e Right click a feature to edit its properties rename the feature delete a feature suppress a feature and check the status of a feature e Drag and drop features in the Design Explorer to reorder them Changing the feature generation order changes the construction of the part next to a feature to see its associated sketch 9 2 Modifying a Part You can easily alter a part by editing sketches and features suppressing features reordering feature construction and rolling back features 9 2 1 Editing Sketches and Features After the initial creation of a feature you can always edit the original feature sketch or the defining properties of the feature gt To edit a feature sketch 1 In the Design Explorer click the plus sign next to the feature to expand it
446. such as figures reference figures and nodes You can also customize the size of nodes endpoints of items such as lines to make them easier to view and select 4 3 1 Customizing Colors of Items in Sketch Mode To customize the colors of items found in Sketch Mode you will need to set the colors of specific items on the Color Schemes tab of the Options menu gt To change sketch colors 1 Select Tools gt Options 2 Select the Color Schemes tab 3 Under Category select Sketch 4 Set the colors of individual items shown in the Field drop down as you wish 5 Click OK Note If you change the color properties while you are in Sketch Mode you may need to exit Sketch Mode and re enter it for the changes to take effect 4 3 2 Customizing the Size of Nodes You may want to increase or decrease the size of sketch nodes Nodes are basically the endpoints of sketch figures such as the endpoints of a line or an arc You will interact with nodes constantly so it is important that you configure their size so that you can easily view and select them gt To change the size of nodes 1 Select Tools gt Options 2 Choose the General tab 3 Under the Design Viewing area select the size you want from the Node Size item 4 Click OK 28 Chapter 4 Sketching Note If you change the size of sketch nodes while you are in Sketch Mode you may need to exit Sketch Mode and re enter it for the changes to take effect 4 4 Sket
447. t To place ordinate dimensions 1 Right click in the work area and select Ordinate Dimension from the pop up menu or from the Sketch menu select Ordinate Dimension 2 Select the Baseline figure 3 Select the Origin on the baseline figure 4 Drag the origin s dimension line away from the model and click to place it 5 Select the entities edges or points you want to dimension using the same ordinate As you select each entity the dimension is placed in the view aligned to the origin 1 140 736 ade ooo 00 505 1415 2 342 Note You can insert additional ordinate dimensions to a chain after initial placement Select the Dimension tool pick the baseline dimension and then select the new dimension location to add the new dimension to the chain 202 Chapter 12 Drawings 12 3 4 Modifying Driving Dimension Values As previously described you can change the values of driving dimensions in drawings A change to a driving dimension in a drawing will be reflected in the part automatically gt To modify a driving dimension 1 Make sure the Dimension selection filter see Drawing Selection Filters on page 241 is on 2 Select the Select ls tool from the View toolbar if it is not already selected 3 Move the cursor over the dimension The dimension turns red 4 Double click the dimension The dimension control box appears ES rar de E 5 Enter a new value in the box and press Enter Changes made to
448. t Point or right click in the work area and select Insert Point from the pop up menu The Insert Point dialog appears 2 Select the appropriate point type below and follow the steps accordingly 5 3 1 Point at Specified Coordinates You can create a point using direct coordinate entry gt To create a point using direct coordinate entry 1 Enter the 3D coordinates of the new point The coordinates are based on the absolute coordinate system with the origin located at 0 0 0 2 Click OK to create the point 5 3 2 Point at Plane and Axis Edge You can create a point at the intersection of a plane or planar face and an axis or edge gt To create a point at a plane and edge 1 Select a reference plane or planar face 2 Select an axis or edge A preview of the new point is displayed 3 Click OK to create the point 5 3 3 Point at Axis Edge and Axis Edge You can create a point at the intersection of two axes or edges gt To create a point at the intersection of two edges 1 Select an axis or edge 2 Select a second axis or edge A preview of the new point is displayed 3 Click OK to create the point 5 3 4 Point at the Center of Circular Edge You can create a point at the center of a circular edge gt To create a point at the center of a circular edge 1 Select a circular edge A preview of the new point is displayed 2 Click OK to create the point 80 Chapter 5 Reference Geometry 5 3 5 Point at V
449. t Test Column Column Tex a Text K Date Mumber Parameter 5 Edit the Display As field for the custom header as necessary 6 Inthe Data Type column select the column data format Text Date Number or Parameter 291 Chapter 13 Bills of Material 7 Columns will be displayed in the BOM in the order in which they are listed in the Insert Column dialog To move a column up or down in the list select a row and then click either the up arrow or down arrow tT 8 Click OK gt To delete a column from a BOM 1 Click the table header of the column you want to delete indicated by the mouse pointer in the image below The entire column is highlighted Quantity Quantity y MN 2 Right click in the table area and select Column gt Delete from the pop up menu or from the Edit menu select Delete 13 4 2 Adding and Deleting a Row in a BOM You can add rows in a BOM as needed You can also delete a row at any time that has been manually inserted However in order to delete a row that was generated automatically from a design i e a part in the assembly you must first delete the associated part in the assembly The Quantity value must then be updated to zero before the row can be deleted gt To add a row From the Edit menu select Append Row or right click in the table area and select Row gt Append from the pop up menu A row is added to the end of the table gt To delete a
450. t a sketch and are applied to existing edges and faces In This Chapter The Part Modeling Interact A 101 Feature RCH TIO OGY cs scree aesanines AAA AAA RAE AN 103 ExXtude Boss and UC COUN lcs sos es ih See sees dR adler o lie 103 Revolve BOss and Revolve C t cc iii ca llo eee 108 LOM BOSS an LOM QuE at ii ii o aro 111 Sweep BOSS ahd SWE GlUbscmaic liado adsense 113 HelcalB0ss ald FENG al Gl A EA seme tnteneecegesaeene eee anna 117 MSY OEEO esta inated E AA estisnlesicht A T estisalunie ead esniaa A esties unie A A E A E A EEEN 119 A E I E E E E E 121 A A A a aE 123 BP O A A 123 Esem Cosmetic Tea ooo tds A e AT 124 A 0 A O O O E E E 125 CAMI o 127 COP VIG EXMISINO RSS cui E AA SS AE A Ad E II 128 BEST FC APCS AMA I a a nett a aaa rote a a a ea aby asta ete a e a aa ea EO 137 BrE CTE O 139 e L O Ra A A eet nae ce aa saaeee ces auaceacemnecsce Sas seececamnracebanees seca uauscesas eaceeeancenceets 146 Managing Features im the Design EXPO rta A A 147 101 Chapter 7 Feature Creation 7 1 The Part Modeling Interface The Part Modeling toolbar is shown by default on the right side of the workspace Commonly used modeling tools are accessible on the Part Modeling toolbar al gt le ka e a S a E e a a Extrude Boss create an extrude boss feature which adds material to the model in a linear fashion Extrude Cut create an extrude cut feature which removes material in a linear fash
451. t button 2 to change the font of the Title 177 Chapter 9 Working with Parts Note The Title can be one line only and the text will not wrap If you want to add a footer select the Footer tab and enter a footer Click the Font button to change the font of the Footer Note The Footer can be one line only and the text will not wrap Click Next In the Page Layout section select the page layout to which you want to publish Check the Put my logo on the top right corner to include an image in the PDF then click Browse to find and select the image In Save Location browse to the location where you want to save the PDF file Note If you choose to save to an existing file after clicking Publish you will be prompted to choose if you want to overwrite the existing 10 file or add the published page to the existing file at the end as an additional page Choose Preview if you would like to view the PDF file before saving it This creates a temporary file that is deleted if you do not publish the file Click Publish The PDF file will be created and saved to the location you specified and can be viewed Adobe Reader 7 0 8 or higher gt 178 To create a PDF file of a BOM Notes You must have installed PDFCreator during the installation of Alibre Design You must have Full Publishing capability PDFCreator cannot be installed on the Vista operating system From the File menu select Publish to PDF or sele
452. t from four different display modes to control how parts are displayed The default display type is Shaded Other display options include Wireframe Shaded amp Visible Edges and Shaded amp All Edges gt To change the display From the View menu select Display and one of the four options e Shaded displays parts in shaded mode edges are not outlined e Wireframe displays parts in wireframe mode only edges are outlined and displayed Note When viewing the display in wireframe you can turn the silhouette edges of the model on or off To do this from the View menu 2 select Display Check the Silhouette Edges option to turn them on You can also use the de tool to toggle them on and off e Shaded amp Visible Edges displays parts in shaded mode only visible edges are outlined e Shaded amp All Edges displays parts in shaded mode visible as well as hidden edges are outlined The display is updated cod Note You can quickly change between shaded and wireframe display modes by selecting the Shaded and Wireframe tools from the Options drop down list on the Visibility toolbar 9 5 3D Section Views You can insert 3D section views into a part and subsequently take measurements on the sectioned face or use the sectioned face in modeling operations gt Toinsert a 3D section view 1 Select the Insert 3D Section View tool from the Inspection toolbar or from the Insert menu select 3D Section View or right click a
453. t has fillets on it can cause the operation to fail if all of the affected faces are not selected Even if you check the Infer Pockets option some applicable faces may not be selected To fix this error visually inspect the area around the highlighted faces to determine if any faces have been excluded If you find additional faces select them If you move a pocket into free space off of the solid body it will disappear This is because you are essentially moving a hole into empty space where it can not exist 7 17 4 Push Pull Radius You can use the Push Pull Radius tool to offset cylindrical faces by a distance thereby changing the radius Using this tool creates an Offset Face feature in the Design Explorer This tool is especially useful for manipulating imported files that do not have a Design Tree and consequently do not have features or sketches for you to edit gt 1 6 7 144 To use the Push Pull Radius tool Select the Push Pull Radius tool from the Direct Editing fly out on the Part Modeling toolbar or from the Feature menu select Direct Edit gt Push Pull Radius The Push Pull Radius overlay appears You may need to maximize your workspace in order to view the entire overlay The Push Pull Radius overlay has two sections If you have the Show Full Overlay option checked on you will see both sections displayed If you have this option checked off you will see the top section You can then display the bottom s
454. t how a part can be moved or rotated A fully constrained part has zero degrees of freedom and its movement and or rotation depend on the movement rotation of the part or parts to which it is constrained 11 4 1 Assembly Constraint Types You can use five different types of assembly constraints mate orient angle align and tangent Each constraint type is valid for specific combinations of items You can apply constraints to the following items e Reference planes and axes e Linear edges Planar faces e Cylindrical faces e Spherical conical and toroidal faces 213 Chapter 11 Assembly Design You will always select two items when applying a constraint The following table summarizes which constraint types can be applied to various combinations of items Plane planar face or reference plane Cylinder cylindrical face Line linear edge or axis Sphere spherical face Mate Orient Angle Align Tangent Align Align Orient Tangent Align Tangent Orient Align Tangent Align Tangent Align Orient Align Align Tangent 11 4 2 Inserting Assembly Constraints Quick Constraint Mode Alibre Design has a visual constraint application mode called Quick Constraint Mode Quick Constraint Mode allows you to focus on the job of quickly constraining items without knowing explicitly what constraints need to be applied to get the orientation and behavior you want This is accomplished through visual feed
455. t in the Vault is done directly on the Meta Card for any item The Vault Server provides the available users or user groups available for granting or denying permissions Instructions for setting up new users and user groups on the server are available in the Vault Help system accessed by right clicking the MI icon on the lower left of your screen in the System Tray gt To set permissions while saving 1 Open the item s meta card 2 Ifyou are saving the document you will see a Permissions drop down that allows you to set preset permissions If you need to add additional permissions click next to the Permissions line 354 Chapter 17 The Alibre Vault by M Files i Inductor Assembly General Class Properties Mame or title Inductor Assembly i Description More Properties Permissions Full control for all internal users we Full control for all internal users Only for me Read access for external users full control for internal users Read access for internal users full control for me Cance Workflow 3 After clicking the item next to the Permissions drop down you will see the full permissions dialog Permissions General E Use named access control list Users and user groups A MET NOMAD Administrator Permissions All Change permissions Edit Read 4 Uncheck Use names access control list if you want to define a specific user permission that is not available from the drop
456. t the features to be patterned 3 Check the Pattern Geometry box if you want to pattern the geometry exactly You will normally be concerned with this option when you are patterning a feature that has been created using references to existing geometry such as extrude to geometry Below are two models The first shows a pattern created with the Pattern Geometry box unchecked and the second with the box checked The cylinder was sketched on the ZX Plane and extruded to the sloped face 130 Chapter 7 Feature Creation Linear Pattern Features to Pattern _ Pattern Geometry GH Extrusion lt 3 gt First Direction Linear path Axis C Change direction Spacing 1 250 J Copies Second Direction Linear path C Change direction Spacing 000 a Copies 4 bed Label Pattern lt 4 gt a Cte 0 5 Linear Pattern Features to Pattern Pattern Geometry A Extrusion lt 3 gt First Direction Linear path C Change direction Spacing 1 250 31 Copies q mm Second Direction Linear path C Change direction Spacing 000 a Copies 4 e Label Pattem lt 4 gt sd el Figure 58 Example of Feature Patterned Without Pattern Geometry Option Figure 59 Example of Feature Patterned Using Pattern Geometry Option 4 Select Linear path for the First Direction An axis or linear edge can be used for the path 5 Specify the numb
457. tab length and the flange length 1 000 Before After 8 5 Closed Corner You can close corners where two bends meet in sheet metal bodies with appropriate extensions and square corner bend reliefs gt To close a corner 1 From the Feature Menu select Closed Corner Or select the Closed Corner tool from the Sheet Metal Modeling Toolbar The Closed Corner dialog appears 2 In Edge click an edge that is part of the corner you want to close 3 In Join choose the method that you want to use to join the two flanges 155 Chapter 8 Sheet Metal Feature Creation 4 In Label enter a unique name for this feature if desired 5 Click OK 8 6 Dimple gt To create a dimple 1 From the Feature menu select Dimple Or select the Dimple tool from the Sheet Metal Modeling Toolbar The dimple dialog appears 2 In Sketch select the sketch you would like to use to create the dimple Note Sketches used to create dimples can contain only one closed figure 3 In Depth enter the depth of the dimple from the start face The default is two times the thickness of the stock material 4 In Draft Angle enter the angle if needed Only positive angle values are allowed If a negative angle is entered the OK button will not activate 5 In Sketch Alignment specify whether the tool profile sketch is to be applied to the outside of the dimple or the inside which impacts the offset and draft angles used to create the featur
458. tches in part mode Refer to Sketching on page 25 for more information gt To place dimensions in a drawing 1 Select the Dimension ye tool from the Sketching toolbar 2 Select the figure to dimension A dimension preview appears press Esc if the wrong figure was dimensioned 3 When the preview displays the correct dimension location click to place the dimension The newly placed dimension is a reference dimension 12 3 2 Dimensioning Slots and Holes You can easily control how dimensions related to slots and holes are created and displayed gt To insert a dimension related to a slot or hole 1 Select the Dimension oe tool from the Sketching toolbar 2 Select the first circular radial figure or line to be dimensioned from A dimension appears but do not click to place it 251 Chapter 12 Drawings 3 Select a second circular radial figure or line to be dimensioned to The Slot Dimension Options dialog appears Slot Dimension Options Slot Dimension Style Circular to Circular 3 Center To Center Y SA 7 8 9 10 11 12 4 From the Circular to Circular or Linear to Circular list select a dimension type from the drop down list The numbers in the list correspond to the graphical key in the dialog 5 Click OK The dimension is previewed in the work area 6 Move the cursor to correctly position the dimension 7 Click to place the dimension 12 3 3 Placing Ordinate Dimensions on a View g
459. te the active configuration If only one configuration exists it is by default the active configuration and the Delete option will be disabled 10 3 Assembly Configurations As with part workspaces when a new assembly workspace is opened the Configurations category will show up in the Design Explorer as the first category in the list Design Explorer sai New Assembly 1 H Configurations BS Confia lt 1 gt Axes af Anis Y le AZ ble S Planes T Plane Ye Plane 190 Chapter 10 Design Configurations Under the Configurations category Config lt 1 gt is listed Every assembly contains at least one configuration This is true for all versions of Alibre Design gt To create a new configuration Note Not all versions of Alibre Design include the ability to create new configurations 1 From the Insert menu select Configuration Or right click on Configurations in the Design Explorer and choose New Configuration Or select the Configuration tool from the Inspection toolbar The New Configuration dialog appears New Configuration Name Confige 2 gt Copy From Confige1 gt Locks Lock All Unlock All General Parameter Values Part Data General Properties Color Properties Reference Geometry Hiding Active Section View Assembly Part 4 Subassembly Configuration Part Subassembly Suppression Part Subassembly Hiding O Constraint Su
460. tecting possible interferences and where only the ranges of motion are the outputs of interest 16 6 2 Producing Efficient and Useful Simulations There are a few simple general principles that when followed will help produce accurate and efficient simulations Some are good general CAD practice while others are specific to simulating with Alibre Motion Build Full Size This is good general CAD practice but is crucial to accurate simulation Specifying a large force to act on a body may produce misleading results if the body is ten times shorter and a thousand times lighter than its real world counterpart Specify The Material or at Least the Density Alibre Motion needs to know the mass and the moments of inertia of a part in order to simulate it These are calculated by Alibre Motion from the density of the Part and the volume and shape of its design Be sure to verify the correct material density has been specified for each part whether you are designing new parts or importing existing ones Group Non Independent Parts into Sub Assemblies The efficiency of a simulator is always dependent on the number of moving parts it has to analyze and compute In designs with Parts that are locked together and cannot move independently of one another simulation will be more efficient if they are grouped into sub assemblies that the simulator can treat as one object No loss of simulation accuracy is to be expected in these cases as the physical
461. ter 13 Bills of Material 13 4 1 Adding and Deleting Columns in a BOM You can add standard or custom columns to a BOM as well as delete columns as needed gt Toadd a column to a BOM 1 From the Edit menu select Insert Column or right click in the table area and select Column gt Insert from the pop up menu The Insert Column dialog appears Insert Column Standard Properties Property Display 43 Data Type Configuration Mame ltem Mum Item Num Humber Cost Center Created By Created Date Part Num Part Num Test Creating Application Description Document Number Revision Revision Test Eng Approval Date Comment Comment Text Eng Approved By Estimated Cost Keywords Last Author lt TT Luantity Quantity Number Fat Mame Fat Mame Text Custom ox taa Note In the Insert Column dialog you can edit the fields under the Display As column You cannot edit the Property or Data Type fields when using standard headers 2 Inthe Standard Properties area select a column header from the options listed 3 Click the Add button to move the standard header to the column list 4 To create a column with a custom header click the Custom button The custom column is automatically added to the column list Property Display 4s Data Type ltem Num ltem Wum Humber Luantity Luantity Number Fart Mum Part Num Text Pat Mame Part Name Text Revision Revision Text Comment Commen
462. ter 9 Working with Parts 3 Click an affected parameter and click Link The Link Parameter dialog appears 5 Link Parameter Windows Folders PT O Repository e Apply to all such parameters Cancel 4 Click Windows Folders then Browse if the associated spreadsheet is in a Windows folder The Browse for Spreadsheet File dialog opens 5 In Look In browse to the location of the spreadsheet 6 Click the spreadsheet s file name to select it 7 Click Open The new file path to the spreadsheet appears in the browse field 8 Click Apply to all such parameters to apply the changes to all parameters driven by the same spreadsheet 9 Click OK 10 Repeat steps 4 10 if any affected parameters are driven by a separate spreadsheet 9 10 3D PDF Publishing Alibre Design supports publishing parts assemblies drawings and BOMs to PDF file format Once published these files can be viewed with the Adobe Reader There are two levels of PDF publishing e Model Only Publishing e Full Publisher Module Note Users with licenses for Alibre Design Xpress and Standard have access to Model Only Publishing Users with licenses for Alibre Design Professional and Expert have access to Full Publishing PDF Publishing is not supported for licenses of Alibre Design Basic Model Only Publishing Features e Ability to publish PDF files with interactive 3D model including rotate pan and zoom e PDF file can be viewed wit
463. th multiple configurations it is important to realize that as features are created in the active configuration the features for inactive configurations are recorded but not executed This means that inactive configurations are not updated while you are editing the active configuration Using the Update Activated Configuration option you can choose if you want Alibre Design to automatically compute all newly added features when you switch a configuration from inactive to active 187 Chapter 10 Design Configurations gt To set the Update Activated Configuration option In a Part Workspace from the Features menu choose Update Activated Configuration When this option is checked it is activated This is the default setting When it is unchecked it is turned off If Update Activated Configuration is checked When you activate a configuration it will automatically be computed up to the dog bone position in the configuration you just edited e f Update Activated Configuration is unchecked When you activate a configuration no new features will be computed The dog bone is located below the last valid feature in the newly activated configuration This is useful if you want to modify data that does not require feature regeneration such as Property Data Note When this option is off the position of the dog bone can vary greatly between each configuration 10 2 Creating Part and Sheet Metal Part Configurations When a new part o
464. the Position and Rotation section 9 Click OK 268 Chapter 12 Drawings 10 Save the drawing template 11 When creating a new drawing use the drawing template you just made as the template for the drawing If you have filled out the data referenced by the fields in the File gt Properties gt General tab section of the part and assembly files you are projecting that data will automatically be filled in upon view creation Note All the fields on a sheet can reference a maximum of one design and they all must reference the same design If for example you have inserted a view of a part and of an assembly on the same sheet you must pick which design will populate all the Design Property fields on that sheet This is discussed in the next section 12 5 6 Managing Design Property Value Fields If your template uses Design Property Value fields or if you have inserted Custom Symbols containing Design Property Value fields you may need to manage them Managing means selecting which design on any particular sheet will be used to fill out Design Property Fields on that sheet Note Only one design per sheet may be used to populate Design Property Value fields gt To select the design to populate Design Property Value fields 1 Select the Manage Design Properties icon under the Reproject icon The Manage Design Properties dialog displays lt D Manage Design Properties Fields Choose Design One design per sheet can populat
465. the constraint Note When manually applying constraints hints are displayed in the status bar in the lower left corner of the workspace The hints provide step by step instructions to apply a constraint You can turn these hints on and off by going to the Tools menu and selecting Options Make sure Status Hints is checked on Select the FIRST point or figure for the comeident constraint Press ESC to cancel 4 7 3 Deleting Constraints Sketch constraints can be deleted at anytime regardless of whether they were placed automatically or manually gt Note To delete a sketch constraint Select the sketch Select tool from the Sketching toolbar Position the mouse pointer over the sketch constraint you want to delete The figure associated with the constraint is highlighted and the mouse pointer displays the selected constraint symbol A i r When the constraint symbol appears on the mouse pointer right click the constraint and select Delete from the pop up menu The constraint is deleted For constraints applied to multiple figures deleting the constraint from one deletes that constraint from all the other figures in that constraint group 96 Chapter 4 Sketching 4 7 4 Controlling the Display of Sketch Constraint Symbols Sketch constraints symbol visibility can be turned on and off In addition you can control the size of the sketch constraint symbols gt To turn off sketch constraint visibility
466. the error REM NO SOLUTION gap cannot be filled This typically means that Alibre Design does not know how the model should go together when the selected items are removed To correct this you need to visually inspect the selected items and determine which faces have been excluded For example complex fillets can sometimes leave a small face unselected If this error occurs pay close attention to the filleted areas of the model 7 17 6 Tips for Successful Direct Editing The best way to be successful with the Direct Editing tools is to practice using them so you will learn to identify situations where they will be useful while minimizing potential issues These tools can help you accomplish many design goals easily but there are situations where you should avoid using them If you can easily edit the model using traditional methods you should use them such as by editing sketches or features Direct Editing is not meant to be a replacement for making easy modifications There are some modifications that are difficult or time consuming to make that can be accomplished easily with Direct Editing tools In general if you can edit a base sketch or feature quickly to get your desired result you should e f you can delete a feature do not use the Remove Tool Using the Remove tool can be a quick way to remove features or portions of features It is not intended to replace deleting a feature from the Design Explorer when doing that would acco
467. the file that you want to insert and click Open The Insert Surface Options dialog appears if you have that option turned on Note To turn on the option to see the Insert Surface dialog from the Tools menu select Options gt Interoperability Tab In the Insert Options section check the box beside Show Options When Inserting 81 4 Select Chapter 5 Reference Geometry the desired options and click OK Stitch Adjoining Faces takes faces that meet at a common edge and places them in the same surface body Each resulting lump becomes a surface None inserts the surfaces as they exist in the file Each lump is a surface The body is unchanged Unstitch to Standalone Surfaces converts each face into a separate surface Heal is same as healing for import of solid It will recalculate inaccurate geometry in order to make the part more accurate upon import It cleans up the body by making sure edges lie on faces eliminates duplicate vertices etc Healing attempts to fix problems detected with the model by changing it Most IGES files require healing to import properly Make Tolerant will tag inaccurate geometry to enable more intelligent subsequent operations after import Because the geometry of a tolerant model is allowed to be less precise inaccurate or leaky data can often be imported using the Make Tolerant option Making a model tolerant leaves its underlying geometry unchanged The surface is inserted into the work area and is li
468. the workspace in which you are doing it Alibre Design files are linked to each other in most cases For example an assembly file is linked to each of the part files that are used in the assembly A drawing of the assembly would be linked to the assembly file as well as each of the part files used in the assembly 14 2 1 General Saving Principles Alibre Design will save the minimum number of items necessary to represent any changes you have made There are three basic types of saves 1 Save Saves the current design If the item has never been saved this will perform a Save As and ask you to name the file 2 Save As Creates a duplicate of the top level item you are working on For example if you are working on a part you will create a copy of the part If you are working on an assembly you will create a new assembly file but will not duplicate each of the parts in the assembly 3 Save As All Creates duplicates of all items in the current design Save As All in an assembly will create a duplicate assembly file and duplicate part files 14 2 2 Single Item Save vs Multi ltem Save When working with single items and in some cases with assemblies and drawings you may only be saving a single file However there are cases when multiple files will need to be saved simultaneously Because Alibre Design allows you to design or change parts within the context of an assembly and to change dimensions from within a drawing there are severa
469. ther application and choose Paste you will be pasting only the values of the data in text If you choose Paste Special or a similar option you will be given the choice to paste the text or an image If you want to paste both text and the image you will need to do it twice Click OK to close the dialog 3 Open the application where you want to paste the data and choose the appropriate Paste option gt To Export Chart Data You can export the chart data out of Alibre Design for use in reports and presentations 343 Right click in the graph area and select Export chart data The Export Data dialog appears Export Data Alibre Motion Data separator f Tab f Other W Data W Headings W Frame number W Time Export File CAD ocuments and Settings Users Alibre Design Mo al Caos In Data separator select which method you want to use to separate the data points In Export select all of the options you want exported out In Export File click the Browse button to browse to a location to save the file and choose whether you want it saved as a text file or a csv file Choose Export to export the data to the file you specified The Export option exports only the chart data not the plot image 16 8 Detecting Interferences While generating or playing back Simulations Alibre Motion allows you to check for Interferences between parts at each frame To enable this select the Interferences tool options an
470. thout leaving sketch mode You can turn the display of this overlay on and off by going to the Tools menu and selecting Options On the Overlays tab you will see the following options e Show Full Overlay Only applies to Direct Editing on page 139 Functions e Show overlay in 2D Sketch mode To turn off the overlay in sketch mode uncheck the option Show overlay in 2D Sketch mode Check it to turn it back on 27 Chapter 4 Sketching When the overlay is turned on you have the following capabilities e Check Show Grid to display the sketch grid and uncheck it to turn the display off e Set the grid X Spacing and Y Spacing as desired e Check Snap to Grid to snap to the X amp Y gridline intersections you can snap to grid even if you have the grid display off 4 A E Derin Papert Eds de des mel eich 3 etch Pesas Teck Abra iit rara Heb 3 CESA Oa 34 EE FELD Be A MA l a me ATEN Y Epson 110 Figure 12 Sketch Mode Overlay e Select the Analyze Sketch tool Bel to open the Analyze Sketch dialog Select the Refresh tool to refresh the work area e Click Apply to accept the sketch you have created and begin a new sketch you will be prompted to select a sketch plane to begin sketching again you can choose the same sketch plane or a new one e Click Exit to accept the sketch you have created and exit sketch mode 4 3 Customizing the Look of Sketch Figures You can customize the colors of most object types
471. three points or vertices gt To create a plane through three points 1 Select the Insert Plane E tool from the Inspection toolbar or from the Insert menu select Plane or right click in the work area and select Insert Plane from the pop up menu The Insert Plane dialog appears 2 Select an existing point or vertex 3 Select a second point or vertex 4 Select the third point or vertex A preview of the new plane is displayed 5 Click OK to create the plane 5 1 7 Plane Normal to 3D Sketch or 3D Edge You can create a plane normal to an open 3D sketch or normal to an edge of a solid model gt To create a plane normal to a 3D sketch or edge 1 Select the Insert Plane E tool from the Inspection toolbar or from the Insert menu select Plane or right click in the work area and select Insert Plane from the pop up menu The Insert Plane dialog appears 2 Select an existing open 3D sketch or model edge A preview of the new plane is displayed 3 Check the Other End box to move the plane to the other end of the sketch or edge 4 Click OK to create the plane 5 2 Axes Three axes are visible by default in part and assembly workspaces the X axis Y axis and Z axis Additional axes can be inserted as needed 5 2 1 Axis through Axis or Edge You can create an axis through an existing axis or linear edge gt To create an axis through an edge 1 Select the Insert Axis tool from the Inspection toolbar or from the Insert m
472. tia of a part or assembly gt To seta density value 1 From the File menu select Properties The Design Properties dialog appears 2 Select the Material tab 3 Inthe Material field select the desired material from the drop down menu or select Custom to enter your own density value The density is only valid for a part not an assembly 4 Click Apply and then Close gt To calculate physical properties 1 Select the Physical Properties tool from the Inspection toolbar or from the Tools menu select Physical Properties The Physical Properties dialog appears 2 Select an Accuracy setting 3 Click Calculate The physical properties are displayed If necessary you can copy the physical properties information from the dialog and paste it into another document The units displayed for these calculations can be set from the File menu by selecting Properties and choosing the Units tab 4 Click Close to close the dialog 164 Chapter 9 Working with Parts 9 7 Color Properties You can add color to a part as well as control a part s reflectivity and opacity gt 1 To apply color properties Right click in the work area and select Color Properties from the pop up menu or from the Edit menu select Color Properties The Color Properties dialog appears Select the Color button to apply a color to the part or the Edge Color button to apply a color to the part edges The Color dialog appears Select a color
473. tic Constraint Mapping or ACM ACM is completed automatically when the Motion Explorer is activated from the Motion Menu and whenever a new simulation is created or Regenerated Tip Before activating Motion ensure all constraints are correct and that the Parts and Sub Assemblies move as required 16 6 4 Moving and Fixed Parts Automatic Body Mapping ABM Alibre Motion uses Automatic Body Mapping to analyze your Assembly designs and determine which Parts and Sub Assemblies should become Moving Parts for the purposes of simulation If a Sub Assembly is Made Flexible the Parts and Sub Assemblies in it will all produce moving parts Automatic Constraint Mapping will also create simulation constraints for each of its contained constraints If the Sub Assembly is not Flexible the entire Sub Assembly will become a Moving Part Because of this it is common for the Motion Explorer to show that the simulation has more moving parts than the Design Explorer shows Fixed Parts Anchored Parts and Sub Assemblies will always become Fixed Parts The dynamics of Fixed Parts are not calculated and are used by Alibre Motion only when they are constrained to Moving Parts as well as for determining any Interferences or Collisions Physical Characteristics of Parts And Sub Assemblies The physical characteristics of the moving parts in the simulation decide how they react to forces and torques applied to them Alibre Motion calculates these ch
474. tion 2 Check Enable gravity in the dialog K nable gravity Components of gravity parallel to Amis it s Alo 32 1850 tise eh es 0 his 3 Click OK gt To Change Gravity Settings 1 Right click on Gravity and select Edit The Gravity dialog appears 2 Check Enable gravity in the dialog k nable gravity Components of gravity parallel to Als O ftis eet ts 42 1850 fhes2 arte 0 fies a e 3 Specify the components of gravity along each major axis of the Assembly Enter values in each of the X Y and Z Axis text boxes 4 If you want to go back to the default values for gravity press the Default button The default values are 9 81 m s or 32 185 ft s along the Y Axis and zero along the X and Z axes 5 Click OK 16 6 Simulation Types and Parameters To specify the Simulation Type and Parameters used for a Simulation from the Motion main menu select Settings Choose the Simulation Settings Tab There are various methods used to produce simulations of systems and mechanisms each with their own characteristics Choosing the type of Simulator to use and the parameters that specify it can be very important to producing useful results e Dynamic Simulation e Kinematic Simulation e Quasi Kinematic Simulation 331 Chapter 16 Alibre Motion The default settings provided by Alibre Motion will produce effective simulations in a very wide variety of situations Yo
475. tions a list that contains helpful information on a variety of topics On the left side of the page click the FAQ link e Knowledge Base contains tips and instructions for performing specific tasks Interactive Support for users with active maintenance agreements e If you are online you can use Alibre s interactive real time support An Alibre Application Engineer can help you on your computer while you watch and learn Click the Chat with Support button feature at the bottom of the Home Window to access this e You can contact the Alibre Application Engineers by phone or email during regular support hours e You can sign in to the Alibre Support web page and enter a support incident for the Alibre Application Engineers Note Interactive support requests are handled in the order they are received You should receive a response from an application engineer within approximately 24 hours 3 6 Keyboard Hot Key Descriptions The following is a list of keyboard hot keys for some of the most commonly used functions of Alibre Design General for Part Assembly and Drawing Workspaces Open Select All Copy Cut Paste Save Save As Undo Redo Delete Help Part Workspace Design Properties Options Sketch Mode Toggle Orientation Dialog 22 CTRL O CTRL A CTRL C CTRL X CTRL V CTRL S CTRL SHIFT S CTRL Z CTRL Y DEL F1 ALT RETURN CTRL SHIFT O CTRL
476. to create the sweep 114 Chapter 7 Feature Creation Figure 47 Sweep Profile and Path Sketches Figure 48 Resulting Sweep 7 6 2 Thin Wall Boss Sweep and Cut Sweep Features Thin wall sweep features either create or remove a thin wall of material by moving a closed or open sketch along a path defined by a second sketch gt To create a thin wall boss or cut sweep 1 Sketch a closed or open profile to define the sweep cross section 2 Onadifferent plane create a new sketch and sketch the path 115 3 116 Chapter 7 Feature Creation From the Feature menu select Thin Wall Boss gt Sweep or Thin Wall Cut gt Sweep The Sweep Thin Boss or the Sweep Thin Cut dialog appears Sweep Thin Boss Sketch to Sweep Sweep Type Rigid Path Objects HI Draft Angle Outward Wall Thickness Side 1 Side 2 Gap Type 000 C 1000 EC nawa l Label Sweeps gt Select the Sketch to sweep and the Path Objects these are the sketch or sketches you want to use for the path Select a Sweep Type You can create the sweep along the Entire Path or To Geometry If To Geometry was selected click in the Geometry Target box and select an existing plane surface or face in the work area You can also specify a Geometry Offset value to create a gap between the target and the end of the feature If Entire Path was selected click the Rigid checkbox if desired to force the profile to remain parallel
477. to position the BOM view on the sheet and click to place the view 7 You can move a BOM view just like any other drawing view gt To insert a new BOM view into a drawing 1 Select the Insert Bill of Materials tool from the Detailing toolbar or from the Insert menu select Bill of Materials View The Bill of Materials dialog appears 2 Click the New Bill of Materials radio button 284 Chapter 13 Bills of Material 3 Select a Standard Template Or Select a Custom Template Click Browse to select the custom template 4 Inthe Design area click Browse The Choose Design Part or Assembly dialog appears 5 Inthe Document Browser navigate to the location containing the design 6 Select the design and click OK 7 Click OK in the Bill of Materials dialog A preview of the BOM view appears in the work area and is listed in the Drawing Explorer in the sheet view list 8 Move the cursor to position the BOM view on the sheet and click to place the view 13 3 2 Linking a BOM to a Drawing Linking a BOM to a drawing creates an association between the BOM data and the drawing itself You can link a BOM to a drawing without actually inserting the BOM view into a sheet This is useful if you want to display item callouts in a drawing but do not want to display the BOM data in the sheet Before you can insert callout balloons you must either link a BOM to a drawing or insert a BOM view into the drawing Inserting a BOM view into a
478. to reposition Left click again to place it 16 Click Close to exit the dialog Note You can copy and paste weld annotations on the same sheet or paste them on another sheet in the same drawing file To copy the annotation click on it to select it press and hold the Shift key to select multiple annotations Then either right click and choose Copy or from the Edit menu select Copy To paste the annotation you can choose Paste from the Edit menu or you can move your mouse to the location you want to paste the annotation and press CTRL V on your keyboard 12 6 8 Editing and Deleting Annotations You can edit or delete an annotation anytime after it has been created and placed gt To edit or delete an annotation 1 Select the Select ls tool from the View toolbar 2 Move the cursor over the annotation The annotation is highlighted and the cursor includes the symbol icon when it is over the annotation that can be edited or deleted 3 Right click the annotation and select Edit or Delete from the pop up menu In the Edit case the Annotation dialog appears 4 Make the necessary changes to the annotation properties 280 Chapter 13 Bills of Material CHAPTER 13 Bills of Material You can create a bill of material BOM for an assembly as well as a part if necessary You can create a custom BOM or create a new BOM from a template The bill of material is fully associative to the assembly and or drawing A chang
479. to the profile s sketch plane through the sweep Select a Gap Type Natural Extends the edges of the sweep wall along their natural curves until they intersect Round Creates fillets on any corners of the wall profile Extend Extends the edges of the wall beyond their endpoints in straight lines until they intersect Specify the Wall Thickness Side 1 creates or removes material on the inward side of the sketch Side 2 creates or removes material on the outward side of the sketch To taper the extrusion specify a Draft Angle To change the draft orientation select the Outward option Click OK to create the thin wall sweep Chapter 7 Feature Creation Figure 49 Thin Wall Boss Sweep Profile and Path Sketches Figure 50 Resulting Thin Wall Sweep Boss 7 7 Helical Boss and Helical Cut Although the helical boss and helical cut features are different in end result the steps used to create them are identical Helical features often referred to as helixes either create or remove material by automatically sweeping a cross section represented by a sketch along a helical path The helical path is automatically created by the software and is driven by user specified parameters Helical features are beneficial when modeling springs internal and external threads ball screws worm gears etc The following guidelines should be followed when creating helical features e The sketch that defines the cross section of the helix mu
480. tor The Actuator Settings dialog opens Note Depending on the constraint you may be able to add one both or neither type of Actuator 3 In Type choose either a Force motor or a Linear Motion motor For Rotary Actuators motors you may choose between a Torque motor and a Rotation motor 4 Choose either Constant or Harmonic function gt To Edit an Actuator Right click the Actuator in the Motion Explorer and select Edit Or Double click the Actuator item 324 Chapter 16 Alibre Motion gt To Re Name Delete or Suppress an Actuator Right click the Actuator in the Motion Explorer and select the required option Suppressed Actuators are shown grayed out Force and Torque Type Actuators In many circumstances simulations using these types can be the more realistic choice Actuators of these types may be opposed by springs dampers and the inertias of any driven parts in a realistic way Forces and Torques can be defined in the following ways e Constant Force or Torque e Harmonic or Sinusoidally varying Force or Torque Prescribed Motions and Rotations Actuators of the Prescribed Motion type produce the specified motion of the connected parts no matter what magnitude of force or torque would be required to do so in the real world They are very useful for answering sizing questions like Assuming this part is to rotate at 5rom what torque would be required and are often used for modeling sub secti
481. tor stops for no apparent reason make sure that the Simulator messages are visible as they often provide useful feedback about what has happened and what may be done to correct the situation gt To turn on and off the Motion Status window From the Motion main menu check the option Show Status Window to turn it on and uncheck the option to turn it off 16 6 9 Maintaining Multiple Simulations Multiple Simulations Alibre Motion allows you to maintain multiple Simulation Setups for each Configuration in your Assembly design Each Simulation may have completely different Motors and Motions as well as different Traces Measurements and Simulation and Playback settings specified Using this feature you can try out multiple scenarios on an assembly with for example different strength motors and compare the results from each 335 Chapter 16 Alibre Motion Simulations with Design Configurations When Motion is enabled in the workspace of a new Assembly a default simulation is created using Automatic Body Mapping and Automatic Constraint Mapping The Part and Constraint data is taken from the Configuration currently active at that time and the Simulation generated applies to that specific Configuration Note Only Simulations for the Currently Active Configuration are displayed in the Motion Explorer Alibre Motion detects when you change the Active Configuration and if it already has Simulation Setup data for that Configuration th
482. ts i Check Part Trails to include the trail lines for exploded views of assemblies Click OK to create the views Previews of the selected views are displayed in the work area Note that the cursor is essentially tied to the front view As you move the cursor the views will all move together Move the cursor to dynamically re position the front view to the correct location within the drawing sheet Click to place the front view The corresponding views are also placed The dimensions that were used to create the part are displayed automatically in the corresponding view if you checked the option to include design dimensions The Drawing Explorer on the left side of the work area lists the sheets associated with the drawing as well as the views associated with each sheet The associated design is also listed under the view Drawing Explorer EH A assembly ER 3 Sheets views gt EP hal assembly part lt 1 part4 1 gt part 21 gt park lt gt parth lt 1 gt Note Alibre Design supports both First Angle and Third Angle projection methods You can set the projection method for a drawing in the Detailing tab of the Drawing Properties dialog Click Properties in the File main menu to bring up the Drawing Properties dialog 235 Chapter 12 Drawings 12 1 5 Inserting Additional Standard Views After you have created Standard Views you can create additional standard views that will be scaled and aligned with th
483. ts to break non linear edges into when projecting them on the display Smaller edges will be broken down into less segments This optimization applies to all views in the drawing and is valid for only projected edges not for sketches created in the drawing itself Turning on the Optimize option reduces the memory used by the drawing and also the time required to render it on the display gt To optimize your drawing display 1 From the File menu choose Properties 2 Select the Display tab 3 Inthe Curve Smoothness section check the Optimize option to optimize drawing performance Optimized edges may appear a little more coarse because of the smaller number of segments used to display the edge If you have the optimize option turned on you can refine individual non linear edges so that they appear finer gt To refine individual edges Right click on the edge you want to refine and select Refine Edge This option will be disabled if the edge has already been refined or if it is a linear edge 12 2 14 Layers In drawings model views are displayed and detailed using a variety of layers The use of different layers is often dependant on the drafting and detailing standards defined by your organization In Alibre Design there are several predefined layers which can be modified to meet your standards Additional layers can be added to your pallete as needed The layer settings are accessible from the Layers tab in the Drawing Properties d
484. ture It could be one of the Boss features such as Extrude Boss or Sweep Boss but it does not have to be In the following example there are 4 separate Bosses You can choose to move any combination of them with a Push Pull function 142 Chapter 7 Feature Creation Figure 70 Model showing example of 4 separate bosses gt Touse the Push Pull Pocket or Boss tool 1 Select the Push Pull Pocket or Boss tool from the Direct Editing fly out on the Part Modeling toolbar or from the Feature menu select Direct Edit gt Push Pull Pocket or Boss The Push Pull Pocket or Boss overlay appears You may need to maximize your workspace in order to view the entire overlay The Push Pull Pocket or Boss overlay has two sections If you have the Show Full Overlay optn checked on you will see both sections displayed If you have this option checked off you will see only the top section You can then display the bottom section by moving your mouse pointer over the overlay To turn this option on and off from the Tools menu select Options On the Overlays tab check or uncheck Show Full Overlay Or you can click the Pin button to pin or unpin the bottom section 2 Check the Infer Pockets option on if you want Alibre Design to infer additional faces to include based on the selection you make Uncheck it if you want to select all of the faces manually 3 Click in the Selection field to activate it Left click to select a face or combination of fa
485. ture Creation O Fillet Edges Fillet Type Variable Radius Y Tangent Propagate Entities to fillet Start radius End radius Edge 500 500 Radius 500 E 500 188 Label Fillet lt 3 gt Ce Ceres 3 Select the edge s or face s to be rounded Selecting a face will subsequently select all the edges associated with that face 4 Deselect the Tangent Propagate option if necessary The Tangent Propagate option creates a fillet on the selected edge as well as any other edges that form a path in which a tangent condition can be resolved 5 Specify the start Radius in the first radius field 6 Specify the end Radius in the second radius field 7 Click OK to create the fillet 7 9 Chamfers Chamfer features create a beveled face on a selected edge face or vertex 7 9 1 Edge Chamfers gt To create an edge chamfer F 1 Select the Chamfer tool from the Part Modeling toolbar or from the Feature menu select Chamfer gt Edge or right click and select Add Edge Chamfer from the pop up menu The Chamfer Edge dialog appears Chamfer Edge Edges Faces to chamfer Chamfer Type Distance Distance Distance 1 250 Distance 2 1 250 Tangent Propagate Label Edge Chamfer lt 3 gt Ce Cenas 2 Select the edges or faces to chamfer 3 Select the Chamfer Type from the list 121 Chapter 7 Feature Creation Distance Distanc
486. u should find them useful when simulating most mechanisms on everyday scales If you are working with mechanisms that move or rotate very fast or very slowly are extremely large or small you may get better results by adjusting these parameters e Time Step or Simulation Frame Interval o Error Tolerance 16 6 1 Simulation Types Dynamic Simulation This is the most accurate and therefore realistic type of simulation Each body in the system is analyzed to determine the physical characteristics that influence its motions and accelerations The effects of any forces or torques applied to or within the system are calculated and applied precisely and the movements and accelerations of each body are derived as accurately as possible within the specified simulation parameters The correct solutions for a particular time step are found using an iterative process which can involve thousands and often millions of calculations for each simulation time step or frame By default Alibre Motion uses this type of simulation Kinematic Simulation Kinematics is a branch of physics which is concerned with the motions of objects and particles without regard to the forces or torques which create those motions The familiar laws of motion such as v u a x t are examples of the application of kinematics So a Kinematic Simulation is driven solely by any motions prescribed for the system and does not take account of the weights or moments of inertia of t
487. ubsequent editing operations 230 Chapter 11 Assembly Design gt To turn Auto Regenerate On and Off From the Tools menu select Auto Regenerate This is an on off toggle If the option is checked it is on If not checked it is off 11 11 Importing Parts into an Assembly You can import parts and subassemblies into an assembly and subsequently use them in the design You can import STEP SAT and IGES files into an assembly To learn more about importing data refer to Importing and Exporting Data on page 305 gt To import a part into an assembly 1 Select the Import a tool from the Standard toolbar or from the File menu select Import The Import File dialog appears 2 Browse to the location of the file that you want to import 3 Select the file to import 4 Click Open The part subassembly appears in the assembly workspace and is listed in the Design Explorer You can constrain the imported parts to existing parts and vice versa 11 12 Joining Parts amp Removing Material in an Assembly You can use the Assembly Boolean command to either join multiple parts together into a new single part or to remove material from parts in an assembly The result is one or more new parts that can be added into the existing assembly or placed in a new workspace gt To join parts in an assembly Axes y Planes i Points o Redline Views iy Section Views at Exploded Wiews wm Constraints BasePlate lt 1 gt 4nch
488. ue of a dimension from the Equation Editor or by double clicking the value in the sketch and typing in the new value 202 A AAA CHAPTER 11 Assembly Design You can create multi part assemblies of varying function and complexity In This Chapter Assembly Design MS MOI A dl io 203 TheAssemblv Desidh Metacritic 203 ASSIM DASS A lic 205 ASSembI COnStTa MiS ot ii 213 Oc AAA E o cae a wale aia ae ack eat aera cara 220 Checking TOF Interterencos esco ii access cd sa cd o A A 222 Meninga EXNGdEd AMA II ame oleae ianoenst 223 Deleting an Exploded VIEW sia ona 228 Dupe ating an E XPIOGEd VIEW eese a E a E biemtadenoagaadentn 228 Editing and Designing Parts in the ASOMAN 228 IMPORMING Parts IME anr ASOMO incida 231 Joining Parts amp Removing Material in an Assembly csscistescacsesananconceavedsarearadsnian AAA PARRAS AAA RARE AAA AREA DE AGARRAR 231 11 1 Assembly Design Methodology You can use two distinct assembly design methods or a combination of both The first method often referred to as bottom up design involves creating each assembly part in an individual part workspace After the parts have all been individually modeled you can then insert them into an assembly workspace and subsequently position and mate them correctly by inserting assembly constraints The second method often referred to as top down design involves creating all the assembly parts in the assembly workspace Using this method enables you t
489. ult view scale is applied to any views that are inserted subsequent to the scale change Views already in the sheet will not be effected Changing the scale of an individual view will subsequently change the scale of its dependent views 242 Chapter 12 Drawings gt To change the default view scale 1 In the Drawing Explorer right click the sheet in which you want to change the default view scale and select Default View Scale from the pop up menu The Scale dialog appears 2 Modify the scale as required 3 Click OK The default view scale is changed gt To change the scale of a view 1 Right click the view and select Scale from the pop up menu The Scale dialog appears a Ce 0 2 Specify the new scale 3 Click OK The view scale is updated 12 2 11 Line Display in Views You can control how individual views are displayed You can show or hide hidden lines and tangent edges By default tangent edges are shown and hidden lines are not displayed gt To show or hide hidden or tangent edge lines in a view Right click a view in the Drawing Explorer or right click a view in the work area and select one or both of the following Show Hidden Lines or Show Tangent Edges A check mark displayed next to the option indicates the item is currently being displayed 12 2 12 Centerlines and Centermarks The following apply to centermarks and centerlines in 2D drawings e Displayed by default for holes in 2D dr
490. used in your drawing by going to File gt Properties and choosing the Dimensions tab In Default Style choose the style you want to use from the drop down list gt To Edit an Existing Dimension Style 1 From the Tools menu select Dimension Styles The Dimension Styles dialog appears 2 Choose the dimension you want to modify from the Dimension Style drop down list 3 Make any necessary modifications on each of the tabs 4 Click OK to accept the changes and exit the dialog OR choose another style to modify from the drop down list OR choose to create a new style gt To Create a New Dimension Style 1 From the Tools menu select Dimension Styles The Dimension Styles dialog appears 2 Click the New Dimension Style button 3 In Name enter the name for the new style 4 In Copy From select the existing style you want to use for the initial values 5 Click OK 6 Make any necessary modifications on each of the tabs 7 Click OK to accept the changes and exit the dialog or choose another style to modify from the drop down list or choose to create a new style Using Dimension Styles in Templates Saving your dimension styles to your template allows you to reuse the same styles without having to create them again each time you start a new drawing Note We recommend that you give all of your styles a unique name even if they are in different templates This will prevent conflicts from arising if you choose to use more th
491. ut since this may often not easily translate to the problem at hand Alibre Motion specifies the Phase as a combination of the Initial value and whether the value is initially increasing or decreasing For instance if the Initial Value is half way between the Upper and Lower limits and increasing this would represent a Phase of O If it is initially decreasing the Phase would be 180 degrees or Pi Radians When you first start a Simulation the positions of the parts either Linear or Angular are taken from your Assembly Design If you are specifying a Harmonic Prescribed Motion you will see that the Initial Value box is disabled In this case if you want to specify different initial conditions ensure that you are not in Simulation Mode change the position of the Part and regenerate the Simulation Often you will know the range of motion or force relative to the initial value rather than as absolutes Alibre Motion allows you to specify the Limits in either absolute or relative terms To specify that the values you enter should be interpreted as relative to the Initial Value check the Limits are relative check box Actuator Settings General Tab Note Applying changes to the values in this dialog will reset the current simulation 326 Chapter 16 Alibre Motion 1 Check Enable motor or Enable actuator to enable this actuator or uncheck to disable it 2 In Name specify the name of the actuator as it should be shown o
492. utton El 319 Chapter 16 Alibre Motion General Tab x a Show all warning information and confirmation dialogs R Show Simulation messages M Save Simulation Data in Assembly File Make these the default settings OF Cancel gt To set General options 1 Check Show all warning information and confirmation dialogs to see pop up dialogs with messages and warnings while working in Alibre Motion 2 Check Show Simulation Messages to see messages concerning the actions and status of the Simulator in the Motion Status Window 3 Check Save Simulation Data in Assembly File if you want to save your simulation data with the assembly If you do NOT want your simulation information saved un check the box Note If this box is not checked any Simulation setup data actuators springs dampers and feedback elements will not be saved and will be lost when you close the Assembly workspace When you have finished setting your options on all of the tabs in the Motion Options dialog 1 Check Make these the default settings to save these settings as the default for all new Simulations generated from that point on This option does not apply to the General Tab so it will be grayed out if you have that tab selected Select any other tab and then check the option on 2 Click OK to apply your changes and exit the dialog or click Cancel to abandon your changes and exit the dialog 16 3 5 Playback Deck This section of the
493. ve or from the point where the bend ends The length will be calculated as illustrated in the figures below Figure 74 Flange Length Inside Option Figure 75 Flange Length Outside Option 153 Chapter 8 Sheet Metal Feature Creation Figure 76 Flange Length Tab Option d Choose Bend Only if you do not want the flange wall but just the bend that would be created for it This option can be used for creating jogs e Choose Match Taper if you want to specify that the taper of adjacent faces is continued through the flange f In Bend Angle type in the angle you want your flange with respect to the face you are adding it to The bend angle is the excluded angle of the bend measured as shown in the following Using a bend angle equal to or greater than 180 will disable inside outside alignment options g In Bend Radius type the radius for your bend This will be the inside radius of the bend The default value here is the global bend radius specified in the parameters Check Reverse Bend if you want the flange to go the opposite direction from what is showing in the preview 3 On the Advanced Tab a In Bend Relief Type specify whether you want No Bend Relief Rectangular Relief or Rounded Relief If you choose to have a relief enter the Width and Depth Default values are taken from the parameters set in the Properties dialog c Bend Allowance Choose Use K factor use the specified K Factor to calculat
494. vector lines are scaled logarithmically such that Zero velocity is a line 5 pixels long and the maximum possible velocity C the speed of light in a vacuum is half the length of the diagonal extents of the assembly To derive quantitative velocity and acceleration data use X Y Plots or the Current Value option Examples Of Various Trace Options Here are some examples of the sorts of traces that can be produced using the options in the Trace Options dialog 337 8 Frame Trail length Position Velocity and Acceleration Traces Shown Position Trails Shown As above with Position Fade Trails selected As above with Trail Length of 30 frames Acceleration trails shown 338 Chapter 16 Alibre Motion Chapter 16 Alibre Motion Creating Traces gt le 2 To create a Trace In the Motion Explorer right click on a Moving Part or a Constraint and select the type of Trace you want to display from the Trace menu new Trace item is shown below the Traces item in the Motion Explorer Big Traces i E Crank Arme 1 Note Traces are shown on the main canvas during playback To Change Trace Options Right click the trace you want to modify and select or deselect the desired items To change the way Traces of particular types are shown select Trace Options from the right click menu of any Trace or the Traces item in the Motion Explorer Trace Options Change the desired
495. version All intermediate versions are maintained 17 11 Relationships In the Alibre Vault you can see the relationships between items i e what items use other items For example you can find what assemblies use a specific part These relationships between parts assemblies drawings and BOMs can be seen using the Relationships dialog within the Alibre Vault Relationships are populated during an Alibre Save operation only and only when an item is checked in This means you will need to select the Make Version option during a save at least once for any given design in order for the Relationships to populate The two tabs that you will use are e Relationships from this Object Shows what the item in question is using For example shows which parts are used in an assembly e Relationships to this Object Shows what is using the item in question For example shows which assemblies use a part gt To view an item s relationships 1 Open the Alibre Vault interface by browsing to your Vault 2 Find the item for which you want to see Relationships 359 Chapter 17 The Alibre Vault by M Files 3 Right click the item and select Relationships The Relationships dialog appears CJ Relationships Cutter assembly AD_ASM Relationships From This Object 4 Relationships To This Object 0 All Relationships 4 Name Ball Joint Assembly AD_45M Base AD_PRT Jcutter AD_PRT square Outer guide AD_PRT Add Rel
496. verview of simulation see An Overview of Simulation on page 313 for details on this question e What is the difference between Simulation and Animation Simulation is the process of calculating the positions of the bodies at a given moment Animation is displaying the bodies at the new positions in sequence e Does Dynamic Simulation involve stresses and strains within the bodies No generally Dynamic Simulation is concerned with what is termed Rigid Body Dynamics which assumes each body is infinitely strong and infinitely stiff e How do generate video of my Simulations Please see the section on generating videos see Generating Video with Alibre Motion on page 340 for information on how to do this 345 Chapter 17 The Alibre Vault by M Files CHAPTER 17 The Alibre Vault by M Files The Alibre Vault by M Files is a complete data management solution lt is completely integrated into Windows and appears as a virtual drive providing a familiar interface The Alibre Vault has special integration with Alibre Design allowing you to perform several tasks directly from within Alibre Design The Vault is composed of two components the Vault Server and the Vault Client For single users both of these items will usually be installed on the same computer While the Vault is powerful for a single user setup its real power is realized when multiple users each with their own Vault Client are using a centralized Vault Server allow
497. w Full Overlay Or you can click the Pin button to pin or unpin the bottom section Click in the Selection field to activate it Left click to select a planar face or an unconsumed sketch Check the Snap Every option if you would like the value of the Depth to snap at a defined increment Set the Depth to push or pull the face or sketch to You can do this in two ways a Enter a value in the Depth field and select the Refresh tool or press the Tab key to see a preview b Left click on the hot spot shown on the face and drag it until you have it placed approximately where you want it The Depth field will be populated with the new value Click Reset to erase the current item from the Selection field and set the Depth value back to 0 141 Chapter 7 Feature Creation Check the Auto Apply option on if you want Alibre Design to automatically apply the current option when you select a new face to perform an operation on If this option is unchecked selecting a new face will begin a new operation without applying the current one The Auto Apply function only applies if you select a subsequent face or sketch to perform an operation on lf you use the tool on only one face or sketch and then click Exit the operation will not automatically be applied So you can use Auto Apply when you are making multiple changes to multiple faces Click Apply to accept the new position The model is updated and a new feature is listed in the Design
498. x drawings because they require less time to generate than views in the standard Precise mode There are some limitations when using Fast Views so once you are no longer making a large number of changes to the model you should convert your views to Precise Views You can include both Fast Views and Precise Views in the same drawing Fast Views are noted by a specific icon in the Drawing Explorer so you can easily tell whether or not a view is in Fast View mode gt Touse Fast View mode 1 Begin the process to insert standard views See Inserting Standard Views on page 234 2 Inthe Standard Views Creation dialog click the More Options button 3 Check the Fast Views option on 4 Continue selecting the desired options and then click OK to proceed with the view creation 236 Chapter 12 Drawings Benefits of Fast Views Fast View mode Is recommended for use with very large or very complex models The standard Precise View mode can take a long time to generate drawing views for these models Using Fast View mode these views are generated 4 10 times faster allowing you to get started detailing your drawing much sooner When you have finished working on your model and have completed the detailing on the drawing you can convert your views to Precise Views Note For small models and models that are not complex there is no perceptible difference between the two modes so the standard Precise View mode should be used Limitation
499. xists in the drawing the Unlinking Bill of Materials dialog appears 2 Inthe Unlinking Bill of Materials dialog click Yes If applicable the BOM view is deleted from the drawing sheet and the association between the BOM and the drawing is broken 13 3 4 Editing a BOM You can open the BOM workspace directly from the drawing and subsequently edit the BOM attributes 285 Chapter 13 Bills of Material gt To edit the BOM from the drawing 1 Select the Select ls tool from the View toolbar 2 Move the cursor over the BOM view in the work area and double click or in the Drawing Explorer right click the BOM item and select Edit Bill of Materials from the pop up menu or in the Drawing Explorer double click the BOM item The BOM workspace appears 3 Inthe BOM workspace edit the BOM as necessary Refer to Assembly Constraints on page 213 for information related to working in a BOM workspace The BOM view in the drawing will update automatically 4 Close the BOM workspace when finished You do not need to save the changes before you close the BOM workspace Any changes made to the BOM will be saved when you save the drawing 13 3 5 Moving the BOM View on the Sheet You can move a BOM view after it has been inserted into a sheet gt Tomove a BOM view on a sheet 1 From the Tools menu select Selection Filters gt Views if it is not already selected Select the Select tool from the View toolbar 3 Move the cursor ov
500. y to the shape then select OK The figure updates to reflect the changes Note The only way to edit sketch shapes is via the Shape dialog 4 5 Reference Figures and Sketch Nodes Reference figures and sketch nodes are used as construction geometry Construction geometry is any entity that helps you model a part but does not contribute to the physical properties of the model For example a reference line can be sketched and subsequently used in a sketch mirror operation You can also place dimensions and constraints in relation to reference figures and sketch nodes Reference figures and sketch nodes are contained within a sketch but are only visible in sketch mode Reference figures are displayed as green dashed lines in sketch mode Reference figures can be created in the exact same shapes as normal sketch figures gt To sketch a reference figure 1 From the Sketch menu select Reference Figures gt and then select a figure type 2 To sketch the reference figure follow the same steps you would use to create a normal sketch figure You can move and resize a reference figure just as you would a normal sketch figure gt To place a sketch node 1 Select the Sketch Node tool from the Sketching toolbar or from the Sketch menu select Figures gt Node 2 Click once to place a sketch node 46 Chapter 4 Sketching gt To convert a sketch figure to a reference figure 1 Right click on a sketch figure 2 Choose Convert To Re
501. yed 4 Move the cursor over the circle 5 Click and drag to resize 6 Release the mouse button when the circle is resized appropriately 258 Chapter 12 Drawings 7 Click OK in the Detail View Annotation dialog The detail view is updated automatically to reflect the change in size of the detail area 12 4 4 Section View A section view represents a 2D cross section of a model Section views are created from other views and are dependent on them You can create a normal section view or a stepped section view gt To create a normal section view 1 Sketch a straight line across the view to define the section location Make sure you are sketching in the view by selecting the view in the Design Explorer before entering Sketch Mode 2 Select the Section View tool from the Detailing toolbar or from the Insert menu select Section View 3 Select the line that you sketched in step 1 A preview of the section view appears in the drawing 4 Drag the section view preview to the appropriate location on the sheet You will only be able to move the view in a direction normal to the section line 5 Click to place the view Stim ae Notes In the Detailing tab of the Drawing Properties dialog you can pre define the display style for the section line the font for the section line label and the default hatch pattern style For advanced users who want to customize the available hatch patterns in Alibre Design You can mod

Alibre Design User Guide Alibre Design User Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents